PC4000 GZEBM08199-1 (Completo)Mm

May 12, 2018 | Author: Foto Tortas | Category: High Voltage, Safety, Flammability, Technology, Energy And Resource
Share Embed Donate


Short Description

Download PC4000 GZEBM08199-1 (Completo)Mm...

Description

SHOP 08199-upD-GB-1

Shop Manual

HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR

PC4000-6 Diesel Serial Number 08199 and up

HYDRAULIC MINING EXCAVATOR PC4000-6D

Machine model

Serial numbers

PC4000-6D

08199 and up

00 Foreword

® Copyright 2009 KOMATSU MINING GERMANY GmbH

PC4000-6D

1

2

PC4000-6D

1.1 CONTENTS OF THE BINDER

1.1

CONTENTS OF THE BINDER

Assembled in this file are the Operation- and Maintenance Manuals for your KOMATSU Mining Shovel.

4

INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION

1.2

1.2 DIVISION OF THE BINDER

DIVISION OF THE BINDER

Part 1: Operation Manual Part 2: Maintenance Manual Part 3: Depending on the volume of Part 3 a second Binder "Volume 2" is being delivered with the Shovel. This Binder contains the General Assembly Procedure Manual for the Shovel, Specification Booklet, Service Literature for the Power Unit (Diesel Engine or Electric Motor) and for Special Equipment. The Electrical- and Hydraulic Diagrams are attached in the pocket of the front cover. Refer to the -TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME 2 BINDERfor details.

Read the Manuals before You Start the Engine. Before operating the machine, familiarize yourself with its instruments and controls. Observe the instructions in these manuals for: ●

your Personal SAFETY



Operating SAFETY, and



READY and EFFICIENT KOMATSU Shovel.

PERFORMANCE

of

your

Periodic preventive inspections and maintenance are the surest means of keeping the machine in proper working order. Prompt detection and correction of minor irregularities, and immediate replacement of worn out or broken parts will prevent failures and avoid expenses. Replace damaged graphics and symbols. Observe safety precautions to prevent injury and damage. If you have any questions concerning this literature please contact Komatsu Mining Germany GmbH Service Information Department 8151.30 P.O. Box 18 03 61 D - 40570 Düsseldorf GERMANY

5

1.3 DESIGNATED USE OF THE SHOVEL

1.3

DESIGNATED USE OF THE SHOVEL

This machine has been manufactured in accordance with advanced and up-to-date technology standards including recognized safety rules. Nevertheless, its use may constitute a risk to life and limb of the user or of third parties, or cause damage to the machine and to other material property. The machine must only be used in technically perfect condition in accordance with its designated use and the instructions set out in the operation manual. Only trained safety-conscious operators who are fully aware of the risks involved should operate the machine. Any functional disorders, especially those affecting the safety of the machine, should, therefore, be rectified immediately. The hydraulic Shovel is designed exclusively for excavating, i.e. excavation of bulk material and natural soil structure (e.g. earth, clay, sand and stones ashore and off-shore). Observe local and national safety regulations. Special conditions at the worksite require additional safe working precautions, follow your company's safety instructions. Short traveling distances for changing the working site are considered as part of the designated use of the Shovel. Using the Shovel for purposes other than those mentioned above (such as object handling and use as a transport vehicle) is considered contrary to its designated use. The manufacturer/supplier cannot be held liable for any damage resulting from such use. The risk of such misuse lies entirely with the user. WARNING Special use of the Shovel beyond its designated use, e.g. object handling operations, require written agreement from the manufacturer and retrofitment of the Shovel with respective safety related equipment before such special applications are permitted.

6

INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION

1.4

1.4 DELIVERY OF THE SHOVEL

DELIVERY OF THE SHOVEL

The Shovel is being delivered disassembled into its main components. For assembling the Shovel refer to the ”General Assembly Procedure Manual” in Volume 2 Service Literature Binder. WARNING ●

Improper assembling of the Shovel can cause serious accidents with personal injury or death.



Personnel entrusted with work on the machine must have read the Assembly Manual, the Operation- and Maintenance Manual and in particular the section on safety before beginning work. Reading the instructions after work has begun is too late. If there are any questions concerning safe assembling procedure, contact your local Komatsu Service Organization.

Prior to first operation, inspect the Shovel thoroughly with the Service Engineer responsible for the erection of the machine. Check all fluid levels according to the Lubrication and Maintenance Schedule. Damages and defects caused by incorrect operation and maintenance are not covered by the manufacturers guarantee. NOTICE If the Shovel is equipped with a fire suppression system, make sure that the system is ready for operation.

SPARE PARTS For your spare part orders refer to the Parts Catalogue. In order to keep your Shovel in first-class operating condition use only genuine spare and wear parts. The use of any part other than the genuine part releases the KOMATSU MINING GERMANY GmbH from any guarantee.

SERVICE For all questions related to your Shovel please contact your local Service Center. In all your written or phoned inquiries please indicate the model and serial number of your Shovel.

7

1.5 EXPLANATION OF ABBREVIATIONS

1.5

EXPLANATION OF ABBREVIATIONS

ABB

Definition

A

Ampere

AC

Alternating Current

API

American Petroleum Institute

cSt

Centistoke

°C

Degree Celsius

CENSE

Engine Monitoring System

CLS

Central Lubrication System

DC

Direct Current

DIN

German Institute for Standardization

EBL

Electronic Bucket Levelling System

ECM

Electronic Control Module (Engine)

FGPS

Front Guard Protective Structure

FOPS

Falling-Object Protective Structure

GL

Gear Lubricant

h

hours of operation

HPF

High Pressure Filter (Hydraulic Oil)

HT

High Tension

LED

Light Emitting Diode

LT

Low Tension

N

Newton

Nm

Newton meter

QSK

Type of Engine Fuel System

PLC

Programmable Logic Controller

PM

Planned Maintenance

ppm

parts per million

PTO

Power Take-Off (Pump Distributor Gear)

SLS

Swing circle pinion Lubrication System

V

Volt

VHMS

Vehicle Health Monitoring System

1/min

Revolutions Per Minute (RPM)

8

INTRODUCTION

SAFETY

2 SAFETY

IGNORING THE INSTRUCTIONS IN THIS MANUAL COULD LEAD TO SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH. Please read and make sure that you fully understand the precautions described in this section and the safety labels on the machine. When operating or servicing the machine, always follow these precaution strictly.

2 -1

SAFETY

CONTENTS 2.1

SAFETY INFORMATION ................................................................................................................... 2-3

2.2

OVERVIEW......................................................................................................................................... 2.2.1 NORMAL OPERATIONS ....................................................................................................... 2.2.2 REGULAR MAINTENANCE................................................................................................... 2.2.3 TROUBLESHOOTING, ADJUSTMENTS AND REPAIR ....................................................... 2.2.4 ADDITIONAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR ASSEMBLING, DISASSEMBLING AND TRANSPORTATION OF THE EXCAVATOR.........................................................................

2-4 2-4 2-4 2-4 2-4

2.3

SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL IN THE OPERATOR’S CAB. .............................................................. 2-5

2.4

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS COMMON TO OPERATION ON THE EXCAVATOR........................... 2-6 2.4.1 UNDERSTANDING THE MACHINE ...................................................................................... 2-6 2.4.2 PRECAUTIONS BEFORE STARTING OPERATION ON THE EXCAVATOR ...................... 2-6 2.4.2.1 ENSURING SAFE OPERATION............................................................................ 2-6 2.4.3 PREPARATIONS FOR SAFE OPERATION.......................................................................... 2-6 2.4.3.1 PRECAUTIONS REGARDING SAFETY RELATED EQUIPMENT........................ 2-6 2.4.3.2 INSPECTING THE MACHINE................................................................................ 2-6 2.4.3.3 WEAR WELL FITTING CLOTHES AND PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT.................. 2-7 2.4.3.4 KEEP MACHINE CLEAN ....................................................................................... 2-7 2.4.3.5 PRECAUTIONS INSIDE OPERATOR’S COMPARTMENT ................................... 2-7 2.4.3.6 PROVIDE FIRE EXTINGUISHER AND FIRST AID KIT ........................................ 2-8 2.4.3.7 IF A PROBLEM IS FOUND .................................................................................... 2-8 2.4.4 FIRE PREVENTION............................................................................................................... 2-8 2.4.4.1 PRECAUTIONS TO PREVENT FIRE .................................................................... 2-8 2.4.4.2 ACTION IF FIRE OCCURS.................................................................................... 2-9 2.4.4.3 EMERGENCY EXIT FROM OPERATOR’S CAB................................................. 2-10 2.4.5 PRECAUTIONS WHEN CLEANING CAB GLASS .............................................................. 2-10 2.4.6 PRECAUTIONS WHEN GETTING ON OR OFF THE MACHINE ....................................... 2-10 2.4.6.1 USE HANDRAILS AND STEPS WHEN GETTING ON OR OFF THE MACHINE............................................................................................................. 2-10 2.4.6.2 NO JUMPING ON OR OFF THE MACHINE ........................................................ 2-10 2.4.6.3 NO PEOPLE ON THE ATTACHMENT ................................................................ 2-10 2.4.6.4 WORKING IN HIGH PLACES .............................................................................. 2-10 2.4.6.5 LEAVING OPERATOR’S SEAT WITH LOCK ...................................................... 2-11 2.4.6.6 LEAVING THE MACHINE .................................................................................... 2-11 2.4.7 BURN PREVENTION........................................................................................................... 2-11 2.4.7.1 HOT COOLANT .................................................................................................. 2-11 2.4.7.2 HOT OIL .............................................................................................................. 2-12 2.4.8 PRECAUTIONS RELATED TO PROTECTIVE STRUCTURES .......................................... 2-12 2.4.8.1 UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATION...................................................................... 2-12 2.4.9 PRECAUTIONS AT JOBSITE.............................................................................................. 2-14 2.4.9.1 VISIBILITY FROM OPERATOR’S SEAT ............................................................. 2-15 2.4.9.2 CAMERA SYSTEM WITH MONITORS................................................................ 2-15 2.4.9.3 ENSURE GOOD VISIBILITY................................................................................ 2-15 2.4.9.4 CHECKING SIGNS AND SIGNALMAN’S SIGNALS............................................ 2-15 2.4.9.5 INVESTIGATE AND CONFIRM JOBSITE CONDITIONS.................................... 2-16 2.4.9.6 DO NOT GO CLOSE TO HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES .......................................... 2-16 2.4.9.7 WORKING ON LOOSE GROUND ....................................................................... 2-17 2.4.9.8 GAS, DUST, STEAM AND SMOKE ..................................................................... 2-17 2.4.9.9 VENTILATION OF ENCLOSED AREAS.............................................................. 2-18

2 -2

SAFETY

2.5

2.6

2.4.10 STARTING ENGINE ............................................................................................................ 2.4.10.1 WARNING TAG ................................................................................................... 2.4.10.2 CHECKS BEFORE STARTING ENGINE ............................................................ 2.4.10.3 PRECAUTION WHEN STARTING ENGINE........................................................ 2.4.10.4 PRECAUTION IN COLD AREAS ......................................................................... 2.4.11 OPERATION........................................................................................................................ 2.4.11.1 CHECKS BEFORE OPERATION ........................................................................ 2.4.11.2 PRECAUTIONS WHEN TRAVELLING IN FORWARD OR REVERSE ............... 2.4.11.3 PRECAUTIONS WHEN TRAVELLING ................................................................ 2.4.11.4 TRAVELLING ON SLOPES ................................................................................. 2.4.11.5 OPERATIONS ON SLOPES................................................................................ 2.4.11.6 PROHIBITED OPERATIONS............................................................................... 2.4.11.7 TRAVELLING ON FROZEN OR SNOW COVERED SURFACES....................... 2.4.11.8 PARKING THE MACHINE ................................................................................... 2.4.11.9 TRANSPORTATION ............................................................................................

2-19 2-19 2-19 2-19 2-20 2-20 2-20 2-21 2-22 2-23 2-24 2-24 2-25 2-25 2-25

PRECAUTION FOR MAINTENANCE.............................................................................................. 2.5.1 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS ................................................................................................. 2.5.1.1 SELECTION AND QUALIFICATION OF PERSONNEL - BASIC RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................................................................ 2.5.1.2 STOP ENGINE FOR MAINTENANCE ................................................................. 2.5.1.3 WARNING TAG ................................................................................................... 2.5.1.4 KEEP WORKPLACE CLEAN AND TIDY ............................................................. 2.5.1.5 APPOINT LEADER WHEN WORKING WITH OTHERS ..................................... 2.5.1.6 TWO WORKERS FOR MAINTENANCE WHEN THE MACHINE IS RUNNING ............................................................................................................ 2.5.1.7 INSTALLING, REMOVING OR STORING ATTACHMENTS ............................... 2.5.1.8 PRECAUTIONS WHEN WORKING UNDER THE MACHINE OR EQUIPMENT........................................................................................................ 2.5.1.9 NOISE .................................................................................................................. 2.5.1.10 WHEN USING A HAMMER ................................................................................. 2.5.1.11 PROPER TOOLS................................................................................................. 2.5.1.12 ACCUMULATOR ................................................................................................. 2.5.1.13 PERSONNEL ....................................................................................................... 2.5.2 PRECAUTIONS FOR INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE................................................ 2.5.2.1 PRECAUTION WHEN WELDING ........................................................................ 2.5.2.2 BATTERY HANDLING ......................................................................................... 2.5.3 PRECAUTIONS WITH HIGH PRESSURE FLUID............................................................... 2.5.3.1 PRECAUTIONS WITH HIGH FUEL PRESSURE ................................................ 2.5.3.2 HANDLING HIGH PRESSURES HOSES OR PIPES .......................................... 2.5.3.3 REPLACEMENT OF HOSE LINES...................................................................... 2.5.3.4 INSPECTION OF HOSE LINES........................................................................... 2.5.3.5 PERIODIC REPLACEMENT OF SAFETY CRITICAL PARTS ............................ 2.5.3.6 PRECAUTIONS FOR HIGH VOLTAGE............................................................... 2.5.3.7 AIR CONDITIONING MAINTENANCE ................................................................ 2.5.3.8 COMPRESSED AIR............................................................................................. 2.5.3.9 WASTE MATERIALS ...........................................................................................

2-26 2-26 2-27 2-28 2-28 2-29 2-30 2-30 2-30 2-31 2-31 2-31 2-32 2-32 2-32 2-32 2-32 2-33 2-34 2-34 2-34 2-34 2-35 2-35 2-36 2-36 2-36 2-37

ADDITIONAL SAFETY INFORMATION FOR TROUBLESHOOTING AND ADJUSTMENTS............................................................................................................................... 2-38 2.6.1 INSPECTION OF THE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM ................................................................... 2-38 2.6.2 TWO WORKERS ONLY WHEN THE MACHINE IS RUNNING DURING

2 -3

SAFETY

2.6.3 2.7

2 -4

ADJUSTMENTS................................................................................................................... 2-38 AREAS OF POTENTIAL DANGER AROUND THE EXCAVATOR...................................... 2-38

SPECIAL SAFETY EQUIPMENT..................................................................................................... 2.7.1 FRONT GUARD PROTECTIVE STRUCTUR ’FOPS’ FOR OPERATOR’S CAB ................ 2.7.2 OBJECT HANDLING ........................................................................................................... 2.7.3 LIGHTING ............................................................................................................................ 2.7.4 WARNING BEACON............................................................................................................ 2.7.5 SAFETY HARNESS IN CONFORMITY WITH EN 361 (EUROPEAN STANDARD) ........... 2.7.5.1 SAFETY HARNESS IN CONFORMITY WITH EN 361 (EUROPEAN STANDARD) .................................................................................. 2.7.5.2 INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE ................................................................................. 2.7.5.3 PRIOR TO USING THE HARNESS (1), THE WEARER SHALL ......................... 2.7.5.4 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR USE OF THE HOLDING HOOKS AND HOLD-BACK HOOKS OF THE SAFETY HARNESS (1), .................................... 2.7.5.5 INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE .................................................................................

2-40 2-41 2-41 2-41 2-41 2-41 2-41 2-43 2-45 2-45 2-47

SAFETY

2.1

SAFETY INFORMATION

SAFETY INFORMATION

To enable you to use this machine safely, and to prevent injury to operators, service personnel or bystanders, the precautions and warnings included in this manual and the safety signs attached to the machine must always be followed. To identify important safety messages in the manual and on the machine labels, the following signal words are used. The "Safety Alert Symbol" identifies important safety messages on machines, in manuals, and elsewhere. When you see this symbol, be alert to the risk of personal injury or death. Follow the instructions in the safety message.

DANGER This signal word indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING This signal word indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION This signal word indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.

NOTICE This signal word is used to alert you to information that must be followed to avoid damage to the machine. This precaution is given where the machine may be damaged or the service life reduced if the precaution is not followed.

2 -5

OVERVIEW

2.2

SAFETY

OVERVIEW

The appropriate safety information for specific working modes on the excavator can be found in the following:-

2.2.1

NORMAL OPERATIONS



For normal operating procedures, refer to the OPERATION section of the Operation and Maintenance Manual.



For operational safety information, refer to section 2.4 on page 3-8.



For on site safety information, refer to section 2.4.9 on page 3-16.

2.2.2

REGULAR MAINTENANCE



For information on regular maintenance, including maintenance intervals, refer to the MAINTENANCE section of the Operation and Maintenance Manual.



For maintenance safety information, refer to section 2.5 on page 3-28.

2.2.3

TROUBLESHOOTING, ADJUSTMENTS AND REPAIR



For additional safety information for troubleshooting and adjustments refer to section 2.6 on page 3-40.



For maintenance solutions, refer to the separate manuals TROUBLESHOOTING manual. Available through Komatsu Mining Germany.



For servicing information and adjustments, refer to the separate SERVICE MANUAL. Available through Komatsu Mining Germany.

2.2.4 –

ADDITIONAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR ASSEMBLING, DISASSEMBLING AND TRANSPORTATION OF THE EXCAVATOR

Prior to starting assembling, disassembling and transportation of the excavator read and follow the additional safety precautions given in the ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE MANUAL.

2 -6

SAFETY

2.3

SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL IN THE OPERATOR’S CAB.

SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL IN THE OPERATOR’S CAB.

Fig. 3-1 The sound pressure level in the operator’s cab is measured according to ISO 6396 (Dynamic test method). The sound pressure value is also shown on the decal attached to the wall inside the operator’s cab, see Fig. 3-1.

2 -7

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS COMMON TO OPERATION ON THE EXCAVATOR

2.4

SAFETY

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS COMMON TO OPERATION ON THE EXCAVATOR

WARNING WHEN MISUSED, THESE MACHINES ARE DANGEROUS. Mistakes in operation, inspection, or maintenance may result in personal injury or death. Before carrying out operation, inspection, or maintenance, always read this manual and the safety labels on the machine carefully and obey the warnings.

2.4.1

UNDERSTANDING THE MACHINE

Before operating the machine, read this manual thoroughly. If there are any places in this manual that you do not understand, ask the person in charge of safety to give an explanation.

2.4.2

PRECAUTIONS BEFORE STARTING OPERATION ON THE EXCAVATOR

2.4.2.1 ENSURING SAFE OPERATION –

Only trained and authorized personnel can operate and maintain the machine.



During operations, personnel are not allowed outside of the operator’s cabin.



Follow all safety rules, precautions and instructions when operating or performing inspection or maintenance on the machine.



If you are not feeling well, or are under the influence of alcohol or medication, your ability to safely operate or repair your machine may be severly impaired putting yourself and everyone else on your jobsite in danger.



When working with another operator or with a person on worksite traffic duty, discuss the content of the operation beforehand and use pre-determined signals when carrying out these operations.

2.4.3

PREPARATIONS FOR SAFE OPERATION

2.4.3.1 PRECAUTIONS REGARDING SAFETY RELATED EQUIPMENT –

Be sure that all guards, covers and mirrors are in their proper positions. Have guards and covers repaired immediately if they are damaged.



Understand the method of use of safety features and use them properly.



Never remove any safety features. Always keep them in good operating condition.

2.4.3.2 INSPECTING THE MACHINE Check the machine before starting operations. If any abnormality is found, do not operate the machine until repairs of the problem location have been completed.

2 -8

SAFETY

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS COMMON TO OPERATION ON THE EXCAVATOR

2.4.3.3 WEAR WELL FITTING CLOTHES AND PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT –

Do not wear loose clothing and accessories. If these catch on the control levers or moving parts, there is a danger that it may cause the machine to move unexpectedly.



Always wear a hard hat and safety shoes when working on the machine outside of the cabin. If the nature of the work requires it, wear safety glasses, mask, gloves, ear plugs and a safety belt when operating or maintaining the machine (Fig. 3-2).



If you have long hair and it hangs out from your hard hat, there is a hazard that it may get caught up in the machine, so tie your hair up and be careful not to let it get caught.



Check that all protective equipment functions properly before using it.

Fig. 3-2

2.4.3.4 KEEP MACHINE CLEAN –

If you get on or off the machine or carry out inspection or maintenance when the machine is dirty with mud or oil, there is a hazard that you will slip and fall. Wipe off any mud or oil from the machine. Always keep the machines clean.



If water gets into the electrical system (Fig. 3-3), there is a hazard that it will cause malfunctions or a misoperation. If there is any misoperation, there is a danger that the machine may move unexpectedly and cause serious personal injury or death. When washing the machine with water or steam, do not allow the water or steam to come into direct contact with electrical components. Fig. 3-3

2.4.3.5 PRECAUTIONS INSIDE OPERATOR’S COMPARTMENT –

When entering the operator’s compartment, always remove all mud and oil from your shoes. If you operate the pedal with mud or oil affixed to your shoes, you may slip and this may cause a serious accident.



Do not leave tools or machine parts lying around inside the operator’s compartment. If tools or parts get into the control devices, they may obstruct operation and cause the machine to move unexpectedly, resulting in serious personal injury or death.



Do not stick suction pads to the window glass. Suction pads act as a lens and may cause fire.



Do not use a cell phone when driving or operating the machine. This may lead to mistakes in operation, which could cause serious personal injury or death.



Never bring any dangerous objects such as flammable or explosive items into the operator’s compartment.

2 -9

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS COMMON TO OPERATION ON THE EXCAVATOR

SAFETY

2.4.3.6 PROVIDE FIRE EXTINGUISHER AND FIRST AID KIT Always follow the precautions below to prepare for action if any injury or fire should occur. –

Be sure that fire extinguishers have been provided and read the labels to ensure that you know how to use them in emergencies.



Carry out periodic inspection and maintenance to ensure that the fire extinguisher can always be used.



Provide a first aid kit. Carry out periodic checks and add to the contents if necessary (Fig. 3-4).

Fig. 3-4

2.4.3.7 IF A PROBLEM IS FOUND If you find any problems in the machine during operation and maintenance (noise, vibration, smell, incorrect gauges, smoke, oil, leakage, etc., or any abnormal display on the warning devices or monitor), report to the person in charge and have the necessary action taken. Do not operate the machine until the problem has been corrected.

2.4.4

FIRE PREVENTION

2.4.4.1 PRECAUTIONS TO PREVENT FIRE Fire caused by fuel, oil, antifreeze, or window washer fluid. Do not bring any flame or fire close to flammable substances such as fuel, oil, antifreeze, or window washer fluid. There is a danger they may catch fire. To prevent fire, always observe the following: – Do not smoke or use any flame near fuel or other flammable substances. (Fig. 3-5) – Stop the engines before adding fuel. – Do not leave the machine while adding fuel or oil. – Tighten all fuel and oil caps securely. – Be careful not to spill fuel on overheated surfaces or on parts of the electrical system. – After adding fuel or oil, wipe up any spillage. – Put greasy rags and other flammable materials into a safe container to maintain safety in the workplace. – When washing parts with oil, use a non-flammable oil. Do not use diesel oil or gasoline. There is a danger that they may catch fire.

Fig. 3-5

– Do not weld or use a cutting torch to cut any pipe or tubes that contain flammable liquids. – Determine well ventilated areas for storing oil and fuel. Keep the oil and fuel in the determined place and do not allow unauthorised persons to enter. REMARKS: Before carrying out grinding or welding work on the machine, remove any flammable materials.

2 - 10

SAFETY

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS COMMON TO OPERATION ON THE EXCAVATOR



Fire caused by accumulation of flammable material. Remove any dry leaves, chips, pieces of paper, coal dust, or any other flammable materials accumulated or affixed around the engines, exhaust manifold, muffler or battery, or inside the undercovers.



Fire coming from electrical wiring Short circuits in the electrical system can cause fire. To prevent fire, always observe the following: – Keep all electrical connections clean and securely tightened. – Check the wiring every day for looseness or damage. Tighten any loose connectors or wiring clamps. Repair or replace any damaged wiring.



Fire coming from piping Check that all hose and tube clamps, guards, and cushions are securely fixed in position. If they are loose, they may vibrate during operation and rub against other parts. There is a danger that this may lead to damage to the hoses and cause high pressure oil to spurt out, leading to fire, personal injury, or death.



Explosion caused by lighting equipment – When checking fuel, oil, battery electrolyte, or coolant, always use lighting with anti-explosion specifications. – When taking the electrical power for the lighting from the machine itself, follow the instructions of this manual.

2.4.4.2 ACTION IF FIRE OCCURS –

Activate the STOP switch to stop the engine.



Use the access ladders and steps to get off the machine.



If it is impossible to escape from the rear of the cab, use the rope ladder provided for emergency escape to escape from the side of the cab. (Fig. 3-6.)

Fig. 3-6



After escaping with the emergency escape ladder, activate the engine stop chains (1 on Fig. 3-7) to shut down the engine if they are equipped on your shovel.

Fig. 3-7

2 - 11

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS COMMON TO OPERATION ON THE EXCAVATOR

SAFETY

2.4.4.3 EMERGENCY EXIT FROM OPERATOR’S CAB If the cab door does not open, use the sliding window for an emergency escape. On machines without a sliding window, use the emergency escape hammer to break the window glass and use the window as an emergency escape.

2.4.5

PRECAUTIONS WHEN CLEANING CAB GLASS

Always keep the cab glass clean to ensure good visibility when operating. Use an ethyl alcohol based washer liquid. Methyl alcohol based liquid may irritate your eyes, so do not use it. If the cab glass on the work equipment side is broken, there is a hazard that the intruding objects may contact the operator's body directly. Stop operation immediately and replace the glass.

2.4.6

PRECAUTIONS WHEN GETTING ON OR OFF THE MACHINE

2.4.6.1 USE HANDRAILS AND STEPS WHEN GETTING ON OR OFF THE MACHINE To prevent personal injury caused by slipping or falling off the machine, always do as follows. –

Always use the handrails and steps when getting on or off the machine.



To ensure safety, always face the machine and maintain three-point contact (both feet and one hand, or both hands and one foot - see Fig. 3-8). with the handrails and steps to ensure that you support yourself.



When walking around the machine, where possible, move only in areas that have non-slip padded walkways and nonslip gratings. Extra care is to be taken when moving around outside of these areas.



Before getting on or off the machine, check the handrails and steps. If there is any oil, grease, or mud on the handrails or steps, wipe it off immediately. Always keep these parts clean. Repair any damage and tighten any loose bolts.

Fig. 3-8

2.4.6.2 NO JUMPING ON OR OFF THE MACHINE –

Never jump on or off the machine. Never get on or off a moving machine.



If the machine starts to move when there is no operator on the machine, do not jump onto the machine and try to stop it.

2.4.6.3 NO PEOPLE ON THE ATTACHMENT Never let any person mount the boom, arm, bucket, or other attachment without appropriate safety equipment. There is danger of falling and suffering serious personal injury. For further information refer to section 2.7 on page 3-42.

2.4.6.4 WORKING IN HIGH PLACES When working in high places, use safety harness and fall absorber to ensure that the work can be carried out safely. For further information refer to section 2.7 on page 3-42.

2 - 12

SAFETY

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS COMMON TO OPERATION ON THE EXCAVATOR

2.4.6.5 LEAVING OPERATOR’S SEAT WITH LOCK –

Before standing up from the operator's seat in order to adjust the seat, always lower the work equipment to the ground, turn off the engine, relieve the pressure in the hydraulic system and set lock lever to LOCK position (L, Fig. 3-9.). If the lock is not applied, there is danger of serious personal injury if the work equipment control levers are touched by mistake and the machine moves suddenly. For information on relieving the pressure in the hydraulic system, refer to chapter ’RELIEVING THE PRESSURE IN THE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM’ in the ’OPERATION’ part of this manual.

Fig. 3-9

2.4.6.6 LEAVING THE MACHINE –

When leaving the machine, always lower the work equipment completely to the ground, turn off the engine, relieve the pressure in the hydraulic system and set lock lever (1) securely to the LOCK position (L), then stop the engine. Use the key to lock all the equipment. Always remove the key, take it with you, and keep it in the specified place (Fig. 3-10). For information on relieving the pressure in the hydraulic system, refer to chapter ’RELIEVING THE PRESSURE IN THE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM’ in the ’OPERATION’ part of this manual.

Fig. 3-10

2.4.7

BURN PREVENTION

2.4.7.1 HOT COOLANT –

To prevent burns from hot water or steam spurting out when checking or draining the coolant, wait for the water to cool to a temperature where it is possible to touch the radiator cap (Fig. 3-11 and Fig. 3-12) by hand before starting the operation. Even when the coolant has cooled down, loosen the cap slowly to relieve the pressure inside the radiator before removing the cap.

Fig. 3-11

2 - 13

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS COMMON TO OPERATION ON THE EXCAVATOR

SAFETY

2.4.7.2 HOT OIL –

To prevent burns from hot oil spurting out when checking or draining the oil, wait for the oil to cool to a temperature where it is possible to touch the cap or plug by hand before starting the operation (Fig. 3-12). Even when the oil has cooled down, loosen the cap or plug slowly to relieve the internal pressure before removing the cap or plug.

Fig. 3-12

2.4.8

PRECAUTIONS RELATED TO PROTECTIVE STRUCTURES

On jobsites where there is a hazard that falling objects (Fig. 3-13), flying objects (Fig. 3-14), or intruding objects may hit or enter the operator's cab, consider the operating conditions and install the necessary guards to protect the operator. –

When carrying out operations in mines or quarries where there is danger of falling or flying rocks, order/use the optionally available front guard.



When carrying out the above operations, always ensure that bystanders are a safe distance away and are not in hazard from falling or flying objects.



The above recommendations assume that the conditions are Fig. 3-13 for standard operations, but it may be necessary to add additional guards according to the operating conditions on the jobsite. Always contact your Komatsu distributor for advice.

Fig. 3-14

2.4.8.1 UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATION –

Komatsu will not be responsible for any injuries, accidents, product failures or other property damage resulting in modifications made without authorisation from Komatsu.



Any modifications made without authorisation from Komatsu can create hazards. Before making a modification, consult your komatsu distributor.



Any injuries, accidents, or product failures resulting from the use of unauthorized attachments or parts will not be the responsibility of Komatsu.

2 - 14

SAFETY

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS COMMON TO OPERATION ON THE EXCAVATOR

Please continue reading on the next page.

2 - 15

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS COMMON TO OPERATION ON THE EXCAVATOR

2.4.9

Fig. 3-15

2 - 16

PRECAUTIONS AT JOBSITE

SAFETY

SAFETY

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS COMMON TO OPERATION ON THE EXCAVATOR

2.4.9.1 VISIBILITY FROM OPERATOR’S SEAT

WARNING THE AREA AROUND THE EXCAVATOR DURING OPERATION IS EXTREMELY DANGEROUS! Death and serious injury can occur. Make sure the job site is organized in such a way, that the safety of man and equipment is always ensured.

Fig. 3-15 shows an example of general blind areas of large Komatsu hydraulic mining shovels. The grey shaded areas (A) show the areas where the view is blocked when the operator is sitting in the operator’s seat, and the shovel is equipped with standard mirrors. The boundary line (B) shows the distance of 1 meter from outside surface of the shovel. Please be fully aware that there are places that can not seen when operating the machine. REMARKS: The blind areas (A) differ depending on the machine type, attachment and position of attachment. The International Standard ISO 5006 defines criteria for Operator’s visibility. This standard is not met and does not apply to large hydraulic mining shovels.

2.4.9.2 CAMERA SYSTEM WITH MONITORS Komatsu Mining Germany offers optionally camera systems and monitors to improve the overall visibility. See latest version of the OMM for typical arrangement of cameras and monitors. The camera system can be installed ex works and can also be retrofitted in the field. If you need more information, please contact your local Komatsu distributor.

2.4.9.3 ENSURE GOOD VISIBILITY When operating or travelling in places with poor visibility, if it is impossible to confirm the condition of the job side or obstacle is in the area around the machine, there is danger that the machine may suffer damage or the operator may suffer serious personal injury. When operating or travelling in places with poor visibility, always observe the following items strictly. –

If the visibility cannot be sufficiently assured, position a flagman if necessary. The operator should pay careful attention to the signs and follow the instructions of the flagman.



The signals should be given only by one flagman.



When working in dark places, turn on the working lamps and front lamps of the machine, and if necessary, set up additional lighting in the area.



Stop operations if there is poor visibility, such as in fog, snow, rain, or sand storms.



Check the mirrors on the machine before starting operations every day. Clean off any dirt and adjust the view to ensure good visibility.



In areas where it is impossible to confirm the area around the machine and observation cameras have been set up, clean off any dirt from the lens and make sure that the cameras give a clear view of the working area of the machine.

2.4.9.4 CHECKING SIGNS AND SIGNALMAN’S SIGNALS –

Set up signs to inform of road shoulders or soft ground. If the visibility is not good, position a signalman if necessary. Operators should pay careful attention to the signs and follow the instructions from the signalman.



Only one signalman should give signals.

Make sure that all workers understand the meaning of all signals and signs before starting work.

2 - 17

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS COMMON TO OPERATION ON THE EXCAVATOR

SAFETY

2.4.9.5 INVESTIGATE AND CONFIRM JOBSITE CONDITIONS On the jobsite, there are various hidden dangers that may lead to personal injury or death. Before starting operations, always check the following to confirm there are no dangers on the jobsite. –

When carrying out operations near combustible materials, there is a hazard of fire, so be careful when operating.



Check the terrain and condition of the ground at the worksite, and determine the safest method of operation. Do not operate where there is a hazard of landslides or falling rocks.



If water lines, gas lines, or high-voltage electrical lines may be buried under the worksite, contact each utility and identify their locations. Be careful not to sever or damage any of these lines (Fig. 3-16).



Take necessary measures to prevent any unauthorized person from entering the operating area.



If there is a fire near the machine, there is danger of sparks being sucked in and causing a fire on the machine.



When travelling or operating in shallow water or on soft ground, check the shape and condition of the bedrock, and the depth and speed of flow of the water before starting operations.



Maintain the travel path on the jobsite so that there is no obstruction to travel operations.

Fig. 3-16

2.4.9.6 DO NOT GO CLOSE TO HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES

DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE! Do not travel or operate the machine near electric cables (Fig. 3-17). There is a hazard of electric shock, which may cause serious injury or property damage. Even going close to high-voltage cables can cause an electric shock, which may cause serious burns or even death.

Fig. 3-17

2 - 18

SAFETY

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS COMMON TO OPERATION ON THE EXCAVATOR

On jobsites where the machine may go close to electric cables, always do as follows. –

Before starting work near electric cables, inform the local power company of the work to be performed, and ask them to take the necessary action.



Always maintain a safe distance (see the table on the right) between the machine and the electric cable. Check with the local power company about safe operating procedure before starting operations.



To prepare for any possible emergencies, wear rubber shoes and gloves. Lay a rubber sheet on top of the seat, and be careful not to touch the chassis with any exposed part of your body.



Use a signalman to give warning if the machine approaches too close to the electric cables.



When carrying out operations near high voltage cables, do not let anyone near the machine.



If the machine should come too close or touch the electric cable, to prevent electric shock, the operator should not leave the operator's compartment until it has been confirmed that the electricity has been shut off. Also, do not let anyone near the machine.

Voltage of Cables 100 V - 200 V 6,600 V 22,000 V 66,000 V 154,000 V 187,000 V 275,000 V 500,000 V

Safety Distance Over 2 m (7 ft) Over 2 m (7 ft) Over 3 m (10 ft) Over 4 m (14 ft) Over 5 m (17 ft) Over 6 m (20 ft) Over 7 m (23 ft) Over 11 m (36 ft)

2.4.9.7 WORKING ON LOOSE GROUND –

Avoid travelling or operating your machine too close to the edge of cliffs, overhangs, and deep ditches. The ground may be weak in such areas. If the ground should collapse under the weight or vibration of the machine, there is a hazard that the machine may fall or tip over. Remember that the soil after heavy rain or blasting or after earthquakes is weak in these areas.



When working on embankments or near excavated ditches, there is a hazard that the weight and vibration of the machine will cause the soil to collapse. Before starting operations, take steps to ensure that the ground is safe and to prevent the machine from rolling over or falling.

2.4.9.8 GAS, DUST, STEAM AND SMOKE

WARNING RISK OF EXPOLSION AND FIRE! Welding, flame-cutting and grinding work on the machine increases the risk of explosion and fire which may result in serious injury or death. All relevent safety measures must be followed and only under expressly obtained authorization. Special care must be taken before welding, flame-cutting and grinding operations are carried out on the counterweight. The filling of the counterweight chambers can create explosive gases which will accumulate in the chambers of the counterweight. These gases must be expelled before welding, flame-cutting and grinding operations are carried out on the counterweight. Follow the instructions given in PARTS & SERVICE NEWS No. AH04518 for expelling the gases from the counterweight chambers. (See Volume 2 binder)

2 - 19

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS COMMON TO OPERATION ON THE EXCAVATOR

SAFETY

WARNING RISK OF EXPLOSION! Substances and objects igniting can lead to fire or explosion resulting in serious injury or death. Before carrying out welding, flame-cutting and grinding operations, clean the machine and its surroundings from dust and other inflammable substances and make sure that the premises are adequately ventilated as there is a risk of explosion.

2.4.9.9 VENTILATION OF ENCLOSED AREAS

WARNING POISONOUS FUMES! Unventilated areas where poisonous fumes can accumulate can kill. Always ensure adequate ventilation.



Operate internal combustion engines and fuel operated heating systems only on adequately ventilated premises. Before starting the machine on enclosed premises, make sure that there is sufficient ventilation (Fig. 3-18). Observe the regulations in force at the respective site.



If it is necessary to start the engine within an enclosed area, or when handling fuel, flushing oil, or paint, open the doors and windows to ensure that adequate ventilation is provided to prevent gas poisoning.

Fig. 3-18

2 - 20

SAFETY

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS COMMON TO OPERATION ON THE EXCAVATOR

2.4.10 STARTING ENGINE 2.4.10.1 WARNING TAG –

If there is a "DANGER DO NOT OPERATE!" warning tag displayed, it means that someone is carrying out inspection and maintenance on the machine (Fig. 3-19). If the warning sign is ignored and the machine is operated, there is a danger that the person carrying out the inspection or maintenance may be caught in the rotating parts or moving parts and suffer personal injury or death. Do not start the engine or touch the levers.

Fig. 3-19

2.4.10.2 CHECKS BEFORE STARTING ENGINE Carry out the following checks before starting the engine at the beginning of the day's work to ensure that there is no problem with the operation of the machine. If this inspection is not carried out properly, problems may occur with the operation of the machine, and there is the danger that this could lead to serious personal injury or death. –

Remove all dirt from the surface of the window glass to ensure a good view.



Completely remove all flammable materials accumulated around the engine and battery, and remove any dirt from the windows, mirrors, handrails, access ladder and steps.



Check the coolant levels, fuel levels, and oil levels, and check for damage to the electric wiring.



Adjust the operator's seat to a position where it is easy to carry out operations, check the camera system functions and check that there is no damage or wear to the seat belt or mounting clamps.



Check the operation of the instruments and gauges, check the angle of the mirror, and check that the control levers are all at the Neutral position.



Before starting the engine, check that lock lever (Fig. 3-20) is in LOCK position (L).



Adjust the mirrors so that the rear of the machine can be seen clearly from the operator's seat.



Check that there are no persons or obstacles above, below, or in the area around the machine.

Fig. 3-20

2.4.10.3 PRECAUTION WHEN STARTING ENGINE –

Start and operate the machine only while seated.



Do not short circuit the starting motor circuit to start the engine. Short circuiting can cause fire.



When starting the engine, sound the horn as a warning.

2 - 21

HYDRAULIC MINING EXCAVATOR PC4000-6D

Machine model

Serial numbers

PC4000-6D

08199 and up

01 Specification

® Copyright 2009 KOMATSU MINING GERMANY GmbH

PC4000-6D

1

2

PC4000-6D

OPERATING WEIGHT 385-397 ton 850,000-875,000 lb 22

m3

SHOVEL CAPACITY 29 yd3 SAE 2:1 heaped

BACKHOE CAPACITY 22 m3 29 yd3 SAE 1:1 heaped

PC4000 PC

4000

SUPER SHOVEL

PC 4000

S UPER S HOVEL

WALK-AROUND Quality ● Quality management ISO 9001 certified. ● Environmental Management ISO 14001 certified. ● High consistent quality through continuous investment in personnel, design and manufacturing systems and processes.

Reliability and Durability Designed for lower operating costs ● Robust structural design developed from field experience and finite element analaysis. ● Extended life undercarriage wear parts; Big diameter rollers, idlers and sprockets. Large surface area and extensive precision hardening. Hardened track link pin bores.

Productivity Designed for more tons per hour ● Powerful digging forces. ● Ease of bucket filling. ● Proven attachment design. ● All cylinders mounted under the shovel attachment for additional protection. ● Buckets and Wear Packages to suit all material densities and ground conditions.

2

PC 4000

SUPER SHOVEL

MATCHED FOR 150 to 240 U.S. ton TRUCKS

Large Comfortable Cab Full shift comfort ● Komatsu low noise cab on multiple viscous mounts for reduced noise and vibration. ● Large volume cab with deep wide front window. ● Comprehensive climate control with pressurised filtered air ventilation and air conditioning. ● High specification multi-adjustable air suspension seat. ● Well elevated operator position giving good all round view.

SHOVEL AND BACKHOE BUCKET CAPACITY 22 m3 29 yd3

Advanced Hydraulics Extended reliability and precise control ● Comprehensive monitored filtration. ● Simple open circuit hydraulic system with high efficency swing out oil coolers.

Powerful Diesel Engine Single Komatsu SDA16V160 engine ● Rated 1400 kW 1875 HP, at 1800 rpm. ● Electronic engine management. ● Low engine emission levels meet EPA regulations. ● Time saving oil management system fitted as standard; Centinel Engine Oil Management, Reserve Engine Oil Supply and Eliminator Oil Filter systems.

Easy Maintenance Simple, common-sense design gives quick safe access to all major components ● Generous access to all major service points from machinery house floor level. ● Enclosed, internally lit machinery house with firewall separating engine from pump area. ● Automatic central lubrication. ● VHMS electronic monitoring system providing real time information about the operating status of the machine. ● Ground-level access to hydraulically powered swing down service arm with Wiggins connections.

3

PC 4000

S UPER S HOVEL

SPECIFICATIONS DIESEL DRIVE Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Komatsu SDA16V160 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-cycle, water-cooled, direct injection Aspiration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turbocharged and aftercooled Number of cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Rated power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1400 kW 1875 HP @ 1800 rpm (SAE 1995/J1349)

Governor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All-speed, electronic The integrated engine oil and filter system combining the oil stabilising systems, Reserve and Centinel, with the Eliminator self cleaning oil filter extends, with oil analysis, the oil change interval to 4000 hours. (not available in Australia)

ELECTRIC DRIVE Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Squirrel-cage induction motor Power output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1350 kW Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6600 V* Amperage (approximate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 A Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soft start Frequency (standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Hz @ 1500 rpm Optional frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Hz @ 1800 rpm *Other voltages available on request

UNDERCARRIAGE ELECTRICS System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 V Batteries (series/parallel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2x 3 x 12 V Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 A Standard working lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Xenon lights Standard service lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 lights

HYDRAULICS The power train consists of one main drive. Diesel engine or electric motor can be supplied. One gearbox drives four identical main pumps which draw hydraulic oil from an unpressurized hydraulic tank. Open circuit hydraulics provide maximum cooling and filtering efficiency. Rated flow (total output) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4140 ltr/min 1096 U.S. gal Relief valve setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 bar 4,495 psi Swing flow rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1590 ltr/min 420 U.S. gal High pressure in line filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 microns

Undercarriage consists of one center carbody and two track frames, each side attached by 62 high torque bolts. Center frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-type Track frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel box-section

CRAWLER ASSEMBLY Track adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic hydraulic type Number of shoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 each side Number of top rollers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 each side Number of bottom rollers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 each side

COOLING SYSTEM The high capacity engine radiators are cooled by hydraulically driven fans for superior cooling efficiency and require little maintenance. The hydraulic system includes two large swing-out vertical air-to-oil hydraulic coolers with temperature-regulated hydraulically driven fans.

one per pump located at the valve blocks

Full flow return line filters (8 double elements) . . . . . . . . 10 microns at head of hydraulic tank

Case drain/by-pass return line filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 microns The four-circuit system features a load-limiting governor with oil delivery summation to the working circuits and incorporates pressure cut-off control. Hydropilot prioritizes hydraulic flow giving smooth hydraulic response, simple hydraulic system layout, and a reduced number of components. The hydraulic system includes four large swing-out vertical air-to-oil hydraulic coolers with temperatureregulated hydraulically driven fans.

DRIVES AND BRAKES Travel control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 foot pedals Gradeability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up to 50% Travel speed (maximum) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 km/h 1.3 mph Service brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hydraulic brake Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wet, multiple-disc

SWING SYSTEM Hydraulic motors and drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Swing brake, service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hydraulic brake Swing brake, parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wet, multiple-disc Swing ring teeth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Swing speed (maximum) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 rpm

4

AUTOMATIC CENTRALISED LUBRICATION Two hydraulically powered Lincoln single line automatic lubrication systems are provided as standard, complete with time and volume variable controls. Activity and malfunction events are linked to the VHMS. The central lube grease system is supplied from a refillable 200 litre 53 gal. barrel. A second, identical system supplies open gear lubricant to the swing ring teeth through a lube pinion. Replenishment of the barrels is through the service arm.

SERVICE CAPACITIES Hydraulic oil tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3900 ltr Hydraulic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5900 ltr Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6400 ltr Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 ltr Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 ltr Centinel engine oil make up tank . . . . . . . 460 ltr

1,030 U.S. gal 1,559 U.S. gal 1,691 U.S. gal 125 U.S. gal 77 U.S. gal 122 U.S. gal

PC 4000

SUPER SHOVEL

CAB Cab engineering standards are; • ISO 3449 Falling Objects Protection Structure • ISO 6396 Noise in operator´s cab is 73 dB(A) • ISO 2631-1/ 5349-1 Vibration and Shock • Air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10kW 34120 Btu • Heater/Demister (Diesel version) . . . . . . . . . . . . .10kW 34120 Btu

The large welded steel safety cab is mounted with 18 viscous damping pads and sound insulated. It is equipped with automatic climate control and is pressurised. The operator’s seat is fully adjustable, air suspended, electrically heated and has a lap seat belt. There is a trainer’s seat. Low effort joy stick controls are electric over hydraulic and foot controls are for front shovel clam, crawler and swing brake. Full instrumentation and VHMS are provided. Space in the console is provided for an additional monitor. AM/FM radio is fitted. The windshield wash wiper has two speed and intermittent operation. (Water reservoir 7 litres 1.8 gal.) Amenities include a wash basin with running water, water reservoir, (50 litres 13 gal.), refrigerator and storage cabinets. Powered mirrors are adjusted from inside the cab. There are left and right hand sliding windows. All windows are tinted parsol green. External metal louvres are provided on the cab side windows.

CS

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM

VHMS is designed for Komatsu mining equipment to provide real time and stored information about the status of the operating machine. A touch sensitive flat screen color monitor gives a continuous display or can be activated to provide operator or service data. Non serious and critical faults are automatically announced, while for major malfunctions the engine is also shut down. The integrated digital storage provides a full event history, which can be down loaded by laptop computer or by wireless link. The ability to provide real time service information as messages, snap-shot or trend data automatically to mine control programmes can improve mechanical utilisation and reduce costs. (Electric drive version fitted with ECS Health Monitor)

OPERATING WEIGHTS PC 4000 Backhoe:

PC 4000 Front Shovel:

Operating weight including 9750 mm 32’0’’ boom, 4500 mm 14’9’’ stick, 22 m3 29 yd3 backhoe bucket, operator, lubricant, coolant, full fuel tank and standard equipment.

Operating weight including 7150 mm 23’6’’ boom, 4900 mm 16’1’’ stick, 22 m3 29 yd3 shovel bucket, operator, lubricant, coolant, full fuel tank and standard equipment.

Shoe Width

Operating Weight

Ground Pressure

Shoe Width

Operating Weight

Ground Pressure

1200 mm 47’’

392 t 865,000 lb

2.19 kg/cm2 31.2 psi

1200 mm 47’’

385 t 850,000 lb

2.15 kg/cm2 30.6 psi

1500 mm 59’’

397 t 875,000 lb

1.78 kg/cm2 25.3 psi

1500 mm 59’’

390 t 860,000 lb

1.75 kg/cm2 24.8 psi

4

5

3

Explanation 1 Operator´s Cab

7

10

2 Power Train 3 Hydraulic Pumps

6

4 Hydraulic Tank

2

9

5 Hydraulic Coolers 6 Valve Blocks 7 Swing Motor

7

10

8 Fuel Tank

8

9 Counterweight 10 Autolube System

6

1

11 Secondary Egress

11

Lower-Level Upper-Level SKZ4006_68

5

PC 4000

S UPER S HOVEL

PRODUCTIVITY-FEATURES

4006078

DIGGING FORCES Break-out force Tear-out force

1155 kN 1050 kN

260,000 lb 236,000 lb

Maximum reach at ground level . . . . . . . . .16.650 mm 54’8’’ Maximum digging depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8000 mm 26’3’’

BACKHOE BUCKET, STICK AND BOOM COMBINATION Bucket Capacity

Width

SAE Heaped 1 : 1 22 m3 29 yd3

Teeth

including Wear package -2 3790 mm 12’5’’

Alternative buckets / wear packages are available

6

Weight

23.4 t 51,590 lb

Boom Length 9750 mm 32’ 0’’ Stick Length 4500 mm 14’ 9’’

6

 Material weight to 1.8 t/m3 3000 lb/yd3

SUPER SHOVEL

PC 4000

4006077

DIGGING FORCES Break-out force Crowd force

1250 kN 1330 kN

280,000 lb 300,000 lb

Level crowd at ground level . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5700 mm 18’8’’ Maximum dumping height . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.000 mm 39’4’’

SHOVEL BUCKET, STICK AND BOOM COMBINATION Bucket Capacity SAE / CECE Heaped 2 : 1

Heaped 1 : 1

22 m3 29 yd3

25 m3 32.7 yd3

Width

Weight

Teeth

including Wear package-3 4020 mm 13’2’’

38.8 t 76,700 lb

Boom Length 7150 mm 23’ 6’’ Stick Length 4900 mm 16’ 1’’

5

 Material weight to 1.8 t/m3 3000 lb/yd3

Alternative buckets / wear packages are available

7

STANDARD EQUIPMENT Hydraulic Mining Shovel with Diesel Drive will comprise: ● FRONT SHOVEL ATTACHMENT 7.15 m 23'6" boom and 4.9 m 16'1" stick complete with cylinders. 22 m3 29 yd3 (SAE 2:1) shovel bucket with mechanical teeth and lip system. OR ● BACKHOE ATTACHMENT 9.75 m 32'0" boom and 4.5 m 14'9" stick with 22 m3 29 yd3 (SAE 1:1) bucket. ● CRAWLER UNDERCARRIAGE Heavy-duty shovel type undercarriage consisting of a center carbody and 2 heavy box-type track frames, each having 7 bottom rollers, 3 top rollers, and 1200 mm 47" cast steel track shoes. Hydraulic track adjustment and parking brake provided.

● SUPERSTRUCTURE Main frame mounted over an externally toothed swing circle carries the main drive module, including Komatsu SDA16V160 diesel engine, oil and fuel reservoirs, counterweight, operator’s cab and base.

AM-FM radio. Washbasin with running water (reservoir 50 ltr 13 gal). Refrigerator and storage cabinets. Left and right hand sliding windows. All windows tinted parsol green. ● LUBRICATION LINCOLN central lubrication for basic machine, attachment, and bucket. 200 ltr 53 gal refillable barrel. LINCOLN automatic pinion lubrication system for swing circle teeth with 200 ltr 53 gal refillable barrel.

● LIGHTING 8 Xenon high performance working lights. 11 service lights throughout platform. ● OPERATOR’S CAB Fully enclosed steel cab which incorporates the ISO 3449 standard FOPS structure and CARRIER SÜTRAK air-conditioning unit. Mounted on viscous pads. GRAMMER fully suspended seat with lap-belt. Fold-away auxiliary seat. Full selection of controls, switches, and VHMS (Vehicle Health Monitoring System). Joystick and pedal-operated controls are electric over hydraulic. Windshield wash wipers with two speed and intermittent operation. (reservoir 7 ltr 1.8 gal).

Service point (diesel version only as standard) on hydraulic arm carrying WIGGINS fluid receiving connectors for filling of fuel, engine oil and coolant, hydraulic oil, grease, cabwater and the evacuation of coolant, and hydraulic and engine oils. ● ACCESSORIES Acoustic travel alarm Hydraulically actuated ground access ladder Electric air horn Engine oil management System. (Centinel, Reserve & Eliminator Systems)

OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT • 1500 mm 59’’ track shoes • Extra or alternative, lighting

• Electric drive • Cable reel (Electric Version)

• Low temperature package • Fire suppression system

DIMENSIONS

BASIC MACHINE WITH COUNTERWEIGHT

N M

OR

L

A B CA CB D E F G

1200mm 1500mm 6750mm 7050mm 2480mm 3380mm 6700mm 8842mm

47" 59" 22'2" 23'2" 8'2" 11'1" 22'0" 29'0"

H I J K L M N O OR

3017mm 3085mm 7600mm 8300mm 3175mm 4700mm 7975mm 6095mm 6500mm

9'11" 10'2" 24'11" 27'3" 10'5" 18'6" 26'2" 20'0" 21'4"

O

K

H

D

E

A B

F

CA

G

CB

Ground Clearance: 930mm 3'0"

QESS0046 01

I J

SKZ4006_67

SKZ4006_66

©2006 Komatsu Printed in Germany

www.komatsu-mining.com

Materials and specifications are subject to change without notice. is a trademark of Komatsu Ltd. Japan.

HYDRAULIC MINING EXCAVATOR PC4000-6D

Machine model

Serial numbers

PC4000-6D

08199 and up

10 Structure, Function

® Copyright 2009 KOMATSU MINING GERMANY GmbH

PC4000-6D

1

2

PC4000-6D

I.

II.

INTRODUCTION ............................................................................ I-1 I.I

CONTENTS OF THE BINDER ........................................................................................... I-2

I.II

FOREWORD ...................................................................................................................... I-3 1.2.1 IMPORTAND NOTE.............................................................................................. I-5

I.III

EXPLANATION OF ABBREVATIONS .............................................................................. I-7

SAFETY ......................................................................................... II-1 II.I

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ................................................................................................. II-2

II.II

GENERAL PREAUCTIONS .............................................................................................. II-3

II.III

PREPARATIONS FOR WORK ......................................................................................... II-4

II.IV

PRECAUTIONS DURING WORK ..................................................................................... II-5

II.V

PRECAUTIONS AFTER WORK ....................................................................................... II-6

1

1

III.

2

MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS............................................................ 1-1 1.1

GENERAL LAYOUT .......................................................................................................... 1-2

1.2

SUPERSTRUCTURE ......................................................................................................... 1-4

1.3

MACHINE HOUSE ............................................................................................................ 1-6

1.4

HYDRAULIC OIL RESERVOIR ......................................................................................... 1-8

1.5

HYDRAULIC OIL COOLER ............................................................................................. 1-10

1.6

FUEL TANK .................................................................................................................... 1-12

1.7

COUNTERWEIGHT.......................................................................................................... 1-14

1.8

CAB SUPPORT................................................................................................................ 1-16

1.9

OPERATOR’S CAB ......................................................................................................... 1-18

1.10

CONTROL BLOCKS ........................................................................................................ 1-20

1.11

SWING GEARS ................................................................................................................ 1-22

1.12

UNDERCARRIAGE.......................................................................................................... 1-24

1.13

BACKHOE ATTACHMENT (BHA) .................................................................................. 1-26

1.14

FRONT SHOVEL ATTACHMENT (FSA) ......................................................................... 1-28

SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................ III-1 III.I

LIFTING GEARS .............................................................................................................. III-2

III.II

STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUE CHART ................................................................ III-4

III.III

CONVERSION TABLE ..................................................................................................... III-5

III.IV

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................................... III-12

2.

DRIVE............................................................................................... 2-1 2.1

PRIME DRIVE ASSEMBLY ............................................................................................... 2-2

2.2

ENGINE AND PTO MOUNTS ............................................................................................ 2-4 2.2.1 FLEXIBLE MOUNTS ............................................................................................ 2-5 2.2.2 TORQUE SUPPORT............................................................................................ 2-7

2.3

FAN DRIVE AND RADIATOR ASSEMBLY....................................................................... 2-8 2.3.1 RADIATOR FAN DRIVE SPEED ADJUSTMENT .............................................. 2-12

2.4

PUMP DISTRIBUTOR GEARBOX (PTO)........................................................................ 2.4.1 SPLINE SHAFT HOUSING ................................................................................ 2.4.2 PTO LUBRICATION AND COOLING................................................................. 2.4.3 HYDRAULIC PUMPS – LOCATION, DRIVE SPEED AND FLOW RATES .......

2.5

GEISLINGER COUPLING................................................................................................ 2-28

2.6

AIR FILTER ...................................................................................................................... 2-30

2-16 2-18 2-20 2-26

3

3.

4

HYDRAULIC OIL RESERVOIR ........................................................ 3-1 3.1

GENERAL LAYOUT ......................................................................................................... 3-2

3.2

MAIN OIL TANK, LOCATION OF ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT. ........................................... 3-4

3.3

SUCTION OIL RESERVOIR WITH STRAINERS ............................................................. 3-6

3.4

RETURN OIL COLLECTOR TUBE WITH STRAINER ..................................................... 3-8

3.5

BACK PRESSURE VALVE ............................................................................................. 3-10

3.6

TRANSFER PUMP .......................................................................................................... 3-12 3.6.1 EVACUATION OF THE SUCTION OIL RESERVOIR........................................ 3-15 3.6.2 EVACUATION OF THE RETURN OIL COLLECTOR PIPES AND COOLER CIRCUIT 3-17

3.7

RETURN AND LEAK OIL FILTER .................................................................................. 3-18

3.8

BREATHER FILTER ....................................................................................................... 3-20

4.

HYDRAULIC OIL COOLING ............................................................ 4-1 4.1

4.2 CIRCUIT 4.3

GENERAL .......................................................................................................................... 4-2 FUNCTION OF THE HYDRAULIC OIL COOLING 4-4 ADJUSTMENT OF THE BACK PRESSURE VALVE........................................................ 4-6

4.4 FAN DRIVE (TWO STAGE COOLER FAN RPM CONTROL) 4-8 4.4.1 FIXED DISPLACEMENT PUMP, WITH VARIABLE SETTING ......................... 4-10 4.4.2 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES .......................................................................... 4-12 4.4.3 FAN SPEED CONTROL VALVE ARRANGEMENT........................................... 4-14 4.5

ADJUSTMENT OF THE COOLER FAN DRIVE SPEED ................................................. 4-16 4.5.1 FUNCTION CHECK OF FAN SPEED CONTROL ............................................. 4-21

5

5.

CONTROLLING.............................................................................. 5-23 5.1

GENERAL LAYOUT ........................................................................................................ 5-24

5.2 CONTROL AND FILTER PANEL LOCATION OF COMPONENTS 5-26 5.3

PILOT PRESSURE SUPPLY AND ADJUSTMENTS ...................................................... 5.3.1 PILOT PRESSURE CIRCUIT (PPC) .................................................................. 5.3.2 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENT OF PILOT PRESSURE..................................... 5.3.3 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES ARRANGEMENT..............................................

5-32 5-33 5-36 5-38

5.4 FUNCTION ELECTRO HYDRAULIC CONTROL SYSTEM 5-40

6

5.5

POTENTIOMETER CONTROL (LEVER, JOY STICK).................................................... 5-44

5.6

POTENTIOMETER CONTROL (PEDAL) ........................................................................ 5-46

5.7

PROPORTIONAL AMPLIFIER MODULE, TYPE A ......................................................... 5-48

5.8

PROPORTIONAL AMPLIFIER MODULE, TYPE B ......................................................... 5-50

5.9

RAMP TIME MODULE .................................................................................................... 5-52

5.10

ADJUSTMENTS OF AMPLIFIER MODULES ................................................................. 5.10.1 GENERAL .......................................................................................................... 5.10.2 ADJUSTING THE AMPLIFIERS TYPE B........................................................... 5.10.3 ADJUSTING THE AMPLIFIERS TYPE A...........................................................

5.11

ADJUSTING THE RAMP TIME MODULE ....................................................................... 5-62

5-54 5-55 5-56 5-60

6.

COMPONENTS ................................................................................ 6-1

6.1 MAIN CONTROL BLOCKS AND HIGH PRESSURE FILTER (FSA) 6-2 6.2 MAIN CONTROL BLOCKS AND HIGH PRESSURE FILTER (BHA) 6-4 6.3 DISTRIBUTOR MANIFOLD - LOCATION OF RESTRICTOR BLOCKS AND ANTI CAVITATION VALVES (FSA) 6-6 6.4 DISTRIBUTOR MANIFOLD - LOCATION OF RESTRICTOR BLOCKS AND ANTI CAVITATION VALVES (BHA) 6-8 6.5

SINGLE CONTROL BLOCKS (FLOATING) FOR STICK AND BOOM (FSA)................ 6-10

6.6

RESTRICTOR BLOCK WITH PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE........................................... 6-12

6.7

ANTI CAVITATION VALVE BLOCK................................................................................ 6-14

6.8

REMOTE CONTROL VALVES ........................................................................................ 6-16

6.9 DIRECTIONAL SOLENOID VALVES (THREE POSITIONS / 4-WAYS) 6-18 6.10

PROPORTIONAL SOLENOID VALVE ............................................................................ 6-20

6.11

HIGH PRESSURE FILTER .............................................................................................. 6-22

6.12

CONTROL BLOCKS AND VALVES................................................................................ 6-24

6.13

TRAVEL BRAKE VALVE................................................................................................. 6-36

6.14

PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE..................................................................................... 6-38

6.15 DIRECTIONAL SOLENOID VALVES (TWO POSITIONS / 4-WAYS) 6-40 6.16

PRESSURE INCREASING VALVE ................................................................................. 6-42

6.17

HYDRAULIC CYLINDER ................................................................................................. 6-44

6.18

SWING RING.................................................................................................................... 6-48

7

7.

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION................. 7-1 7.1

GENERAL .......................................................................................................................... 7-2

7.2

MAIN PUMPS ................................................................................................................... 7.2.1 LOCATION OF PUMPS ..................................................................................... 7.2.2 PUMP BEARING FLUSHING / LUBRICATION.................................................. 7.2.3 OPERATING PRINCIPLE .................................................................................. 7.2.4 CHECKS / ADJUSTMENTS ...............................................................................

7-12 7-13 7-14 7-16 7-34

7.3

ELECTRONIC PUMP REGULATION SYSTEM .............................................................. 7.3.1 ELECTRONIC LOAD LIMITING CONTROL - GENERAL .................................. 7.3.2 MICROCONTROLLER RC4-4............................................................................ 7.3.3 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS ........................................................................

7-44 7-45 7-47 7-49

7.4

HYDRAULIC CONSTANT REGULATION SYSTEM ....................................................... 7-76 7.4.1 GENERAL .......................................................................................................... 7-77 7.4.2 X1-PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT (CONSTANT-PRESSURE)............................. 7-78

7.5 DETERMINATION OF THE PEAK POINT (ENGINE PERFORMANCE) 7-80

8

7.6

ENGINE SPEED SENSOR (PICK UP)............................................................................. 7-82 7.6.1 GENERAL .......................................................................................................... 7-83 7.6.2 ENGINE SPEED SENSOR (PICK UP) ADJUSTMENT ..................................... 7-83

7.7

ENERGY EFFICIENCY .................................................................................................... 7-84 7.7.1 GENERAL .......................................................................................................... 7-85 7.7.2 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS ........................................................................ 7-86

8.

OPERATING HYDRAULIC............................................................... 8-1 8.1

GENERAL .......................................................................................................................... 8-2 8.1.1 FLOATING SYSTEM............................................................................................ 8-4

8.2

HYDRAULIC FOR THE ATTACHMENT CYLINDER FSA AND BHA............................... 8-6 8.2.1 ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "BOOM RAISING" FSA...................... 8-6 8.2.2 ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "BOOM RAISING" BHA ..................... 8-8 8.2.3 ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "BOOM LOWERING" FSA ............... 8-10 8.2.4 ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "BOOM LOWERING" BHA............... 8-12 8.2.5 ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "STICK EXTENDING" FSA .............. 8-14 8.2.6 ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "STICK EXTENDING" BHA.............. 8-16 8.2.7 ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "STICK RETRACTING" FSA............ 8-18 8.2.8 ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "STICK RETRACTING" BHA ........... 8-20 8.2.9 ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "BUCKET FILLING" FSA ................. 8-22 8.2.10 ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "BUCKET FILLING" BHA ................. 8-24 8.2.11 ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "BUCKET EMPTYING" FSA ............ 8-26 8.2.12 ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "BUCKET EMPTYING" BHA............ 8-28 8.2.13 ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "CLAM OPENING" FSA ................... 8-30 8.2.14 ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "CLAM CLOSING" FSA ................... 8-32 8.2.15 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS OF THE MAIN RELIEF VALVES (FSA) ......... 8-34 8.2.16 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS OF THE MAIN RELIEF VALVES (BHA)......... 8-36 8.2.17 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS OF THE SERVICE LINE RELIEF VALVES (SRV) 8-38 8.2.17.1 BOOM CYLINDER "PISTON SIDE" FSA + BHA .............................. 8-39 8.2.17.2 BOOM CYLINDER "PISTON ROD SIDE" FSA +BHA ...................... 8-43 8.2.17.3 STICK CYLINDER "PISTON SIDE" FSA .......................................... 8-47 8.2.17.4 STICK CYLINDER "PISTON SIDE" BHA.......................................... 8-51 8.2.18 STICK CYLINDER "PISTON ROD SIDE" FSA .................................................. 8-55 8.2.18.1 STICK CYLINDER "PISTON ROD SIDE" BHA................................. 8-59 8.2.18.2 BUCKET CYLINDER "PISTON SIDE" FSA ...................................... 8-63 8.2.18.3 BUCKET CYLINDER "PISTON SIDE" BHA...................................... 8-67 8.2.18.4 BUCKET CYLINDER "PISTON ROD SIDE" FSA ............................. 8-71 8.2.18.5 BUCKET CYLINDER "PISTON ROD SIDE" BHA............................. 8-75 8.2.18.6 CLAM CYLINDER "PISTON ROD SIDE" FSA.................................. 8-79 8.2.18.7 CLAM CYLINDER "PISTON SIDE" FSA........................................... 8-81 8.2.18.8 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS OF THE LOWERING SPEED ....... 8-83 8.2.18.9 BUCKET CYLINDER FSA ................................................................ 8-97 8.2.18.10 BUCKET CYLINDER BHA ................................................................ 8-99 8.2.18.11 CLAM CYLINDER BHA .................................................................. 8-101

8.3

HYDRAULIC FOR THE SWING CIRCUIT ..................................................................... 8.3.1 SWING CIRCUIT.............................................................................................. 8.3.2 SWING MOTOR .............................................................................................. 8.3.3 SWING GEAR BOX ......................................................................................... 8.3.4 SWING PARKING BRAKE (GEAR HOUSE BRAKE) ...................................... 8.3.5 SWING BRAKE VALVE ................................................................................... 8.3.6 ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "SWING LEFT" .............................. 8.3.7 ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "SWING RIGHT" ............................ 8.3.8 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS FOR THE SWING CIRCUIT......................... 8.3.9 FUNCTION CHECK FOR HYDRAULIC SWING BRAKE ................................ 8.3.10 FUNCTION CHECK FOR THE SWING PARKING BRAKE .............................

8-102 8-102 8-106 8-108 8-110 8-112 8-114 8-116 8-118 8-124 8-126

9

8.4

10

HYDRAULIC FOR THE TRAVEL CIRCUIT ................................................................... 8.4.1 TRAVEL CIRCUIT ............................................................................................ 8.4.2 TRAVEL MOTOR ............................................................................................. 8.4.3 ROTARY DISTRIBUTOR ................................................................................. 8.4.4 TRAVEL GEAR ................................................................................................ 8.4.5 TRAVEL PARKING BRAKE (GEAR HOUSE BRAKE)..................................... 8.4.6 TRAVEL BRAKE VALVE.................................................................................. 8.4.7 ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART “TRAVELING FORWARD”............. 8.4.8 ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART “TRAVELING BACKWARD”........... 8.4.9 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS FOR THE TRAVEL CIRCUIT ....................... 8.4.10 FUNCTION CHECK FOR THE TRAVEL PARKING BRAKE ...........................

8-128 8-128 8-132 8-134 8-136 8-138 8-140 8-142 8-144 8-146 8-148

9.

HYDRAULIC TRACK TENSIONING SYSTEM ................................ 9-1 9.1

GENERAL .......................................................................................................................... 9-2

9.2

PRESSURE INCREASING VALVE ................................................................................... 9-6

9.3

TENSIONING CYLINDER .................................................................................................. 9-8

9.4

ADJUSTMENTS / CHECKS............................................................................................. 9-10

9.5

FUNCTIONAL TEST ........................................................................................................ 9-12

11

10. ACCESS LADDER HYDRAULICALLY OPERATED ...................... 10-1

12

10.1

GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 10-2

10.2

FUNCTION OF HYDRAULICALLY OPERATED ACCESS LADDER............................. 10-4

10.3

ADJUSTMENTS / CHECKS............................................................................................. 10-8

11. CENTRAL REFILLING SYSTEM (SERVICE ARM) ....................... 11-1 11.1

GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 11-2

11.2

FUNCTION ....................................................................................................................... 11-4

13

12. HINTS FOR READING THE HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM ................... 12-1

14

12.1

GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 12-2

12.2

SYMBOLIC....................................................................................................................... 12-4 12.2.1 LINES, UNIONS ................................................................................................. 12-5 12.2.2 COMPONENTS, VALVES.................................................................................. 12-6 12.2.3 SENSORS .......................................................................................................... 12-7 12.2.4 VALVES, VALVE COMPONENTS ..................................................................... 12-8 12.2.5 PUMP, MOTOR, CYLINDER............................................................................ 12-12

13. HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM....... 13-1 13.1

DESIGNATION OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ........................................................ 13-3

13.2

ELECTRIC SYMBOLS ..................................................................................................... 13-4

13.3

SYMBOLS ........................................................................................................................ 13-6

13.4

DRAWING CONCEPT...................................................................................................... 13-8

13.5

READING A CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.................................................................................. 13-12

13.6

COMPONENT LIST........................................................................................................ 13-16

15

14 VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM ................................. 14-1

16

14.1

GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 14-2

14.2

SPECIFICATIONS FOR OPERATORS .......................................................................... 14-4 14.2.1 SEQUENCE OF DISPLAYS............................................................................... 14-5 14.2.2 OPENING SCREEN ........................................................................................... 14-5 14.2.3 MAIN GAUGE SCREENS 1 TO 3 ...................................................................... 14-6 14.2.4 FUEL CONSUMPTION SCREEN .................................................................... 14-10 14.2.5 FAILURE MESSAGE HISTORY SCREEN FOR OPERATOR......................... 14-13 14.2.6 MAIN SCREEN - CHANCE TIME SMR DATE ................................................. 14-13 14.2.7 MAINTENANCE MONITOR ............................................................................. 14-14 14.2.8 SETTINGS FOR OPERATOR.......................................................................... 14-16 14.2.9 AUTOMATIC MESSAGES ............................................................................... 14-22 14.2.10 TABLE OF ALL TOP MESSAGES PROVIDED BY THE SYSTEM.................. 14-26 14.2.11 TABLE OF AVAILABLE INSTRUCTION MESSAGES ..................................... 14-36

14.3

SPECIFICATIONS FOR SERVICE ................................................................................ 14.3.1 MAIN SCREEN FLOW CHART FOR THE OPERATER MODE ...................... 14.3.2 MAIN SCREEN FLOW CHART FOR THE SERVICE MODE .......................... 14.3.3 ENTERING THE SERVICE MENU .................................................................. 14.3.4 SERVICE MENU SELECT SCREEN ............................................................... 14.3.5 REAL TIME MENU SELECT SCREEN ............................................................ 14.3.5.1 ENGINE .......................................................................................... 14.3.5.2 PTO 1.............................................................................................. 14.3.5.3 HYDRAULIC ................................................................................... 14.3.5.4 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT............................................................ 14.3.5.5 EMERGENCY STOP ...................................................................... 14.3.5.6 MANUAL SW .................................................................................. 14.3.5.7 CENTRAL LUBRICATION SYSTEM 1 ........................................... 14.3.5.8 SLEW RING GEAR LUBE SYSTEM............................................... 14.3.5.9 OTHER............................................................................................ 14.3.5.10 OUTPUT SIGNALS......................................................................... 14.3.5.11 OUTPUT SIGNALS WITH DEACTIVATED PLC-EVALUATION .... 14.3.6 PM-CLINIC ....................................................................................................... 14.3.6.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................... 14.3.6.2 POWER CHECK ............................................................................. 14.3.7 SERIAL/GCC NO. SETTING............................................................................ 14.3.8 MEMORY CLEAR ............................................................................................ 14.3.8.1 INPUT MEMORY CLEAR ID........................................................... 14.3.8.2 MEMORY CLEAR SCREEN ........................................................... 14.3.9 FAILURE HISTORY ......................................................................................... 14.3.10 MAINTENANCE MONITOR ............................................................................. 14.3.11 SNAPSHOT...................................................................................................... 14.3.12 SETTINGS........................................................................................................ 14.3.12.1 CENTRAL LUBRICATION SYSTEM (CLS) .................................... 14.3.12.2 SWING LUBRICATION SYSTEM (SLS)......................................... 14.3.12.3 OTHER SETTINGS 1...................................................................... 14.3.12.4 OTHER SETTINGS 2...................................................................... 14.3.12.5 SHUTDOWN ON/OFF ....................................................................

14.4

WIRING OF THE MAIN COMPONENTS ....................................................................... 14-74

14-38 14-39 14-40 14-44 14-46 14-47 14-47 14-48 14-48 14-50 14-50 14-51 14-52 14-52 14-53 14-54 14-56 14-57 14-57 14-58 14-59 14-60 14-60 14-61 14-62 14-64 14-65 14-66 14-66 14-67 14-68 14-70 14-71

14.4.1 14.4.2 14.4.3 14.4.4

WIRING OF THE ENGINE ............................................................................... WIRING OF THE VHMS-CONTROLLER......................................................... WIRING OF THE CGD-MONITOR................................................................... WIRING OF THE PLC......................................................................................

14-76 14-78 14-82 14-84

14.5

GENERAL DESIGN OF THE PLC ................................................................................. 14.5.1 INPUT AND OUTPUT OF THE PLC ................................................................ 14.5.2 TASK ................................................................................................................ 14.5.3 PLC DIGSY PLUS ® ........................................................................................

14-86 14-89 14-89 14-90

14.6

HOW TO PROCEED THE MAINTENANCE AND INSTALLATION .............................. 14.6.1 MEANING OF THE +5 V STATUS LED........................................................... 14.6.2 MEANING OF THE DIAG STATUS LED ......................................................... 14.6.3 SHORT CIRCUIT MARKER-LED “MK”............................................................ 14.6.4 DIAGNOSTIC FOR ANALOGUE-MODULE “ANM” .........................................

14-92 14-93 14-95 14-98 14-98

14.7

FRONT CONNECTOR ARRANGEMENT...................................................................... 14-99 14.7.1 FRONT CONNECTOR ARRANGEMENT, BIM MODULE (DIGITAL INPUT / OUTPUT) 14-

99 14.7.2 14.7.3 14.7.4

FRONT CONNECTOR ARRANGEMENT, ANM-MODULE (ANALOGUES INPUT) 14-101 GROUND CONNECTION OF THE CONTROL UNIT .................................... 14-103 INTERFACE-CONNECTION VHMS-CONTROLLER .................................... 14-104

14.8

POWER SUPPLY......................................................................................................... 14.8.1 OPERATION VOLTAGES +24 V ................................................................... 14.8.2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR TROUBLESHOOTING................................. 14.8.3 CPU VOLTAGE RANGE AND ELECTRIC CLASSIFICATION ...................... 14.8.4 FUSE..............................................................................................................

14-106 14-107 14-108 14-109 14-109

14.9

FUNCTION EXPLANATIONS WITH ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM.................................. 14.9.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 14.9.2 PRESSURE MEASURING (HYDRAULIC SYSTEM) ..................................... 14.9.3 TEMPERATURE MEASURING AND TROUBLESHOOTING........................ 14.9.4 TEMPERATURE – RESISTANCE CHART PT100 ........................................

14-111 14-111 14-112 14-114 14-116

14.10 HINTS FOR READING THE FUNCTIONAL FLOW CHARTS..................................... 14-117 14.10.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 14-117 14.10.2 EXAMPLE: MONITORING THE X1-PRESSURE FOR PUMP CONTROL .... 14-118

17

15. LUBRICATION SYSTEMS ............................................................. 15-1

18

15.1

INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................. 15-3

15.2

CENTRAL LUBRICATION SYSTEM (CLS) .................................................................... 15-4 15.2.0.1 CLS LUBRICATION SYSTEM ELECTRIC LAYOUT ........................ 15-8

15.3

LUBRICATION PUMP STATION (SLS) ........................................................................ 15.3.0.1 SLS LUBRICATION SYSTEM ELECTRIC LAYOUT ...................... 15.3.1 HYDRAULICALLY DRIVEN LUBE PUMP........................................................ 15.3.2 VENT VALVE ................................................................................................... 15.3.3 END OF LINE SWITCH.................................................................................... 15.3.4 IN-LINE FILTER ............................................................................................... 15.3.5 LUBRICANT LEVEL SENSOR......................................................................... 15.3.6 LUBRICANT PRESSURE SENSOR ................................................................ 15.3.7 LUBRICANT INJECTOR .................................................................................. 15.3.7.1 FUNCTION STEPS:........................................................................ 15.3.7.2 INLINE CONNECTION OF INJECTORS ........................................ 15.3.8 LUBRICATION PINION ....................................................................................

15.4

OPERATING AND CONTROLLING .............................................................................. 15-33 15.4.1 OPERATING FLOW, ELECTRICAL FLOW ..................................................... 15-34

15.5

ADJUSTMENTS ............................................................................................................. 15.5.1 PUMP SPEED AND WORKING PRESSURE .................................................. 15.5.1.1 ADJUSTMENTS LUBRICATING PUMP SPEED............................ FIG. 15-20ADJUSTMENTS LUBRICATING PUMP PRESSURE .................... 15.5.2 INJECTORS ..................................................................................................... 15.5.3 END OF LINE SWITCH SETTING CLS ........................................................... 15.5.4 END OF LINE SWITCH SETTING SLS ...........................................................

15.6

TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................................... 15-48

15.7

COMMISSIONING .......................................................................................................... 15.7.1 COMMISSIONING OF THE CLS ..................................................................... 15.7.2 FINE ADJUSTMENT ........................................................................................ 15.7.3 COMMISSIONING OF THE SLS......................................................................

15-10 15-14 15-16 15-18 15-20 15-22 15-24 15-25 15-26 15-28 15-30 15-31

15-38 15-39 15-39 15-41 15-42 15-44 15-46 15-52 15-52 15-53 15-53

Table of Contents I.

INTRODUCTION ............................................................................ I-1 I.I

CONTENTS OF THE BINDER ........................................................................................... I-2

I.II

FOREWORD ...................................................................................................................... I-3

I.III

RECOMMENDATIONS FOR ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF HYDRAULIC MINING SHOVELS ...................................................... I-4

I.IV

EXPLANATION OF ABBREVATIONS .............................................................................. I-5

I.V

DIAGRAMS AND ILLUSTRATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ................................................... I-6

SAFETY............................................................................................ II-1 CONTENTS ........................................................................................................................ II-2 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................................ NORMAL OPERATIONS ..................................................................................... REGULAR MAINTENANCE................................................................................. TROUBLESHOOTING, ADJUSTMENTS AND REPAIR...................................... ADDITIONAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR ASSEMBLING, DISASSEMBLING AND TRANSPORTATION OF THE EXCAVATOR ................

II-3 II-3 II-3 II-3 II-3

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS COMMON TO OPERATION ON THE EXCAVATOR........... II-4 PRECAUTIONS BEFORE STARTING OPERATION ON THE EXCAVATOR .... II-4 PREPARATIONS FOR SAFE OPERATION ........................................................ II-4 FIRE PREVENTION............................................................................................. II-6 PRECAUTIONS WHEN GETTING ON OR OFF THE MACHINE........................ II-8 BURN PREVENTION........................................................................................... II-9 PRECAUTIONS WHEN CLEANING CAB GLASS............................................... II-9 PRECAUTIONS RELATED TO PROTECTIVE STRUCTURES ........................ II-10 PRECAUTIONS AT JOBSITE............................................................................ II-11 STARTING ENGINE .......................................................................................... II-17 OPERATION ...................................................................................................... II-18 PRECAUTION FOR MAINTENANCE.............................................................................. II-24 PRECAUTIONS FOR INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE .............................. II-30 ADDITIONAL SAFETY INFORMATION FOR TROUBLESHOOTING AND ADJUSTMENTS................................................................................................................ II-36 SPECIAL SAFETY EQUIPMENT..................................................................................... II-38

III.

SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................ III-1 III.I

LIFTING GEARS .............................................................................................................. III-2

III.II

SAFETY HINTS FOR SLING ACCESSORY ................................................................... III-4

III.III

STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUE CHART ................................................................ III-5

III.IV

CONVERSION TABLE ..................................................................................................... III-6

III.V

BLIND PLUGS ............................................................................................................... III-13

III.VI

CLASSIFICATION OF THREADS TO THE NOMINAL WIDTH .................................... III-15

III.VII PLUGS AND FITTINGS ACCORDING TO ISO 8434-1 / DIN 2353 .............................. III-16

3

1.

2.

3.

4

MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS............................................................ 1-1 1.1

GENERAL LAYOUT .......................................................................................................... 1-2

1.2

SUPERSTRUCTURE ......................................................................................................... 1-4

1.3

MACHINE HOUSE ............................................................................................................ 1-6

1.4

HYDRAULIC OIL TANK..................................................................................................... 1-8

1.5

HYDRAULIC OIL COOLER ............................................................................................. 1-10

1.6

FUEL TANK ..................................................................................................................... 1-12

1.7

COUNTERWEIGHT.......................................................................................................... 1-14

1.8

CAB SUPPORT................................................................................................................ 1-16

1.9

OPERATOR’S CAB ......................................................................................................... 1-18

1.10

CONTROL BLOCKS ........................................................................................................ 1-20

1.11

SWING MACHINERY....................................................................................................... 1-22 1.11.1 SWING MACHINERY L&S ................................................................................. 1-22 1.11.2 SWING MACHINERY SIEBENHAAR................................................................. 1-24

1.12

UNDERCARRIAGE.......................................................................................................... 1-26

1.13

BACKHOE ATTACHMENT (BHA) .................................................................................. 1-28

1.14

FRONT SHOVEL ATTACHMENT (FSA) ......................................................................... 1-30

DRIVE............................................................................................... 2-1 2.1

PRIME DRIVE ASSEMBLY ............................................................................................... 2-2

2.2

ENGINE AND PTO MOUNTS ............................................................................................ 2-4 2.2.1 ENGINE MOUNTS ............................................................................................... 2-5 2.2.2 TORQUE SUPPORT............................................................................................ 2-6

2.3

GEISLINGER COUPLING.................................................................................................. 2-8

2.4

FAN DRIVE AND RADIATOR ASSEMBLY..................................................................... 2-10 2.4.1 RADIATOR FAN DRIVE SPEED ADJUSTMENT .............................................. 2-14

2.5

PUMP DISTRIBUTOR GEARBOX (PTO) ........................................................................ 2.5.1 PUMP DRIVE SHAFT HOUSING....................................................................... 2.5.2 PTO LUBRICATION AND COOLING................................................................. 2.5.3 HYDRAULIC PUMPS – LOCATION, DRIVE SPEED AND FLOW RATES .......

2.6

AIR FILTER ...................................................................................................................... 2-28

2-18 2-20 2-22 2-26

HYDRAULIC OIL TANK.................................................................... 3-1 3.1

GENERAL LAYOUT ......................................................................................................... 3-2

3.2

HYDRAULIC OIL TANK, LOCATION OF THE ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT ........................ 3-4

3.3

SUCTION OIL TANK WITH STRAINERS ......................................................................... 3-6

3.4

RETURN OIL COLLECTOR PIPE WITH STRAINER ....................................................... 3-8

3.5

BACK PRESSURE VALVE ............................................................................................. 3-10

3.6

TRANSFER PUMP FOR HYDRAULIC OIL ..................................................................... 3-12

3.7

RETURN AND LEAK OIL FILTER .................................................................................. 3-14

3.8

BREATHER FILTER ....................................................................................................... 3-16

4.

5.

6.

HYDRAULIC OIL COOLING ............................................................ 4-1 4.1

OVERALL VIEW OF THE HYDRAULIC OIL COOLING ................................................... 4-2

4.2

FUNCTION OF THE HYDRAULIC OIL COOLING CIRCUIT ............................................ 4-4

4.3

ADJUSTMENT OF THE BACK PRESSURE VALVE........................................................ 4-6

4.4

FAN DRIVE (TWO STAGE COOLER FAN RPM CONTROL)........................................... 4-8 4.4.1 FIXED DISPLACEMENT PUMP, WITH VARIABLE SETTING ......................... 4-10 4.4.2 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE ............................................................................ 4-12 4.4.3 SOLENOID VALVE ............................................................................................ 4-14

4.5

ADJUSTMENT OF THE COOLER FAN DRIVE SPEED ................................................. 4.5.1 MAXIMUM SPEED............................................................................................. 4.5.2 MEDIUM SPEED................................................................................................ 4.5.3 FUNCTION CHECK OF FAN SPEED CONTROL .............................................

4-16 4-16 4-19 4-20

CONTROLLING.............................................................................. 5-23 5.1

GENERAL LAYOUT ........................................................................................................ 5-24

5.2

VALVE CARTRIDGE BLOCK.......................................................................................... 5-26

5.3

PILOT PRESSURE SUPPLY AND ADJUSTMENTS ...................................................... 5.3.1 PILOT PRESSURE CONTROL (PPC) CIRCUIT ............................................... 5.3.2 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENT OF PILOT PRESSURE .................................... 5.3.3 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES ARRANGEMENT .............................................

5.4

FUNCTION OF THE ELECTRO HYDRAULIC CONTROL SYSTEM .............................. 5-40

5.5

HAND LEVER (JOYSTICK) CONTROL .......................................................................... 5-44

5.6

FOOT PEDAL CONTROL................................................................................................ 5-46

5.7

PROPORTIONAL AMPLIFIER MODULE, TYPE A......................................................... 5-48

5.8

PROPORTIONAL AMPLIFIER MODULE, TYPE B......................................................... 5-50

5.9

RAMP TIME MODULE ..................................................................................................... 5-52

5.10

ADJUSTMENTS OF AMPLIFIER MODULES ................................................................. 5.10.1 GENERAL .......................................................................................................... 5.10.2 ADJUSTING THE AMPLIFIERS TYPE A........................................................... 5.10.3 ADJUSTING THE AMPLIFIERS TYPE B...........................................................

5.11

ADJUSTING THE RAMP TIME MODUL ......................................................................... 5-60

5-32 5-33 5-36 5-38

5-54 5-55 5-56 5-58

COMPONENTS ................................................................................ 6-1 6.1

MAIN CONTROL BLOCKS AND HIGH PRESSURE FILTER (FSA)................................ 6-2

6.2

MAIN CONTROL BLOCKS AND HIGH PRESSURE FILTER (BHA) ............................... 6-4

6.3

DISTRIBUTOR MANIFOLD - LOCATION OF RESTRICTOR BLOCKS AND ANTI CAVITATION VALVES (FSA) ................................................................................... 6-6

6.4

DISTRIBUTOR MANIFOLD - LOCATION OF RESTRICTOR BLOCKS AND ANTI CAVITATION VALVES (BHA)................................................................................... 6-8

6.5

SINGLE CONTROL BLOCKS (FLOATING) FOR STICK AND BOOM (FSA)................ 6-10

6.6

RESTRICTOR BLOCK WITH PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE........................................... 6-12

6.7

ANTI CAVITATION VALVE BLOCK................................................................................ 6-14

6.8

REMOTE CONTROL VALVES ........................................................................................ 6-16 5

7.

8.

6

6.9

4/3 DIRECTIONAL SOLENOID VALVES ........................................................................ 6-18

6.10

PROPORTIONAL SOLENOID VALVES.......................................................................... 6-20

6.11

HIGH PRESSURE FILTER .............................................................................................. 6-22

6.12

CONTROL BLOCKS AND VALVES................................................................................ 6-24

6.13

TRAVEL BRAKE VALVE................................................................................................. 6-36

6.14

PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE ..................................................................................... 6-38

6.15

4/2 DIRECTIONAL SOLENOID VALVES ........................................................................ 6-40

6.16

PRESSURE DOUBLE STAGE VALVE ........................................................................... 6-42

6.17

HYDRAULIC CYLINDER ................................................................................................. 6-44

6.18

SLEW RING ..................................................................................................................... 6-48

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION................. 7-1 7.1

GENERAL .......................................................................................................................... 7-2

7.2

MAIN PUMPS ................................................................................................................... 7.2.1 LOCATION OF PUMPS ..................................................................................... 7.2.2 PUMP BEARING FLUSHING / LUBRICATION.................................................. 7.2.3 OPERATING PRINCIPLE .................................................................................. 7.2.4 CHECKS / ADJUSTMENTS ...............................................................................

7-10 7-11 7-12 7-14 7-30

7.3

ELECTRONIC PUMP REGULATION SYSTEM .............................................................. 7.3.1 ELECTRONIC LOAD LIMITING CONTROL - GENERAL .................................. 7.3.2 MICROCONTROLLER RC4-4............................................................................ 7.3.3 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS ........................................................................

7-38 7-39 7-41 7-43

7.4

HYDRAULIC CONSTANT REGULATION SYSTEM ....................................................... 7-50 7.4.1 GENERAL .......................................................................................................... 7-51 7.4.2 X1 PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT (CONSTANT PRESSURE) ............................. 7-52

7.5

DETERMINATION OF THE PEAK POINT (ENGINE PERFORMANCE) ........................ 7-54

7.6

ENGINE SPEED SENSOR (PICK-UP) ............................................................................ 7-56 7.6.1 GENERAL .......................................................................................................... 7-57 7.6.2 ENGINE SPEED SENSOR (PICK-UP) ADJUSTMENT ..................................... 7-57

7.7

ENERGY EFFICIENCY .................................................................................................... 7-58 7.7.1 GENERAL .......................................................................................................... 7-59 7.7.2 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS ........................................................................ 7-60

OPERATING HYDRAULICS ............................................................ 8-1 8.1

GENERAL .......................................................................................................................... 8-2 8.1.1 FLOATING SYSTEM............................................................................................ 8-4

8.2

HYDRAULICS FOR THE ATTACHMENT CYLINDER FSA AND BHA ............................ 8-6 8.2.1 ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "BOOM RAISE" FSA .......................... 8-6 8.2.2 ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "BOOM RAISE" BHA ......................... 8-8 8.2.3 ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "BOOM LOWERING" FSA ............... 8-10 8.2.4 ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "BOOM LOWERING" BHA............... 8-12 8.2.5 ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "STICK EXTEND" FSA .................... 8-14 8.2.6 ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "STICK EXTEND" BHA .................... 8-16 8.2.7 ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "STICK RETRACT" FSA .................. 8-18

8.2.8 8.2.9 8.2.10 8.2.11 8.2.12 8.2.13 8.2.14 8.2.15 8.2.16 8.2.17

8.2.18

ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "STICK RETRACT" BHA.................. ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "BUCKET CURL" FSA ..................... ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "BUCKET CURL" BHA..................... ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "BUCKET DUMP" FSA .................... ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "BUCKET DUMP" BHA .................... ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "CLAM OPEN" FSA ......................... ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "CLAM CLOSE" FSA ....................... CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS OF THE MAIN RELIEF VALVES (FSA) ......... CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS OF THE MAIN RELIEF VALVES (BHA)......... CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS OF THE SECONDARY RELIEF VALVES (SRV)................................................................................................... 8.2.17.1 BOOM CYLINDER "PISTON SIDE" FSA + BHA .............................. 8.2.17.2 BOOM CYLINDER "PISTON ROD SIDE" FSA +BHA ...................... 8.2.17.3 STICK CYLINDER "PISTON SIDE" FSA .......................................... 8.2.17.4 STICK CYLINDER "PISTON SIDE" BHA.......................................... STICK CYLINDER "PISTON ROD SIDE" FSA .................................................. 8.2.18.1 STICK CYLINDER "PISTON ROD SIDE" BHA................................. 8.2.18.2 BUCKET CYLINDER "PISTON SIDE" FSA ...................................... 8.2.18.3 BUCKET CYLINDER "PISTON SIDE" BHA...................................... 8.2.18.4 BUCKET CYLINDER "PISTON ROD SIDE" FSA ............................. 8.2.18.5 BUCKET CYLINDER "PISTON ROD SIDE" BHA............................. 8.2.18.6 CLAM CYLINDER "PISTON ROD SIDE" FSA.................................. 8.2.18.7 CLAM CYLINDER "PISTON SIDE" FSA........................................... 8.2.18.8 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS OF THE LOWERING SPEED .......

8-20 8-22 8-24 8-26 8-28 8-30 8-32 8-34 8-36 8-38 8-39 8-43 8-47 8-51 8-55 8-59 8-63 8-67 8-71 8-75 8-79 8-81 8-83

8.3

HYDRAULICS FOR THE SWING CIRCUIT................................................................... 8.3.1 SWING CIRCUIT.............................................................................................. 8.3.2 SWING MOTOR .............................................................................................. 8.3.3 SWING GEARBOX (L&S)................................................................................ 8.3.4 SWING GEARBOX (SIEBENHAAR)................................................................ 8.3.5 SLEW PARKING BRAKE (L&S) ...................................................................... 8.3.6 SLEW PARKING BRAKE (SIEBENHAAR) ...................................................... 8.3.7 SWING BRAKE VALVE ................................................................................... 8.3.8 ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "SWING LEFT" .............................. 8.3.9 ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "SWING RIGHT" ............................ 8.3.10 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS FOR THE SWING CIRCUIT......................... 8.3.11 FUNCTION CHECK FOR THE HYDRAULIC SWING BRAKE ........................ 8.3.12 FUNCTION CHECK FOR THE SLEW PARKING BRAKE...............................

8-102 8-102 8-106 8-108 8-110 8-112 8-114 8-116 8-118 8-120 8-122 8-128 8-130

8.4

HYDRAULICS FOR THE TRAVEL CIRCUIT ................................................................ 8.4.1 TRAVEL CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 8.4.2 TRAVEL MOTOR ............................................................................................. 8.4.3 ROTARY JOINT ............................................................................................... 8.4.4 TRAVEL GEARBOX (L&S).............................................................................. 8.4.5 TRAVEL GEARBOX (ZOLLERN)..................................................................... 8.4.6 TRAVEL PARKING BRAKE (GEAR HOUSE BRAKE) .................................... 8.4.7 TRAVEL BRAKE VALVE.................................................................................. 8.4.8 ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART “TRAVEL FORWARD” ................... 8.4.9 ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART “TRAVEL BACKWARDS” .............. 8.4.10 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS FOR THE TRAVEL CIRCUIT ....................... 8.4.11 FUNCTION CHECK FOR THE TRAVEL PARKING BRAKE ...........................

8-132 8-132 8-136 8-138 8-140 8-142 8-144 8-146 8-148 8-150 8-152 8-154

7

9.

HYDRAULIC TRACK TENSIONING SYSTEM................................. 9-1 9.1

GENERAL .......................................................................................................................... 9-2

9.2

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................... 9-4

9.3

PRESSURE DOUBLE STAGE VALVE ............................................................................. 9-6

9.4

TENSIONING CYLINDER .................................................................................................. 9-8

9.5

ADJUSTMENTS / CHECKS............................................................................................. 9-10

10. ACCESS LADDER, HYDRAULICALLY OPERATED ..................... 10-1 10.1

GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 10-2

10.2

FUNCTION OF HYDRAULICALLY OPERATED ACCESS LADDER............................. 10-4

10.3

ADJUSTMENTS / CHECKS............................................................................................. 10-8

11. CENTRAL REFILLING SYSTEM (SERVICE ARM) ....................... 11-1 11.1

GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 11-2

11.2

FUNCTION ....................................................................................................................... 11-4

12. HINTS FOR READING THE HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM ................... 12-1 12.1

GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 12-2

12.2

HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS .................................................................................................. 12-4 12.2.1 LINES, UNIONS ................................................................................................. 12-5 12.2.2 COMPONENTS, VALVES.................................................................................. 12-7 12.2.3 SENSORS .......................................................................................................... 12-7 12.2.4 VALVES, VALVE COMPONENTS ..................................................................... 12-8 12.2.5 PUMP, MOTOR, CYLINDER............................................................................ 12-12

13. HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM........ 13-1

8

13.1

GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 13-2

13.2

REFERENCE DESIGNATION OF THE ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ......................... 13-3 13.2.1 AREA CODE ...................................................................................................... 13-3 13.2.2 COMPONENT IDENTIFYING LETTER.............................................................. 13-5

13.3

GRAPHICAL SYMBOLS.................................................................................................. 13-6

13.4

DRAWING CONCEPT.................................................................................................... 13-10

13.5

CABLE MARKING ......................................................................................................... 13-20

13.6

TABLE OF NEW AND OLD COMPONENT DESIGNATIONS ...................................... 13-21

14. VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM ...................................................................... 14-1 14.1

GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 14-2

14.2

SPECIFICATIONS FOR OPERATORS ........................................................................... 14-4 14.2.1 SEQUENCE OF DISPLAYS............................................................................... 14-5 14.2.2 OPENING SCREEN........................................................................................... 14-5 14.2.3 MAIN GAUGE SCREENS 1 TO 3 ...................................................................... 14-6 14.2.4 FUEL CONSUMPTION SCREEN .................................................................... 14-11 14.2.5 FAILURE MESSAGE SCREEN FOR THE OPERATOR ................................. 14-13 14.2.6 MAIN GAUGE SCREENS - CHANGING OF TIME / SMR / DATE .................. 14-15 14.2.7 MAINTENANCE MONITOR ............................................................................. 14-16 14.2.8 SETTINGS FOR OPERATORS ....................................................................... 14-18 14.2.9 AUTOMATIC MESSAGES ............................................................................... 14-26 14.2.10 TABLES OF ALL MESSAGES PROVIDED BY THE SYSTEM ....................... 14-29 14.2.10.1 TABLE OF G-CODES .................................................................... 14-30 14.2.10.2 TABLE OF C-CODES - DIESEL ENGINES WITH EMISSION STANDARD TIER 2 ..................................................... 14-39 14.2.10.3 TABLE OF C-CODES - DIESEL ENGINES WITH EMISSION STANDARD TIER 1 ..................................................... 14-46 14.2.10.4 TABLE OF AVAILABLE INSTRUCTION MESSAGES ................... 14-52

14.3

FLOW CHARTS (1-4) VHMS MAIN SCREENS............................................................. 14-55

14.4

VHMS SERVICE LEVEL ................................................................................................ 14.4.1 EXPLANATION OF THE BUTTON SYMBOLS (SERVICE LEVEL) ................ 14.4.2 SERVICE MENU SELECT SCREEN ............................................................... 14.4.3 REAL TIME MENU SELECT SCREEN............................................................ 14.4.3.1 REAL TIME MENU, OPTION: 01 ENGINE 1 .................................. 14.4.3.2 REAL TIME MENU, OPTION: 02 PTO 1 ........................................ 14.4.3.3 REAL TIME MENU, OPTION: 03 HYDRAULIC .............................. 14.4.3.4 REAL TIME MENU, OPTION: 04 SLEW ........................................ 14.4.3.5 REAL TIME MENU, OPTION: 05 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ...... 14.4.3.6 REAL TIME MENU, OPTION: 06 EMERGENCY STOP................. 14.4.3.7 REAL TIME MENU, OPTION: 07 MANUAL SWITCH .................... 14.4.3.8 REAL TIME MENU, OPTION: 08 CENTRAL LUBE SYSTEM 1..... 14.4.3.9 REAL TIME MENU, OPTION: 09 SLEW RING GEAR LUBE SYSTEM ............................................................................... 14.4.3.10 REAL TIME MENU, OPTION: 10 WINDSCREEN WIPER ............. 14.4.3.11 REAL TIME MENU, OPTION: 11 LADDER .................................... 14.4.3.12 REAL TIME MENU, OPTION: 12 SERVICE ARM .......................... 14.4.3.13 REAL TIME MENU, OPTION: 13 PILOT CONTROL...................... 14.4.3.14 REAL TIME MENU, OPTION: 14 OTHER ITEMS .......................... 14.4.3.15 REAL TIME MENU, OPTION: 15 OUTPUT SIGNALS ................... 14.4.3.16 OUTPUT SIGNALS WITH DEACTIVATED MTC-EVALUATION.... 14.4.4 PM-CLINIC ....................................................................................................... 14.4.4.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................... 14.4.4.2 POWER CHECK ............................................................................. 14.4.5 SERIAL/GCC NO. SETTING............................................................................ 14.4.6 MEMORY CLEAR ............................................................................................ 14.4.6.1 INPUT MEMORY CLEAR ID .......................................................... 14.4.6.2 MEMORY CLEAR SCREEN ...........................................................

14-59 14-60 14-61 14-62 14-62 14-63 14-64 14-65 14-65 14-65 14-66 14-67 14-67 14-68 14-68 14-69 14-70 14-71 14-72 14-77 14-78 14-78 14-79 14-80 14-81 14-81 14-82 9

14.4.7 14.4.8 14.4.9 14.4.10

FAILURE HISTORY ......................................................................................... MAINTENANCE MONITOR ............................................................................. SNAPSHOT...................................................................................................... SETTINGS........................................................................................................ 14.4.10.1 CENTRAL LUBRICATION SYSTEM (CLS 1), SCREEN 1/8 .......... 14.4.10.2 SWING LUBRICATION SYSTEM (SLS), SCREEN 2/8.................. 14.4.10.3 QMIN - QMAX - SETTING, SCREEN 3/8 ....................................... 14.4.10.4 OTHER SETTINGS 1/2, SCREEN 4/8............................................ 14.4.10.5 OTHER SETTINGS 2/2, SCREEN 5/8............................................ 14.4.10.6 SHUTDOWN BYPASS ON/OFF .....................................................

14-83 14-84 14-85 14-86 14-86 14-87 14-88 14-88 14-90 14-92

14.5

INTERFACE-CONNECTION VHMS-CONTROLLER .................................................... 14-94 14.5.1 VHMS-CONTROLLER ..................................................................................... 14-95

14.6

WIRING OF THE VHMS-CONTROLLER....................................................................... 14-96

14.7

GLOBAL LAYOUT OF THE MTC CONTROL SYSTEM ............................................. 14.7.1 MTC (MASTER TURBO CONTROLLER) ...................................................... 14.7.1.1 MTC-FLOWCHART ...................................................................... 14.7.1.2 MTC FEATURES .......................................................................... 14.7.1.3 MTC-FIRMWARE AND SOFTWARE............................................ 14.7.1.4 VIEW ONTO THE MTC UNIT AND ITS CONNECTORS .............

14-100 14-102 14-102 14-102 14-103 14-104

14.8

GLOBAL LAYOUT OF THE INTERNAL CAN BUS .................................................... 14.8.1 GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT A CAN BUS SYSTEM........................... 14.8.1.1 GENERAL CAN BUS DESCRIPTION .......................................... 14.8.1.2 CAN BUS TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................. 14.8.1.3 CAN BUS WIRING........................................................................ 14.8.1.4 CAN BUS END RESISTOR ..........................................................

14-106 14-106 14-107 14-107 14-108 14-110

14.9

THE NODES IN THE CAN BUS SYSTEM ................................................................... 14.9.1 GLOBAL LAYOUT.......................................................................................... 14.9.2 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................ 14.9.2.1 ICN-V FEATURES ........................................................................ 14.9.2.2 ICN-D FEATURES ........................................................................ 14.9.3 NODE DIP-SWITCHES .................................................................................. 14.9.4 NODE BOX..................................................................................................... 14.9.5 NODE LOCATIONS ON THE MACHINE ....................................................... 14.9.5.1 NODE & LOCATION CHART........................................................ 14.9.5.2 EXEMPLARY VIEW ONTO LOCATION 11 (CAB BASE).............

14-112 14-112 14-113 14-114 14-115 14-116 14-117 14-118 14-119 14-120

15. AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS ....................................... 15-1

10

15.1

GENERAL OVERVIEW CLS & SLS ................................................................................ 15-2 15.1.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION................................................................................. 15-3

15.2

BASIC FUNCTION OF THE LUBRICATION SYSTEMS ................................................. 15-4

15.3

CENTRAL LUBRICATION SYSTEM (CLS) .................................................................... 15-6 15.3.1 GENERAL INFORMATION ON CLS.................................................................. 15-8

15.4

LUBRICATION PUMP STATION (SLS) ........................................................................ 15-10 15.4.1 GENERAL INFORMATION ON SLS ................................................................ 15-12

15.5

LUBRICATION CYCLE.................................................................................................. 15.5.1 OPERATION AND CONTROL ......................................................................... 15.5.2 LUBRICATION CYCLE - COMPONENTS ....................................................... 15.5.3 LUBRICATION CYCLE - PROCESSING ......................................................... 15.5.4 TIME SEGMENTS & SWITCH POINTS OF A LUBRICATION CYCLE ........... 15.5.5 LUBRICATION MODES ................................................................................... 15.5.5.1 AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION MODE .............................................. 15.5.5.2 MANUAL LUBRICATION MODE .................................................... 15.5.5.3 VHMS SERVICE MODE .................................................................

15-13 15-13 15-14 15-16 15-17 15-18 15-18 15-18 15-18

15.6

HYDRAULICALLY DRIVEN LUBE PUMP .................................................................... 15.6.1 ADJUSTMENT OF LUBE PUMP SPEED & WORKING PRESSURE ............. 15.6.1.1 STROKE SPEED ADJUSTMENT ................................................... 15.6.1.2 WORKING PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT ........................................

15-20 15-22 15-23 15-23

15.7

LUBRICANT INJECTORS ............................................................................................. 15.7.1 TIGHTENING TORQUE FOR FITTINGS AT THE GREASE INCETORS ....... 15.7.2 DESCRIPTION................................................................................................. 15.7.3 ADJUSTMENT OF THE LUBRICANT OUTPUT .............................................. 15.7.4 OPERATION PRINCIPLE OF LUBRICANT INJECTORS ............................... 15.7.4.1 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION ............................................................ 15.7.5 CONNECTION OF ONE OR MORE INJECTORS...........................................

15-24 15-25 15-25 15-25 15-26 15-28 15-29

15.8

VENT VALVE ................................................................................................................. 15-30 15.8.1 DESCRIPTION................................................................................................. 15-31

15.9

END-LINE SWITCH........................................................................................................ 15.9.1 DESCRIPTION................................................................................................. 15.9.2 CLS END-LINE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT ........................................................ 15.9.3 SLS END-LINE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT ........................................................

15-32 15-33 15-34 15-36

15.10 IN-LINE FILTER ............................................................................................................. 15-38 15.10.1 DESCRIPTION................................................................................................. 15-39 15.10.2 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE ....................................................................... 15-39 15.11 LUBRICANT LEVEL SENSOR ...................................................................................... 15-40 15.11.1 DESCRIPTION................................................................................................. 15-41 15.11.1.1 LEDS AT THE SONAR SENSOR ................................................... 15-41 15.12 LUBRICATION PINION (SLS) ....................................................................................... 15-44 15.12.1 DESCRIPTION................................................................................................. 15-45 15.13 COMMISSIONING.......................................................................................................... 15.13.1 COMMISSIONING OF THE CLS LUBRICATION SYSTEM ............................ 15.13.2 FINE ADJUSTMENT ........................................................................................ 15.13.3 COMMISSIONING OF THE SLS LUBRICATION SYSTEM ............................

15-46 15-46 15-47 15-48

11

12

I. INTRODUCTION

Version 2010/1

I-1

I.I

CONTENTS OF THE BINDER

Assembled in this file are the Service Manual with explanation and adjustment of the major components and circuits for your KOMATSU Hydraulic Mining Shovel PC4000-6 Diesel with X2 controller and the enhanced VHMS system.

I-2

Version 2010/1

I.II

FOREWORD

Observe the instructions in these manuals for: WARNING z

your Personal SAFETY

z

Operating SAFETY, and

z

READY and EFFICIENT PERFORMANCE of your KOMATSU Hydraulic Mining Shovel.

With this SERVICE MANUAL KOMATSU provides you with the description of the construction and the function of the major systems of the Hydraulic Excavator PC 4000-6D. We describe for you all functions and how to carry out the inspections and adjustments.

How do you find "your" desired information? In the TABLE OF CONTENT all the functions and components are shown in their sequence of the description. CAUTION Periodic preventive inspections and maintenance are the surest means of keeping the machine in proper working order. Prompt detection and correction of minor irregularities, and immediate replacement of worn out or broken parts will prevent failures and avoid expenses.

Personnel entrusted with work on the machine must have read the Assembly Manual, the Operation,- Lubrication- and Maintenance Manual and in particular the section on Safety before beginning to work. Reading the instructions after work has begun is too late.

Damages and defects caused by incorrect operation and maintenance are not covered by the manufacturers guarantee. NOTICE If the Shovel is equipped with a fire suppression system, make sure that the system is ready for operation. In order to keep your Shovel in first-class operating condition use only genuine spare and wear parts. The use of any part other than the genuine part releases the KOMATSU MINING GERMANY GmbH from any guarantee.

SERVICE For all questions related to your Shovel please contact your local Service Center. In all your written or phoned inquiries please indicate the model and serial number of your Shovel.

Replace damaged graphics and symbols at the machine. Observe safety precautions to prevent injury and damage. If after reading this SERVICE MANUAL you can give us suggestions and comments for improvements please do not hesitate to contact us.

Komatsu Mining Germany GmbH Buscherhofstr. 10 40599 Düsseldorf GERMANY

FROM THE PRACTICE - FOR THE PRACTICE -

Version 2010/1

I-3

I.III

RECOMMENDATIONS FOR ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF HYDRAULIC MINING SHOVELS

Operation z

Avoid engine idling over long periods. Long periods of idling, more than 10 minutes, will not only waste fuel, but is also harmful to the engine.

z

Avoid operation against the main relief valves of the hydraulic system. Move control lever to neutral position before the loader attachment stalls due to overload.

z

Position trucks in such a way, that loading operation can be carried out in a safe and economic manner. Avoid swing angeles over 90°.

Maintenance and repair z

Preserve our environment. To prevent environmental pollution, pay careful attention to the method of disposing waste materials.

z

Always drain fluids from your machine into containers. Never drain fluids onto the ground or dump it into the sewage system rivers, the sea, or lakes.

z

Dispose of harmful material, such as oil, fuel, coolant, solvent, filters and batteries in accordance with environmental regulations and laws.

.

I-4

Version 2010/1

I.IV

EXPLANATION OF ABBREVATIONS

Abbre.

Definition

AC

Alternating Current

A/C

Air Condition

ACV

Anti-Cavitation Valve

API

American Petroleum Institute

BHA

Backhoe Attachment

°C

Degree Celsius

CCW

Counterclockwise

CW

Clockwise

CLS

Central Lubrication System

CO

Cut off function (main pump)

DC

Direct Current

FSA

Front Shovel Attachment

GET

Ground Engaging Tools

HP

High Pressure

LED

Light Emitting Diode

L.H.

Left Hand

MH801

VHMS monitor

MRV

Main Relief Valve

MTC

Master Turbo Controller

PTO

Power Take-Off (Pump Distributor Gear)

Qmax

Maximum pump delivery = maximum swash plate angle

Qmin

Minimum pump delivery = minimum swash plate angle

1/2 Qmax

1/2 pump delivery

R.H.

Right Hand

RPM

Revolutions Per Minute

SLS

Swing circle pinion Lubrication System

SRV

Secondary Relief Valve

VHMS

Vehicle Health Monitoring System

Version 2010/1

I-5

I.V

DIAGRAMS AND ILLUSTRATIONS IN THIS MANUAL

Wiring Diagrams & Hydraulic Diagrams z

During work or troubleshooting always make sure to use your Wiring Diagrams and Hydraulic Diagrams which are assigned to your machine.

z

Due to variable requirements in many respects, the samples of diagrams shown in this manual can not meet the actual state of each machine in every case.

Illustrations & technical drawings

I-6

z

The illustrations and technical drawings shown in this manual correspond to state of the technology at the time of press date.

z

Modifications of shown components are possible prior notice.

Version 2010/1

This page was left blank intentionally.

Version 2010/1

I-7

I-8

Version 2010/1

III. SPECIFICATIONS

Version 2010/1

III-1

III.I

LIFTING GEARS CAUTION

Heavy parts (25 kg or more) must be lifted with a hoist etc.

CAUTION If any part cannot be smoothly removed from the machine by hoisting, the following checks should be made: Check for removal of all bolts fastening the part to the relative parts. Check for existence of another part causing interference with the part to be removed.

WIRE ROPES Use adequate ropes depending on the weight of parts to be hoisted, referring to the table below:

z

Wire popes (Standard "Z" or "S" twist ropes without galvanizing) Rope diameter [mm]

10,0

11,2

12,5

14,0

16,0

18,0

20,0

22,4

30,0

40,0

50,0

60,0

Allowable load [tons]

1,0

1,4

1,6

2,2

2,8

3,6

4,4

5,6

10,0

18,0

28,0

40,0

CAUTION The allowable load value is estimated to be 1/6 or 1/7 of the breaking strength of the rope used.

z

Sling wire ropes from the middle portion of the hook. Slinging near the edge of the hook may cause the rope to slip off the hook during hoisting, and a serious accident can result. Hooks have maximum strength at the middle portion.

z

Do not sling a heavy load with one rope alone, but sling with two or more ropes symmetrically wound on to the load.

Fig. III-1 III-2

Version 2010/1

WARNING Slinging with one rope may cause turning of the load during hoisting, untwisting of the rope, or slipping of the rope from its original winding position on the load, which can result in a dangerous accident.

z

Do not sling a heavy load with ropes forming a wide hanging angle from the hook. When hoisting a load with two or more ropes, the force subjected to each rope will increase with the hanging angles. The table below shows the variation of allowable load (kg) where hoisting g is made with two ropes, each of which is allowed to sling up to 1000kg vertically, at various hanging angles. When two ropes sling a load vertically, up to 2000kg of total weight can be suspended. This weight becomes 1000kg when two ropes make a 120° hanging angle. On the other hand two ropes are subject to an excessive force as large as 4000kg if they sling a 2000kg load at a lifting angel of 150°.

Fig. III-2

Version 2010/1

III-3

III.II

SAFETY HINTS FOR SLING ACCESSORY WARNING

Always attend to local standards when using sling accessory.

z

Do not use rigid eye bolts from steel C 15 for lifting (e.g. ISO 580). These eye bolts may only be loaded vertically or with a maximum permissible angle of 45° to the ring.

z

Always use suitable swivel hoist rings according to local standards or Vario-Starpoint hoist rings recommended by Komatsu, see following table: Thread

Komatsu Part Number

Tightening Torque

M8

941 650 40

10 Nm

M10

941 651 40

10 Nm

M12

906 519 40

25 Nm

M16

906 780 40

60 Nm

M20

906 782 40

115 Nm

M24

906 783 40

190 Nm

M30

906 421 40

330 Nm

M36

906 233 40

590 Nm

DANGER Vario-Starpoint hoist rings are not suited for turning under load. After installing a Starpoint hoist ring disengage the star key. Adjust the ring plane in direction of pull before attaching any sling accessory.

DANGER Eye bolts or sling accessory which is not suitable can result in serious accidents.

z

Check that the wire rope, chains, and hooks are free from damage.

z

Always use lifting equipment which has ample capacity.Install the lifting equipment at the correct places.

z

Use a hoist or crane and operate slowly to prevent the component from hitting any other part. Do not work with any part still raised by the hoist or crane.

III-4

Version 2010/1

III.III STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUE CHART

Bolt diameter

Wrench size [mm]

Tightening torque [Nm] Bolt quality grades

metric regular

8.8

10.9

12.9

M 8

13

6

21

31

36

M 10

17

8

43

63

73

M 12

19

10

74

108

127

M 14

22

12

118

173

202

M 16

24

14

179

265

310

M 18

27

14

255

360

425

M 20

30

17

360

510

600

M 22

32

17

485

690

810

M 24

36

19

620

880

1030

M 27

41

19

920

1310

1530

M 30

46

22

1250

1770

2080

M 33

50

24

1690

2400

2800

M 36

55

27

2170

3100

3600

M 39

60

2800

4000

4700

M 42

65

3500

4950

5800

M 45

70

4350

6200

7200

M 48

75

5200

7500

8700

M 52

80

6700

9600

11200

M 56

85

8400

12000

14000

M 60

90

10400

14800

17400

M 64

95

12600

17900

20900

M 68

100

15200

21600

25500

32

35

41

46

z

(1 kgm = 9,806 Nm)

z

Insert all bolts lubricated with multi purpose grease MPG (Multi Purpose Grease) (same grease as used in the central lubrication system)

Version 2010/1

III-5

III.IV CONVERSION TABLE Millimeter - Inch & Kilogram - Pound Method of using the conversion table The Conversion Table in this section is provided to enable simple conversion of figures. For details of the method of using the Conversion Table, see the example given below. Example: Method of using the conversion table to convert from millimeters to inches. Convert 55 mm into inches: z

Locate the number 5 in the vertical column at the left side, take this as (A), then draw a horizontal line from (A).

z

Locate the number 5 in the row across the top, take this as (B), then draw a perpendicular line down from (B).

z

Take the point where the two lines cross as (C). This point (C) gives the value when converting from millimeters to inches. Therefore, 55 millimeters = 2.165 inches.

Convert 550 mm into inches. z

The number 550 does not appear in the table, so divide by 10 (move the decimal one place to the left) to convert it to 55 mm.

z

Carry out the same procedure as above to convert 55 mm to 2.165 inches.

z

The original value (550 mm) was divided by 10, so multiply 2.165 inches by 10 (move the decimal one place to the right) to return to the original value. This gives 550 mm = 21.65 inches.

III-6

Version 2010/1

Version 2010/1

III-7

Liter - U.S. Gallon & Liter - U.K. Gallon

III-8

Version 2010/1

Nm - ft.lb 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

0

0.74

1.47

2.21

2.95

3.69

4.42

5.16

5.90

6.63

10

7.37

8.11

8.84

9.58

10.32

11.06

11.79

12.53

13.27

14.00

20

14.74

15.48

16.21

16.95

17.69

18.43

19.16

19.90

20.64

21.37

30

22.11

22.85

23.58

24.32

25.06

25.80

26.53

27.27

28.01

28.74

40

29.48

30.22

30.95

31.69

32.43

33.17

33.90

34.64

35.38

36.11

50

36.85

37.59

38.32

39.06

39.80

40.54

41.27

42.01

42.75

43.48

60

44.22

44.96

45.69

46.43

47.17

47.91

48.64

49.38

50.12

50.85

70

51.59

52.33

53.06

53.08

54.54

55.28

56.01

56.75

57.49

58.22

80

58.96

59.07

60.43

61.17

61.91

62.65

63.38

64.12

64.86

65.59

90

66.33

67.07

67.80

68.54

69.28

70.02

70.75

71.49

72.23

72.96

100

73.70

74.44

75.17

75.91

76.65

77.39

78.12

78.86

79.60

80.33

110

81.07

81.81

82.54

83.28

84.02

84.76

85.49

86.23

86.97

87.70

120

88.44

89.18

89.91

90.65

91.39

92.13

92.86

93.60

94.34

95.07

130

95.81

96.55

97.28

98.02

98.76

99.50

100.23

100.97

101.71

102.44

140

103.18

103.92

104.65

105.39

106.13

106.87

107.60

108.34

109.08

109.81

150

110.55

111.29

112.02

112.76

113.50

114.24

114.97

115.71

116.45

117.18

160

117.92

118.66

119.39

120.13

120.87

121.61

122.34

123.08

123.82

124.55

170

125.29

126.03

126.76

127.50

128.24

128.98

129.71

130.45

131.19

131.92

180

132.66

133.40

134.13

134.87

135.61

136.35

137.08

137.82

138.56

139.29

190

140.03

140.77

141.50

142.24

142.98

143.72

144.45

145.19

145.93

146.66

200

147.40

148.14

148.87

149.61

150.35

151.09

151.82

152.56

153.30

154.03

1 Nm = 0.737 ft.lb

Version 2010/1

III-9

bar - PSI / PSI - bar

Conversion Table bar / PSI bar - PSI bar 1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200

PSI 14,5033 73 145 218 290 363 435 508 580 653 725 798 870 943 1015 1088 1160 1233 1305 1378 1450 1523 1595 1668 1740 1813 1885 1958 2030 2103 2175 2248 2321 2393 2466 2538 2611 2683 2756 2828 2901

PSI - bar bar 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 245 250 255 260 265 270 275 280 285 290 295 300 305 310 315 320 325 330 335 340 345 350 355 360 365 370 375 380 385 390 395 400

PSI 2973 3046 3118 3191 3263 3336 3408 3481 3553 3626 3698 3771 3843 3916 3988 4061 4133 4206 4278 4351 4424 4496 4569 4641 4714 4786 4859 4931 5004 5076 5149 5221 5294 5366 5439 5511 5584 5656 5729 5801

PSI 1 75 150 225 300 375 450 525 600 675 750 825 900 975 1050 1125 1200 1275 1350 1425 1500 1575 1650 1725 1800 1875 1950 2025 2100 2175 2250 2325 2400 2475 2550 2625 2700 2775 2850 2925 3000

bar 0,06895 5,17 10 16 21 26 31 36 41 47 52 57 62 67 72 78 83 88 93 98 103 109 114 119 124 129 134 140 145 150 155 160 165 171 176 181 186 191 197 202 207

PSI 3075 3150 3225 3300 3375 3450 3525 3600 3675 3750 3825 3900 3975 4050 4125 4200 4275 4350 4425 4500 4575 4650 4725 4800 4875 4950 5025 5100 5175 5250 5325 5400 5475 5550 5625 5700 5775 5850 5925 6000

bar 212 217 222 228 233 238 243 248 253 259 264 269 274 279 284 290 295 300 305 310 315 321 326 331 336 341 346 352 357 362 367 372 378 383 388 393 398 403 409 414

PSI bar

x

14,5033 = PSI

=

bar

14,5033

III-10

Version 2010/1

Basic values in Ohm according to IEC 751 / EN 60751 Conversion table - Ohm to Centigrade of PT100 sensors °C

-0

-1

-2

-3

-4

-5

-6

-7

-8

-9

-50

80.31

79.91

79.51

79.11

78.72

78.32

77.92

77.52

77.13

76.73

-40

84.27

83.88

83.48

83.08

82.69

82.29

81.89

81.50

81.10

80.70

-30

88.22

87.83

87.43

87.04

86.64

86.25

85.85

85.46

85.06

84.67

-20

92.16

91.77

91.37

90.98

90.59

90.19

89.80

89.40

89.01

88.62

-10

96.09

95.69

95.30

94.91

94.52

94.12

93.73

93.34

92.95

92.55

0

100.00

99.61

99.22

98.83

98.44

98.04

97.65

97.26

96.87

96.48

°C

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

100.00

100.39

100.78

101.17

101.56

101.95

102.34

102.73

103.12

103.51

10

103.90

104.29

104.68

105.07

105.46

105.85

106.24

106.63

107.02

107.40

20

107.79

108.18

108.57

108.96

109.35

109.73

110.12

110.51

110.90

111.28

30

111.67

112.06

112.45

112.83

113.22

113.61

113.99

114.38

114.77

115.15

40

115.54

115.93

116.31

116.70

117.08

117.47

117.85

118.24

118.62

119.01

50

119.40

119.78

120.16

120.55

120.93

121.32

121.70

122.09

122.47

122.86

60

123.24

123.62

124.01.

124.39

124.77

125.16

125.54

125.92

126.31

126.69

70

127.07

127.45

127.84

128.22

128.60

128.98

129.37

129.75

130.13

130.51

80

130.89

131.27

131.66

132.04

132.42

132.80

133.18

133.56

133.94

134.32

90

134.70

135.08

135.46

135.84

136.22

136.60

136.98

137.36

137.47

138.12

100

138.50

138.88

139.26

139.64

140.02

140.39

140.77

141.15

141.53

141.91

110

142.29

142.66

143.04

143.42

143.80

144.17

144.55

144.93

145.31

145.68

120

146.06

146.44

146.81

147.19

147.57

147.94

148.32

148.70

149.07

149.45

130

149.82

150.20

150.57

150.95

151.33

151.70

152.08

152.45

152.83

153.20

140

153.58

153.95

154.32

154.70

155.07

155.45

155.82

156.19

156.57

156.94

150

157.31

157.69

158.06

158.43

158.81

159.18

159.55

159.93

160.30

160.67

Version 2010/1

III-11

Temperature Fahrenheit – Centigrade Conversion; a simple way to convert a Fahrenheit temperature reading into a Centigrade temperature reading or vise versa is to enter the accompanying table in the center or boldface column of figures. These figures refer to the temperature in either degrees Fahrenheit or Centigrade . If it is desired to convert from degrees Fahrenheit to Centigrade, consider the center column as a table of Fahrenheit temperatures and read the corresponding Centigrade temperature in the column at the left. If it is desired to convert from degrees Centigrade to Fahrenheit, consider the center column as a table of Centigrade values, and read the corresponding Fahrenheit temperature on the right.

III-12

Version 2010/1

III.V BLIND PLUGS Dummy plates for SAE–flanges

Fig. III-3

Forms / types of dummy plates for SAE–flanges

Up to 3000 PSI (207 bar)

SAE size

Form / type according to Fig. III-3

Part Number

DN (Diameter Nominal) (hose / pipe)

1/2"

A

506 521 98

12

3/4"

A

506 583 98

20

1 1/4"

A

506 584 98

32

1 1/2"

A

506 522 98

40

2"

A

506 523 98

50

2 1/2"

A

506 585 98

65

3"

A

512 570 98

80

3/4"

B

516 826 98

20

1 1/4

B

517 479 98

32

1 1/2"

B

506 528 98

40

2"

B

506 529 98

50

2 1/2"

B

506 530 98

65

3"

B

512 571 98

80

Version 2010/1

III-13

Up to 6000 PSI (414 bar)

III-14

SAE size

Form / type according to Fig. III-3

Part Number

DN (Diameter Nominal) (hose / pipe)

3/4"

A

506 580 98

20

1"

A

506 519 98

25

1 1/4"

A

506 520 98

32

1 1/2"

A

506 581 98

40

2"

A

506 582 98

50

1"

B

506 524 98

25

1 1/4"

B

506 525 98

32

1 1/2"

B

506 526 98

40

2"

B

506 527 98

50

1 1/4"

C

516 499 98

32

1 1/2"

C

509 375 98

40

2"

C

509 376 98

50

Version 2010/1

III.VI CLASSIFICATION OF THREADS TO THE NOMINAL WIDTH Heavy class (up to 6000 PSI / 414 bar)

Light class (up to 3000 PSI / 207 bar)

Size

Ra

DN (nominal width)

Ra

DN (nominal width)

M 12 x 1.5

-

-

6

5

M 14 x 1.5

-

-

8

6

M 16 x 1.5

8

5

10

8

M 18 x 1.5

10

6

12

10

M 20 x 1.5

12

8

-

-

M 22 x 1.5

14

10

15

12

M 24 x 1.5

16

12

-

-

M 26 x 1.5

-

-

18

16

M 30 x 1.5

-

-

-

-

M 30 x 2

20

16

22

20

M 36 x 2

25

20

28

25

M 38 x 1.5

-

-

-

-

M 42 x 2

30

25

-

-

M 45 x 1.5

-

-

-

-

M 45 x 2

-

-

35

32

M 52 x 1.5

-

-

-

-

M 52 x 2

38

32

42

40

M 65 x 2

-

-

-

-

Method of using the above table to find appropriate plugs and fittings according to Table III.VII on page 16. EXAMPLE: To cover up a hose / tube with a diameter of 25 mm, for a pressure up to 3000 PSI perform the following steps: z

Locate the 25 in the column "DN" in the category "up to 3000 PSI".

z

Check the digit in the column "Ra" next to DN 25 in the same row and category. For this example the proper plug and fitting is BUZ 28-L and ROV 28-L, refer to Table III.VII on page 16.

NOTE: The column "Size" indicates the thread-size for the ROV-fittings.

Version 2010/1

III-15

III.VII PLUGS AND FITTINGS ACCORDING TO ISO 8434-1 / DIN 2353 Up to 3000 PSI / 207 bar BUZ (plugs)

Part Number

ROV (fittings)

Part Number

8-L

501 692 98

8-L

518 113 98

10-L

371 852 99

10-PL

513 789 98

12-L

371 854 99

12-PL

513 547 98

15-L

371 855 99

15-PL

507 051 98

18-L

371 856 99

18-PL

513 787 98

22-L

371 857 99

22-PL

513 788 98

28-L

371 858 99

28-PL

509 377 98

35-L

371 859 99

35-PL

516 770 98

42-L

371 860 99

42-PL

513 790 98

Up to 6000 PSI / 414 bar

III-16

BUZ (plugs)

Part Number

ROV (fittings)

Part Number

-

-

8-PS

515 921 98

-

-

10-PS

507 023 98

-

-

12-PS

507 022 98

16-S

371 866 99

-

-

20-S

371 853 99

20-PS

512 005 98

25-S

371 867 99

25-PS

508 033 98

30-S

371 868 99

30-PS

507 021 98

38-S

371 869 99

38-PS

507 020 98

Version 2010/1

This page was left blank intentionally.

Version 2010/1

III-17

III-18

Version 2010/1

MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS

1. MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS

Version 2010/1

1-1

General Layout

1.1

GENERAL LAYOUT

Fig. 1-1

General layout

1-2

MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS

Version 2010/1

MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS

General Layout

Legend for Fig. 1-1: (1)

Superstructure

(2)

Undercarriage

(3)

Front shovel attachment (FSA)

(4)

Backhoe attachment (BHA)

Version 2010/1

1-3

Superstructure

1.2

SUPERSTRUCTURE

Fig. 1-2

Superstructure

1-4

MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS

Version 2010/1

MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS

Superstructure

Legend for Fig. 1-2: (1)

Hydraulically operated access ladder

(2)

Battery main switches (batteries G1-G4)

(2a)

Battery main switches (batteries G8-G9)

(3)

Lift cylinder for access ladder

(4)

Batteries, location below the catwalk (batteries G1-G4)

(5)

Control switch for access ladder

(6)

Emergency engine shut down switch

(7)

Fuel tank

(8)

Cab base, contains the electronic components of the VHMS system, the electrical switch boards, and the batteries G8 & G9

(9)

Side window of operator’s cab

(10)

Swing circle guard

(11)

Emergency escape ladder

(12)

Engine air cleaners

(13)

Exhaust mufflers

(14)

Air duct

(15)

Extinguishing agent tank assemblies, only on machines equipped with a fire detection, actuation and suppression system.

(16)

Counterweight

(17)

Main control valves & remote control valves with high pressure in-line filters

(18)

Hydraulic oil reservoir

(19)

Return oil filters and leak oil filter

(20)

Hydraulic oil cooler

(21)

Swing machinery

(22)

Distributor manifold

(23)

Swing circle pinion Lubrication System (SLS)

(24)

Central Lubrication System (CLS)

(25)

Node box, location 40

(26)

Node box, location 51

(27)

Node box, location 56

Version 2010/1

1-5

Machine House

1.3

MACHINE HOUSE

Fig. 1-3

Machine house

1-6

MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS

Version 2010/1

MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS

Machine House

Legend for Fig. 1-3: (1)

Engine air cleaners

(2)

Exhaust air duct

(3)

Exhaust muffler housing

(4)

Rain cap for exhaust muffler

(5)

Expansion tank for radiator

(6)

Coolant radiator

(7)

Hydraulic motor for radiator fan drive

(8)

Oil tank for engine oil reserve system

(9)

Engine oil filler tube

(10)

Engine oil eliminator filter

(11)

Diesel engine

(12)

Flexible coupling, oil-filled (Geislinger)

(13)

Suction oil manifold

(14)

Hydraulic pump for the hydraulic oil cooler fan drive

(15)

Hydraulic pump for the coolant radiator fan drive

(16)

Gear pumps, installed at the drive through shaft of the main hydraulic pumps

(17)

Main hydraulic pumps

(18)

Pump distributor gear (PTO)

(19)

Valve cartridge block

(20)

Node box, location 40

Version 2010/1

1-7

Hydraulic Oil tank

1.4

HYDRAULIC OIL TANK

Fig. 1-4

Hydraulic oil tank

1-8

MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS

Version 2010/1

MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS

Hydraulic Oil tank

Legend for Fig.1-4: (1)

Breather filter

(2)

Back pressure valve, temperature controlled

(3)

Drain coupling of the hydraulic oil tank

(4)

Return oil filters

(5)

Leak oil filter

(6)

Main shut-off valve (gate valve) with compensator

(7)

Return oil collector pipe

(8)

Drain coupling of the return oil collector pipe

Version 2010/1

1-9

Hydraulic Oil Cooler

1.5

HYDRAULIC OIL COOLER

Fig. 1-5

Hydraulic oil cooler

1-10

MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS

Version 2010/1

MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS

Hydraulic Oil Cooler

Legend for Fig. 1-5: (1)

Cooler frame with swing out facility

(2)

Hydraulic motor of upper fan

(3)

Upper fan

(4)

Fan guard

(5)

Outer part of the upper radiator set

(6)

Inner part of the upper radiator set

(7)

Hydraulic motor of lower fan

(8)

Lower fan

(9)

Fan guard

(10)

Outer part of the lower radiator set

(11)

Inner part of the lower radiator

(12)

Swing out doors

(13)

Lock bars to secure the swing out doors in open position

Version 2010/1

1-11

Fuel Tank

MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS

1.6

FUEL TANK

Fig. 1-6

Fuel tank

1-12

Version 2010/1

MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS

Fuel Tank

Legend for Fig. 1-6 : (1)

Fuel tank

(2)

Fuel tank breather valve

(3)

Main shut-off cock valve

(4)

Drain coupling with protection cap

(5)

Shut-off cock valve for fuel pressure transducer

(6)

Fuel pressure transducer (31B063)

(7)

Fuel shut-off solenoid (31Q599)

Version 2010/1

1-13

Counterweight

1.7

COUNTERWEIGHT

Fig. 1-7

Counterweight

1-14

MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS

Version 2010/1

MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS

Counterweight

Legend for Fig. 1-7: (1)

Counterweight

(2)

Mounting bolts

(3)

Instruction label

(4)

Lifting points for horizontal transport

(5)

Lifting points for vertical transport

(6)

Lifting points for raising up the counterweight

NOTE: For information about bolt connections see OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL, section Maintenance.

Version 2010/1

1-15

Cab Support

1.8

CAB SUPPORT

Fig. 1-8

Cab support

1-16

MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS

Version 2010/1

MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS

Cab Support

Legend for Fig. 1-8: (1)

Cab support (location of the electrical switch board “X2”)

(2)

Mounting bolts

(3)

Mounting bolts

(4)

Door

(5)

Door seal

(6)

Door handle (adjustable)

NOTE: For information about bolt connections see OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL, section Maintenance.

Version 2010/1

1-17

Operator’s Cab

1.9

OPERATOR’S CAB

Fig. 1-9

Operator’s cab

1-18

MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS

Version 2010/1

MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS

Operator’s Cab

Legend for Fig. 1-9: (1)

VHMS monitor (20P047)

(2)

Switch panel

(3)

Operator’s seat

(4)

Lock lever (20S105)

(20S019)

Control lever

(20S020)

Control lever

(20S021a)

Control pedal: left track

(20S021b)

Control pedal: right track

(20S022)

Control pedal: swing brake

(20S023)

Control pedal: clam closing

(20S024)

Control pedal: clam opening

Version 2010/1

1-19

Control Blocks

MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS

1.10 CONTROL BLOCKS

Fig. 1-10 Control blocks 1-20

Version 2010/1

MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS

Control Blocks

Legend for Fig. 1-10: (1)

Control block carrier

(2)

Remote control valves

(3)

Main control blocks

(4)

High pressure filter

Version 2010/1

1-21

Swing machinery

MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS

1.11 SWING MACHINERY 1.11.1 SWING MACHINERY L&S

Fig. 1-11 Swing machinery (L&S) 1-22

Version 2010/1

MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS

Swing machinery

Legend for Fig. 1-11: (1)

Oil dip stick (gearbox)

(2)

Oil filler plug (gearbox)

(3)

Breather filter (gearbox)

(4)

Oil dip stick (motor adapter housing)

(5)

Breather filter (motor adapter housing)

(6)

Oil drain plug (motor adapter housing)

(7)

Drain plug (gearbox)

(8)

Pinion

(60.1 + 60.2)

Swing motors

(61.1 + 61.2)

Swing brake valve blocks

(48.1 + 48.2)

Swing gearbox (L&S) with integrated spring loaded multi disc brakes

Version 2010/1

1-23

Swing machinery

MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS

1.11.2 SWING MACHINERY SIEBENHAAR

Fig. 1-12 Swing machinery (Siebenhaar)

1-24

Version 2010/1

MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS

Swing machinery

Legend for Fig. 1-12: (1)

Swing gearbox SIEBENHAAR

(2)

Oil drain coupling

(3)

Compensator oil tank for swing machinery

(4)

Brake housing

(5)

Oil level gauge, motor adaper housing

(6)

Oil level gauge and oil drain plug, brake housing

(7)

Oil drain plug and breather filter, motor adapter housing

(8)

Breather filter, brake housing

(9)

Dipstick, swing machinery housing

(10)

Breather filter, oil tank

(48.1 + 48.2)

Multi-disc slew parking brake

(60.1 + 60.2)

Swing motor

(61.1 + 61.2)

Hydraulic swing brake

Version 2010/1

1-25

Undercarriage

MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS

1.12 UNDERCARRIAGE

Fig. 1-13 Undercarriage

1-26

Version 2010/1

MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS

Undercarriage

Legend for Fig. 1-13: (1)

Undercarriage center body

(2)

Crawler carrier R.H.-side

(3)

Crawler carrier L.H.-side

(4)

Screws, connecting center body and crawler carriers

(5)

Crawler tracks

(6)

Rotary joint

(7)

Travel brake valves

(8)

Travel motors

(9)

Parking brakes, spring loaded disk type brakes

(10)

Travel gearbox

(11)

Sprocket

(12)

Track rollers

(13)

Carrier rollers

(14)

Guide wheel (idler)

(15)

Track tensioning cylinder

Version 2010/1

1-27

Backhoe Attachment (BHA)

MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS

1.13 BACKHOE ATTACHMENT (BHA)

Fig. 1-14 Backhoe attachment (BHA)

1-28

Version 2010/1

MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS

Backhoe Attachment (BHA)

Legend for Fig. 1-14: (1)

Boom

(2)

Boom cylinders

(3)

Stick

(4)

Stick cylinders

(5)

Bucket

(6)

Bucket cylinders

(7)

Steering

(8)

Rod

Version 2010/1

1-29

Front Shovel Attachment (FSA)

MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS

1.14 FRONT SHOVEL ATTACHMENT (FSA)

Fig. 1-15 Front shovel attachment (FSA)

1-30

Version 2010/1

MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS

Front Shovel Attachment (FSA)

Legend for Fig. 1-15: (1)

Boom

(2)

Boom cylinders

(3)

Stick

(4)

Stick cylinders

(5)

Bucket backwall

(6)

Bucket cylinders

(7)

Clam

(8)

Clam cylinders

Version 2010/1

1-31

Front Shovel Attachment (FSA)

1-32

MAIN ASSEMBLY GROUPS

Version 2010/1

DRIVE

2. DRIVE

Version 2010/1

2-1

Prime Drive Assembly

2.1

PRIME DRIVE ASSEMBLY

Fig. 2-1

Prime drive assembly

2-2

DRIVE

Version 2010/1

DRIVE

Prime Drive Assembly

Legend for Fig. 2-1: (1)

Engine, Komatsu SDA16V160

(2)

Front damper

(3)

Coupling adapter flange

(4)

Coupling (Geislinger)

(5)

Pump distributor gear (PTO)

(6)

Power frame

General description The drive unit consists of the Komatsu engine SDA16V160, the fexible coupling, the front damper, and the PTO gear. The drive unit is bolted to the power frame with engine mounts and PTO mounts. Two damping elements, which complement each other, are installed at the prime drive in order to eliminate exessive rotation torques at the crankshaft of the engine (Fig. 2-1, Pos. 1). The damping elements are the front damper (Fig. 2-1, Pos. 3) at the front and rear side of the engine as well as the flexible coupling (Fig. 2-1, Pos. 4) which is connected to the PTO (Fig. 2-1, Pos. 5). It is very important that both damping elements are working properly. In case of any damage or wear at either the front damper or at the flexible coupling also always check the damping element at the opposite side of the engine for proper function as well. For further information about the Geislinger coupling refer to section 2.3 GEISLINGER COUPLING.

Version 2010/1

2-3

Engine and PTO Mounts

2.2

ENGINE AND PTO MOUNTS

Fig. 2-2

Engine and PTO mounts

2-4

DRIVE

Version 2010/1

DRIVE

Engine and PTO Mounts

Legend for Fig. 2-2: Quantity

Size

Grade

WS*

Torque

(1)

Flexible bearing

14

(2)

Bolt with self-locking nut

4 per mount

M10x35

8.8

17

43

(3)

Tie bolt

4

M24x400

10.9

36

handtight

(4)

Rubber-bounded metal bar

4

(5)

Self locking nut

4

M24

8

36

handtight

(6)

Bolt with self locking nut

28

M16x80

10.9

24

265

(7)

Cup springs

7 per bolt

(8)

Stop bolt

2

M36x250

10.9

55

-

(9)

Nut

2

M36

10

55

-

(10)

Bolt

10

M24x200

10.9

36

880

(11)

Bolt

16

M20x120

10.9

30

510

(12)

Resilient sleeve

16

(13)

Bolt

4

M30x200

10.9

46

1770

(14)

Resilient sleeve

4 * Wrench Size

2.2.1

ENGINE MOUNTS

The flexible mounts are installed to absorb the vibrations and the torsional forces. They carry the total weight of the engine and the pump distributor gear with all hydraulic pumps. For this reason, all connections must be checked frequently (every 3000 hs) according to PARTS & SERVIVE NEWS "AH01521b" (latest edition), or after the engine, the coupling, or the PTO has been replaced. In the case of wear or damage of any metal rubber guide (Fig. 2-2, Pos. 1), all metal rubber guides and their fastening bolts (Fig. 2-2, Pos. 2) including nuts must be replaced. Also inspect the metal-rubber-bar (Fig. 2-2, Pos. 4) for wear or damage and replace if necessary. The bolt (Fig. 2-2, Pos. 3) should not have any axial play. If necessary, re-tighten the nut (Fig. 2-2, Pos. 5) until the rubber is squeezed slightly out of the rubber bar (Fig. 2-2, Pos. 4).

Version 2010/1

2-5

Engine and PTO Mounts

2.2.2

DRIVE

TORQUE SUPPORT

To absorb the torque force, the front engine support is additionally supported by a cup spring package. Check the cup springs (Fig. 2-2, Pos. 7) of both supports for fatigue or damage regularly and replace them if necessary. Turn the bolt (Fig. 2-2, Pos. 8) down until it slightly pre-stresses the cup spring and secure it with the lock nut. (Distance between engine torque support and bolt head "B" = 29 mm)

2-6

Version 2010/1

Engine and PTO Mounts

DRIVE

This page was left blank intentionally.

2-7

Version 2010/1

Geislinger Coupling

2.3

GEISLINGER COUPLING

Fig. 2-3

Geislinger coupling

2-8

DRIVE

Version 2010/1

DRIVE

Geislinger Coupling

Legend for Fig. 2-3: (1)

Coupling assembly

(2)

Input drive flange

(3)

Leaf spring assembly

(4)

Output drive flange

(5)

Dip stick

(6)

Bleeder plug

(7)

O-rings

(8)

Spacer

(E)

Engine input flange

(G)

Gearbox output flange

Description of the oil-filled GEISLINGER coupling The combination of the high elasticity of the leaf springs together with viscous damping by oil displacement ensures that the GEISLINGER-COUPLING removes major critical speeds outside the engine speed range and dampens minor torsional vibrations effectively. The widest engine speed range free of vibration periods and dangerous resonance is thus obtained. Furthermore, the employment of this coupling with its highly dampening characteristics generally results in lower stress in all engine driving shafts and gears as well as in the crankshaft, permitting further power development on standard components. In any similar application, a simple vibration damper and/or a pure flexible coupling would not confer the same advantages. The springs (Fig. 2-3, Pos. 3) together with the inner driving and outer driven member, form the chambers A and B (Fig. 2-3, Pos. A and B), which are filled with oil. If the outer member is displaced in relation to the inner member, the deflection of the leaf springs displaces oil from one chamber to the next. By this action the relative movements of the two members of the coupling are braked and the vibrations are dampened. The spacer (Fig. 2-3, Pos. 8) limits the movement of the leaf springs.

Version 2010/1

2-9

Fan Drive and Radiator Assembly

2.4

FAN DRIVE AND RADIATOR ASSEMBLY

Fig. 2-4

Fan drive and radiator assembly

2-10

DRIVE

Version 2010/1

DRIVE

Fan Drive and Radiator Assembly

Legend for Fig. 2-4: (1)

Radiator

(2)

Fan motor (axial piston motor)

(3)

Intake air fan

(4)

Bearing group carrier

(5)

Ball bearings

(6)

Breather filter

(7)

Oil level plug

(8)

Check valve (anti-cavitation valve)

NOTE: For service intervals and procedures refer to the OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL of the corresponding machine. The fan direction is counterclockwise viewed from the engine to the radiator. The fan aspirates air through the cooler into the engine house => The air flows from the outside to inside.

Version 2010/1

2-11

Fan Drive and Radiator Assembly

Fig. 2-5

2-12

DRIVE

Fan drive and radiator assembl

Version 2010/1

DRIVE

Fan Drive and Radiator Assembly

Legend for Fig. 2-5: (1)

Radiator

(2)

Intake air fan

(5.2)

Axial piston pump (fixed displacement pump, with variable setting)

(23)

Fan motor (axial piston motor)

(31.2)

Pressure relief valve - engine radiator fan drive

(34.2)

Pressure filter

(41)

Hydraulic oil tank

(52)

Check valve – (anti cavitation valve for fan drive motor)

(57K636-1)

Proportional solenoid valve - Engine radiator fan speed (infinitely variable)

(L)

Leak oil tank

(P)

Pressure to motor

(R)

Return oil to tank

Function description From the pump (Fig. 2-5, Pos. 5.2) the oil flows through the filter (Fig. 2-5, Pos. 34.2) to the fan motor (Fig. 2-5, Pos. 23) and then back to the oil tank. The check valve (Fig. 2-5, Pos. 52) acts as an anti-cavitation valve and is installed, because the fan motor drive is stopped by a cutt-off of the pressure and the fan keeps on running for a short period due to its own torque. The hydraulic circuit "Fan drive" is secured by the pilot controlled pressure relief valve (Fig. 2-5, Pos. 31.2). This valve works together with the proportional solenoid valve (Fig. 2-5, Pos. 57K636-1). The proportional solenoid valve (Fig. 2-5, Pos. 57K636-1) operates dependent on the engine coolant temperature. The ECM (Electronic Control Module) passes the engine coolant temperature on to the MTC controller, which regulates the fan speed via proportional solenoid valve (Fig. 2-5, Pos. 57K636-1) by sending variable current signals. With a low current signal to the proportional solenoid the fans are running with the max. set-speed. With a high current signal to the proportional solenoid the fans are running with a very low speed.

Version 2010/1

2-13

Fan Drive and Radiator Assembly

2.4.1

RADIATOR FAN DRIVE SPEED ADJUSTMENT

Fig. 2-6

Radiator fan drive speed adjustment

2-14

DRIVE

Version 2010/1

DRIVE

Fan Drive and Radiator Assembly

Legend for Fig. 2-6: (1)

Dust cap

(2)

Lock nut

(3)

Set screw

(5.2)

Axial piston pump (fixed displacement pump, with variable setting)

(6)

Torque adjustment bolt

(6.1)

Lock nut

(7)

Qmax stop bolt

(7.1)

Lock nut

(10)

Positioning pin (mover)

(31.2)

Pressure relief valve - engine radiator fan drive

(57K636-1)

Proportional solenoid valve - engine radiator fan speed

(L1)

Measurement of torque adjustment bolt

(L2)

Measurement of Qmax stop bolt

(M7)

Pressure check point - engine radiator fan drive operating pressure

Basic Adjustment NOTE: Basic adjustment has to be carried out whenever one of the following components has been replaced: z

pump

z

relief valve

z

hydraulic motor

1. Reduce the output flow of pump (Fig. 2-6, Pos. 5.2) by adjusting the minimum possible swivel angle, to avoid over speeding the fan: To do this, loosen both lock nuts (Fig. 2-6, Pos. 6.1+7.1) and turn out bolt (Fig. 2-6, Pos. 6) and turn in bolt (Fig. 2-6, Pos. 7) the same length. This is necessary to avoid a loose positioning pin (Fig. 2-6, Pos. 10), resulting in oscillating of the cylinder barrel. Tighten the lock nuts. 2. Remove the protection cap (Fig. 2-6, Pos. 1) from the relief valve (Fig. 2-6, Pos. 31.2), loosen the lock nut (Fig. 2-6, Pos. 2) and turn the set screw (Fig. 2-6, Pos. 3) fully clockwise and then half turn counterclockwise. 3. Isolate the function of the proportional solenoid valve (Fig. 2-6, Pos. 57K636-1), by disconnecting the plug connector, to ensure that the full flow of the pump (Fig. 2-6, Pos. 5.2) will be delivered to the fan motor. 4. Connect a pressure gauge to the check point (Fig. 2-6, Pos. M7). 5. Start the engine and let it run at high idle. 6. Check the fan speed with a non-contact rev counter, required fan speed: 1200 ± 50 rpm

WARNING Be careful not to get caught in the fan or other rotating parts.

Version 2010/1

2-15

Fan Drive and Radiator Assembly

DRIVE

7. If the speed can not be raised by increasing the pressure then increase the output flow of the pump (Fig. 2-6, Pos. 5.2). If necessary increase the output flow of the pump (Fig. 2-6, Pos. 5.2), by adjusting the swivel angle, until the fan speed will be 20 rpm higher than required: To do this, loosen both lock nuts (Fig. 2-6, Pos. 6.1 + 7.1), turn in the bolt (Fig. 2-6, Pos. 6), and turn out the bolt (Fig. 2-6, Pos. 7) the same length. This is necessary to avoid a loose positioning pin (Fig. 2-6, Pos. 10), resulting in oscillating of the cylinder barrel. Tighten the lock nuts (Fig. 2-6, Pos. 6.1 + 7.1).

WARNING Do not exceed the maximum permissible operating pressure of max 230 bar.

NOTE: Note down the lengths (Fig. 2-6, Pos. L1) and (Fig. 2-6, Pos. L2) as reference measurements. 8. Loosen the lock nut (Fig. 2-6, Pos. 2) of the relief valve (Fig. 2-6, Pos. 31.2), and decrease the pressure with the set screw (Fig. 2-6, Pos. 3) until the correct fan speed is obtained. 9. Tighten the lock nut (Fig. 2-6, Pos. 2) and fix the protection cap (Fig. 2-6, Pos. 3). 10. Activate the function of the proportional solenoid valve (Fig. 2-6, Pos. 57K636-1), by connecting the connector (fan speed is controlled in relation to the engine temperature). 11. Disconnect the pressure gauge from the check point (Fig. 2-6, Pos. M7). Fan speed check If the fan speed is out of the adjustment range, first increase or decrease the pressure at the relief valve (Fig. 2-6, Pos. 31.2), in order to change the speed.

2-16

Version 2010/1

DRIVE

Fan Drive and Radiator Assembly

This page was left blank intentionally.

Version 2010/1

2-17

Pump Distributor Gearbox (PTO)

2.5

PUMP DISTRIBUTOR GEARBOX (PTO)

Fig. 2-7

Pump distributor gearbox (PTO)

2-18

DRIVE

Version 2010/1

DRIVE

Pump Distributor Gearbox (PTO)

Legend for Fig. 2-7: (1)

Oil level dip stick

(2)

Oil filler plug

(3)

Breather filter

(4)

Oil collector reservoir for auxiliary pump drive shaft housing

(5)

Breather filter with oil level dip stick

(6)

Main pump drive shaft housings

(7)

Oil level plug of main pump drive shaft housing

(8)

Oil filler plug with breather pipe of main pump drive shaft housing

(9)

Oil drain plug of main pump drive shaft housing

(10)

Oil drain plug of PTO gear

(11)

Flange for heater studs

(12)

Mounting bore for sensor "Trouble totally loss gear oil" (option)

(13)

Gear oil temperatur sensor mounting bore

(14)

Suction line connection for gear oil cooling

(15)

Return line connection from gear oil cooler

(16)

Return line connection from cooling system relief valve

(D)

Drive flange

(M)

Power take off for main pumps

(R)

Power take-off for engine radiator fan drive pump

(C)

Power take-off for hydraulic oil cooler fan drive pump

Description The pump distribution gear (PTO gear) is a spur gear design and driven by a Diesel engine. The PTO gear runs in anti-friction bearings and it has been provided with a splash lubrication system. The oil supply of the bearings and tooth contacts takes place by an injection. The gearwheels are of case-hardened steel. The hydraulic pumps are directly attached to the gearbox. O-rings included in the supply enable the unit to be reliably sealed statically. The gearbox housing is a one-piece design and made of grey cast iron. The gearbox has been provided with connections for a separate cooling system or, as an option, a heating system.

Version 2010/1

2-19

Pump Distributor Gearbox (PTO)

2.5.1

PUMP DRIVE SHAFT HOUSING

Fig. 2-8

Pump drive shaft housing

2-20

DRIVE

Version 2010/1

DRIVE

Pump Distributor Gearbox (PTO)

Legend for Fig. 2-8: (1)

Oil filler plug with breather pipe of main pump drive shaft housing

(2)

Oil collector reservoir for auxiliary pump drive shaft housing

(M)

Configuration, main pump drives

(A)

Configuration, auxiliary pump drives

The gear oil in the drive shaft housings is different to the gear oil in the pump distributor gear. There are two reasons for to have seperate housings: 1. To lubricate the multi-spline connections in order to prevent wear and corrosion. 2. It makes it easier to determine a seal ring leak at one of the drive shaft connections.

Function description z

(Fig. 2-8, Pos. M): If the oil level increases, the oil drops out of the breather pipe (Fig. 2-8, Pos. 1). If this oil is gear oil, it indicates a possible leak at the gearbox side. If the oil is a mixture of gear oil and hydraulic oil, it shows a possible leak at the pump side. If during an oil level check a loss of oil is found, the cause may be worn or defective radial seal rings.

z

(Fig. 2-8, Pos. A): The oil is filled in via the oil collector reservoir (Fig. 2-8, Pos. 2). All auxiliary drive shaft housings are connected to the reservoir by pipes. The reservoir is filled approx. one half with oil. If the oil level in the reservoir increases due to leakage, the oil drops out from the breather filter (with oil level gauge) on top of the reservoir. In this case a check has to be done, to find out which one of the drive shafts seals is damaged. It can be done by disconnecting the pipe to the reservoir temporarily. Disconnect the pipe at the drive shaft housing, plug the pipe and leave the union open. Start the motor or engine and run it at high idle. After a while monitor the open drive shaft housings. The housing with continuous oil leak has a pump seal defect. Otherwise check all auxiliary drives one after the other.

Version 2010/1

2-21

Pump Distributor Gearbox (PTO)

2.5.2

PTO LUBRICATION AND COOLING

Fig. 2-9

PTO Lubrication and cooling

2-22

DRIVE

Version 2010/1

DRIVE

Pump Distributor Gearbox (PTO)

Legend for Fig. 2-9: (1)

Line to the cooler (hot oil)

(2)

Return line from the cooler (cooled oil)

(3)

Return line from the valve (cooler by-pass)

(4)

Control line (x)

(5)

Leak oil line (y)

(P)

Spray nozzle port

(8.2)

Gear pump - PTO gearbox lubrication

36

Pressure filter - PTO gearbox lubrication

(57B027-1)

Filter clogging sensor (5 bar)

(29)

Pressure relief valve (10 bar)

(M3)

Pressure check point

(57B017-1)

Pressure switch (0.5 bar)

(51.1 & 51.2)

Oil cooler, part of the hydraulic oil cooler

(57B049-1)

Temperature sensor

(M34)

Pressure check point

(57K553-1)

Solenoid valve (by-pass control)

Function description An external gear pump (Fig. 2-9, Pos. 8.2) feeds gear oil from the gearbox sump and pumps it through the oil coolers (Fig. 2-9, Pos. 51.1 & 51.2) back to the gearbox. The lubrication and cooling circuit is protected by a filter (Fig. 2-9, Pos. 36) and a pressure relief valve (Fig. 2-9, Pos. 29). The gear oil coolers (Fig. 2-9, Pos. 51.1 & 51.2) are small parts of the hydraulic oil cooler elements, thus the gear oil is getting cooled by the same air stream as the hydraulic oil. From the coolers the oil flows to the spray nozzle port (Fig. 2-9, Pos. P) of the gearbox via return line (Fig. 2-9, Pos. 2). The spray nozzle insures proper and adequate distribution of the oil in order to lubricate and cool down the gears and bearings. The circuit is monitored by the pressure switch (Fig. 2-9, Pos. 57B017-1). If the lube oil pressure is too low ( low volume through the coolers

z

High temperature => high volume through the coolers

NOTE: For further information about the function principle, refer to section 4.2 on page 4-4. For further information about adjustment, refer to section 4.3 on page 4-6.

Version 2010/1

3-11

Transfer Pump for hydraulic oil

3.6

TRANSFER PUMP FOR HYDRAULIC OIL

Fig. 3-8

Transfer pump for hydraulic oil

3-12

HYDRAULIC OIL TANK

Version 2010/1

HYDRAULIC OIL TANK

Transfer Pump for hydraulic oil

REMARK The illustration shows the transfer pump arrangement viewed from the center of the platform. Legend for Fig. 3-8 1

Cock for the suction oil tank (11)

2

Cock for the collector pipe (13)

3

Cock for the return oil collector pipe (12)

4

Electric motor of the transfer pump (40G018)

5

Transfer pump (40G018)

6

Operating switch (40S035) for the transfer pump (5)

7

Suction line to the suction oil manifold (11)

8

Suction line to the collector pipe (13)

9

Suction line to the return oil manifold (12)

10

Hand wheel of the main shut-off gate valve

11

Suction oil manifold

12

Return oil manifold

13

Collector pipe

14

Back pressure valve

General description 1. Transfusing oil from the suction manifold into the main hydraulic oil tank. This is required for the evacuation of the suction oil manifold when replacing the hydraulic oil. Before servicing the main hydraulic pumps, it is recommended to empty the suction oil manifold partially. 2. Transfusing oil from the return oil manifold and from the collector pipe into the main hydraulic oil tank. This is required when replacing the hydraulic oil and before servicing the high-pressure filters, the main control valves, or the hydraulic oil cooler (oil return system). NOTE: For the operating instructions of the transfer pump refer to the OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL.

Version 2010/1

3-13

Return and Leak Oil Filter

3.7

RETURN AND LEAK OIL FILTER

Fig. 3-9

Return and leak oil filter

3-14

HYDRAULIC OIL TANK

Version 2010/1

HYDRAULIC OIL TANK

Return and Leak Oil Filter

Legend for Fig. 3-9: (1)

Filter cover retainer

(2)

Filter cover with O-ring

(3)

Pre-tensioning spring

(4)

Retainer

(5)

Filter assembly

(6)

Filter pot with machined cover

(7)

Main filter element, 10 micron absolute for return oil 3 micron absolute for leak oil

(8)

Safety filter element (200 micron strainer), same for return and leak oil

(9)

Bypass valve, 2.3 bar

(9.1)

Valve cone

(9.2)

Valve spring

(9.3)

O-ring

(10)

Profile gasket

(11)

Seal ring

(12)

Self locking nut

(13)

Self locking nut

(A)

Filter chamber

Function The return oil flows into the filter chamber (Fig. 3-9, Pos. A) of the hydraulic oil tank (the drawing is showing a section of it only). The chamber is split into two sections; one section with 4 filter elements for the return oil (10 micron) and another section with one filter element for the leak oil (3 micron). But the structure of the five filter assemblies is basically the same. The hydraulic oil enters the filter at the top and then passes on its way to the tank the filter element (Fig. 3-9, Pos. 7) "Inside to outside filtration". The filter element condition is monitored by pressure switches (40B164 for the leak oil filter and 40B163 for the return oil filter). As soon as the pressure inside the filter chamber reaches the set pressure of those switches due to the restriction of the filter element, which is caused by foreign matters, the fault message ”Return oil filter restricted" or ”Leak oil filter restricted” is displayed at the VHMS monitor. In this case the filter elements must be replaced. For safety precautions the filter is equipped with a bypass valve. As the filter chamber pressure increases the by-pass valve opens at 2.3 + 0.5 bar and protects the element from bursting. But the oil does not flow totally unfiltered into the tank because it is forced to flow through the strainer (Fig. 3-9, Pos. 8).

Version 2010/1

3-15

Breather Filter

3.8

HYDRAULIC OIL TANK

BREATHER FILTER

Fig. 3-10 Breather filter 3-16

Version 2010/1

HYDRAULIC OIL TANK

Breather Filter

Legend for Fig. 3-10: (1)

Nut

(2)

Cover

(3)

Filter element

(4)

Filter pot

(5)

Pressure sensor

Two breather filters are installed in order to clean the air which streams into the tank at any time when the oil level decreases during the extension of the attachment cylinders. The filter element condition is monitored by a vacuum type pressure switch (40B024, 0.08 bar). NOTE: Refer to the OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL for further information.

CAUTION Only use steel filter elements.

Version 2010/1

3-17

Breather Filter

3-18

HYDRAULIC OIL TANK

Version 2010/1

HYDRAULIC OIL COOLING

4. HYDRAULIC OIL COOLING

Version 2010/1

4-1

Overall view of the hydraulic oil cooling

HYDRAULIC OIL COOLING

4.1

OVERALL VIEW OF THE HYDRAULIC OIL COOLING

Fig. 4-1

Overall view of the hydraulic oil cooling

4-2

Version 2010/1

HYDRAULIC OIL COOLING

Overall view of the hydraulic oil cooling

Legend for Fig. 4-1: (1)

Cooler door

(2)

Cooler (radiator)

(3)

Cooler frame

(4)

Fan

(5)

Fan motor (axial piston motor)

(6)

Bolt

(7)

Bolt

(8)

Drive shaft

(9)

Shaft protecting sleeve

(10)

Drive shaft seal

(11)

Ball bearings

(12)

Seeger clip ring

(13)

Bearing group carrier

(14)

Oil level plug

(15)

Breather filter

(16)

Bolt

The hydraulic oil cooling system keeps the hydraulic oil in the normal operating temperature range. Design There are four hydraulic oil coolers in front of the hydraulic tank on the R.H. side of the platform. They are in pairs mounted in one frame, one above the other. The air stream needed for the cooling is produced by hydraulic driven fans. The air flows from the inside to the outside through the coolers. For cleaning, the cooler frame must be moved to the side ("swing out cooler"). The bearing group carrier is filled with oil (CLP 220) in order to lubricate the bearings and the spline shaft connection. The oil change interval is 3000 hours.

Version 2010/1

4-3

Function of the Hydraulic Oil Cooling Circuit

HYDRAULIC OIL COOLING

4.2

FUNCTION OF THE HYDRAULIC OIL COOLING CIRCUIT

Fig. 4-2

Function of the hydraulic oil cooling circuit

4-4

Version 2010/1

HYDRAULIC OIL COOLING

Function of the Hydraulic Oil Cooling Circuit

Legend for Fig. 4-2: (32.1 - 32.4)

Restrictor, shock absorbers for the hydraulic oil cooler 22mm.

(39.1 + 39.2)

Hydraulic oil cooler

(41)

Main oil reservoir

(54)

Return oil collector pipe

(55)

Back pressure valve

(L6 + L7)

Return line from control blocks

(L13 + L14)

Supply line for the anti cavitation circuit of the swing motors

(M10)

Pressure check point

(40K601)

Solenoid valve – 4/2-directional control valve

(H)

Lines to cooler (hot oil)

(C)

Lines to tank (cold oil)

Function description The returning oil from the system flows via the lines (Fig. 4-2, Pos. L6 - L7) into the return oil collector pipe (Fig. 4-2, Pos. 54). A pressure relief valve, also called back pressure valve (Fig. 4-2, Pos. 55) is installed on top of it. The back pressure valve (Fig. 4-2, Pos. 55) causes a back pressure which forces most of the relative hot oil through the lines (Fig. 4-2, Pos. H) to the cooler (Fig. 4-2, Pos. 39.1 - 39.2). During its flow through the coolers the oil gets cooled and then it flows through the restrictors (Fig. 4-2, Pos. 32.1 - 32.4) and the lines (Fig. 4-2, Pos. C) into the filter chamber of the main hydraulic oil tank (Fig. 4-2, Pos. 41). The restrictors are acting as shock absorbers in order to prevent cooler cracking at pressure peaks. The back pressure valve (Fig. 4-2, Pos. 55) also acts as an oil flow control valve as long as the oil temperature has not reached its normal operating temperature. During the warm up period (1/2 Qmax) the back pressure valve (Fig. 4-2, Pos. 55) is wide open because the solenoid valve 40K601 is energized. As a results smaller oil flow volume passes through the coolers, which causes the oil to reach its optimum operating temperature faster. With increasing oil temperature the oil gets thinner, so that the main pumps can be shifted to Qmax position and simultaneously the solenoid valve 40K601 will be de-energized. As a result the valve piston is more closed by the force of the spring so that a larger oil volume may pass the coolers. NOTE: Refer to the sectional drawing in (Fig. 4-3).

Version 2010/1

4-5

Adjustment of the Back Pressure Valve

HYDRAULIC OIL COOLING

4.3

ADJUSTMENT OF THE BACK PRESSURE VALVE

Fig. 4-3

Back pressure valve

4-6

Version 2010/1

HYDRAULIC OIL COOLING

Adjustment of the Back Pressure Valve

Legend for Fig. 4-3: (1)

Control oil port

(2)

"Y"- port (external return to tank)

(2a)

"X"- port (external return to tank via solenoid valve 40K601)

(3)

Poppet

(4)

Valve spring

(5)

Lock nut

(6)

Set screw

(7)

Jet bore (large)

(8)

Valve spring

(9)

Valve piston

(10)

Jet bore (small)

(11)

Plug screw

(12)

Protective cap

(13)

Plug connector

(A)

Return to tank (filter chamber)

(Z)

Pressure oil to valve

Checks and settings only at normal operating temperature of the hydraulic oil and main pumps in maximum flow position (Qmax activated via VHMS). 1. Connect a pressure gauge to the check point (Fig. 4-3, Pos. M10). 2. Disconnect the plug connector (Fig. 4-3, Pos. 13) of the solenoid valve 40K601. 3. Activate the Qmax function via VHMS. 4. Start the engine and run it at high idle. 5. Required pressure: 10 ± 1.0 bar If adjustment is required: z

Remove the protective cap (Fig. 4-3, Pos. 12).

z

Loosen the lock nut (Fig. 4-3, Pos. 5).

z

Adjust the pressure with the set screw (Fig. 4-3, Pos. 6).

z

Tighten the lock nut (Fig. 4-3, Pos. 5) and refit the protective cap (Fig. 4-3, Pos. 12).

6. Disconnect the pressure gauge, reconnect the solenoid valve 40K601, and switch off the Qmax function via VHMS.

Version 2010/1

4-7

Fan Drive (Two Stage Cooler Fan RPM Control)

HYDRAULIC OIL COOLING

4.4

FAN DRIVE (TWO STAGE COOLER FAN RPM CONTROL)

Fig. 4-4

Fan drive

4-8

Version 2010/1

HYDRAULIC OIL COOLING

Fan Drive (Two Stage Cooler Fan RPM Control)

Legend for Fig. 4-4: (5.1)

Axial piston pump (fixed displacement pump with variable setting)

(31.1)

Pressure relief valve, pilot controlled (maximum fan speed)

(34.1)

Pressure filter

(37.1)

Fan motor top (axial piston motor)

(37.2)

Fan motor bottom (axial piston motor)

(38)

Check valve – (anti-cavitation valve for fan drive motor)

(124)

Pressure relief valve (medium fan speed)

(57K506a/b-1)

Solenoid valve

(M6)

Pressure check point

Function From the pump (Fig. 4-4, Pos. 5.1) the oil flows through the pressure filter (Fig. 4-4, Pos. 34.1) to the fan motors (Fig. 4-4, Pos. 37.1 + 37.2) and then back to the tank. The check valve (Fig. 4-4, Pos. 38) acts as an anti-cavitation valve. It is installed because the fan motor (driven by inertial force) keeps on running for a short period after the oil flow is interrupted by the solenoid valve (Fig. 4-4, Pos. 57K506a/b-1). The fan drive circuit is protected by the pilot controlled pressure relief valves ( Fig. 4-4, Pos. 31.1) and (Fig. 4-4, Pos. 124). These valves are working together with the solenoid valve (Fig. 4-4, Pos. 57K506a/b-1), controlled by the VHMS system, depending on the hydraulic oil temperature. z

With de-energized solenoids 57K506a-1 and 57K506b-1 the relief valve (Fig. 4-4, Pos. 31.1) is operating and the fans are running with max. adjusted speed (1250 ± 50 rpm).

z

With solenoid 57K506a-1 energized the relief valve (Fig. 4-4, Pos. 31.1) is not operating and the fans are running with a very low speed caused by the flow resistance only.

z

With solenoid 57K506b-1 energized the relief valve (Fig. 4-4, Pos. 124) is controlling the relief valve (Fig. 4-4, Pos. 31.1) and the fans are running with medium speed (1000 ± 10 rpm) only.

Version 2010/1

4-9

Fan Drive (Two Stage Cooler Fan RPM Control)

HYDRAULIC OIL COOLING

4.4.1

FIXED DISPLACEMENT PUMP, WITH VARIABLE SETTING

Fig. 4-5

Fixed displacement pump

4-10

Version 2010/1

HYDRAULIC OIL COOLING

Fan Drive (Two Stage Cooler Fan RPM Control)

Legend for Fig. 4-5: (1)

Drive shaft

(2)

Bearings

(3)

Cylinder with pistons

(4)

Center pin

(5)

Control lens

(6)

Torque adjustment bolt

(7)

Qmax adjustment bolt

(8)

Pressure port

(9)

Tank port

Description Pump type A7F0 is a variable displacement pump, designed to operate in open circuits. It has an internal case drain return into the suction port. The rotary group is a robust self aspirating unit. Changing the swivel angle of the rotary group is achieved by sliding the control lens along a cylindrical formed track by means of an adjusting screw. z

With an increase in the swivel angel, the pump output increases together with the necessary drive torque.

z

With an decrease in the swivel angel, the pump output decreases together with the necessary drive torque.

WARNING When increasing to the maximum swivel angle, there is a danger of cavitation and over-speeding the hydraulic motors!

Version 2010/1

4-11

Fan Drive (Two Stage Cooler Fan RPM Control)

4.4.2

PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE

Fig. 4-6

Pressure relief valve

4-12

HYDRAULIC OIL COOLING

Version 2010/1

HYDRAULIC OIL COOLING

Fan Drive (Two Stage Cooler Fan RPM Control)

Legend for Fig. 4-6: (1)

Valve cartridge

(2)

Spring

(3)

Spring chamber

(4)

"X" port

(5)

Jet bore, pilot poppet

(6)

Jet bore, main piston

(7)

Main valve piston

(8)

Valve housing

(9)

Pilot valve cone

(A)

Pressure port

(B)

Return oil port

(X)

Remote control port

(Y)

External leak oil port

Function description Pressure input (A) affects the main piston (Fig. 4-6, Pos. 7). At the same time pressure acts via the jet bore (Fig. 4-6, Pos. 6) onto the spring-loaded side of the main piston, and via the jet bore (Fig. 4-6, Pos. 5) onto the pilot poppet (Fig. 4-6, Pos. 9) of the relief valve cartridge (Fig. 4-6, Pos. 1). If the system pressure in line (A) exceeds the value which is set at the spring (Fig. 4-6, Pos. 2), the pilot poppet (Fig. 4-6, Pos. 9) opens. The signal for this action comes from line (A) via the jet bores (Fig. 4-6, Pos. 6) and (Fig. 4-6, Pos. 5). The oil on spring-loaded side of the main piston (Fig. 4-6, Pos. 7) now flows via the jet bore (Fig. 4-6, Pos. 5) and poppet (Fig. 4-6, Pos. 9) into the spring chamber (Fig. 4-6, Pos. 3). From here it is fed internally by means of the control line (Fig. 4-6, Pos. Y) to the tank (Fig. 4-6, Pos. B). Due to the state of equilibrium at the main piston (Fig. 4-6, Pos. 7), the oil flows from line (A) to (B), while the adjusted operating pressure is maintained. The pressure relief valve can be unloaded (remote controlled) by means of the port (X) and the function of the solenoid valve (Fig. 4-7, Pos. 124). For the operating function of the solenoid valve refer to section 4.4.3 on page 4-14.

Version 2010/1

4-13

Fan Drive (Two Stage Cooler Fan RPM Control)

4.4.3

SOLENOID VALVE

Fig. 4-7

Solenoid valve

4-14

HYDRAULIC OIL COOLING

Version 2010/1

HYDRAULIC OIL COOLING

Fan Drive (Two Stage Cooler Fan RPM Control)

Function description With de-energized solenoids (Fig. 4-7, Pos. 57K506a/b-1) the spool (Fig. 4-7, Pos. 3) keeps the "X" connection of valve (Fig. 4-7, Pos. 31.1) and port “B“ to port “P“ closed. The pressure relief valve (Fig. 4-7, Pos. 31.1) operates normally. • Fan speed: maximum speed. The energized solenoid 57K506b-1 operates the spool (Fig. 4-7, Pos. 3) and a connection is made between port “P“ and port “B“ and port "X" of the valve (Fig. 4-7, Pos. 31.1) The system pressure now opens the main piston (Fig. 4-6, Pos. 7) of the pressure relief valve (Fig. 4-7, Pos. 31.1), because via the solenoid 57K506b-1 (P to B) the oil from the rear side of the piston (Fig. 4-6, Pos. 7) flows from the "X"-port to the “P“ connection of the valve (Fig. 4-7, Pos. 124). The normal valve function is now remote controlled by the pressure adjusted at the valve (Fig. 4-7, Pos. 124). • Fan speed: medium speed The energized solenoid 57K506a-1 operates the spool (Fig. 4-7, Pos. 3) and a connection is made between port “P“ and port “A” and port "X" of the relief valve (Fig. 4-7, Pos. 31.1). The system pressure now opens the main piston (Fig. 4-6, Pos. 7) of the relief valve (Fig. 4-7, Pos. 31.1) because via the "X"-port the oil from the rear side of piston (Fig. 4-6, Pos. 7) flows to the tank. The normal relief valve function is eliminated. • Fan speed: minimum speed

Version 2010/1

4-15

Adjustment of the Cooler Fan Drive Speed

HYDRAULIC OIL COOLING

4.5

ADJUSTMENT OF THE COOLER FAN DRIVE SPEED

4.5.1

MAXIMUM SPEED

Fig. 4-8

Adjustment of the cooler fan drive maximum speed

4-16

Version 2010/1

HYDRAULIC OIL COOLING

Adjustment of the Cooler Fan Drive Speed

Legend for Fig. 4-8: (a + d)

Dust cap

(b + e)

Lock nut

(c + f)

Set screw

(5.1)

Axial piston pump (fixed displacement pump, with variable setting)

(6)

Torque adjustment bolt

(6.1)

Lock nut

(7)

Qmax stop bolt

(7.1)

Lock nut

(10)

Positioning pin (mover)

(31.1)

Pressure relief valve – Hydraulic oil cooler fan drive

(34.1)

Pressure filter

(124)

Pressure relief valve (medium fan speed)

(57K506a/b-1)

Solenoid valve

(L1)

Measurement of torque adjustment bolt

(L2)

Measurement of Qmax stop bolt

(M6)

Pressure check point

NOTE: Basic adjustment has to be carried out whenever one of the following components has been replaced: z

pump

z

relief valve

z

hydraulic motor

Precaution when the fan pump was replaced: The pump must be bleeded properly and the spline housing must be filled with oil, refer to the OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL. Basic Adjustment – Maximum Speed 1. For safety reason reduce the output flow of the pump (Fig. 4-8, Pos. 5.1) by adjusting the minimum possible swivel angle, to avoid over-speeding the fan: To do this, loosen both lock nuts (Fig. 4-8, Pos. 6.1 + 7.1), turn out the torque adjustment bolt (Fig. 4-8, Pos. 6). Turn in the Qmax bolt (Fig. 4-8, Pos. 7) the same length. This is necessary to avoid a loose positioning pin (Fig. 4-8, Pos. 10) which would result in oscillating of the cylinder barrel. Tighten the lock nuts. Adjust the relief valve to a higher setting as required in order to eliminate the pressure relief valve influence. 2. Remove the protection cap (Fig. 4-8, Pos. a) from the relief valve (Fig. 4-8, Pos. 31.1), loosen the lock nut (Fig. 4-8, Pos. b) and turn the set screw (Fig. 4-8, Pos. c) fully clockwise and then a half turn counterclockwise. 3. Isolate the function of the solenoid valve (Fig. 4-8, Pos. 57K506a/b-1) by disconnecting both connectors, to ensure that the full flow capacity of pump 5.1 will be delivered to the fan motor. 4. Connect a pressure gauge to the check point (Fig. 4-8, Pos. M6).

Version 2010/1

4-17

Adjustment of the Cooler Fan Drive Speed

HYDRAULIC OIL COOLING

5. Start the engine and run it at high idle. 6. Check the fan speed with a non-contact revolution counter.

WARNING Be careful not to get caught in the fan or other rotating parts.

7. Increase the output flow of pump (Fig. 4-8, Pos. 5.1) by adjusting the swivel angle, until the fan speed will be 20 - 50 rpm higher as required: To do this, loosen both lock nuts (Fig. 4-8, Pos. 6.1 + 7.1) and turn in the bolt (Fig. 4-8, Pos. 6). Turn out the bolt (Fig. 4-8, Pos. 7) the same length while the engine and the fan are in operation. This is necessary to avoid a loose positioning pin (Fig. 4-8, Pos. 10) which would result in oscillating of the cylinder barrel. Tighten the lock nuts (Fig. 4-8, Pos. 6.1 + 7.1).

WARNING Do not exceed the maximum permissible operating pressure of p = 230 +30 bar.

NOTE: Note down the lengths ”L1” and ”L2” as reference measurements. 8. Loosen the lock nut (Fig. 4-8, Pos. b) of the relief valve (Fig. 4-8, Pos. 31.1), and decrease the pressure with the set screw (Fig. 4-8, Pos. c) until the correct fan speed is obtained. 9. Tighten the lock nut (Fig. 4-8, Pos. b) and fix the protection cap (Fig. 4-8, Pos. a). NOTE: Both fans have to be checked. A speed difference of 50 rpm is normal due to the higher resistance of the air stream for the lower fan. If the speed difference between both fans is higher than 50 rpm, a possible cause could be a worn hydraulic motor or defective bearings.

4-18

Version 2010/1

HYDRAULIC OIL COOLING

4.5.2

MEDIUM SPEED

Fig. 4-9

Adjustment of the cooler fan drive medium speed

Version 2010/1

Adjustment of the Cooler Fan Drive Speed

4-19

Adjustment of the Cooler Fan Drive Speed

HYDRAULIC OIL COOLING

Basic Adjustment – Medium Speed 10. Activate the function of the pressure relief valve (Fig. 4-9, Pos. 124) by connecting the connector of the solenoid valve 57K506b-1 only. 11. Use the REAL TIME MONITOR of the VHMS system and check the condition of the solenoid valve 57K506b-1 (0 or 1).

Fig. 4-10 VHMS screen with 57K506b-1 NOTE: For the operating instructions of the VHMS system refer to section 14. 12. Loosen the lock nut (Fig. 4-9, Pos. e) of the relief valve (Fig. 4-9, Pos. 124) and turn the set screw (Fig. 4-9, Pos. f) fully counterclockwise and then clockwise until the correct fan speed is obtained. z

Required fan speed: 1000 ± 10 rpm.

13. Tighten the lock nut (Fig. 4-9, Pos. e) and fix the protection cap (Fig. 4-9, Pos. d). 14. Note down the pressure as reference value (expected ~ 150 bar). 15. Disconnect the pressure gauge from the check point (Fig. 4-9, Pos. M6). 16. Connect the connector of the solenoid valve 57K506a-1.

4.5.3

FUNCTION CHECK OF FAN SPEED CONTROL

Connect/disconnect the plugs of the solenoids 57K506a/b-1 and check the following fan speeds: 57K506a-1 - 0 57K506b-1 - 0

nmaximum ≈ 1250 ± 50 rpm

57K506a-1 - 0 57K506b-1 - 1

nmedium ≈ 1000 ± 10 rpm

57K506a-1 - 1 57K506b-1 - 0

nminimum ≈ 0 - 50 rpm

NOTE: At minimum speed condition the fan may spin at low revolution or it may stop completely.

4-20

Version 2010/1

HYDRAULIC OIL COOLING

Adjustment of the Cooler Fan Drive Speed

This page was left blank intentionally.

Version 2010/1

4-21

Adjustment of the Cooler Fan Drive Speed

4-22

HYDRAULIC OIL COOLING

Version 2010/1

CONTROLLING

5. CONTROLLING

Version 2010/1

5-23

General layout

5.1

GENERAL LAYOUT

Fig. 5-1

Overall view of the controlling system

5-24

CONTROLLING

Version 2010/1

CONTROLLING

General layout

Legend for Fig. 5-1 (20S019)

Electro proportional joystick control

(20S020)

Electro proportional joystick control

(20S021a)

Electro proportional pedal control, travelling of left crawler

(20S021b)

Electro proportional pedal control, travelling of right crawler

(20S022)

Electro proportional pedal control, swing brake

(20S023)

Electro proportional pedal control, closing of the clam

(20S024)

Electro proportional pedal control, opening of the clam

(M1.1)

Pressure test port, X4 pressure. (Pump bearing lubrication, pump support pressure (60 bar)) CLS SLS

(M1.2)

Pressure test port, X2 pressure. Pilot pressure (45 bar), bracke control, pump regulation.

(8.1)

Gear pump for pilot pressure, pump regulation and pump bearing lubrication

(14.1/.2 + 15.1/.2)

Remote control valve blocks

(33)

Pressure filter

(35)

Valve cartridge block

(41)

Main hydraulic oil tank

(85)

Bladder accumulator – 10 liters, 10 bar (located underneath the catwalk in front of the PTO)

(252.1)

Pressure relief valve for pilot pressure X2 (45 bar)

(252.2)

Pressure relief valve for pump support pressure X4 (60 bar)

General The control circuit is fed by one gear pump, and splitted in two pressure lines X4 and X2. The controlling includes the pilot pressure system and the pump regulation system. The pump (Fig. 5-1, Pos. 8.1) forces the oil through the filter (Fig. 5-1, Pos. 33) to all involved valves. The pressure accumulator ensures that under any circumstances enough pilot pressure oil is available. The accumulator (Fig. 5-1, Pos. 85) also serves as a hydraulic back-up system for a certain time when the engine was shut down, or to relieve the system pressure for repair works. The remote control valves are constantly supplied with the pilot pressure X2 (45 bar). When the operator is using the control elements, an electric signal is sent to electric system which energises and controls the relevant proportional valve(s) of the remote control valves (Fig. 5-1, Pos. 14.1/.2+15.1/.2). As a consequence of this, hydraulic oil runs to the corresponding component.

Version 2010/1

5-25

Valve cartridge block

5.2

VALVE CARTRIDGE BLOCK

Fig. 5-2

Valve cartridge block, location of components

5-26

CONTROLLING

Version 2010/1

CONTROLLING

Valve cartridge block

Legend for Fig. 5-2: Solenoid valves (57Q505)

Slew parking brake operating pressure

(57K506a-1)

Cooler fan RPM control, minimum speed

(57K506b-1)

Cooler fan RPM control, medium speed

(57Q516)

Travel parking brake operating pressure

(57K517)

Qmin control (pump control system)

(57K517a)

½ Qmax (reduced oil flow at cold oil [below T2])

(57K553-1)

”Reduction pre-load pressure PTO gear lubrication - oil cooler”

(57K561-1)

X1 pressure, pumps 1 – 4

(57K620)

Hydraulic swing brake, operating pressure

(57Q623a)

Ladder, raise

(57Q623b)

Ladder, lower

(57Q624a)

Refilling arm, raise

(57Q624b)

Refilling arm, lower

(57Q624c)

Refilling arm stop, hold position

(57Q625)

Ladder, fast movement

(57K626)

Flow reduction swing (pump 1)

(57Q627)

Proportional swing brake pressure

(57K630)

Fixed pump No. 1 (max. flow, X1 = 45 bar)

(57K631)

Fixed pump No. 3 (max. flow, X1 = 45 bar)

(57K636)

Engine radiator fan speed (proportional valve)

(57K646)

Energy Efficiency (pump No. 2 + No. 4)

(57K647)

Energy Efficiency (pump No. 3)

(57K648)

Energy Efficiency (pump No. 1) Filter

(33)

Pilot pressure

(34.1)

Hydraulic oil cooler fan drive

(34.2)

Engine radiator fan drive

(36)

PTO gear lubrication

Version 2010/1

5-27

Valve cartridge block

Fig. 5-3

5-28

CONTROLLING

Valve cartridge block, location of components

Version 2010/1

CONTROLLING

Valve cartridge block

Miscellaneous (29)

Pressure relief valve – PTO gear lubrication

(31.1)

Pressure relief valve – hydraulic oil cooler fan drive, with solenoid valve 57K506a/b-1 for fan RPM control

(31.2)

Pressure relief valve - engine radiator fan drive, with proportional solenoid valve 57K636-1 for fan RPM control

(47)

Pressure reducing valve – track tensioning system (35 bar)

(124)

Pressure relief valve medium speed cooler fan

(152)

Pressure reducing valve – Energy Efficiency (X3 ~ 18 bar, pre-adjustment)

(252.1)

Pressure reducing valve for pilot pressure X2 (45 bar)

(252.2)

Pressure relief valve for pump support pressure X4 (60 bar)

(253.1)

Change-over valve – electronic pump regulation or hydraulic constant regulation

(253.2)

Pressure reducing valve – hydraulic constant regulation

(255.4)

Pressure reducing valve – ½ Qmax

(257.1)

Pressure relief valve – safety valve for travel brake / track tensioning system (55 bar)

(258.3)

Pressure relief valve – safety valve for hydraulic access ladder (70 bar)

Version 2010/1

5-29

Valve cartridge block

Fig. 5-4

5-30

CONTROLLING

Valve cartridge block, location of components

Version 2010/1

CONTROLLING

Valve cartridge block

Legend for Fig. 5-4: Pressure switches (57B017-1)

PTO gear lubrication pressure

(57B027-1)

PTO gear lubrication - filter element monitoring

(57B085-1)

Pressure transducer – X1 pressure

(57B086)

Pressure transducer – X2 pressure Pressure test ports

(M1.1)

X4, pump support pressure, pump bearing lubrication (60 bar)

(M1.2)

X2 pressure, pilot pressure (45 bar)

(M2)

Bladder accumulator, pilot pressure (45 bar)

(M3)

PTO gear lubrication pressure

(M4)

Travel parking brake operating pressure (35 bar)

(M5)

Slew parking brake operating pressure (45 bar)

(M6)

Hydraulic oil cooler fan drive operating pressure

(M7)

Engine radiator fan drive operating pressure

(M15)

X1 pressure, hydraulic constant regulation only

(M18)

X1 pressure – general (electronic or hydraulic constant regulation general)

(M19)

X3 pressure – Energy Efficiency (~18 bar pre-adjustment)

(M23)

Travel parking brake safety pressure (55 bar)

(M30)

X4 pressure (60 bar)

(M31)

Option operating pressure: “fast motion for travel” not used

(M32)

X3 pressure – pumps No. 2 to No. 4

(M33)

Reduced X3 pressure – to pump No. 1 – ½ Qmax (~15 bar)

(M35.1)

Hydraulic cylinder access ladder “piston side”

(M35.2)

Hydraulic cylinder access ladder “rod side”

(M38.1)

Hydraulic cylinder refilling arm “piston side”

(M38.2)

Hydraulic cylinder refilling arm “rod side”

(M39)

Proportional pressure to hydraulic swing brake

(M41)

X1 pressure – fixed pump No. 3 (max. flow, X1 = 45 bar)

(M42)

X1 pressure – fixed pump No. 1 (max. flow, X1 = 45 bar)

Version 2010/1

5-31

Pilot pressure supply and adjustments

CONTROLLING

5.3

PILOT PRESSURE SUPPLY AND ADJUSTMENTS

Fig. 5-5

Pilot pressure supply and adjustments

5-32

Version 2010/1

CONTROLLING

Pilot pressure supply and adjustments

Legend for Fig. 5-5: (20S019)

Electro proportional joystick control

(20S020)

Electro proportional joystick control

(20S021a)

Electro proportional pedal control, travelling of left crawler

(20S021b)

Electro proportional pedal control, travelling of right crawler

(20S022)

Electro proportional pedal control, swing brake

(20S023)

Electro proportional pedal control, closing of the clam

(20S024)

Electro proportional pedal control, opening of the clam

(M1.1)

Pressure test port, X4 pressure. (Pump bearing lubrication, pump support pressure (60 bar)) CLS SLS

(M1.2)

Pressure test port, X2 pressure. Pilot pressure (45 bar), bracke control, pump regulation.

(8.1)

Gear pump for pilot pressure, pump regulation and pump bearing lubrication

(14.1/2+15.1/.2)

Remote control valve blocks

(33)

Pressure filter

(35)

Valve cartridge block

(41)

Main hydraulic oil tank

(85)

Bladder accumulator – 10 liters, 10 bar (located underneath the catwalk in front of the PTO)

(252.1)

Pressure relief valve for pilot pressure X2 (45 bar)

(252.2)

Pressure relief valve for pump support pressure X4 (60 bar)

5.3.1

PILOT PRESSURE CONTROL (PPC) CIRCUIT

The pilot pressure oil is used for the following functions: To operate the control block spools, to supply the main pump regulation system, to lubricate the main pump bearings, to release the travel- and swing gear house brakes (spring loaded multi disk brakes), to drive the grease pumps and to supply the hydraulic track tensioning system. Function NOTE: For further details refer to the hydraulic circuit diagram! The pump (Fig. 5-5, Pos. .8.1) delivers the oil through the pressure filter (Fig. 5-5, Pos. 33) to port "A" of the pressure relief valve (Fig. 5-5, Pos. 252.2) to limit the pump support pressure X4 (60 bar). The pressure reducing valve (Fig. 5-5, Pos. 252.1) maintains the adjusted pressure of 45 bar (X2) for the pilot pressure system, the pump regulation system and the supply for some auxiliary systems. The pressure accumulator (Fig. 5-5, Pos. 85) holds a certain amount of oil under pressure to provide sufficient pilot pressure during normal operation, and to ensure a limited number of lowering operations with the main drive motor at standstill.

Version 2010/1

5-33

Pilot pressure supply and adjustments

Fig. 5-6

5-34

CONTROLLING

Pilot pressure supply and adjustments

Version 2010/1

CONTROLLING

Pilot pressure supply and adjustments

Legend for Fig. 5-6: (41)

Main hydraulic oil tank

(85)

Bladder accumulator – 10 liters, 10 bar (located underneath the catwalk in front of the PTO)

(PX2)

Pilot pressure line

(LX2)

Leak / return oil line from the remote control valve blocks

Function The pilot pressure oil (X2 pressure) flows via a line (Fig. 5-6, Pos. PX2) to the pressure port of each remote control valve block. These solenoid valves are energized when operating the electro proportional controls (joysticks or pedals). The soleniod valves direct the pilot pressure oil to the respective spools of the main control blocks. The pressure correlates to the deflection of the controls corresponding to the adjustments of the amplifiers and the ramp time module. NOTE: For the location and designation of the proportional and directional solenoid valves of the remote control blocks refer to section 5.3.3 on page 5-38.

Version 2010/1

5-35

Pilot pressure supply and adjustments

5.3.2

CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENT OF PILOT PRESSURE

Fig. 5-7

Checks and adjustment of pilot pressure

5-36

CONTROLLING

Version 2010/1

CONTROLLING

Pilot pressure supply and adjustments

Legend for Fig. 5-7: (1), (3)

Lock nut

(2), (4)

Set screw, pressure relief valve

(85)

Bladder accumulator – 10 liters, 10 bar pre-charge pressure

(252.1)

Pressure reducing valve for pilot pressure X2 (45 bar)

(252.2)

Pressure relief valve for pump support pressure X4 (60 bar)

(M1.1)

Pressure test port X4, pump support pressure (60 bar)

(M1.2)

Pressure test port X2 pressure, pilot pressure (45 bar)

(M2, M40)

Pressure test ports for accumulator

NOTE: Carry out oil pressure testing and adjustment only at hydraulic oil temperature T3. X4 pressure (60 bar), valve 252.2: 1. Connect a pressure gauge to the appropriate test port (Fig. 5-7, Pos. M1.1). 2. Start the engine, run at high idle. 3. Read pressure, required = 60 bar (±1.0 bar). If readjustment is required, proceed as follows: z

Loosen the lock nut (Fig. 5-7, Pos. 1).

z

Set pressure with the set screw (Fig. 5-7, Pos. 2).

z

Tighten the lock nut (Fig. 5-7, Pos. 1).

X2 pressure (45 bar), valve 252.1: 1. Connect a pressure gauge to the appropriate test port (Fig. 5-7, Pos. M1.2). 2. Start the engine, run at high idle. 3. Read pressure, required = 45 bar (±1.0 bar). If readjustment is required proceed as follow: z

Loosen lock nut (Fig. 5-7, Pos. 3).

z

Set pressure with the set screw (Fig. 5-7, Pos. 4).

z

Tighten the lock nut (Fig. 5-7, Pos. 3).

Checking the accumulator function: 1. Connect a pressure gauge to the appropriate test port (Fig. 5-7, Pos. M2). 2. Start the engine, run at high idle. 3. After build-up of pressure stop the drive engine, but do not turn the key switch to zero position. 4. Watch the pressure gauge. Pressure should remain constant for at least 5 minutes. NOTE: If the pressure drops, the system must be checked for leakages. To check the accumulator charging pressure, refer to PARTS & SERVICE NEWS “AH01531”, latest edition.

Version 2010/1

5-37

Pilot pressure supply and adjustments

5.3.3

REMOTE CONTROL VALVES ARRANGEMENT

Fig. 5-8

Remote control valves arrangement

5-38

CONTROLLING

Version 2010/1

CONTROLLING

Pilot pressure supply and adjustments

Legend for Fig. 5-8: Remote control unit schematic code

Directional solenoid

Proportional solenoid

61K540

Function BHA

FSA Boom raising

61K573 61K541

Boom lowering

61K538

Stick extending

Clam closing

Stick retracting

Clam opening

Bucket filling

Bucket filling

Bucket dump

Stick extending

61K572 61K539 (15.1) 61K536 61K571 61K537 61K534

L.H. crawler reverse 61K570

61K535

L.H. crawler forward

61K524

L.H. swing 61K565

61K525

R.H. swing

61K522 (14.1)

Bucket filling (curl) 61K564

61K523

Bucket emptying

61K520

Boom raising 61K563

61K521

Boom lowering

61K526

R.H. swing 61K566

61K527

L.H. swing

61K532 (14.2)

Boom lowering

Bucket filling

Boom raising

Boom raising

61K569 61K533 61K530

Stick extending 61K568

61K531

Stick retracting

61K546

Boom raising 61K576

61K547

Boom lowering

61K544

Bucket filling (curl) 61K575

61K545

Bucket emptying

(15.2) 61K542

Stick extending 61K574

61K543

Stick retracting

61K528

R.H. crawler forward 61K567

61K529

Version 2010/1

R.H. crawler reverse

5-39

Function of the electro hydraulic control system

5.4

FUNCTION OF THE ELECTRO HYDRAULIC CONTROL SYSTEM

Fig. 5-9

Electro hydraulic control system

5-40

CONTROLLING

Version 2010/1

CONTROLLING

Function of the electro hydraulic control system

Legend for Fig. 5-9: (1)

Control lever (joystick)

(2)

MTC controller (zero position and direction recognition)

(3)

Node

(4)

Proportional solenoid valve

(5)

Directional solenoid valve, a side

(6)

Directional solenoid valve, b side

(7)

Main control valve block

(8)

Pump

(9)

Filter

(10)

Pressure relief valve

(11)

Check valve

(12)

Pressure accumulator

Function The electric-hydraulic control system is used to control the direction and volume of the oil flow to the operating cylinders and motors via the main control valve blocks. Hydraulically The oil volume of the pump (Fig. 5-9, Pos. 8) flows through the filter (Fig. 5-9, Pos. 9) into the pilot pressure system. The pressure is limited by the pressure relief valve (Fig. 5-9, Pos. 10). With the pressurized oil stored in accumulator (Fig. 5-9, Pos. 12), a limited number of control valve spool movements can be carried out with the main drive motor at standstill. When a lever (or pedal) is actuated, the proportional solenoid valve (Fig. 5-9, Pos. 4) and one of the directional solenoid valves (Fig. 5-9, either Pos. 5 or 6) are energized, the pilot pressure moves the spools of the main control valve blocks. Electrical Whenever a lever or a pedal is moved out of its neutral position, an amplifier will create a current between 0 and 1000 mA. (For detailed information see next page.) Depending on the lever direction, one of the directional solenoid valves (Fig. 5-9, either Pos. 6 or 7) is energized to select the main valve direction. The proportional solenoid valve alters the pilot pressure according to the lever deflection, effecting a spool movement between neutral and full stroke position.

Version 2010/1

5-41

Function of the electro hydraulic control system

CONTROLLING

Fig. 5-10 Electro hydraulic proportional control

5-42

Version 2010/1

CONTROLLING

Function of the electro hydraulic control system

Legend for Fig. 5-10 (exemplary illustration of the function of two axis with one amplifier only): (1)

Control lever (joystick)

(2)

Capacitor module

(3)

Ramp time module

(4)

Proportional amplifier module

(5)

Relay (supply voltage)

(6)

Proportional solenoid valve

(7)

Directional solenoid valve

(8)

Control block spool

General Function The control lever (Fig. 5-10, Pos. 1) is supplied with 24 VDC battery voltage for the switch contacts and with capacitor supported 24 VDC to create a stable signal voltage. When moving the the lever (Fig. 5-10, Pos. 1) out of his neutral position, 24 VDC battery voltage is applied to the relay (Fig. 5-10, Pos. 5) and energizes the proportional amplifier (Fig. 5-10, Pos. 4) with capacitor supported 24 VDC via terminal 1. Depending on the function of the control lever, 1 to 4 amplifiers can be involved for the „Y-axis“ (forward/ backwards direction) and 1 to 4 amplifiers for the „X-axis“ (left/right direction). The polarity of the output signal from the joystick (Fig. 5-10, Pos. 1), either positive or negative, between 0 and 10 VDC indicates the direction of the lever movement and is proportional to the lever deflection. This is the input signal to the ramp time module (Fig. 5-10, Pos. 3) at terminal 5 which will arrive after the adjusted ramp time delay via terminal 7 at the proportional amplifier (Fig. 5-10, Pos. 4), terminal 5. This input signal (between 0 and 10 VDC) is amplified to an output signal between 0 to 1000 mA and is simultaneously sent via terminal 7 (negative) or terminal 8 (positive) to the proportional solenoid valve (Fig. 5-10, Pos. 6) and the directional solenoid valve (Fig. 5-10, Pos. 7) via terminal 3 (negative) or terminal 9 (positive) to the “a” or “b”-side. The proportional solenoid valve (Fig. 5-10, Pos. 6) alters the pilot pressure (“X2”) of max. 45 bar to a value proportional to the current signal. This pressure controls the movement of the control block spool (Fig. 5-10, Pos. 8) between neutral and full stroke position.

Version 2010/1

5-43

Hand lever (joystick) control

5.5

CONTROLLING

HAND LEVER (JOYSTICK) CONTROL

Fig. 5-11 Potentiometer control

5-44

Version 2010/1

CONTROLLING

Hand lever (joystick) control

Legend for Fig. 5-11: (1)

Control lever (joystick)

(2)

Control unit

(3)

Deutsch connector

(4)

Inductive linear transmitter

(5)

Push pin

(6)

Coil

(7)

Direction monitoring

(8)

Zero position monitoring

(9)

Electronics of the control unit

(10)

Direction contacts

(11)

Zero position contacts

* Alternative application The non-contacting lever control (inductive linear transmitter) contains both the electronic and mechanical components which convert the lever movement into a proportional electrical voltage. The lever can be operated in two axes: z

Axis "Y", splitted into the half axis Y- and Y + (backward and forward)

z

Axis "X", splitted into the half axis X- and X + (left and right)

Of course the lever can be moved in any combined direction (joystick function). In order to be able to monitor the direction of the lever movement and the neutral position, the electronics (Fig. 5-11, Pos. 9) sends a 24 V signal as soon as the lever gets moved out of its neutral position. For one axis two inductive linear transmitter (Fig. 5-11, Pos. 4) are used. The motion of the coil core connected to the push pin (Fig. 5-11, Pos. 5) causes a variation of the induction in the coil (Fig. 5-11, Pos. 6). The electronics converts this inductive signal into a proportional output signal of -10...0...+10 V for the amplifiers. In order to be able to monitor the direction of the lever movement and its neutral position, two switches (Fig. 5-12, Pos. 7 and 8) are fitted, which are actuated by the switch actuator attached to the push pin (Fig. 5-12, Pos. 5) as soon as the lever gets moved out of its neutral position. The monitoring of the neutral position and the direction of the lever is carried out by the MTC controller.

Version 2010/1

5-45

Foot pedal control

5.6

CONTROLLING

FOOT PEDAL CONTROL

Fig. 5-12 Foot pedal control

5-46

Version 2010/1

CONTROLLING

Foot pedal control

Legend for Fig. 5-12: (1)

Pedal control unit

(2)

Foot pedal

(3)

Connection cable

(4)

Deutsch connector

(5)

Push pin

(6)

Coil

(7)

Direction monitoring

(8)

Direction contacts

(9)

Electronics

(10)

Switch actuator

(11)

Neutral (zero) position contacts

(12)

Neutral (zero) position monitoring

Application for: (A)

Clam opening/closing

(B)

Travelling

(C)

Swing foot brake

The foot pedal control (inductive, linear travel transmitter) contains both the electronic and mechanical components which convert the pedal movement into a proportional electrical voltage. In order to be able to electrically monitor the pedals (Fig. 5-12, Pos. A-C) action, neutral position switches are fitted. These switches close when the pedal is moved out of the neutral position. In order to be able to monitor the direction of the pedal movement and the neutral position of travel unit (Fig. 5-12, Pos. B), two switches (Fig. 5-12, Pos. 7 and 12) are fitted, which are actuated by the switch actuator (Fig. 5-12, Pos. 10) as soon as the pedal gets moved out of its neutral position.

Version 2010/1

5-47

Proportional amplifier module, type A

5.7

CONTROLLING

PROPORTIONAL AMPLIFIER MODULE, TYPE A

Fig. 5-13 Proportional amplifier module, type A

5-48

Version 2010/1

CONTROLLING

Proportional amplifier module, type A

Legend for Fig. 5-13: Type A

Usage: Swing brake :

11T016

(1)

LED for solenoid A or B

(2)

Set potentiometer R1 and R2 R1 for the lowest current value R2 for the highest current value

The amplifier module contains the necessary electronics for the control of two proportional solenoids. Depending on the input polarity, either channel A or channel B is operated. Both channels outputs are combined. The solenoid current (solenoid A – solenoid B) is measured and compared with the external input value. Differences between feed-back and input values, for example caused by changes in solenoid temperature or supply voltage, are compensated. Input signals up to 1 V generate no output signal (ouput current = 0). From 1 V to 9 V, the output current rises linearly from 40 mA to 350 mA. For input signals above 9 V, the ouptut current is fixed to the maximum of 1000 mA. The module also generates a direction-dependent voltage signal (solenoid A - solenoid B) as soon as the solenoid current reaches the lowest set value. Both endpoints for the linear increase (proportinal area) are set externally via the potentiometer R1 and R2. NOTE: For adjustment of the type A amplifier refer to section 5.10.2 on page 5-56.

Version 2010/1

5-49

Proportional amplifier module, type B

5.8

CONTROLLING

PROPORTIONAL AMPLIFIER MODULE, TYPE B

Fig. 5-14 Proportional amplifier module, type B

5-50

Version 2010/1

CONTROLLING

Proportional amplifier module, type B

Legend for Fig. 5-14: Type B

Usage: Boom Stick Bucket Clam Swing Travel, left Travel, right

: : : : : : :

11T010… (4 Pcs.) 11T008… (2 Pcs.) 11T009… (3 Pcs.) 11T011 11T007… (2 Pcs.) 11T012 11T013

(LED) Ax: AS: Bx: BS: Power: Fault:

Proportional output Ax active Switched output AS active Proportional output Bx active Switched output BS active Internal supply voltage Fault indication (P)

(P)

Set potentiometer: z 10% for the lowest current value z J2 for the highest current value

The amplifier module contains the necessary electronics for the control of two proportional solenoids and two directional solenoids. The amplifier outputs for proportional solenoids Ax and Bx and the switched outputs As and Bs are activated by connecting a minimum of approx. 10% signal voltage at the amplifier input. A positive signal voltage controls outputs A, a negative signal voltage controls output B. A signal voltage of approx. 10% with respect to ±10 V input voltage at the amplifier, produces a stepped output voltage. The height of this 10% jumps may be set separately for the proportional outputs Ax and Bx via external potentiometers. As the signal voltage rises, the solenoid current for the proportional outputs increases linearly. A further step in the output current occurs at approx. 90% signal voltage. The maximum current or the 90% jump may be set separately for outputs Ax and Bx via potentiometers. Hence the gradient of the output curve may be influenced. LED`s indicate the current output to each proportional and switched output, whereby the brightness is approx. proportional to the solenoid current in Ax and Bx. A fault is indicated by the LED „Fault“.

Version 2010/1

5-51

Ramp time module

5.9

CONTROLLING

RAMP TIME MODULE

Fig. 5-15 Ramp time module

5-52

Version 2010/1

CONTROLLING

Ramp time module

Legend for Fig. 5-15: Ramp time module

Usage: Boom Stick Travel

: : :

Swing : Swing brake : Bucket :

11T049 11T048 11T051 (left) 11T052 (right) 11T050/50a 11T050b 11T059

Potentiometer "t1" to "t5"

Ramp time adjustment (t5 not used)

"w1" to "w4"

Command value call-ups (not used)

"G"

Zero point matching

"Z"

Amplitude attenuation for the differential input

LED Displays (1)

green => operational power

(2)

"4-Q" => quadrant recognition (not used)

(3)

"INV" => inversion active (not used)

(4)

yellow => display for potentiometer t1 to t4

(5)

yellow => display for potentiometer w1 to w4

(6)

Measurement sockets: z z z

"t" - Actual ramp time (tension signal) "w" - Internal adjustment variable (not used) "⊥" - Reference potential / GND

General The ramp time module is snapped onto mounting rails inside the X2-box. The electrical connection is done via screw terminals. The module is operated with 24 VDC. A power supply provides the internally required positive and negative supply voltages. As soon as the power supply is in operation, the green LED (power) lights up. Internal Command Values The internal command value signal is generated from the external command value signal which is being applied to the differential input, a called-up signal and an offset signal (zero point potentiometer "Z"). The external command value signal can be changed from 0% to approx. 110% via potentiometer "G". Command Value Call-ups The call-up signals w1 to w4 also have an adjustment range of 0% to 110%. No settings required (factory set to 100%). Ramp Time Call up If the quadrant recognition is not activated, then each command value call-up "w1" to "w4" is allocated its own ramp time "t1" to "t4". As long as there is a signal change, the LED allocated to the actual ramp time is illuminated. Version 2010/1

5-53

Adjustments of amplifier modules

CONTROLLING

5.10 ADJUSTMENTS OF AMPLIFIER MODULES

Fig. 5-16 Adjustments of amplifier modules

5-54

Version 2010/1

CONTROLLING

Adjustments of amplifier modules

Legend for Fig. 5-16: (1)

Control lever (joystick)

(2)

Terminal with a separating possibility

(3)

Ramp time module

(4)

Amplifier

(5)

Solenoid valve (Proportional valve)

(6)

Service module

5.10.1 GENERAL Introduction Fig. 5-16 is a simplified illustration of the signal voltage route from the joystick control (Fig. 5-16, Pos. 1) to the solenoid valve (Fig. 5-16, Pos. 5): (A)

With ramp time module FSA & BHA – Boom, stick, bucket, travel, swing brake and swing function NOTE: For adjustment data, please also refer to the Parts & Service News "AH09525" (latest edition).

(B)

Without ramp time module FSA only – Clam function

The ramp time modules (Fig. 5-16, Pos. 3) and the amplifiers (Fig. 5-16, Pos. 4) are adjustable. Adjustments are required: Ramp Time Modules z z

When commissioning the machine. When replacing a module.

Amplifiers z z

When replacing a proportional solenoid valve. When replacing an amplifier.

For checking and setting the signal current at the proportional-amplifier (Fig. 5-16, Pos. 4), both separating terminal (Fig. 5-16, Pos. 2) before and behind the amplifier (Fig. 5-16, Pos. 4) must be opened. For the setting procedure the signal voltage from the potentiometer control (Fig. 5-16, Pos. 1) can be simulated with the potentiometer of the service module (Fig. 5-16, Pos. 6) installed on the X2 board.

Version 2010/1

5-55

Adjustments of amplifier modules

CONTROLLING

5.10.2 ADJUSTING THE AMPLIFIERS TYPE A

Fig. 5-17 Adjusting the amplifiers type A

5-56

Version 2010/1

CONTROLLING

Adjustments of amplifier modules

NOTE: The adjustment of the amplifier for the swing brake is slightly different from the adjustment procedures for the amplifiers of the other foot pedals and the joysticks, also refer to section 5.10.3 on page 5-58. Adjustment procedure for the amplifier of the swing brake (foot pedal): 1. Open* the respective separating terminal (Fig. 5-17, Pos. T1) between the pedal unit and the amplifier module to be set. 2. Open* the respective separating terminal (Fig. 5-17, Pos. T2) between the amplifier module to be set and the proportional solenoid valve. 3. Disconnect the wire from the amplifier, terminal 5. 4. Connect the positive output of the service module with terminal 5 of the amplifier module using a test lead (Fig. 5-17, Pos. 2). 5. Attach a multimeter for voltage reading to the service module using test leads (Fig. 5-17, Pos. 3). 6. Attach a multimeter (in series) for ampere reading to the terminals between the amplifier module and the solenoid valve using test leads (Fig. 5-17, Pos. 3). 7. Press the swing brake pedal fully down, or manually override the relay supplying the amplifier module with 24 VDC operating voltage. (Thus, the amplifier gets 24 V operating voltage.) 8. Turn the potentiometer (Fig. 5-17, Pos. P) of the service module until the multimeter for voltage reading shows 1 VDC; the multimeter for the current reading will show a value that should correspond to the value given in the circuit diagram, e.g. 40 mA (10% value). If necessary correct the value with the potentiometer (Fig. 5-17, Pos. R1). 9. Turn the potentiometer (Fig. 5-17, Pos. P) of the service module until the multimeter for voltage reading shows 10 VDC; the multimeter for the current reading will show a value that should correspond to the value given in the circuit diagram, e.g. 350 mA (100% value). If necessary correct the value with the potentiometer (Fig. 5-17, Pos. R2). NOTE: It is important that the pilot pressure for the pressure increasing valve is 24 ±1 bar. For more information refer to section 8.3 on page 8-102. * How to open and close the terminal: Push the yellow stud (Fig. 5-17, Pos. 1) down with a screw driver and turn it 90° to the left to open or to the right to close the terminal. Then a spring pushes the stud outwards and the contacts are either open or closed.

Version 2010/1

5-57

Adjustments of amplifier modules

CONTROLLING

5.10.3 ADJUSTING THE AMPLIFIERS TYPE B

Fig. 5-18 Adjusting the amplifiers type B

5-58

Version 2010/1

CONTROLLING

Adjustments of amplifier modules

Procedure applicable for all amplifiers except the one for the swing brake: NOTE: Used respective electric circuit diagram to identify the required terminals, components and valves. NOTE: Do not start the engine, only turn the key switch into ON-position. 1. Open* the respective separating terminal (Fig. 5-18, Pos. T1) between the lever unit and the amplifier module. 2. Open* the respective separating terminal (Fig. 5-18, Pos. T2) between the amplifier module and the proportional solenoid valve. 3. Disconnect the wire from terminal 5. 4. Connect the positive output of the service module with terminal 5 of the amplifier module using a test lead (Fig. 5-18, Pos. 2). 5. Attach a multimeter for voltage reading to the service module using test leads (Fig. 5-18, Pos. 3). 6. Attach a multimeter (in series) for ampere reading to the terminal between the amplifier module and the solenoid valve using test leads (Fig. 5-18, Pos. 3). 7. Move the lever 20S105 into operating position, or manually override the relay supplying the amplifier module with 24 VDC operating voltage. Thus the amplifier gets 24 V operating voltage. Simultaneously the power LED and either LED A(+) or B(-) light up, depending on the polarity. 8. Turn the potentiometer (Fig. 5-18, Pos. P) of the service module until the multimeter shows 1 VDC (it may be either positive or negative); the multimeter for the current reading should show a value corresponding to the value given in the circuit diagram, e.g. 300 mA (first step / 10% value [R1]). The LED’s show which channel (positiv A or negativ B) is activated. For adjustment use always potentiomenter in horizontal line to the activated LED’s. If necessary correct the value with the potentiometer (Fig. 5-18, Pos. R1). 9. Turn the potentiometer (Fig. 5-18, Pos. P) of the service module further until the multimeter shows 9 VDC; the multimeter for the current reading should show a value corresponding to the value given in the circuit diagram, e.g. 550 mA (second step / 90% value [R2]). The LED’s show which channel (positiv A or negativ B) is activated. For adjustment use always potentiomenter in horizontal line to the activated LED’s. If necessary correct the value with potentiometer (Fig. 5-18, Pos. R2). 10. Repeat settings of item 8 and 9 until both mA values are stabilized, because R1 and R2 influence each other. 11. If the setting with either positive or negative potential was successful, turn the potentiometer (Fig. 5-18, Pos. P) of the service module into the opposite direction and check the settings with the other polarity. 12. Repeat the setting as described in steps 7 to 10. 13. Remove the multimeter, test leads, close* the terminals and reconnect the wire to terminal 5 of the amplifier module. *How to open and close the terminal: Push the yellow stud (Fig. 5-18, Pos. 1) down with a screw driver and turn it 90° to the left to open or to the right to close the terminal. Then a spring pushes the stud outwards and the contacts are either open or closed.

Version 2010/1

5-59

Adjusting the ramp time modul

CONTROLLING

5.11 ADJUSTING THE RAMP TIME MODUL

Fig. 5-19 Adjusting the ramp time module

5-60

Version 2010/1

CONTROLLING

Adjusting the ramp time modul

Legend for Fig. 5-19: (1)

Capacitor module

(2)

Service module

(3)

Ramp time module

(P)

Potentiometer

NOTE: The following adjustments have to be done when commissioning the machine and whenever the ramp time module has been replaced. Do not start the motor, turn only the key switch in ON – position. The following step numbers corespond to the boldface numbers in Fig. 5-19. Basic adjustment: 1. Connect a multimeter for voltage reading to the service module (Fig. 5-19, Pos. 6) and, if required, set voltage to 0 V by turning the potentiometer "P". Connect another multimeter for voltage reading to terminal 7 (+) and terminal 8 (-) of the ramp time module (Fig. 5-19, Pos. 3). Connect the red (positive) terminal of the service module with terminal 5 of the ramp time module using a test lead. If the multimeter at the ramp time module does not show "0 V", adjust the value by turning potentiometer "Z" at the ramp time module. 2. Now set the output voltage of the service module to 10 V. Check the voltage reading of the multimeter connected to the ramp time module; if neccessary, adjust to "10 V" by turning the potentiometer "G". NOTE: Repeat settings of item 1 and 2 until both values are stabilized, because "Pot Z" and "Pot G" influence each other. Disconnect the test lead after the setting is done. NOTE: The factory setting of potentiometer "w1" to "w4" must not be adjusted!

Version 2010/1

5-61

Adjusting the ramp time modul

CONTROLLING

Fig. 5-20 Adjusting the ramp time module

5-62

Version 2010/1

CONTROLLING

Adjusting the ramp time modul

Legend for Fig. 5-20: (1)

Capacitor module

(2)

Control lever (joystick)

(3)

Ramp time module

(4)

Proportional amplifier module

(5)

Relay (supply voltage)

(6)

Extract from the circuit diagram

(7)

Designation of the amplifier connected to the ramp time module to be set

Ramp time adjustment in relation to the operating movements: 3. Disconnect the cables at terminal 3 and terminal 5 of the respective module. Connect a multimeter for voltage reading to the ramp time module terminals marked "t" (+) and "⊥" (-). 4. For setting the ramp times "t1" to "t4" one after another: Apply +24 VDC to the corresponding terminal (9 to 12, see Fig. 5-20) of the ramp time module using a test lead. (+24 VDC can be taken from terminal 1 of the ramp time module itself.) Take the set value for the ramp time(s) from the corresponding table in the circuit diagram and set the voltage by adjusting the appropriate potentiometer marked "t1" to "t4" at the ramp time module. NOTE: The ramp time "t" corresponds to the voltage "Ut"set as desribed above, see following table and examples. Voltage Ut measured at socket "t" [V]

Ramp time (±20%) [ms]

t = 100 Vms / Ut

5

20

Quick reaction

3

33

2

50

1

100

0.5

200

0.3

333

0.2

500

0.1

1000

0.05

2000

0.03

3333

0.02

5000

Example: Measured value Ut = 5 V

⇒ Resulting ramp time t = 100 V ms / 5 V = 20 ms

Example: Requested ramp time = 50 ms ⇒ Voltage to be set Ut = 100 V ms / 50 ms = 2 V

Slow reaction

NOTE: Through the new release of the PM Clinic procedure (and adjustment of the Energy Efficiency), the ramp time modules (except swing and travel circuit) are basically adjusted to 20 ms / 5 V. For more details refer to your electric circuit diagram. The amplifiers and ramp time modules will soon be replaced with a closed control module for controlling.

Version 2010/1

5-63

Adjusting the ramp time modul

CONTROLLING

5-64

Version 2010/1

COMPONENTS

6. COMPONENTS

Version 2010/1

6-1

Main control blocks and high pressure filter (FSA)

COMPONENTS

6.1

MAIN CONTROL BLOCKS AND HIGH PRESSURE FILTER (FSA)

Fig. 6-1

Main control blocks and high pressure filter (FSA)

6-2

Version 2010/1

COMPONENTS

Main control blocks and high pressure filter (FSA)

NOTE: Legend for Fig. 6-1: Pump Circuit No. I (10 / I)

Main control block (swing [fast] L.H. & R.H., bucket fill / boom raise, stick retract / extend)

(13.2)

High pressure filter

(68.1)

Anti cavitation valve – stick cylinder piston side

(66.4)

Service-line relief valve – stick cylinder rod side Pump Circuit No. II

(11 / II)

Main control block (boom, clam, bucket fill / stick extend, L.H. travel)

(13.3)

High pressure filter

(45)

SRV clam cylinder piston side

(66.5)

SRV boom cylinder piston side

(68.2)

ACV clam cylinder rod side

(68.3 + 68.4)

ACV travel motors Pump Circuit No. III

(9 / III)

Main control block (swing [slow], clam, bucket, boom [lower])

(13.1)

High pressure filter (with differential pressure switch B7)

(66.1)

SRV bucket cylinder piston side

(66.2)

SRV bucket cylinder rod side Pump Circuit No. IV

(12 / IV)

Main control block (R.H. travel, boom / bucket, stick)

(12.3)

High pressure filter

(66.7)

SRV boom cylinder piston side

(66.8)

SRV boom cylinder rod side

(66.9)

SRV bucket cylinder piston side

(66.10)

SRV bucket cylinder rod side

(66.11)

SRV stick cylinder piston side

(66.12)

SRV stick cylinder rod side

(68.5)

ACV stick cylinder piston side

(68.6 + 68.7)

ACV travel motors

NOTE: There is one main relief valve in each control block.

Version 2010/1

6-3

Main control blocks and high pressure filter (BHA)

COMPONENTS

6.2

MAIN CONTROL BLOCKS AND HIGH PRESSURE FILTER (BHA)

Fig. 6-2

Main control blocks and high pressure filter (BHA)

6-4

Version 2010/1

COMPONENTS

Main control blocks and high pressure filter (BHA)

Legend for Fig. 6-2: Pump Circuit No. I (10 / I)

Main control block (swing [fast], boom, stick)

(13.2)

High pressure filter

(66.4)

Service-line relief valve – Stick cylinder rod side Pump Circuit No. II

(11 / II)

Main control block (boom, bucket, stick, L.H. travel)

(13.3)

High pressure filter

(66.5)

SRV boom cylinder piston side

(66.6)

SRV clam cylinder rod side

(68.3 + 68.4)

ACV travel motors Pump Circuit No. III

(9 / III)

Main control block (swing [slow], bucket, boom)

(13.1)

High pressure filter

(66.3)

SRV bucket cylinder rod side Pump Circuit No. IV

(100 / IV)

Main control block (boom, bucket, stick, R.H. travel)

(13.4)

High pressure filter

(66.7)

SRV boom cylinder piston side

(66.8)

SRV boom cylinder rod side

(66.12)

SRV stick cylinder rod side

(68.6 + 68.7)

ACV travel motors

NOTE: There is one main relief valve in each control block.

Version 2010/1

6-5

Distributor manifold - location of restrictor blocks and anti cavitation valves (FSA)

COMPONENTS

6.3

DISTRIBUTOR MANIFOLD - LOCATION OF RESTRICTOR BLOCKS AND ANTI CAVITATION VALVES (FSA)

Fig. 6-3

Distributor manifold - location of restrictor blocks and anti cavitation valves (FSA)

6-6

Version 2010/1

COMPONENTS

Distributor manifold - location of restrictor blocks and anti cavitation valves (FSA)

Legend for Fig. 6-3: (SB)

Synchronization (equalization) block

(SL)

Synchronization (equalization) lines

(SRV)

Secondary relief valve

(M)

Pressure check point

(42)

Distributor manifold

(64.1)

ACV block section A, boom cylinder rod side

(70.1 + 70.2)

Restrictor blocks section B, boom cylinder piston side with SRVs and pressure check points M16.1 + M16.2

(65.1)

SRV section C, bucket cylinder piston side with SRV and pressure check point M17.1

(70.4)

Restrictor block section C, bucket cylinder piston side with pressure check point M17.2

(64.2)

ACV block section C, bucket cylinder piston side

(64.3)

ACV block section D, bucket cylinder rod side

(70.6)

Restrictor block section E, clam cylinder rod side with SRV and pressure check point M19

(64.4)

ACV block section F, stick cylinder rod side

(65.2)

SRV section G, stick cylinder piston side with pressure check point M20

(64.5)

ACV block section H, stick cylinder rod side

(70.8 + 70.9)

Restrictor blocks section J, stick cylinder piston side with SRVs and pressure check points M21.1 + M21.2

(18)

SRV section K, clam cylinder piston side with pressure check points M22

(64.6)

ACV block section K, clam cylinder piston side

(64.7)

ACV block section L, bucket cylinder rod side

(64.8)

ACV block section M, bucket cylinder piston side

(70.12)

Restrictor block section M, bucket cylinder piston side with SRV and pressure check point M24

(65.3)

SRV section N, bucket cylinder piston side with pressure check point M25

(65.4)

SRV section O, boom cylinder piston side with pressure check point M26.2

(70.13)

Restrictor blocks section O, boom cylinder piston side with SRV and pressure check point M26.1

(64.9)

ACV block section P, boom cylinder rod side

Version 2010/1

6-7

Distributor manifold - location of restrictor blocks and anti cavitation valves (BHA)

COMPONENTS

6.4

DISTRIBUTOR MANIFOLD - LOCATION OF RESTRICTOR BLOCKS AND ANTI CAVITATION VALVES (BHA)

Fig. 6-4

Distributor Manifold - Location of restrictor blocks and anti cavitation valves (BHA)

6-8

Version 2010/1

COMPONENTS

Distributor manifold - location of restrictor blocks and anti cavitation valves (BHA)

Legend for Fig. 6-4: (SL)

Synchronization (equalization) lines

(SRV)

Secondary relief valve

(M)

Pressure check point

(42)

Distributor manifold

(64.1)

ACV block section A, boom cylinder rod side

(70.1 + 70.2)

Restrictor blocks section B, boom cylinder piston side with SRVs and pressure check points M16.1 + M16.2

(70.3)

Restrictor block section C, bucket cylinder piston side with SRV and pressure check point M17.1

(70.4)

Restrictor block section C, bucket cylinder piston side with SRV and pressure check point M17.2

(64.2)

ACV block section C, bucket cylinder piston side

(64.3)

ACV block section D, bucket cylinder rod side

(70.5)

Restrictor block section D, bucket cylinder rod side with SRV and pressure check point M18

(64.4)

ACV block section F, stick cylinder piston side

(70.7)

Restrictor block section G, bucket cylinder rod side with SRV and pressure check point M20

(64.5)

ACV block section H, stick cylinder piston side

(70.8 + 70.9)

Restrictor blocks section J, stick cylinder rod side with SRVs and pressure check points M21.1 + M21.2

(70.10)

Restrictor blocks section K, stick cylinder rod side with SRVs and pressure check points M22

(64.6)

ACV block section K, stick cylinder rod side

(70.11)

Restrictor blocks section L, stick cylinder rod side with SRVs and pressure check points M23

(64.7)

ACV block section L, bucket cylinder rod side

(70.12)

Restrictor block section M, bucket cylinder piston side with SRV and pressure check point M24

(64.8)

ACV block section M, bucket cylinder piston side

(70.13)

Restrictor blocks section O, boom cylinder piston side with SRV and pressure check point M26.1

(70.14)

Restrictor blocks section O, boom cylinder piston side with SRV and pressure check point M26.2

(64.9)

ACV block section P, boom cylinder rod side

Version 2010/1

6-9

Single control blocks (floating) for stick and boom (FSA)

COMPONENTS

6.5

SINGLE CONTROL BLOCKS (FLOATING) FOR STICK AND BOOM (FSA)

Fig. 6-5

Single control blocks (floating) for stick and boom (FSA)

6-10

Version 2010/1

COMPONENTS

Single control blocks (floating) for stick and boom (FSA)

Legend for Fig. 6-5: (60Q632)

Single control block - Stick lowering function Floating position

(60Q633)

Single control block - Stick lowering function Floating position

(60Q634)

Single control block - Stick lowering function Floating position

(61Q635)

Single control block - Boom lowering function Floating position

Function (only Front Shovel Attachment) The additionally installed single control blocks connect the piston side of the cylinders with the rod side and also with the hydraulic oil tank: z

60Q632, 60Q633 and 60Q634 for the stick cylinders

z

61Q635 for the boom cylinders

In normal operation mode (floating position) the pilot pressure oil holds the spool in the single control blocks (via de-energized solenoid valves) open when lowering the boom or stick. If a pressurized lowering of the cylinders is required, the pilot pressure oil is switched via energized solenoid valves to the main control blocks. The solenoid valves (4/2-directional control valves) are controlled by push buttons located in the control levers (joysticks).

Version 2010/1

6-11

Restrictor block with pressure relief valve

COMPONENTS

6.6

RESTRICTOR BLOCK WITH PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE

Fig. 6-6

Restrictor block with secondary relief valve

6-12

Version 2010/1

COMPONENTS

Restrictor block with pressure relief valve

Legend for Fig. 6-6: (1)

Adjustment pin

(2 + 3)

O-ring with back-up ring

(4)

Retainer

(5 + 6)

O-ring with back-up ring

(7)

Spring

(8)

Spring cup

(9)

Valve poppet

(10)

O-ring

(11)

Housing

(12)

Return line port, T

(13)

Secondary relief valve

(14)

Allen bolt

(15)

Clip ring

(16)

Lock nut

(A + B)

Line ports

M

Pressure check point

Y

Control oil drain port

NOTICE A restrictor block is used for limiting cylinder lowering speeds.

z z

A secondary relief valve is installed to limit the maximum system pressure due to external forces.

Function Setting of the maximum permissible cylinder speed (flow B to A) is carried out by the adjustment pin (Fig. 6-6, Pos. 1). Depending on the setting, the radial holes (Fig. 6-6 Pos. 9.1) in the valve poppet (Fig. 6-6, Pos. 9) will be partially opened to achieve the required throttling of the oil flow. The extra holes (fixed throttle 9.2) prevent the valve from becoming completely closed. For the lifting operation (flow A to B), the valve poppet (Fig. 6-6 Pos. 9), which is guided by the pin (Fig. 6-6, Pos. 1), is pressed against the spring (Fig. 6-6, Pos. 7) so that the valve will be completely open. NOTE: Ex factory the throttle valves are pre-adjusted, refer to PM-Clinic.

Version 2010/1

6-13

Anti cavitation valve block

6.7

ANTI CAVITATION VALVE BLOCK

Fig. 6-7

Anti cavitation valve block

6-14

COMPONENTS

Version 2010/1

COMPONENTS

Anti cavitation valve block

Legend for Fig. 6-7 (type 64.1 to 64.9 of the hydraulic circuit diagram): (1)

Housing

(2)

Valve cone

(3)

Spring

(4)

O-ring

(5)

Control and leak oil bore

(6)

Cap screw (torque: 900 Nm)

(S)

Supply line

(A + B)

Line connections

NOTE: ACVs are installed to avoid cavitation damages on hydraulic cylinders by compensating a possible lack of oil when the SRV at the opposite side of the cylinder opens (see circuit diagram). Function The circuit pressure in lines A and B hold the valve cone (Fig. 6-7, Pos. 2) closed. Pressure of the supply line S is put on the valve cone. The valve cone opens, whenever the pressure at the A and B side is lower than the back pressure at the return oil port S, to allow necessary oil supply into the circuit.

Version 2010/1

6-15

Remote control valves

6.8

REMOTE CONTROL VALVES

Fig. 6-8

Remote control valves

6-16

COMPONENTS

Version 2010/1

COMPONENTS

Remote control valves

Legend for Fig. 6-8: (1)

Pilot pressure supply port (marked with P)

(2)

Pilot pressure return port to tank (marked with L)

(3)

Pilot pressure output lines to the control block

(4)

Proportional solenoid valve

(5)

4/3 Directional solenoid valve

NOTE: Remote control valves are part of the electric-hydraulic control system. Function The electric-hydraulic control system is used to control the direction and volume of oil flow to the operating cylinders and motors via the main control valve blocks. When a lever (or pedal) is actuated, a proportional solenoid valve (Fig. 6-8, Pos. 4) and one of the directional solenoid valves (Fig. 6-8, Pos. 5 / either Ax or Bx) are energized, allowing the pilot pressure oil to flow to the spools of the main control blocks. The proportional solenoid valve alters the pilot pressure, proportional to the lever deflection, resulting in a spool movement in the main control block between neutral and full stroke position.

Version 2010/1

6-17

4/3 Directional solenoid valves

6.9

4/3 DIRECTIONAL SOLENOID VALVES

Fig. 6-9

Directional solenoid valve

6-18

COMPONENTS

Version 2010/1

COMPONENTS

4/3 Directional solenoid valves

Legend for Fig. 6-9: (1)

Control spool

(2)

Plunger

(3)

Solenoids

(4)

Reset springs

(5)

Housing

NOTE: This solenoid operated directional spool valves are installed to control the start, stop and direction of an oil flow. Function In un-operated condition the control spool (Fig. 6-9, Pos. 1) is held in the neutral position by the reset springs (Fig. 6-9, Pos. 4). Operation of the control spool takes place by means of oil immersed solenoids (Fig. 6-9, Pos. 3). The force of the solenoid (Fig. 6-9, Pos. 3) acts via the plunger (Fig. 6-9, Pos. 2) on the control spool (Fig. 6-9, Pos. 1) and pushes it from its neutral position into the required end position. This results in the required flow from P to A and B to T, or from P to B and A to T. When the solenoid (Fig. 6-9, Pos. 3) is de-energised, the control spool (Fig. 6-9, Pos. 1) is returned to its original position by the reset springs (Fig. 6-9, Pos. 4).

Version 2010/1

6-19

Proportional solenoid valves

6.10

PROPORTIONAL SOLENOID VALVES

Fig. 6-10

Proportional solenoid valve

6-20

COMPONENTS

Version 2010/1

COMPONENTS

Proportional solenoid valves

Legend for Fig. 6-10: (1)

Connector socket

(2)

Bleed screw

(3)

Proportional solenoid

(4)

Valve housing

(5)

Piston stop

(6)

Pressure spool

(7)

Control piston

(8)

Pressure spool

NOTE: These valves are responsible for the creation of a variable control pressure proportional to the electrical signal output of an amplifier. Function In neutral condition the control piston (Fig. 6-10, Pos. 7) is held in the neutral or starting position by reset springs. The control piston (Fig. 6-10, Pos. 7) is directly operated by the proportional solenoid (Fig. 6-10, Pos. 3). If the solenoid is energised, it produces a force to operate the control piston (Fig. 6-10, Pos. 7) via the pressure spool (Fig. 6-10, Pos. 8) and moves the spool to the left. Oil flows from P to A. As pressure in A increases, it passes via the radial borings in the control piston (Fig. 6-10, Pos. 7) to the inner end of the pressure spool (Fig. 6-10, Pos. 4). The force generated by the pressure now works against the solenoid force and pushes the control piston (Fig. 6-10, Pos. 7) to the right (closing direction) until a balance is achieved between the two forces. In order to achieve this, the pressure spool (Fig. 6-10, Pos. 4) moves to the left in the direction of the piston stop (Fig. 6-10, Pos. 5). When the force balance is achieved, the connection between P and A is interrupted and the pressure in line A is held constant. Any reduction in the solenoid force leads to the pressure force exceeding the solenoid force on the control piston (Fig. 6-10, Pos. 7). The control spool is then moved to the right causing a connection from A to T, allowing the pressure to fall until a balance is re-established at a lower level. At rest, when the solenoid is de-energized, ports A and B are open to tank, while port P is blocked from both ports A and B.

Version 2010/1

6-21

High pressure filter

6.11

HIGH PRESSURE FILTER

Fig. 6-11

High pressure filter

6-22

COMPONENTS

Version 2010/1

COMPONENTS

High pressure filter

Legend for Fig. 6-11: (1)

Hexagon

(2)

Drain plug

(3)

Packing ring

(4)

Spring

(5)

Filter element

(6)

Filter case

(7)

Filter head

(8)

Back-up ring

(9)

O-ring

(10)

Spring

NOTE: High pressure filters are installed in each pump line. Function High-pressure in-line filters prevent contamination from entering the hydraulic circuits. The spin-on filters are installed between the main hydraulic pumps and multi-valve control blocks. All hydraulic components behind the pumps are effectively protected from damage and undue wear.

Version 2010/1

6-23

Control blocks and valves

6.12

CONTROL BLOCKS AND VALVES

Fig. 6-12

Control blocks and valves

6-24

COMPONENTS

Version 2010/1

COMPONENTS

Control blocks and valves

Legend for Fig. 6-12: (1)

Control block housing

(2)

Main relief valve (MRV)

(3)

Boom lifting / lowering spool (special)

(4)

Long cap ("B" side)

(5)

"B" side service line ports

(6)

Centering springs

(7)

Solid spool

(8)

Short cap ("A" side)

(9)

"A" side service line ports

(10)

Load check valves

(11)

Pilot oil warm up and flushing grooves

(12)

Fine controlling grooves

(13)

Type plate

NOTE: Principle drawing, showing valve block II and IV. The control blocks are "Open Center Blocks". Control blocks I and III are 3 spool blocks, control blocks II and IV are 4 spool blocks. See hydraulic circuit diagram for spool details. Each spool is provided with "Fine Controlling Grooves", ring grooves for hydraulically centering of the spool and “Pilot oil warm up and flushing“ grooves. Pilot pressure between 8 and 19 bar moves the spools in their fine control range. The spool (Fig. 6-12, Pos. 3) is especially designed to keep the pressure channel connected to the center channel during the function “Boom lowering“ is selected, so that pump flow is available for other functions. The Load Holding Valves are installed beneath a plug from the service port side of the control block. The MRV is a pilot operated pressure relief valve.

Version 2010/1

6-25

Control blocks and valves

Fig. 6-13

6-26

COMPONENTS

Control blocks and valves

Version 2010/1

COMPONENTS

Control blocks and valves

Legend for Fig. 6-13: (1)

Main relief valve (MRV) control block housing

(2)

Load check valve

(3)

Anti cavitation valve (ACV)

(4)

Secondary relief valve (SRV)

Explanation of the schematic drawing of the control block: The hydraulic oil flows (Qmin = 190 liters/min) through the control block from port P to T, if all spools are in neutral position ("open center“). z

Fig. 6-13 ,Pos. A: E.g. the spools pilot pressure is built up in the control pipe line a1. (Imagine the upper symbol box moves to the center position.) Now pump oil flows through check valve (Fig. 6-13, Pos. 2) to the user port A1 because the free flow circulation to the hydraulic reservoir is closed. The main relief valve (Fig. 6-13, Pos. 1) limits the maximum operation pressure in this circuit. Via port B1 the return oil from the user is flowing back to the hydraulic reservoir. During down hill travelling motion and stopping procedure (e.g. travel motors) the anti cavitation valves (Fig. 6-13, Pos. 3) prevent cavitation on the hydraulic motors, because during these short periods of time the hydraulic motor needs a higher oil supply than the pump can deliver.

z

Fig. 6-13, Pos. B: E.g. spool #3 moves up when pilot pressure is built up in the control pipe b3. Now the user port B3 is supplied with pump pressure. Via port A3 the return oil from the user is flowing back to the hydraulic reservoir. The secondary relief valve (Fig. 6-13, Pos. 4) is additional installed in this circuit to protect the circuit against extreme pressure. The short-time extreme pressure also closes the check valve (Fig. 6-13 Pos. 2) which protects the hydraulic pump against extreme pressure peaks. The check valves (Fig. 6-13, Pos. 2) also have the function of load holding valves, because during the fine controlling period all lines are interconnected (negative over-lapping). For a moment, the load pressure is higher than the pump pressure.

Version 2010/1

6-27

Control blocks and valves

COMPONENTS

Spool in "neutral position"

Pilot pressure connected to spool cab "a"

Fig. 6-14

6-28

Control blocks and valves

Version 2010/1

COMPONENTS

Control blocks and valves

Legend for Fig. 6-14: (1)

Main relief valve (MRV)

(2)

Reset springs

(3)

Fine control grooves

(4)

Spool

Function Reset springs (Fig. 6-14, Pos. 2) move the spool (Fig. 6-14, Pos. 4) into neutral position. Fine control grooves (Fig. 6-14, Pos. 3) provide for sensitive controlling, because a motion is always started while the pressure oil and the return oil first pass these fine control grooves before the spool (Fig. 6-14, Pos. 4) is interconnecting the entire groove to the user channel. In neutral position of spool (Fig. 6-14, Pos. 4) the pump oil is flowing back via port PU to the tank. Lower Picture Example: The spool is moved to left position: Port PU is closed and the connection through the check valve RP1 to the user (port A) is open. In addition, the connection from the other user side (port B return) is connected to the port T (return line to tank). The return line of the pressure relief valve MRV (Fig. 6-14, Pos. 1) is also connected to the port T.

Version 2010/1

6-29

Control blocks and valves

Fig. 6-15 6-30

COMPONENTS

Control blocks and valves Version 2010/1

COMPONENTS

Control blocks and valves

Legend for Fig. 6-15: (1)

Secondary relief valve (SRV)

(2)

Anti cavitation valve

(3)

Main relief valve (MRV)

(4)

Closing plate

(5)

Plug screw

(6)

Spring

(7)

Valve cone

(8)

Dust cap

(9)

Set screw

(10)

Lock nut

(11)

Spring, pilot part

(12)

Poppet

(13 + 16)

Jet bore

(14)

Spring, main cone

(15)

Main valve cone

(17)

Pilot oil dump line to tank

MRVs and SRVs are pilot operated relief valves. The MRV limits the max. pump supply line pressure. The SRV limits the max. possible pressure peak in the service-line. The valves have an „opening characteristic“. That means, that in case of contamination after the response procedure no further pressure increasing is possible and damages are avoided. z

Function: The circuit pressure P pushes the piston surface A of the main valve cone (Fig. 6-15, Pos. 15) with the force F1. Because there is the same pressure on the back side of the main cone via the jet bore (Fig. 6-15, Pos. 16), this, together with the spring (Fig. 6-15 Pos. 14) force, results in a force F2 that keeps the main cone closed. Via the jet bore (Fig. 6-15, Pos. 13) the circuit pressure is in front of the poppet (Fig. 6-15, Pos. 12). When the circuit pressure exceeds the setting value of the spring (Fig. 6-15, Pos. 11), the poppet opens against the force of the spring (Fig. 6-15, Pos. 11). As a result, force F2 decreases and there is no more balance condition between F1 and F2. The valve cone (Fig. 6-15, Pos. 15) is moved upwards by the greater force F1. That means now there is a direct connection from port P to T (tank).

ACVs serve for compensating a possible lack of oil when the SRV at the opposite port is actuated (see circuit diagram) and for avoiding cavitation damages. In addition, they serve to supply a user in case it is continuously moved by acceleration forces at zero position of the control spool. z

Function: The circuit pressure inside the spring chamber closes the valve cone (Fig. 6-15, Pos. 7). The back pressure of the return line acts on the surface of the valve cone (Fig. 6-15, Pos. 7). Whenever the pressure in the service-line is lower than the springs force, the valve cone opens by the force of the back pressure and hydraulic oil is additionally supplied.

Version 2010/1

6-31

Control blocks and valves

Fig. 6-16

6-32

COMPONENTS

Control blocks and valves

Version 2010/1

COMPONENTS

Control blocks and valves

Legend for Fig. 6-16 (load holding valve): (1)

Valve cone guide

(2)

Valve spring

(3)

Valve cone

(4)

Valve block housing

(5)

Passage from pump (P)

(6)

Passage to control block spool A/B

Control blocks II and IV (4 spool blocks) The load holding valves are fitted into separate spaces of the control block housing, one valve for each spool. The load holding valves have three tasks: 1. When the circuit pressure is higher than pump pressure due to the attachment weight, these valves prevent dropping of the attachment, within their sensitive (fine controlling) range. 2. Due to sudden pressure peaks in the service-lines the valves also protect the pump. 3. When two pump flows are used for one user, the valves ensure that at least the flow of one pump reaches the user in case one MRV is defect or no longer properly adjusted. That means: Up to the max. pressure of the defective valve, both load holding valves are open allowing the flow of both pumps to the user. Then one valve will be closed by the higher pressure and the flow of one pump only flows to the user. Function The system pressure pushes onto the front area of the valve cone (Fig. 6-16 Pos. 1). This force moves the valve cone against the spring (Fig. 6-16 Pos. 2) and allows the oil to flow from the pump to the spool. In neutral position of the spool no further flow is possible (see circuit diagram). If the spool is no longer in neutral position, the flow continues to the user. If, due to an external force, the pressure directed to the pump overcomes the pump line pressure, this pressure forces the valve onto its seat (closed position).

Version 2010/1

6-33

Control blocks and valves

Fig. 6-17 6-34

COMPONENTS

Control blocks and valves Version 2010/1

COMPONENTS

Control blocks and valves

Legend for Fig. 6-17 (load holding valve): (1)

Spool

(2)

Valve cone

(3)

Valve spring

(4)

Passage from P to A

(5)

Passage from B to T

NOTE: This is a principle drawing only, showing the location of load holding valves in valve block I and III. Control blocks I and III (3 Spool Blocks) The load holding valves are directly fitted into the spools (one on each side). The load holding valves have three tasks: When circuit pressure is higher than pump pressure due to attachment weight, these valves prevent dropping of the attachment, within their sensitive (fine controlling) range. Due to sudden pressure peaks in the service lines, the valves also protect the pump. When two pumps flows are used for one user, the load holding valves ensure that at least the flow of one pump reaches the user in case one MRV is defect or no longer properly adjusted. That means: Up to the max. pressure of the defective valve, both load holding valves are open allowing the flow of both pumps to the user. Then one valve will be closed by the higher pressure and the flow of one pump only flows to the user. Function In neutral position (upper picture) of the spool (Fig 6-17, Pos. 1) both valve cones (Fig. 6-17, Pos. 2) are closed by the springs (Fig. 6-17, Pos. 3). In a switched position (lower picture), the circuit pressure pushes onto the front area of the valve piston (Fig. 6-17, Pos. 2). This force moves the piston against the spring (Fig. 6-17, Pos. 3) and allows the oil to flow from the pump supply (Fig. 6-17, Pos. 4) to the user port (A) and from port B via boring (Fig. 6-17, Pos. 5) to the return oil passage. If, due to an external force, the pressure directed to the pump overcomes the pressure in the pump line, this pressure/force closes the valve (direction P to A).

Version 2010/1

6-35

Travel brake valve

6.13

TRAVEL BRAKE VALVE

Fig. 6-18

Travel brake valve

6-36

COMPONENTS

Version 2010/1

COMPONENTS

Travel brake valve

Task Travel brake valves control the oil flow from the hydraulic motor to the tank depending on the operating pressure. This braking action prevents the motors from overspeeding.

Function Spring force keeps the spool in the lowest flow position. With increasing operating pressure the opening for the return oil flow becomes larger. On its way to the hydraulic motor the oil flows from A to A1 or B to B1, depending on the selected travel motion.

Example The operating pressure at port A moves spool (Fig. 6-18, Pos. 1) against the force of the spring (Fig. 6-18, Pos. 2) and opens the way for the return oil (Fig. 6-18, Pos. B1 to B). The check valve (Fig. 6-18, Pos. 3) prevents a direct oil flow from B1 to B. If the operating pressure decreases to such an extend that the spring force overcomes the pressure, the flow to the tank becomes restricted, resulting in braking of the machine.

Version 2010/1

6-37

Pressure reducing valve

6.14

PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE

Fig. 6-19

Pressure reducing valve

6-38

COMPONENTS

Version 2010/1

COMPONENTS

Pressure reducing valve

Legend for Fig. 6-19: (1)

Set screw

(2)

Threaded sleeve

(3)

Compression spring

(4)

Spring chamber

(5)

Spool

(6)

Non-return valve

(7)

Cone

(8)

Control line

NOTE: Pressure reducing valves are installed to reduce the common 45 bar pilot pressure to a lower pressure for other systems, e.g. the track tensioning system or the travel parking brake. Function Pressure reducing valves type DR & DP are direct operated valves of 3 way design, e.g. with a pressure relief function on the reduced pressure side. At rest, the valve is normally open, and oil can flow from port P to A. Pressure in port A is also present on the end of the spool (Fig. 6-19, Pos. 5) via control line (Fig. 6-19, Pos. 8), opposing the compression spring (Fig. 6-19, Pos. 3). When the pressure in port A reaches the pressure level set at spring (Fig. 6-19, Pos. 3), the spool (Fig. 6-19, Pos. 5) moves to the control position and holds the pressure in port A constant. Oil to control the valve is taken from port A via the control line (Fig. 6-19, Pos. 8). If the pressure in port A still rises further due to external forces, the spool (Fig. 6-19, Pos. 5) is moved further towards the compression spring (Fig. 6-19, Pos. 3). This causes a flow path to be opened over the cone (Fig. 6-19, Pos. 7) of the control spool (Fig. 6-19, Pos. 5) to tank. Sufficient fluid then flows to tank to prevent any further rise in pressure. An optional non-return valve (Fig. 6-19, Pos. 6) is available to allow free flow from A to P.

Version 2010/1

6-39

4/2 Directional solenoid valves

6.15

4/2 DIRECTIONAL SOLENOID VALVES

Fig. 6-20

Directional solenoid valves

6-40

COMPONENTS

Version 2010/1

COMPONENTS

4/2 Directional solenoid valves

Legend for Fig. 6-20: (1)

Housing

(2)

Control spool

(3)

Plunger

(4)

Solenoid

(5)

Dust cap with stem for manual operation

(6)

Return spring

NOTE: These solenoid operated directional spool valves are installed to control the start, stop, and direction of an oil flow. Function When there is no flow through the valve, the control spool (Fig. 6-20, Pos. 2) is held in neutral or output position by means of the return springs (Fig. 6-20, Pos. 6). The control spool (Fig. 6-20, Pos. 2) is operated by means of oil immersed solenoid (Fig. 6-20, Pos. 4). The force of the solenoid (Fig. 6-20, Pos. 4) effects the control spool (Fig. 6-20, Pos. 2) by means of the plunger (Fig. 6-20, Pos. 3) and pushes it from its resting position to the required end position. This results in free flow from or P to B and A to T. When the solenoid (Fig. 6-20, Pos. 4) is de-energized, the control spool (Fig. 6-20, Pos. 2) is moved back to its resting position by means of return springs (Fig. 6-20, Pos. 6). An optional emergency operating device for manual operation (Fig. 6-20, Pos. 5) allows movement of the control spool (Fig. 6-20, Pos. 2) without energizing the solenoid.

Version 2010/1

6-41

Pressure double stage valve

6.16

PRESSURE DOUBLE STAGE VALVE

Fig. 6-21

Pressure double stage valve

6-42

COMPONENTS

Version 2010/1

COMPONENTS

Pressure double stage valve

Legend for Fig. 6-21: (1)

Pilot valve with valve seat

(2)

Valve poppet

(3)

Compression spring

(4)

Main valve with sleeve

(5)

Main piston

(6)

Closing spring

(7 + 8)

Set screws

(9)

Piston

(10)

Pin

(11 + 12)

Jet bore

(13 + 14)

Lock nut

NOTE: The pressure double stage valve is a remote controlled pressure relief valve, actuated by hydraulic pressure. The individual relieve pressure is determined by the pilot pressure. Function The valve poppet (Fig. 6-21, Pos. 2) is connected via the jet bores (Fig. 6-21, Pos. 11 and Pos. 12) with port P. If static pressure increases above the set pressure value, the valve poppet (Fig. 6-21 Pos. 2) opens and allows oil to flow freely to tank (T1). This oil generates a pressure drop in the spring chamber of the main spool, the closing force of the spring (Fig. 6-21, Pos. 6) is cancelled, and the main piston (Fig. 6-21, Pos. 5) opens to allow the pump flow to tank (T2). Damped opening and closing is obtained by the throttled volumetric change. By applying external pressure of Pst max = 45 bar to the main spool (Fig. 6-21, Pos. 9) via port X, the pre-tensioning of the pressure spring (Fig. 6-21, Pos. 3) is increased by the amount of the piston stroke "S", and system pressure is increased correspondingly. The possible pressure increase p is 440 bar max. or 440 bar minus the basic setting. The setting is fixed by means of the setting screw (Fig. 6-21, Pos. 7) and lock nut (Fig. 6-21, Pos. 13); 1 turn of the screw = 150 bar.

Version 2010/1

6-43

Hydraulic cylinder

6.17

HYDRAULIC CYLINDER

Fig. 6-22

Hydraulic cylinder, layout

6-44

COMPONENTS

Version 2010/1

COMPONENTS

Hydraulic cylinder

Legend for Fig. 6-22: (1)

Bushing

(2)

Grease fitting

(3)

Cylinder head with rod guide and rod seal

(4)

Snap ring

(5)

Piston rod

(6)

Piston seal

(7)

Cylinder barrel

(8)

Main piston seal

(9)

Back up ring

(10)

Piston

(11)

Piston nut

(12)

Bushing

(13)

Hydraulic port to piston side

(14)

Set screw connection of piston nut and piston

(15)

Set screw secured with a prick-punch (acc. to works standard)

(16)

Rod seal to piston

(17)

Back up ring

(18)

O-ring

(19)

Hydraulic port to rod side

(20)

Cylinder head seal to barrel

(21)

O-ring

(22)

Back up ring

(23)

Buffer ring

(24)

Rod seal

(25)

Back up ring for rod buffer ring

(26)

Rod packing

(27)

Rod seal

(28)

Back up ring

(29)

Dust seal

(30)

Dust seal

(31)

Snap ring

Version 2010/1

6-45

Hydraulic cylinder

COMPONENTS

Function Hydraulic cylinders (also called linear hydraulic motors) are actuators which convert fluid power into mechnical power. The cylinders get their power from pressurized hydraulic fluid, typically oil. Hydraulic cylinders are used at high pressures to produce large forces and presice movements. Therefore they are constructed of strong materials and designed to withstand large forces. The hydraulic cylinder is the the actuator or "motor" side of the system. The "generator"side of the system is the hydraulic pump which brings in a regulated flow of oil to the bottom side of the cylinder to move the piston rod outwards. The oil in the chamber on the rod side is pushed back to the oil tank. The force of the cylinder depends on the hydraulic oil pressure and the piston face. The force F is given by the formula F = p A, where p is the pressure (in N/m²) and A is the face (in m²) of the piston the pressure acts on. That means, that the force of the hydraulic oil can be multiplied as needed, the maxium force is only limited by the dimension of the piston face. Structure The layout of the hydraulic cylinder is shown in Fig. 6-22. The piston (Fig. 6-22, Pos. 10) separates the two sides of the cylinder barrel internally. To prevent leakage from one side to the other, the piston is fitted with the piston seal (Fig. 6-22, Pos. 6) and the rod seal (Fig. 6-22, Pos. 16). At the other side of the cylinder, there are 4 different seal packages: – a dust seal (Fig. 6-22, Pos. 29) the prevent dirt beeing drawn into the cylinder – a rod packing (Fig. 6-22, Pos. 26) as the main seal to the outside – a buffer ring (Fig. 6-22, Pos. 23) to prevent leakage between the cylinder head and the piston rod – a cylinder head seal (Fig. 6-22, Pos. 20) to prevent the leakage from the fit between cylinder head and barrel. The cylinder head (Fig. 6-22, Pos. 10) is bolted to the cylinder barrel (Fig. 6-22, Pos. 7).

WARNING During commissioning and when new hydraulic cylinders are installed, first of all, the air has to be bled from the cylinders, refer to the ’air bleeding’ procedure described in the TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL.

NOTE: In case abnormal movements of the hydraulic cylinder are noticed, carry out a cylinder bypass test, refer to the TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL.

6-46

Version 2010/1

COMPONENTS

Hydraulic cylinder

Cylinder data markings, with the following information, are located at the piston rod side (sealing area) of the cylinder tube.

Fig. 6-23

Hydraulic cylinder, data markings

Legend for Fig. 6-23 (example for cylinder data markings): (1)

Piston diameter in [mm]

(2)

Piston rod diameter in [mm]

(3)

Piston stroke in [mm]

(4)

Symbol of producer

(5)

Consecutive number (serial number) for each year of production

(6)

Month of production (06 = June)

(7)

Last two digits of the year of production (10 = 2010)

(8)

Part-no.

Version 2010/1

6-47

Slew ring

COMPONENTS

6.18

SLEW RING

Fig. 6-24

Slew ring

6-48

Version 2010/1

COMPONENTS

Slew ring

Legend for Fig. 6-24: (1)

Seal ring

(2)

Outer ring gear

(3)

Thread for mounting to car body

(4)

Axial roller bearing, bottom

(5)

Lower internal bearing ring

(6)

Radial roller bearing

(7)

Axial roller bearing, top

(8)

Upper internal bearing ring

(9)

Bore for mounting to superstructure

Function The slew ring is the movable connection between the superstructure and the undercarriage. The bearing is from a cylindrical roller design with three roller paths, two for axial guiding (Fig. 6-24, Pos. 4 and 7) and one for radial guiding (Fig. 6-24, Pos. 6). The outer gear is directly machined to the outer bearing ring (Fig. 6-24, Pos. 2). The slew ring bearing is connected to the central lubrication system. The outer ring gear is lubricated by a separate lubrication system SLS for which a special open gear lubricant is used. NOTE: For assembly and additional checks refer to Parts & Service News AH00511, AH01532, and AH02513 (latest edition).

Version 2010/1

6-49

Slew ring

6-50

COMPONENTS

Version 2010/1

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

7. MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Version 2010/1

7-1

General

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

7.1

GENERAL

Fig. 7-1

Circuit diagram of the main hydraulic pumps and pump regulation

7-2

Version 2010/1

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

General

General layout (hydraulic only) Legend for Fig. 7-1: (1-4)

Main hydraulic pumps

(8.1)

Pilot pressure pump

(33)

Pilot pressure filter unit

(152)

Pressure relief valve – energy efficiency (X3: ~18 bar)

(252.1)

45 bar pressure relief valve

(252.2)

60 bar pressure relief valve

(253.1)

Cchange-over valve: "Electronic or hydraulic pump regulation"

(253.2)

Pressure relief valve: " Pump regulation pressure X1 at hydraulic pump regulation" (hydraulic constant regulation mode)

(255.4)

Pressure relief valve: "Remote control pressure" ½ Qmax flow reduction for the warming-up period and flow reduction for pump #1

(57K517)

Solenoid valve:Qmin flow for all main pumps

(57K517a)

Solenoid valve: "Remote control pressure" ½ Qmax flow reduction for all main pumps

(57K561-1)

Proportional solenoid valve: "Pump regulation pressure X1 at electronic pump regulation" (Standard operation mode)

(57K626)

Solenoid valve: "Remote control pressure" ½ Qmax flow reduction for pump #1 only

(57K630)

Solenoid valve: " Pump regulation pressure X1 = 45 bar for pump #1" (fixed pump for swing)

(57K631)

Solenoid valve: " Pump regulation pressure X1 = 45 bar for pump #3" (fixed pump for swing)

(57K646)

Flow reduction (pump No. 2 + No. 4)

(57K647)

Flow reduction (pump No. 3)

(57K648)

Flow reduction (pump No. 1)

Version 2010/1

7-3

General

Fig. 7-2

7-4

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Circuit diagram of the main hydraulic pumps and pump regulation

Version 2010/1

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

General

Pump regulation system ("open sensing system") General z

The system controls the output flow of the main pumps, dependent on engine power, most efficiently.

z

It limits the power request of the hydraulic pumps according to the maximum engine power (Electronic pump regulation with micro-controller RC4-4).

z

For additional functions, such as rotating dependent or temperature-dependent flow reduction.

Function X1 – Pump Regulation Pressure (0–34 bar): The power controller of the main pumps can be remotely controlled by applying an external pilot pressure (X1) at port XLR to the spring chamber of the power control valve. The start of destroking can be varied in proportion to the applied pressure X1. X2 – Pilot Pressure (45 bar): Constant pilot pressure to regulate the main pumps at special circumstances, e.g. to fix pump #1 and # 3 in Qmax position when swinging. X3 – Remote Control Pressure (0 / 15 / 45 bar): Basic setting Qmin (0 bar), the flow rate increases with the pilot pressure X3 at port Pst, up to Qmax (45 bar). The hyperbolic power control is superimposed on the pilot pressure signal and keeps the specified drive power constant. (p x Vg = constant). The flow rates are: Qmin:

X3 = 0 bar

½ Qmax:

X3 = 15 bar

Qmax:

X3 = 45 bar

X4 – Pump Support Pressure (60 bar): Constant pilot pressure to support the regulation function at low operating pressure and to lubricate the main pump bearings.

Version 2010/1

7-5

General

Fig. 7-3

7-6

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Circuit diagram of the main hydraulic pumps and pump regulation

Version 2010/1

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

General

Pump regulation system general Function Solenoid Valve 57K517: If de-energized pumps #1-4 are in Qmin position. It gets energized as soon as one of the control levers/pedals has been operated, and stays energized as long as the temperature state is above T3. It gets de-energized whenever all controls are in neutral position for more than 20 seconds and a temperature state between T1 and T3. Solenoid Valve 57K517a: The solenoid is de-energized as long as the temperature state is below „T2“ (depending on the filled in hydraulic oil) shown in the table ( pumps #1-4 are in ½ Qmax. position for warm up). It gets energized at a temperature state between T2 and T4 as soon as one of the control levers/pedals has been operated, and gets de-energized with 2 seconds delay whenever all controls are in neutral position.

Pump flow control (i.e. pause = not moving the joysticks and pedals OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

Oil temperature

Flow reduction 2 seconds after pause

Flow reduction 20 seconds after pause

Flow reduction 20 seconds after pause

Oil flow

Fig. 7-4

Version 2010/1

7-7

General

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Solenoid Valve 57K626: If energized, pump #1 is in the same regulation mode like pumps #2, #3 and #4. If de-energized, the flow of pump#1 is limited to ½ Qmax by the function of pressure relief valve (255.4). It gets de-energized when the swing function in main control block 1 is activated, or when the hydraulic oil temperature is below „T2“. Normal operating conditions without swinging

Normal operating conditions with swinging (fast speed)

57K517

1

1

57K517a

1

1

57K626

1

0

(1) = Energized (0) = De-energized Proportional solenoid valve 57K561-1: This valve, connected to the RC4-4 micro-controller (electronic pump regulation), creates a X1-pressure depending on the load of the engine. This X1-pressure is the information for the pumps to destroke from Qmax into Qmin position, to keep the engine at rated speed of approx. 1800 rpm. Solenoid valve 57K630: If energized, pump regulation pressure X1 = 45 bar for pump #1 (fixed pump for swinging) Solenoid valve 57K631: If energized, pump regulation pressure X1 = 45 bar for pump #3 (fixed pump for swinging with fast speed) Pressure relief valve 255.4: "Remote control pressure" (X3) z

½ Qmax flow reduction during the warming-up period for all pumps by the function of solenoid valve 57K517a.

z

½ Qmax flow reduction only for pump #1 while swinging with max. speed by the function of solenoid valve 57K626.

Pressure relief valve 253.2: Pump regulation pressure X1 at "Hydraulic pump regulation" (hydraulic constant regulation mode) by the function of change-over valve (22). Change-over valve 253.1: Change-over three way cock valve to select "Electronic or constant regulation mode".

7-8

Version 2010/1

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

General

Pressure relief valve 152: "Remote control pressure" (Energy efficiency ~ 18 bar) Pressure relief valve 152 in connection with the MTC controlled solenoid valves 57K646, 57K647 and 57K648 increases the energy efficiency by optimizing the oil flow of all main pumps under definite combinations of working movements. Solenoid valve 57K646: If energized, main pumps #2 and #4 with optimized oil flow. Solenoid valve 57K647: If energized, main pump #3 with optimized oil flow. Solenoid valve 57K648: If energized, main pump #1 with optimized oil flow.

Version 2010/1

7-9

Main pumps

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

7.2

MAIN PUMPS

Fig. 7-5

Main pumps

7-10

Version 2010/1

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

7.2.1

Main pumps

LOCATION OF PUMPS

Legend for Fig. 7-5: (1-4)

(5.1)

(5.2)

(8.1)

(8.2)

Axial piston pump (swash plate type) theoretical for all working motions Flow rate, each Drive speed*

1034 Liters/min n = 1378 rpm

Axial piston pumpfor oil cooler fan drive Theoretical flow rate Drive speed*

214 Liters/min n = 2000 rpm

Axial piston pump for radiator fan drive Theoretical flow rate Drive speed*

214 Liters/min n = 2000 rpm

Gear pumpfor pilot pressure supply Theoretical flow rate Drive speed*

138 Liters/min n = 1378 rpm

Gear pump PTO gear lubrication Theoretical flow rate Drive speed*

138 Liters/min n = 1378 rpm

NOTE: * at 1800 rpm input drive speed

Version 2010/1

7-11

Main pumps

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

7.2.2

PUMP BEARING FLUSHING / LUBRICATION

Fig. 7-6

Pump bearing flushing / lubrication

7-12

Version 2010/1

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Main pumps

Legend for Fig. 7-6: (1 – 4)

Main pumps

(20.1 – 20.4)

Orifice (one for each main pump)

(33)

Filter for pilot pressure

(B-E)

Ports for X4-pressure (pump support pressure)

(U)

Port for the pump bearing lubrication

The installed main pumps are provided with an external lubrication system for flushing the drive shaft bearing and shaft seal. Oil supply is provided from the X4-pressure circuit. To reach the restricted guidance of the external bearing lubrication, the throttle screw (located behind the union at port U) must be screwed in all the way. An information sign is fixed at the pump.

Fig. 7-7

Circuit diagram

Version 2010/1

7-13

Main pumps

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

7.2.3

OPERATING PRINCIPLE

Fig. 7-8

Main hydraulic pump A4VSLO 750 LR3DN / 30L

7-14

Version 2010/1

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Main pumps

Legend for Fig. 7-8: (1)

Drive shaft

(11)

Drive through (auxiliary pump drive)

(2)

Cylindrical roller bearing

(12)

Swash plate

(3)

Slide shoes

(13)

Qmin stop bolt

(4)

Angle indicator

(14)

Power control valve

(5)

Servo piston

(15)

Pressure balance valve

(6)

Rocker cam

(16)

Power curve correction

(7)

Barrel with pistons

(17)

Pressure cut-off valve

(8)

Case (rear)

(18)

Qmax stop bolt

(9)

Cylindrical roller bearing

(19)

Remote control valve

(10)

Impeller pump

Main hydraulic pump A4VSO750i Type code explanation: A4VSO

750

i

L Rotation

Series Displacement in cm3 at one (1) revolution Axial piston pump series 4, variable displacement ,swash plate design for open circuits with charge pump Function and Characteristics: z

The A4VSO750i variable displacement axial piston pump in swash plate design is intended for drives in open circuit operation.

z

The flow volume is proportional to the drive speed and the displacement. By adjusting the swash plate an infinitely variable flow adjustment is possible.

z

Pumps of the same nominal size can be built onto the trough drive. Combinations with gear pumps are also possible.

Version 2010/1

7-15

Main pumps

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Symbol of main hydraulic pump A4VSO750i

Fig. 7-9

7-16

Symbol of main hydraulic pump A4VSO750i

Version 2010/1

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Main pumps

Legend for Fig. 7-9: (1)

Main pump (swash plate pump, variable displacement)

(2)

Impeller pump

(3)

Pump bearing

(4)

Drive shaft

(5)

Non-return valves

(6)

Remote control valve

(6.1)

Mechanical stroke limitation*

(6.2)

Remote pressure (PST) operated piston for item 6

(6.3)

Mechanical stroke limitation*

(7)

Spool valve (pressure balance valve)

(8)

Throttle valve

(9)

Power control valve

(10)

Throttle valve

(11)

Pressure cut-off valve

(12)

Auxiliary pump (gear pump)

(13)

Servo piston

(14)

Slipper pad piston

(15)

Lever

(16)

Cam

(17)

Through drive shaft

NOTE: * Factory side adjusted, no field adjustment required (B/B1)

Pressure port

(S)

Suction line

(MB)

Operating pressure test port

(ML)

Charging pressure test port

(MST)

Control pressure test port

(R)

Filler and bleeder port

(P)

Pump support pressure (”X4”-pressure)

(PST)

Remote control pressure port (”X3”-pressure)

(U)

Bearing lubrication port

(XLR)

Regulating pressure port (”X1”-pressure)

Version 2010/1

7-17

Main pumps

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Sectional drawing of regulating valves

Fig. 7-10

7-18

Sectional drawing of regulating valves

Version 2010/1

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Main pumps

Legend for Fig. 7-10: (6)

Remote control valve

(6.1)

Mechanical stroke limitation

(6.2)

Remote pressure (PST) operated piston for item 6

(6.3)

Mechanical stroke limitation

(7)

Spool valve (pressure balance valve)

(9)

Power control valve

(11)

Pressure cut-off valve

(13)

Positioning piston

(14)

Slipper pad piston

(15)

Lever

NOTE: Also refer to Fig. 7-9.

Version 2010/1

7-19

Main pumps

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Main pump at Qmin (190 l/min, no lever or pedal activated)

Fig. 7-11

7-20

Operating principle

Version 2010/1

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Main pumps

Qmin position: When are the pumps in Qmin position? A

Engine at standstill

B

Engine running and the controls are not used for 20 sec. or longer at temperature state between T1 and T3.

C

Engine running and via (VHMS Service Menu) 57K517 activated (Qmin position)

Example C with the following conditions: z

Engine running (high idle)

z

Pump circuit pressure less than X4 = 60 bar (pump support pressure).

z

X1 = 34 bar (pump regulation pressure), this pressure will not influence the Qmin position under these conditions.

z

X3 = 0 bar (remote control pressure); 57K517 de-energized (Qmin activated) for pumps #2, #3 and #4. For pump #1, 57K517 de-energized and 57K626 energized.

z

X4 = 60 bar (pump support pressure). Pump support pressure is present at valve #7, the slipper pad of piston #14 and the small area side of the positioning piston #13.

Response of pump control mechanism: Valve #7 moves to position "b" because the X4 pressure exceeds the spring force, since the oil behind nozzle (Fig. 7-11, Pos. 8) flows through valve #6 (which is in position "a", due to the missing remote control pressure X3) back to tank. Pump support pressure X4 passes valve #7 position "b" and flows via power control valve #9 position "a" to the large area side of positioning piston #13 Because the large area side of positioning piston #13 is approximately three times larger than the small area side, the pump support pressure X4 of 60 bar present on both sides, resulting in stronger force at the large area side, keeps the pump in Qmin position. NOTE: The pump remains in Qmin position.

Version 2010/1

7-21

Main pumps

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Main pump at Qmax

Fig. 7-12

7-22

Operating principle

Version 2010/1

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Main pumps

Qmax position: (remember Q means volume) When does the pump move into Qmax position? z

Engine running

z

and hydraulic oil at normal operating temperature (>T2) (57K517a is energized)

z

and the controls individually used for individual movements (or 57K517 activated via VHMS – Qmax position)

z

and a pump pressure below start of de-stroking.

Example with the following conditions: z

Engine running (>1800 rpm)

z

Pump pressure between 60 bar and 300 bar, present at the slipper pad of piston #14 and the small area side of the positioning piston #13

z

X1 = 34 bar (pump regulation pressure via 57K561-1 or constant pressure XLR in hydraulic mode)

z

X3 = 45 bar (remote control pressure); 57K517 + 57K517a energized and 57K646 + 57K647 de-energized for pumps #2, #3 and #4. For pump #1, 57K517 + 57K517a energized and 57K648 de-energized

z

X4 = 60 bar (pump support pressure), present at valve #7.

Response of pump control mechanism: Valve #7 moves to position "a" because the spring force is supported by the X4 pressure, since the oil flow back to tank is blocked at valve #6 (which is in position "b", due to the 45 bar remote control pressure X3). The large area side of positioning piston #13 is connected, via power control valve (Fig. 7-12, Pos. 9) position "a" and pressure balance valve (Fig. 7-12, Pos. 7) position "a", to the return oil line. The pump moves into Qmax position, because the pump pressure acts only at the small area side of positioning piston #13. NOTE: The pump moves into Qmax position

Version 2010/1

7-23

Main pumps

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Main pump at ½Qmax

Fig. 7-13

7-24

Operating principle

Version 2010/1

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Main pumps

½Qmax position: When does the pumps move into ½Qmax position? z

Engine running

z

and hydraulic oil below normal operating temperature (< T2)

z

and the controls frequently used within 20 sec.

z

or the controls not used at a temperature state between T3 and T4

z

and a pump pressure below start of de-stroking.

Example with the following conditions: z

Engine running (> 1800 rpm)

z

Pump pressure between 60 bar and 300 bar, present at the slipper pad of piston #14 and the small area side of the positioning piston #13

z

X1 = 34 bar (pump regulation pressure via 57K561-1)

z

X3 = 15 bar (remote control pressure); 57K517 energized and 57K517a de-energized for pumps #2, #3 and #4. For pump #1, 57K517 energized and 57K626 de-energized or energized.

z

X4 = 60 bar (pump support pressure), present at valve #7.

Response of pump control mechanism: Valve #7 moves to an intermediate position (in-between "a" and "b"), since a certain amount of oil behind nozzle (Fig. 7-13, Pos. 8) flows through valve #6 (which is also in an intermediate position, due to the 15 bar remote control pressure X3) back to tank. The large area side of positioning piston #13 is connected, via power control valve (Fig. 7-13, Pos. 9) position "a" and pressure balance valve (Fig. 7-13, Pos. 7), to the return oil line. The pump moves into ½Qmax position, because the return oil flow through pressure balance valve (Fig. 7-13, Pos. 7) is restricted (due to its intermediate position), resulting in a pressure at the large area side of the positioning piston (Fig. 7-13, Pos. 13). NOTE: The pump moves into ½Q-max position.

Version 2010/1

7-25

Main pumps

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Main pump destroking

Fig. 7-14

7-26

Operating principle

Version 2010/1

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Main pumps

Destroking: (pump moves from Qmax into of Qmin direction) When does the pumps start to destroke? z

Engine running

z

and hydraulic at normal operating temperature (> T2)

z

and VHMS Service Menu "Qmax" deactivated

z

and the load stalls the engine RPM below 1800 rpm. (The electronic pump regulation system will reduce the X1-pressure.)

z

or with pump pressure above ≈180 bar (hydraulic constant regulation) (constant X1-pressure of approximately 13 bar).

Example with the following conditions: z

Engine running (> 1800 rpm)

z

Pump pressure 180 bar at the main relief valve, present at the slipper pad of piston #14 and the small area side of the positioning piston #13.

z

X1 = 13 bar (constant regulation pressure adjustable at pressure relief valve 253.2) Change-over valve (253.1) switched to hydraulic mode.

z

X3 = 45 bar (remote control pressure); 57K517 energized and 57K517a energized for pumps #2, #3 and #4. For pump #1, 57K517 energized and 57K626 energized.

z

X4 = 60 bar (pump support pressure), present at valve #7.

Response of pump control mechanism: Valve #7 moves to position "a" because the spring force is supported by the X4-pressure, since the oil flow back to tank is blocked at valve #6 (which is in position "b", due to the 45 bar remote control pressure X3). The operating pressure (with the value for start of de-stroking) at the slipper pad of piston #14 moves the power control valve (Fig. 7-14, Pos. 9) into position "b" (against the spring force supported by the X1-pressure). This in turn connects the operating pressure to the large area side of positioning piston #13. Because the large area side of positioning piston #13 is approximately three times larger than the small area side, the operating pressure present on both sides, resulting in stronger force at the large area side, moving the pump in Qmin direction. NOTE: The pump de-strokes until the forces at positioning piston #13 are balanced.

Version 2010/1

7-27

Main pumps

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Main pump – pressure cut-off

Fig. 7-15

7-28

Operating principle

Version 2010/1

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Main pumps

Pressure cut-off valve: (DR control valve, Pump moves into Qmin position) When is the pressure cut-off valve active? z

Engine running

z

and with pump pressure above ≈300 bar

Example with the following conditions: Engine running (> 1800 rpm) Pump pressure 300 bar X1 = 34 bar (pump regulation pressure via 57K561-1) X3 = 45 bar (remote control pressure via 57K517 / 57K517a) X4 = 60 bar (pump support pressure)

Response of pump control mechanism: Independent of the position of power control valve #9, the pressure cut-off valve #11 causes the pump to de-stroke to the pre-adjusted Qmin position. The operating pressure moves the pressure cut-off valve #11 (at set pressure) into position "b" and flows to the large area side of positioning piston #13. Because the large area side of positioning piston #13 is approximately three times larger than the small area side, the operating pressure present on both sides, resulting in stronger force at the large area side, moving the pump in Qmin position. NOTE: The pump moves into Qmin position.

Version 2010/1

7-29

Main pumps

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

7.2.4

CHECKS / ADJUSTMENTS

Fig. 7-16

Checks / adjustments

7-30

Version 2010/1

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Main pumps

Legend for Fig. 7-16: (1)

Remote control valve

(2)

Torque adjustment bolt

(3)

Pressure balance valve

(4)

Start of destroking

(5)

Power curve correction

(6)

Pressure cut-off valve

(7)

Qmax stop bolt

(8)

Angle indicator

Average length "L" of the adjustment bolts: Location:

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Length (mm)

13.8

26.9

8.0

8.1

---

6.0

34.4

NOTE: The length "L" is an orientation only if the adjustment is totally out of requirements. They must not be used for final adjustments.

CAUTION The detail for (Fig. 7-16, Pos. 5) shows the position of the housing edge and the edge of the excentric set bolt. The example shows them in parallel position which is mostly not the case. The adjustment should never be altered.

Pressure balance valve (Fig. 7-16, Pos. 3)

CAUTION The pressure balance valve is bench adjusted. There is no field setting with a sufficient result possible.

Version 2010/1

7-31

Main pumps

Fig. 7-17

7-32

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Checks / adjustments

Version 2010/1

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Main pumps

Start of destroking (LR valve), (Fig. 7-17) The purpose of this check is to make sure the pump starts destroking at an operating pressure of 180 bar with a pump regulation pressure X1 of 13 bar. 1. Connect a 400 bar pressure gauge to the pressure test port at the respective high pressure filter for the pumps being checked. 2. Connect a 60 bar pressure gauge to pressure test port M18 at the control and filter panel (X1-pressure). 3. Move the change-over valve into position “Hydraulic” (constant regulation mode). 4. Insert an Allen key into the angle indicator bolt (see illustration) for better visibility of the start of destroking. 5. Start the engine, let it run in high idle and adjust the X1-pressure to 13 bar at pressure relief valve (253.2). 6. Stall the hydraulic for the pump to be checked and alter the operating pressure with the MRV between 160 and 200 bar. Start of destroking should be at an operating pressure of 180 bar, shown at the gauge connected to the high pressure filter. If readjustment is required, proceed as follows: z

With the MRV, adjust the operating pressure to 180 bar.

z

Loosen lock nut #6 (power control valve).

z

Turn set bolt #7 so that the pump is still in Qmax position, but just at the beginning of destroking.

z

Tighten lock nut #6.

7. Readjust the operating pressure at the MRV to 310+5 bar and the X1-pressure at the pressure relief valve (253.2) to approx. 15 bar. (For exact values refer to the final test report.) 8. Remove Allen key and gauges. 9. Move the change-over valve back to eletronic pump regulation.

Version 2010/1

7-33

Main pumps

Fig. 7-18

7-34

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Checks / adjustments

Version 2010/1

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Main pumps

Pressure cut-off valve (DR control valve), (Fig. 7-18) The purpose of this check is to make sure that the pump is in Qmin position at an operating pressure 300±10 bar. 1. Connect a 400 bar pressure gauge to the pressure test port at the respective high pressure filter for the pumps being checked. 2. Insert an Allen key into the angle indicator bolt (see illustration) for better visibility of the start of destroking. 3. Start the engine and run in high idle, stall the hydraulic for the pump that is to be checked and alter the operating pressure ± 20 bar from the starting pressure of 310+5 bar. 4. The angle indicator must indicate Qmin position at a pressure of 300±10 bar shown at the gauge connected to the high pressure filter. If readjustment is required proceed as follow: z

Loosen lock nut (Fig. 7-18, Pos. 8).

z

Turn set bolt (Fig. 7-18, Pos. 9), so that the pump is in Qmin position at the required value.

z

Tighten lock nut (Fig. 7-18, Pos. 8).

5. Re-adjust the operating pressure at the MRV to 310+5 bar 6. Remove Allen key and gauges.

Version 2010/1

7-35

Main pumps

Fig. 7-19

7-36

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Checks / adjustments

Version 2010/1

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Main pumps

Qmax and torque adjustment bolt (Fig. 7-19) 1. Unscrew cap nut (Fig. 7-19, Pos. 10 or 14). 2. Loosen the lock nut (Fig. 7-19, Pos. 11 or 13). 3. Turn the stop bolt (Fig. 7-19, Pos. 12 or 15) in or out until required length "X" or "Y" is obtained. 4. Tighten the lock nut and screw on cap nut (Fig. 7-19, Pos. 10 or 14).

NOTE: If, in exceptional cases the necessary high pressure, required for the secondary valve adjustment, can not be obtained, the cause could be insufficient pump delivery. To enable the adjustment, screw in the torque adjustment bolt (Fig. 7-19, Pos. 15) two turns. After the adjustments are finished the torque adjustment bolt (Fig. 7-19, Pos. 15) must be reset to the initial setting.

WARNING Do not turn the torque adjustment bolt (Fig. 7-19, Pos. 15) too far out, because this can cause serious damage to the pump. The pump moves over 0 (zero) position into the opposite drive direction: suction line becomes pressure line and pressure line becomes suction line.

NOTE: If the machine works at an altitude above 3600 meters, the maximum displacement of the pumps must be reduced by changing the Qmax stop bolt setting according to PARTS & SERVICE NEWS AH05515 (latest edition).

Version 2010/1

7-37

Electronic Pump Regulation System

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

7.3

ELECTRONIC PUMP REGULATION SYSTEM

Fig. 7-20

Electronic pump regulation system

7-38

Version 2010/1

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

7.3.1

Electronic Pump Regulation System

ELECTRONIC LOAD LIMITING CONTROL - GENERAL

The drive train of the excavator consists of a Diesel engine, several hydraulic pumps, which supply cylinders and hydraulic motors. The load limiting control ensures optimum use of the power required for the excavator under varying operating conditions and avoiding overload of the Diesel engine. Fig. 7-20 shows the principle of the electronic load limiting control. The RC4-4 (10K032) processes the following input signals: z

Diesel engine speed (Pin 33) from magnetic pick-up (52B064).

z

Switch signal (Pin 37) from engine control (25K014-1), 24 V if n > 300 rpm.

The RC4-4 (10K032) processes the following output signals: z

Signal value to control the proportional solenoid valve 57K561-1 (Pin 31).

z

Switch signals (Pin 15 and 29), diagnostic of the RC4-4 (10K032).

The Diesel engine drives four variable displacement pumps by means of a PTO-gearbox. Each pump is equipped with a hydraulic power controller (HPC). This controller limits the input torque of the pump to an adjusted command value (X1-pressure, for start of destroking). The command value (X1-pressure) is present via proportional solenoid valve 57K561-1 at the hydraulic power controllers of each pump. The actual speed of the engine is measured with a speed sensor at the flywheel. NOTE: The auxiliary hydraulic pumps and other consumers can be operated without being directly affected by the load limiting control. The control algorithm of the load limiting control always compares the actual engine speed with the rated load speed. With increasing load the engine torque will rise and the engine speed will drop. For this reason the electronic load limiting control will be initiated when the load speed falls below 1800 rpm, i.e. the torque of the main pumps will be lowered (by reducing the X1-pressure) until the rated speed of 1800 rpm is attained again.

Version 2010/1

7-39

Electronic Pump Regulation System

Fig. 7-21

7-40

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Electronic pump regulation system

Version 2010/1

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

7.3.2

Electronic Pump Regulation System

MICROCONTROLLER RC4-4

The RC4-4 microcontroller is used for the programmable control of a maximum of four proportional solenoids and four additional switching functions. As input signals, the microprocessor processes analog voltages in the 0 V to 5 V range and switching information. All inputs are protected against overvoltage and electrical interference. As output signals, the output stages of the RC4-4 deliver closed loop controlled currents for the connection of proportional solenoids. The analog voltage output is suitable for the simple forwarding of analog information to other electronic circuits. Characteristics z

Closed loop control of solenoid currents, i.e. independent of voltage and temperature.

z

Pulse width modulated (PWM) solenoid currents for minimal hysteresis.

z

Internal buzzer for programmable monitoring of functions or errors.

Setting and Display Facilities All calibration operations and the display of functions, faults and system variables are connected via the serial interface to a PC w ith the BODEM 24 software.

Fig. 7-22

RC4-4 - Unit dimensions

Fig. 7-23

RC4-4 - Block circuit diagram

Version 2010/1

7-41

Electronic Pump Regulation System

Fig. 7-24

7-42

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Checks and adjustments

Version 2010/1

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

7.3.3

Electronic Pump Regulation System

CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

Microcontroller RC4-4 (Fig. 7-24) The adjustment of the X1-pressure can be done with two different methods: 1. "A" : with 24 V supply to separating terminals at the X2-board, 2. "B" : with a laptop and the BODEM 24 software connected to the serial interface 20X110 (located in the operators cab)

NOTE: Procedure 2 should only be carried out by authorized personnel [dealer or KMG-factory staff ), because it is possible to influence the behavior of the pump regulation system. On the following pages only the necessary setups are described. If additional information is required, please contact KMG-Service department.

Version 2010/1

7-43

Electronic Pump Regulation System

Fig. 7-25

7-44

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Checks and adjustments

Version 2010/1

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Electronic Pump Regulation System

Microcontroller RC4-4 (Fig. 7-25) Method "A" X1-pressure adjustment with 24 V supply to separating terminals at the X2-switch over the 11X_09 board. Pre-conditions: Normal operating temperature, correct pilot pressure setting and the system must be free of air. 1. Make sure the change-over valve is in position “Electronic Pump Regulation”. 2. Connect a pressure gauge to test port (M18), using a long pressure gauge hose to be able reading the pressure in front of the 11X_09 board. 3. Selection of adjusting mode: Turn the main key switch in on position and activate the adjusting mode as follows: Connect 24 V, simultaneously to terminals 11X_09-4 and -5 for 10 seconds, using two test leads and disconnect the voltage thereafter. 4. Selection of the required proportional solenoid valve: With the main key switch still in ON position, the output terminal of proportional solenoid valve 57K561-1 is directly selected. Since there is only one engine with one proportional solenoid valve installed, a 24 V connection is not required. 5. Adjusting the X1-pressure: Start the engine, let it run with maximum speed. Read the pressure, required = 34±0,5 bar. If necessary, increase the X1-pressure as follows: Connect 24 V to terminal 4. NOTE: As long as voltage is supplied, the X1-pressure drops to zero. After interrupting the voltage supply, the gauge pointer will move slowly to the new X1-pressure. NOTE: Example: Keeping voltage supply for two seconds will increase the X1-pressure of approximately 1 bar. 6. To decrease the X1-pressure connect 24 V to terminal 5 and proceed as described under item 5; keeping voltage supply for two seconds will decrease the X1-pressure of approximately 1 bar. 7. After the adjustment is finished, remove the test leads and the pressure gauge, and turn the main key switch in OFF position to deactivate the adjusting mode.

Version 2010/1

7-45

Electronic Pump Regulation System

Fig. 7-26

7-46

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Checks and adjustments

Version 2010/1

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Electronic Pump Regulation System

Method "B"

With a laptop and BODEM/24 software connected to the serial interface 20X110 (located in the operators cab). Pre-conditions: Normal operating temperature, correct pilot pressure setting and the system must be free of air.

Fig. 7-27 BODEM/24 software CD 1. Make sure the change-over valve is in position “Electronic Pump Regulation”. 2. Connect a pressure gauge to test port (M18). 3. Connect the laptop computer to the data link adapter 20X110, with key switch (20S001) in OFF position. 4. Make sure that the USB dongle is connected to the laptop computer.

Fig. 7-28 USB dongle BODEM/24 software 5. Turn key switch (20S001) in ON position. 6. Switch on the laptop computer. 7. Click on the BODEM/24 icon to start the program (see Fig. 7-29). NOTE: For information about the BODEM/24 software, please refer to the software user’s guide.

Fig. 7-29

Version 2010/1

7-47

Electronic Pump Regulation System

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

8. Open menu "Display/Edit parameters" and, from the Device list, select the required excavator type. Confirm saving the parameters with "OK". 9. Open menu "Display/Edit parameters" and select "Max current" from the shortlist. 10. Adjust the required pressure with the engine running at high idle, and move the slide control to the required pressure. Confirm with OK.

Fig. 7-30 11. After adjusting the pressure, confirm saving the parameters with OK.

7-48

Version 2010/1

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Electronic Pump Regulation System

This page was left blank intentionally.

Version 2010/1

7-49

Hydraulic Constant Regulation System

7.4

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

HYDRAULIC CONSTANT REGULATION SYSTEM

Pilot pressure (X2) Pump support pressure (X4) Pump regulation pressure (X1) Pump regulation pressure (X1) or pilot pressure (X2), depending on the position of 57K6350 and 57K631 respectively Fig. 7-31

7-50

Hydraulic constant regulation system

Version 2010/1

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

7.4.1

Hydraulic Constant Regulation System

GENERAL

Legend for Fig. 7-31: (1 – 4)

Main hydraulic pumps

(8.1)

Pilot pressure pump

(33)

Pilot pressure filter unit

(252.2)

60 bar pressure relief valve

(252.1)

45 bar pressure relief valve

(253.1)

Change-over valve: "Electronic or hydraulic pump regulation"

(253.2)

Pressure relief valve: " Pump regulation pressure X1 at hydraulic pump regulation" (hydraulic constant regulation mode)

(57K561-1)

Proportional solenoid valve: "Pump regulation pressure X1 at electronic pump regulation" (standard operation mode)

(57K630)

Solenoid valve: " Pump regulation pressure X1 = 45 bar for pump #1" (fixed pump for swinging)

(57K631)

Solenoid valve: " Pump regulation pressure X1 = 45 bar for pump #3" (fixed pump for swinging)

The pilot pressure pump (Fig. 7-31, Pos. 8.1) delivers the oil via the pressure filter (Fig. 7-31, Pos. 33) to port A of the pressure relief valve (Fig. 7-31, Pos. 252.2) for limiting the pump support pressure X4 (60 bar). The pilot pressure oil X2 (45 bar) maintained at pressure relief valve (Fig. 7-31, Pos. 252.1) flows through the manifold to the pressure relief valve (Fig. 7-31, Pos. 253.2), which reduces the X2 pressure to the necessary constant X1 pressure to prevent the engine from overloading. NOTE: For testing purposes, the pump regulation system can be changed to the hydraulic operation mode. In case of a failure in the electronic regulation system the hydraulic operation mode can also be used for emergency operation. NOTE: The standard operation mode of the pump regulation system is the Electronic Operation Mode.

Version 2010/1

7-51

Hydraulic Constant Regulation System

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

7.4.2

X1 PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT (CONSTANT PRESSURE)

Fig. 7-32

X1 pressure adjustment

7-52

Version 2010/1

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Hydraulic Constant Regulation System

1. Connect gauges to test ports (M11, M12, M13; and M14) at the high pressure filters. 2. Connect pressure gauge to the X1 pressure test port M18. 3. Unplug solenoid valves 57K506a/b-1 and 57K636-1 to ensure that all fans are running with maximum speed. 4. Shift the three way cock valves (Fig. 7-32, Pos. 253.1) to position “Hydraulic (constant) regulation mode”. 5. Actuate the "Qmax" position via the VHMS Service Menu. 6. Start the engine and let it run at high idle. 7. Set the XLR pressure at pressure relief valve (Fig. 7-32, Pos. 253.2) to approx. 6 bar** 8. Apply max. load to all pumps z

(e.g. BHA: retract the bucket and stick cylinders to the stop position until the hydraulic system stalls. e.g. FSA: extend the bucket cylinders to the stop position until the hydraulic system stalls),

z

and adjust the pressure at all 4 MRV’s* equally to 260 bar.

z

Check the engine speed. Required = 1840 rpm.

z

If necessary, correct the XLR pressure at pressure relief valve (Fig. 7-32, Pos. 253.2), until the required engine speed is obtained. Record the XLR pressure.

9. Shift the cock valves (Fig. 7-32, Pos. 253.1) to position “Electronic regulation“. 10. Switch back "Qmax" via the VHMS Service Menu. 11. Adjust the MRV’s * to 310+5 bar and remove the gauges. *Altering the MRV-setting: z

Remove the dust cap (Fig. 7-32, Pos. a).

z

Loosen the lock nut (Fig. 7-32, Pos. b).

z

Turning the set screw (Fig. 7-32, Pos. c) - cw the pressure will increase.

z

Turning the set screw - ccw the pressure will decrease.

**Altering the XLR-setting: z

Loosen the lock nut (Fig. 7-32, Pos. e).

z

Turning the set screw (Fig. 7-32, Pos. f) - cw the pressure will increase.

z

Turning the set screw - ccw the pressure will decrease.

Version 2010/1

7-53

Determination of the peak point (engine performance)

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

7.5

DETERMINATION OF THE PEAK POINT (ENGINE PERFORMANCE)

Fig. 7-33

Determination of the peak point

7-54

Version 2010/1

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Determination of the peak point (engine performance)

1. Connect pressure gauges to test ports M11, M12, M13, M14 at the high pressure filter. 2. Connect a pressure gauge to the XLR pressure test port M18. 3. Unplug solenoid valves 57K506a-1 and 57K506b-1 to ensure that the hydraulic oil cooler fans are running at maximum speed. 4. Unplug the solenoid valve 57K636-1 to ensure that the engine radiator fan is running at maximum speed. 5. Start the engine and let it run at high idle. 6. Check high idle speed = 1900±10 rpm. 7. Set the MRV individually to approx. 120 bar* to prevent the engine from overloading during the test. 8. Shift the cock valve (Fig. 7-33, Pos. 253.1) to position "hydraulic regulation". 9. Actuate the "Qmax" position via the VHMS Service Menu. 10. Set the XLR pressure at pressure relief valve (Fig. 7-33, Pos. 253.2) > 34 bar** to ensure that the pumps remain in Qmax flow position during the test. 11. Apply max. load to all pumps z

(e.g. BHA: retract the bucket and stick cylinders to the stop position until the hydraulic system stalls. e.g. FSA: extend the bucket cylinders to the stop position until the hydraulic system stalls),

z

and adjust the pressure at all 4 MRV’s *equally until the engine speed is 1800±10 rpm.

z

Record this pressure for other tests. Required: 4 times 157±5 bar.

NOTE: If either the operating pressure or the engine speed is higher than required, there is probably not the full volume available. NOTE: If either the operating pressure or the engine speed is lower than required, there is probably not the full engine power available. 12. Re-set the XLR pressure at pressure relief valve (Fig. 7-33, Pos. 253.2) as recorded**. 13. Shift the cock valve (Fig. 7-33, Pos. 253.1) to position “Electronic regulation“ 14. Switch back "Qmax" via the VHMS Service Menu. 15. Adjust the MRV’s * to 310+5 bar and remove the gauges. * Altering the MRV-Setting: z

Remove the dust cap (Fig. 7-33, Pos. a).

z

Loosen the lock nut (Fig. 7-33, Pos. b).

z

Turning the set screw (Fig. 7-33, Pos. c) - cw the pressure will increase.

z

Turning the set screw - ccw the pressure will decrease.

** Altering the X1-Setting: z

Loosen the lock nut (Fig. 7-33, Pos. e).

z

Turning the set screw (Fig. 7-33, Pos. f) - cw the pressure will increase.

Turning the set screw - ccw the pressure will decrease.

Version 2010/1

7-55

Engine speed sensor (pick-up)

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

7.6

ENGINE SPEED SENSOR (PICK-UP)

Fig. 7-34

Engine speed sensor

7-56

Version 2010/1

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Engine speed sensor (pick-up)

Legend for Fig. 7-34: (1)

Speed sensor (pick-up)

(2)

Flywheel housing

(3)

Flywheel

(4)

Look nut

(5)

RPM-module

7.6.1

GENERAL

The engine speed sensor 52B064-1 (pick-up), together with the RPM-module 51T018-1, use the flywheel teeth to count RPM. With running engine, each tooth induces a coltage in the pick-up coil. That causes an alternative voltage at the pick-up coil wire. With engine at stand still, there is no voltage at the pick-up wire. The frequency of this alternative voltage will increase or decrease proportional to the engine RPM. The RPM-module converts the frequency into a proportional milliampere signal. This signal is used for different components, e.g. pump regulation, display, VHMS.

7.6.2

ENGINE SPEED SENSOR (PICK-UP) ADJUSTMENT

1. Stop the engine. 2. Disconnect plug at the pick-up wire. 3. Loosen the look nut. 4. Turn out the pick-up completely ccw. 5. Check front end of the pick-up and clean it from magnetic chips and dirt. 6. Turn the pick-up completely in (cw) until it touches the flywheel (Fig. 7-34, Pos. A). 7. Turn the pick-up ¾ turn out (ccw) (Fig. 7-34, Pos. B). 8. Secure the pick-up with look nut (Fig. 7-34, Pos. C). 9. Connect the plug. Final Check 10. Start engine and let it run at high idle. 11. Check the voltage (AC) of the pick-up. Insert the T-box on the sensor connector and connect between pick-up and RPM-module 51T018-1. 12. The voltage should be 10±2.5 volts AC.

WARNING z

Avoid pick-up contact with the flywheel while engine is running!

z

The induced AC voltage must be measured with connected pick-up to the RPM-module.

Version 2010/1

7-57

Energy Efficiency

7.7

ENERGY EFFICIENCY

Fig. 7-35

Energy efficiency

7-58

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Version 2010/1

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Energy Efficiency

Legend for Fig. 7-35: (1 – 4)

Main pumps

(11K301)

MTC (Master Turbo Controller)

M19

Test port, pressure control valve

M55

Test port, output 57K646

M56

Test port, output 57K647

M57

Test port, output 57K648

(57K517)

„Idle time“ control (pump control system)

(57K517a)

½ Qmax (reduced oil flow if oil is too cold)

(57K626)

Flow control (pump 1, when swinging with fast speed)

(57K646)

Flow control (pump No. 2 + No. 4)

(57K647)

Flow control (pump No. 3)

(57K648)

Flow control (pump No. 1)

(152)

Pressure control valve – controlled pump flow

(255.4)

Pressure relief valve – ½ Qmax (X3 = 15 bar)

7.7.1

GENERAL

Energy which is not used for active movements can be considered as a loss of energy. Although energy can not be destroyed, it can be converted into heat, which is useless for performing work by means of hydraulics. With the following measures the energy efficiency in your machines is optimized, the oil delivery takes place through specified pumps corresponding to the definite movements of the excavator. NOTE: If individual movements (single movements) are selected, the pumps will have maximum flow, but with one exception. Pump No. 1 will have half flow when high speed swinging is selected (important for PMclinic and other tests). z

Individual movements of the attachment are selected: => 57K646 OFF + 57K647 OFF + 57K648 OFF + 57K626 ON

z

Only travel is selected: => 57K646 OFF + 57K647 OFF + 57K648 OFF + 57K626 ON

z

Only swinging (low speed) is selected: => 57K646 ON + 57K647 OFF + 57K648 ON + 57K626 ON

z

Only swinging (high speed) is selected: => 57K646 ON + 57K647 OFF + 57K648 OFF + 57K626 OFF

Version 2010/1

7-59

Energy Efficiency

7.7.2

CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

Fig. 7-36

Checks and adjustments

7-60

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Version 2010/1

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Energy Efficiency

Legend for Fig. 7-36: (a)

Lock nuts

(b)

Set screws

(M19)

Test port, pressure control valve – X3-pressure

(57K646)

Flow control (pump No. 2 + No. 4)

(57K647)

Flow control (pump No. 3)

(57K648)

Flow control (pump No. 1)

(152)

Pressure relief valve – reduced pump flow (X3 ~ 18 to 19 bar)

To check the function of the Energy Efficiency System it is necessary to follow the instructions below. Adjusting the flow control: 1. Connect a pressure gauge (0-60 bar) to test port M19. 2. Turn the superstructure 90° to the travel direction. 3. Apply the slew parking brake. 4. Move the bucket close to the side frame and raise one track off the ground just enough to get the track free. 5. Activate the travel pedal of the lifted track fully in one direction. Make sure there is no other function activted. 6. Test of max. pump flow: 57K646, 57K647 and 57K648 must be de-energized, and 57K626 must be energized. Check the time of five (5) sprocket revolutions, see table Fig. 7-38. 7. Test of optimized pump flow: Activate the swing function (against the brake). 8. Let the sprocket turn with the swing function still applied (slew parking brake closed). 9. Measure the time for five (5) sprocket revolutions; see table Fig. 7-38 for the required value.

CAUTION Values are based for machine working from see level up to 3600 m. Machines working on higher altitude require a reduced Qmax setup which influences the test values.

NOTE: X3 or PST: both are the same pressure. It is the pressure to control the maximum permissible pump output flow. PST is the port name of the main pump.

Version 2010/1

7-61

Energy Efficiency

Fig. 7-37

7-62

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Checks and adjustments

Version 2010/1

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Energy Efficiency

If adjustment is required: Change the setting at pressure control valve (152): 1. Loosen lock nut (Fig. 7-36, Pos. a) of the pressure control valve. 2. Turn the set screw (b) of the pressure control valve (152) clockwise to reduce or counterclockwise to increase the sprocket speed. Adjust the sprocket speed according to the table below. 3. Lock set screw by tightening the lock nut.

Pump flow control test values No.

Function

57K646

57K647

57K648

57K626

Left sprocket Time/5 revs.

Right sprocket Time/5 revs.

1

Travel right only

0V

0V

0V

24 V

50±1 sec

50±1 sec

2

Travel right and swing (low speed)

24 V

24 V

24 V

24 V

65±1 sec

65±1 sec

3

Travel right and swing (high speed)

24 V

0V

0V

0V

65±1 sec

65±1 sec

4

Travel left only

0V

0V

0V

24 V

50±1 sec

50±1 sec

5

Travel left and swing (low speed)

24 V

24 V

24 V

24 V

65±1 sec

65±1 sec

6

Travel left and swing (high speed)

24 V

0V

0V

0V

65±1 sec

65±1 sec

Fig. 7-38

Pump flow control test values

NOTE: Switch swing speed between low and high with switch 20S154 at the left control lever. 5 revolutions of the sprocket within 65 seconds are mandatory to determine the optimized pump flow. The pressure control valve (152) is factory preset to 18 bar, a field test / adjustment after comissoning is necessary.

Version 2010/1

7-63

Energy Efficiency

7-64

MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND PUMP REGULATION

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8. OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Version 2010/1

8-1

General

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.1

GENERAL

Fig. 8-1

Overall view of the hydraulic system

8-2

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

General

Legend for Fig. 8-1: (1 - 4)

Main pumps

(5)

High pressure filters

(6)

Main control blocks

(7)

Distributor maniflod

(8)

Attachment cylinders

(9)

Swing motors

(10)

Rotary joint

(11)

Travel motors

General Information The control blocks, the piping to the distributor manifold and the connecting hoses to the attachment are different between the backhoe attachment (BHA) and the front shovel attachment (FSA). If a conversion is required, contact the service department for further information. Function: NOTE: Also refer to the circuit diagram. NOTE: The following numbering refers to the hydraulic circuit diagram. Each main pump (Fig. 8-1, Pos. 1 to 4) delivers oil trough the high pressure filter (13.1 to 13.4) to port P of the main control blocks (I to IV). This results in four main circuits. If all spools of the control blocks (I to IV) are in neutral position, the oil flows through the blocks at port T and returns via return oil pipes, return oil collector manifold (107), return oil pipes (L6 and L7), return oil collector pipe (54), back pressure valve (55) and the return oil filters (49.1 - 49.4) into the tank. The function of back pressure valve (55) ensures: z

sufficient oil supply for all anticavitation valves

z

and that sufficient oil is forced through the oil coolers.

If a control lever or pedal is actuated, pilot pressure oil moves the spools of the control blocks, directing the oil flow from the main pumps to one side of the user (either cylinders or motors). From the opposite side of the user, the oil returns to the control block, and from there flows via the return oil circuit back into the tank. Each circuit is provided with one MRV (Main Relief Valve), at least one SRV (Secondary Relief Valve) and at least one flow restrictor.

Version 2010/1

8-3

General

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.1.1

FLOATING SYSTEM

Fig. 8-2

Floating function of boom and stick cylinders, FSA

8-4

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

General

The excavator operates automatically with the floating position for boom and stick activated. That means the lowering movement of boom and stick is always done in the floating position. For deactivation of the floating position, two push-buttons are installed: z

20S095 in the right joystick (20S019) for the boom function,

z

20S098 in the left joystick (20S020) for the stick function.

Press the respective button and keep it depressed as long as the floating position shall be deactivated. When releasing the button, the floating position is activated again. Function: The additionally installed single control blocks (Fig. 8-2, Pos. 60Q632, 60Q633, 60Q634 and 61Q635) connect the piston side of the cylinders with the rod side and also with the tank: z

60Q632, 60Q633 and 60Q634 for the stick cylinders,

z

61Q635 for the boom cylinders.

In normal operation mode (i.e. floating position) the pilot pressure oil is directed via 60Q632, 60Q633 and 61Q635 to the single control blocks when lowering the boom or stick. If a pressurised lowering of the cylinders is required, the pilot pressure oil is directed via 60Q632, 60Q633 and 61Q635 to the main control blocks. The solenoid valves 60Q632, 60Q633 and 61Q635 (4/2-directional control valves) are controlled by push-buttons 20S095 and 20S098. Boom:

20S095 ON => 61K635 ON => Floating position deactivated 20S095 OFF => 61K635 OFF => Floating position activated

Stick:

20S098 ON => 61K632 + 61K633 OFF => Floating position deactivated 20S098 OFF => 61K632 + 61K633 OFF => Floating position activated

NOTE: Due to the two different operation modes for lowering, the lowering speed of boom and stick cylinder must be adjusted twice: • floating position deactivated, • floating position activated.

Version 2010/1

8-5

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.2

HYDRAULICS FOR THE ATTACHMENT CYLINDER FSA AND BHA

8.2.1

ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "BOOM RAISE" FSA

Fig. 8-3

Electric / hydraulic flowchart "boom raise", FSA

8-6

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Legend for Fig. 8-3: (20S019)

Control lever (joystick)

(YD)

Direction (axis) of joystick

(-10V)

Signal voltage (maximum)

(11X_...)

Terminal rail with number

(11T049)

Ramp time module

(11T010)

Amplifier module - boom

(11T010a)

Amplifier module - boom

(11T010b)

Amplifier module - boom up or bucket fill when not raising the boom

(11T010c)

Amplifier module - boom

(11K058)

Relay - pilot control: Contacts 6/10 and 7/11 only closed while lifting the boom.

(11K076)

Relay - pilot control: Contacts 8/12 only closed while travelling, left crawler.

(11K078)

Relay - pilot control: Contacts 6/10 only closed while travelling, right crawler.

(14.1 + 14.2) (15.1 + 15.2)

Remote control valves

(61K563) (61K569) (61K573) (61K576)

Proportional solenoid valve

(61K533) (61K540) (61K546)

Directional solenoid valve

(I - IV)

Main control blocks I - IV

(42)

Distributor manifold

Electrical signal flow Signal voltage of joystick (Fig. 8-3, Pos. 20S019) goes via ramp time module (Fig. 8-3, Pos. 11T049) to terminal 5 of the amplifier modules (Fig. 8-3, Pos. 11T010 to 11T010c) and further to the proportional and directional solenoid valves of the remote control blocks (Fig. 8-3, Pos. 14.1, 14.2, 15.1 and 15.2). Hydraulic signal flow (pilot pressure) When the proportional and directional solenoid valves are energized, pilot pressure oil flows to the pilot pressure ports of the main control blocks. Hydraulic oil flow Now the oil of the main pumps flows through the main control blocks (I ; II ; IV) and, via distributor manifold (Fig. 8-3, Pos. 42), arrives at the hydraulic cylinders.

Version 2010/1

8-7

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.2.2

ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "BOOM RAISE" BHA

Fig. 8-4

Electric / hydraulic flowchart "boom raise", BHA

8-8

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Legend for Fig. 8-4: (20S019)

Control lever (joystick)

(YD)

Direction (axis) of joystick

(-10V)

Signal voltage (maximum)

(11X_…)

Terminal rail with number

(11T049 – 11T049c)

Ramp time module

(11T010 – 11T010c)

Amplifier module – boom

(11K076)

Relay – pilot control: Contacts 8/12 only closed while travelling, left crawler.

(11K078)

Relay – pilot control: Contacts 6/10 only closed while travelling, right crawler.

(14.1 + 14.2) (15.1 + 15.2)

Remote control valves

(61K563) (61K569) (61K573) (61K576)

Proportional solenoid valve

(61K533) (61K540) (61K546)

Directional solenoid valve

(I - IV)

Main control blocks I - IV

(42)

Distributor manifold

Electrical signal flow Signal voltage of joystick (Fig. 8-4, Pos. 20S019) goes via ramp time modules (Fig. 8-4, Pos. 11T049 to 11T049c) to terminal 5 of the amplifier modules (Fig. 8-4, Pos. 11T010 to 11T010c) and further to the proportional and directional solenoid valves of the remote control blocks (Fig. 8-4, Pos. 14.1, 14.2, 15.1 and 15.2). Hydraulic signal flow (pilot pressure) When the proportional and directional solenoid valves are energized, pilot pressure oil flows to the pilot pressure ports of the main control blocks. Hydraulic oil flow Now the oil of the main pumps flows through the main control blocks (I ; II ; IV) via distributor manifold (Fig. 8-4, Pos. 42) to the hydraulic cylinders.

Version 2010/1

8-9

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.2.3

ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "BOOM LOWERING" FSA

Fig. 8-5

Electric / hydraulic flowchart "boom lowering", FSA

8-10

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Legend for Fig. 8-5: (20S019)

Control lever (joystick)

(YC)

Direction (axis) of joystick

(+10V)

Signal voltage (maximum)

(11X_…)

Terminal rail with number

(11T049)

Ramp time module

(11T010)

Amplifier module - boom

(11T010a)

Amplifier module - boom

(11T010b)

Amplifier module - boom or bucket

(11T010c)

Amplifier module - boom

(11K058)

Relay – pilot control: Contacts 6/10 only closed while lifting the boom.

(11K076)

Relay – pilot control: Contacts 8/12 only closed while travelling, left crawler.

(11K078)

Relay – pilot control: Contacts 6/10 only closed while travelling, right crawler.

(14.1 + 14.2) (15.1 + 15.2)

Remote control valves

(61K563) (61K573) (61K576)

Proportional solenoid valve

(61K521) (61K541) (61K547) (61K635)

Directional solenoid valve

(61Q635)

Single control block

(I - IV)

Main control blocks I - IV

(42)

Distributor manifold

Electrical signal flow Signal voltage of joystick (Fig. 8-5, Pos. 20S019) goes via ramp time module (Fig. 8-5, Pos. 11T049) to terminal 5 of the amplifier modules (11T010, 11T010a and 11T010c) and further to the proportional and directional solenoid valves of the remote control blocks (Fig. 8-5, Pos. 14.1, 15.1 and 15.2). Hydraulic signal flow (pilot pressure) When the proportional and directional solenoid valves are energized, pilot pressure oil flows to the pilot pressure ports of the main control blocks and single control block (Fig. 8-5, Pos. 61Q635). Hydraulic oil flow Now piston and piston rod side of the boom cylinders are connected, so that the boom lowers only by gravity. The excess oil flows via distributor manifold (Fig. 8-5, Pos. 42) through the main control blocks (II and III) and single control block (Fig. 8-5, Pos. 61Q635) back to tank.

Version 2010/1

8-11

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.2.4

ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "BOOM LOWERING" BHA

Fig. 8-6

Electric / hydraulic flowchart "boom lowering", BHA

8-12

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Legend for Fig. 8-6: (20S019)

Control lever (joystick)

(YC)

Direction (axis) of joystick

(+10V)

Signal voltage (maximum)

(11X_…)

Terminal rail with number

(11T049 11T049c)

Ramp time module

(A10)

Amplifier module – boom

(A10a)

Amplifier module – boom

(A10b)

Amplifier module – boom or bucket

(A10c)

Amplifier module – boom

(K76)

Relay – pilot control: Contacts 8/12 only closed while travelling, left crawler.

(K78)

Relay – pilot control: Contacts 6/10 only closed while travelling, right crawler.

(14.1 + 14.2) (15.1 + 15.2)

Remote control valves

(61K563) (61K569) (61K573) (61K576)

Proportional solenoid valve

(61K521) (61K532) (61K541) (61K547)

Directional solenoid valve

(I - IV)

Main control blocks I - IV

(42)

Distributor manifold

Electrical signal flow Signal voltage of joystick (Fig. 8-6, Pos. 20S019) goes via ramp time modules (Fig. 8-6, Pos. 1T049 to 11T049c) to terminal 5 of the amplifier modules (Fig. 8-6, Pos. 11T010 to 11T010c) and further to the proportional and directional solenoid valves of the remote control blocks (Fig. 8-6, Pos. 14.1, 14.2, 15.1 and 15.2). Hydraulic signal flow (pilot pressure) When the proportional and directional solenoid valves are energized, pilot pressure oil flows to the pilot pressure ports of the main control blocks. Hydraulic oil flow Now the oil of the main pumps flows through the main control blocks (I to IV) and via distributor manifold (Fig. 8-6, Pos. 42) to the hydraulic cylinders.

Version 2010/1

8-13

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.2.5

ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "STICK EXTEND" FSA

Fig. 8-7

Electric / hydraulic flowchart "stick extend", FSA

8-14

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Legend for Fig. 8-7: (20S020)

Control lever (joystick)

(YC)

Direction (axis) of joystick

(+10V)

Signal voltage (maximum)

(11X_61…)

Terminal rail with number

(11T048)

Ramp time module

(11T008)

Amplifier module – stick

(11T008a)

Amplifier module – stick

(11T009)

Amplifier module – stick extend or bucket fill

(11K074)

Relay – pilot control: Contacts 5/9 only closed while extending the stick.

(11K076)

Relay – pilot control: Contacts 6/10 only closed while travelling, left crawler.

(11K078)

Relay – pilot control: Contacts 8/12 only closed while travelling, right crawler.

(14.2) (15.1 + 15.2)

Remote control valves

(61K568) (61K571) (61K574)

Proportional solenoid valve

(61K530) (61K537) (61K542)

Directional solenoid valve

(60Q632) – (60Q634)

Single control blocks (closed ports while extending the stick)

(I, II + IV)

Main control blocks

(42)

Distributor manifold

Electrical signal flow Signal voltage of joystick (Fig. 8-7, Pos. 20S020) goes via ramp time module (Fig. 8-7, Pos. 11T048) to terminal 5 of the amplifier modules (Fig. 8-7, Pos. 11T008, 11T008a and 11T009) and further to the proportional and directional solenoid valves of the remote control blocks (Fig. 8-7, Pos. 14.2, 15.1 and 15.2). Hydraulic signal flow (pilot pressure) When the proportional and directional solenoid valves are energized pilot pressure oil flows to the pilot pressure ports of the main control blocks . Hydraulic oil flow Now the oil of the main pumps flows through the main control blocks (I, II, IV) and via distributor manifold (Fig. 8-7, Pos. 42) to the hydraulic cylinders.

Version 2010/1

8-15

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.2.6

ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "STICK EXTEND" BHA

Fig. 8-8

Electric / hydraulic flowchart "stick extend", BHA

8-16

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Legend for Fig. 8-8: (20S020)

Control lever (joystick)

(YC)

Direction (axis) of joystick

(+10V)

Signal voltage (maximum)

(11X_00…)

Terminal rail with number

(11T048)

Ramp time module

(11T008)

Amplifier module – stick

(11T008a)

Amplifier module – stick

(11T011)

Amplifier module – stick

(11K076)

Relay – pilot control: Contacts 7/11 only closed while travelling, left crawler.

(11K078)

Relay – pilot control: Contacts 8/12 only closed while travelling, right crawler.

(14.2) (15.1 + 15.2)

Remote control valves

(61K568) (61K572) (51K574)

Proportional solenoid valve

(61K530) (61K538) (61K542)

Directional solenoid valve

(61K632) – (61K634)

Single control blocks (closed ports while extending the stick)

(I, II + IV)

Main control blocks

(42)

Distributor manifold

Electrical signal flow Signal voltage of joystick (Fig. 8-8, Pos. 20S020) goes via ramp time module (Fig. 8-8, Pos. 11T048) to terminal 5 of the amplifier modules (Fig. 8-8, Pos. 11T008, 11T008a and 11T011) and further to the proportional and directional solenoid valves of the remote control blocks (Fig. 8-8, Pos. 14.2, 15.1 and 15.2). Hydraulic signal flow (pilot pressure) When the proportional and directional solenoid valves are energized pilot pressure oil flows to the pilot pressure ports of the main control blocks. Hydraulic oil flow Now the oil of the main pumps flows through the main control blocks (I, II, IV) and via distributor manifold (Fig. 8-8, Pos. 42) to the hydraulic cylinders.

Version 2010/1

8-17

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.2.7

ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "STICK RETRACT" FSA

Fig. 8-9

Electric / hydraulic flowchart "stick retract", FSA

8-18

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Legend for Fig. 8-9: (20S020)

Control lever (joystick)

(YD)

Direction (axis) of joystick

(-10V)

Signal voltage (maximum)

(11X_00…)

Terminal rail with number

(11T048)

Ramp time module

(11T008)

Amplifier module – stick

(11T008a)

Amplifier module – stick

(11T009)

Amplifier module – stick extend or bucket fill

(11K074)

Relay – pilot control: Contacts 5/9 only closed while extending the stick.

(11K076)

Relay – pilot control: Contacts 6/10 only closed while travelling, left crawler.

(11K078)

Relay – pilot control: Contacts 8/12 only closed while travelling, right crawler.

(14.1 + 15.2)

Remote control valves

(99.5)

Check valve (necessary for combined operation of travel right crawler and retracting the stick)

(61K568) (61K574)

Proportional solenoid valve

(61K531) (61K632) (61K633) (61K542) (61K543)

Directional solenoid valve

(60Q632) – (60Q634)

Single control blocks (ports A-B-T connected while retracting the stick)

(I + IV)

Main control blocks I + IV

(42)

Distributor manifold

Electrical signal flow Signal voltage of joystick (Fig. 8-9, Pos. 20S020) goes via ramp time module (Fig. 8-9, Pos. 11T048) to terminal 5 of the amplifier modules (Fig. 8-9, Pos. 11T008, 11T008a) and further to the proportional and directional solenoid valves of the remote control blocks (Fig. 8-9, Pos. 14.2 and 15.2). Hydraulic signal flow (pilot pressure) When the proportional and directional solenoid valves are energized, pilot pressure oil flows to the pilot pressure ports of the single control blocks (Fig. 8-9, Pos. 60Q632, 60Q633 and 60Q634). Hydraulic oil flow Now piston and piston rod side of the stick cylinders are connected, so that the stick lowers only by gravity. The excess oil flows via distributor manifold (Fig. 8-9, Pos. 42) through the single control blocks (Fig. 8-9, Pos. 60Q632, 60Q633 and 60Q634) back to tank.

Version 2010/1

8-19

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.2.8

ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "STICK RETRACT" BHA

Fig. 8-10

Electric / hydraulic flowchart "stick retract", BHA

8-20

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Legend for Fig. 8-10: (20S020)

Control lever (joystick)

(YD)

Direction (axis) of joystick

(-10V)

Signal voltage (maximum)

(11X_00…)

Terminal rail with number

(11T048)

Ramp time module

(11T008)

Amplifier module – stick

(11T008a)

Amplifier module – stick

(11T011)

Amplifier module – stick

(11K076)

Relay – pilot control: Contacts 7/11 only closed while traveling the left crawler.

(11K078)

Relay – pilot control: Contacts 8/12 only closed while traveling the right crawler.

(14.2) (15.1 + 15.2)

Remote control valves

(61K568) (61K572) (61K574)

Proportional solenoid valve

(61K531) (61K539) (61K543)

Directional solenoid valve

(I, II + IV)

Main control blocks I, II + IV

(42)

Distributor manifold

Electrical signal flow Signal voltage of joystick (Fig. 8-10, Pos. 20S020) goes via ramp time module (Fig. 8-10, Pos. E48) to terminal 5 of the amplifier modules (Fig. 8-10, Pos. 11T008, 11T008a and 11T011) and further to the proportional and directional solenoid valves of the remote control blocks (Fig. 8-10, Pos. 14.2, 15.1 and 15.2). Hydraulic signal flow (pilot pressure) When the proportional and directional solenoid valves are energized, pilot pressure oil flows to the pilot pressure ports of the main control blocks . Hydraulic oil flow Now the oil of the main pumps flows through the main control blocks (I, II, IV) and via distributor manifold (Fig. 8-10, Pos. 42) to the hydraulic cylinders.

Version 2010/1

8-21

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.2.9

ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "BUCKET CURL" FSA

Fig. 8-11

Electric / hydraulic flowchart "bucket curl", FSA

8-22

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Legend for Fig. 8-11: (20S019)

Control lever (joystick)

(XB)

Direction (axis) of joystick

(-10V)

Signal voltage (maximum)

(11X_00…)

Terminal rail with number

(11T009) (11T009a) (11T009b)

Amplifier module – bucket

(11T010b)

Amplifier module – boom up or bucket fill when not raising the boom.

(11K050)

Relay – pilot control: bucket cut-off. Contacts 11/12 only closed if the hydraulic oil is overheated.

(11K058)

Relay – pilot control: Contacts 6/10 and 5/9 only closed while lifting the boom.

(11K071)

Relay – pilot control: Contacts 6/10 and 5/9 only closed while filling the bucket.

(11K074)

Relay – pilot control: Contacts 5/9 only closed while extending the stick.

(11K076)

Relay – pilot control: Contacts 6/10 only closed while traveling the left crawler.

(11K078)

Relay – pilot control: Contacts 7/11 only closed while traveling the right crawler.

(14.1 + 14.2) (15.1 + 15.2)

Remote control valves

(61K569) (61K564) (61K571) (61K575)

Proportional solenoid valve

(61K522) (61K532) (61K536) (61K544)

Directional solenoid valve

(I - IV)

Main control blocks I - IV

(42)

Distributor manifold

Electrical signal flow Signal voltage of joystick (Fig. 8-11, Pos. 20S019) goes via relay contacts at terminal 5 of the amplifier modules (Fig. 8-11, Pos. 11T009, 11T009a, 11T009b and 11T010b) and further to the proportional and directional solenoid valves of the remote control blocks (Fig. 8-11, Pos. 14.1, 14.2, 15.1 and 15.2). Hydraulic signal flow (pilot pressure) When the proportional and directional solenoid valves are energized, pilot pressure oil flows to the pilot pressure ports of the main control blocks. Hydraulic oil flow Now the oil of the main pumps flows through the main control blocks (I to IV) and via distributor manifold (Fig. 8-11, Pos. 42) to the hydraulic cylinders.

Version 2010/1

8-23

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.2.10

ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "BUCKET CURL" BHA

Fig. 8-12

Electric / hydraulic flowchart "bucket curl", BHA

8-24

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Legend for Fig. 8-12: (20S019)

Control lever (joystick)

(XB)

Direction (axis) of joystick

(-10V)

Signal voltage (maximum)

(11X_00…)

Terminal rail with number

(11T009) (11T009a) (11T009b)

Amplifier module – bucket

(11K050)

Relay – pilot control: Bucket cut-off. Contacts 11/12 only closed if the hydraulic oil is overheated.

(11K076)

Relay – pilot control: Contacts 6/10 only closed while traveling the left crawler.

(11K078)

Relay – pilot control: Contacts 7/11 only closed while traveling the right crawler.

(14.1) (15.1 + 15.2)

Remote control valves

(61K564) (61K571) (61K575)

Proportional solenoid valve

(61K522) (61K536) (61K544)

Directional solenoid valve

(II, III + IV)

Main control blocks II, III + IV

(42)

Distributor manifold

Electrical signal flow Signal voltage of joystick (Fig. 8-12, Pos. 20S019) goes via relay contacts to terminal 5 to the amplifier modules (Fig. 8-12, Pos. 11T009, 11T009a, 11T009b) and further to the proportional and directional solenoid valves of the remote control blocks (Fig. 8-12, Pos. 14.1, 15.1 and 15.2). Hydraulic signal flow (pilot pressure) When the proportional and directional solenoid valves are energized pilot pressure oil flows to the pilot pressure ports of the main control blocks . Hydraulic oil flow Now the oil of the main pumps flows through the main control blocks (II, III, IV) and via distributor manifold (Fig. 8-12, Pos. 42) to the hydraulic cylinders.

Version 2010/1

8-25

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.2.11

ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "BUCKET DUMP" FSA

Fig. 8-13

Electric / hydraulic flowchart "bucket dump", FSA

8-26

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Legend for Fig. 8-13: (20S019)

Control lever (joystick)

(XA)

Direction (axis) of joystick

(+10V)

Signal voltage (maximum)

(11X_00…)

Terminal rail with number

(11T009a) (11T009b)

Amplifier module – bucket

(11K050)

Relay – pilot control: Bucket cut-off. Contacts 11/12 only closed if the hydraulic oil is overheated.

(11K058)

Relay – pilot control: Contacts 5/9 only closed while lifting the boom.

(11K071)

Relay – pilot control: Contacts 5/9 only closed while filling the bucket.

(11K078)

Relay – pilot control: Contacts 7/11 only closed while travelling, right crawler.

(14.1 + 15.2)

Remote control valves

(61K564) (61K575)

Proportional solenoid valve

(61K523) (61K545)

Directional solenoid valve

(III + IV)

Main control blocks III + IV

(42)

Distributor manifold

Electrical signal flow Signal voltage of joystick (Fig. 8-13, Pos. 20S019) goes via relay contacts to terminal 5 of the amplifier modules (Fig. 8-13, Pos. 11T009a and 11T009b) and further to the proportional and directional solenoid valves of the remote control blocks (Fig. 8-13, Pos. 4.1 and 15.2). Hydraulic signal flow (pilot pressure) When the proportional and directional solenoid valves are energized, pilot pressure oil flows to the pilot pressure ports of the main control blocks. Hydraulic oil flow Now the oil of the main pumps flows through the main control blocks (III + IV) and via distributor manifold (Fig. 8-13, Pos. 42) to the hydraulic cylinders.

Version 2010/1

8-27

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.2.12

ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "BUCKET DUMP" BHA

Fig. 8-14

Electric / hydraulic flowchart "bucket dump", BHA

8-28

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Legend for Fig. 8-14: (20S019)

Control lever (joystick)

(XA)

Direction (axis) of joystick

(+10V)

Signal voltage (maximum)

(11X_00…)

Terminal rail with number

(11T009a) (11T009b)

Amplifier module – bucket

(11K050)

Relay – pilot control: Bucket cut-off. Contacts 11/12 only closed if the hydraulic oil is overheated.

(11K076)

Relay – pilot control: Contacts 6/10 only closed while travelling, left crawler.

(11K078)

Relay – pilot control: Contacts 7/11 only closed while travelling, right crawler.

(14.1) (15.1 + 15.2)

Remote control valves

(61K564) (61K571) (61K575)

Proportional solenoid valve

(61K523) (61K537) (61K545)

Directional solenoid valve

(II, III + IV)

Main control blocks II, III + IV

(42)

Distributor manifold

Electrical signal flow Signal voltage of joystick (Fig. 8-14, Pos. 20S019) goes via relay contacts to terminal 5 of the amplifier modules (Fig. 8-14, Pos. 11T009, 11T009a, 11T009b) and further to the proportional and directional solenoid valves of the remote control blocks (Fig. 8-14, Pos. 14.1, 15.1 and 15.2). Hydraulic signal flow (pilot pressure) When the proportional and directional solenoid valves are energized, pilot pressure oil flows to the pilot pressure ports of the main control blocks. Hydraulic oil flow Now the oil of the main pumps flows through the main control blocks (II, III, IV) and via distributor manifold (Fig. 8-14, Pos. 42) to the hydraulic cylinders.

Version 2010/1

8-29

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.2.13

ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "CLAM OPEN" FSA

Fig. 8-15

Electric / hydraulic flowchart "clam open", FSA

8-30

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Legend for Fig. 8-15: (20S024)

Control pedal

(-10V)

Signal voltage (maximum)

(11X_00…)

Terminal rail with number

(11T011)

Amplifier module – clam

(11K076)

Relay – pilot control: Contacts 7/11 only closed while travelling the left crawler.

(15.1)

Remote control valves

(61K572)

Proportional solenoid valve

(61K539)

Directional solenoid valve

(II)

Main control block II

(42)

Distributor manifold

Electrical signal flow Signal voltage of control pedal (Fig. 8-15, Pos. 20S024) goes via relay contact to terminal 5 of the amplifier module (Fig. 8-15, Pos. 11T011) and further to the proportional and directional solenoid valves of the remote control block (Fig. 8-15, Pos. 15.1). Hydraulic signal flow (pilot pressure) When the proportional and directional solenoid valves are energized, pilot pressure oil flows to the pilot pressure port of the main control block. Hydraulic oil flow Now the oil of the main pump flows through the main control block (II) and via distributor manifold (Fig. 8-15, Pos. 42) to the hydraulic cylinders.

Version 2010/1

8-31

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.2.14

ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "CLAM CLOSE" FSA

Fig. 8-16

Electric / hydraulic flowchart "clam close", FSA

8-32

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Legend for Fig. 8-16: (20S023)

Control pedal

(+10V)

Signal voltage (maximum)

(11X_00…)

Terminal rail with number

(11T011)

Amplifier module – clam

(11K076)

Relay – pilot control: Contacts 7/11 only closed while traveling the left crawler.

(15.1)

Remote control valves

(61K572)

Proportional solenoid valve

(61K538)

Directional solenoid valve

(II)

Main control block II

(42)

Distributor manifold

Electrical signal slow Signal voltage of control pedal (Fig. 8-16, Pos. 20S023) goes via relay contact to terminal 5 of the amplifier module (Fig. 8-16, Pos. 11T011) and further to the proportional and directional solenoid valves of the remote control block (Fig. 8-16, Pos. 15.1). Hydraulic signal flow (pilot pressure) When the proportional and directional solenoid valves are energized, pilot pressure oil flows to the pilot pressure port of the main control block. Hydraulic oil flow Now the oil of the main pump flows through the main control block (II) and via distributor manifold (Fig. 8-16, Pos. 42) to the hydraulic cylinders.

Version 2010/1

8-33

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.2.15

CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS OF THE MAIN RELIEF VALVES (FSA)

Fig. 8-17

Checks and adjustments of the main relief valves (FSA)

8-34

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

There are four main relief valves (MRV) installed, one in each main control block, to limit the maximum pump supply pressure (operating pressure). MRV in control block

Test port

Pump circuit I

I

M14

Pump circuit II

II

M12

Pump circuit III

III

M11

Pump circuit IV

IV

M13

Functions FSA Swing Boom

Clam Swing

Boom

Bucket

Bucket filling Boom raise

Stick

Bucket filling Stick extend

Travel

Bucket

Boom

Stick

Travel

Each pump circuit can be checked or adjusted individually by selecting one function of the required pump circuit. Checking: 1. Connect the gauge to the required test port M11 - M14. 2. Start engine and let it run at high idle. 3. Extend or retract the cylinder to the stop position for the valve being tested until the hydraulic system stalls. 4. Read the pressure. Required: 310+5 bar. If the pressure is not correct, carry out a comparative measurement with another function, in order to avoid wrong measuring results caused by wrongly adjusted SRV or other defects in the system. Adjusting: 1. Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-17, Pos. a). 2. Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-17, Pos. b). 3. Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-17, Pos. c) clockwise to increase pressure, or counter-clockwise to decrease pressure. 4. Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-17, Pos. b) and install cap (Fig. 8-17, Pos. a).

NOTE: It is important that the valve bodies of the MRVs and the SRVs are firmly tightened (with 300 Nm). Otherwise, the internal sealing is not properly, which results in loud flow noises and wrong adjustments.

Version 2010/1

8-35

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.2.16

CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS OF THE MAIN RELIEF VALVES (BHA)

Fig. 8-18

Checks and adjustments of the main relief valves (BHA)

8-36

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

There are four main relief valves (MRV) installed, one in each main control block, to limit the maximum pump supply pressure (operating pressure). MRV in control block

Test port

Pump circuit I

I

M14

Pump circuit II

II

M12

Pump circuit III

III

M11

Pump circuit IV

IV

M13

Functions BHA Swing Boom

Stick Swing

Boom

Bucket

Boom

Stick

Bucket

Travel

Bucket

Boom

Stick

Travel

Each pump circuit can be checked or adjusted individually by selecting one function of the required pump circuit. Checking: 1. Connect the gauge to the required test port M11 - M14. 2. Start engine and let it run at high idle. 3. Extend or retract the cylinder to the stop position for the valve being tested until the hydraulic system stalls. 4. Read the pressure. Required: 310+5 bar. Adjusting: 1. Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-18, Pos. a). 2. Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-18, Pos. b). 3. Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-18, Pos. c) clockwise to increase pressure, counter-clockwise to decrease pressure. 4. Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-18, Pos. b) and install cap (Fig. 8-18, Pos. a).

NOTE: It is important that the valve bodies of the MRVs and the SRVs are firmly tightened (with 300 Nm). Otherwise, the internal sealing is not properly, which results in loud flow noises and wrong adjustments.

Version 2010/1

8-37

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.2.17

CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS OF THE SECONDARY RELIEF VALVES (SRV)

Fig. 8-19

Checks and adjustments of the secondary relief valves (SRV)

8-38

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.2.17.1

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

BOOM CYLINDER "PISTON SIDE" FSA + BHA

There are 6 secondary relief valves (SRV) installed, 4 at the distributor manifold (Fig. 8-19, Pos. 42), 1 in main control block II and 1 in block IV, to limit the maximum possible pressure peaks in the lines. Since the opening pressure of the SRVs is higher than the setting of the main relief valves (MRVs) it is necessary to increase the main relief pressure for testing and adjusting purposes. Valve

Pressure Test Port

Location

SRV 66.5

M12 (High pressure filter)

Control block II, section A1

SRV 66.7

M13 (High pressure filter)

Control block IV, section A1

SRV 65.7

M26.2

Manifold (Fig. 8-19, Pos. 42), section O

SRV 70.13

M26.1

Manifold (Fig. 8-19, Pos. 42), section O

SRV 70.2

M16.2

Manifold (Fig. 8-19, Pos. 42), section B

SRV 70.1

M16.1

Manifold (Fig. 8-19, Pos. 42), section B

MRV circuit II

M12 (High pressure filter)

Control block II

MRV circuit IV

M13 (High pressure filter)

Control block IV

1. Connect gauges to all above listed test ports. 2. Start engine and let it run at high idle. 3. Extend the boom cylinder to the stop position until the hydraulic system stalls. 4. Slowly increase the pump circuit pressure by turning in set-screws (Fig. 8-19, Pos. 3) of both MRVs in control block II and IV while observing the pressure gauges. Stop as soon as the pressure does not rise any further. The gauge pointers should remain at 350±5 bar. NOTE: Since the piston side of the boom cylinders are protected by several SRVs, the pressure gauges show the pressure of the valve with the lowest setting. Even if the gauges show the required pressure, it is possible that one or more valves have a higher setting. To ensure that only the SRVs open during checks and adjustments, it is necessary to further increase the setting of both MRVs. 5. Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-19, Pos. 1) of the MRV. 6. Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-19, Pos. 2). 7. Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-19, Pos. 3) of both MRVs ½ a turn further in, the gauge pointers will remain at the value shown in step 4 (350±5 bar). 8. Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-19, Pos. 2) and install cap (Fig. 8-19, Pos. 1).

Version 2010/1

8-39

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Fig. 8-20

8-40

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Checks and adjustments of the secondary relief valves (SRV)

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

9. Adjust all 6 SRVs equally, until all gauges show a pressure of 350 bar. Adjust in steps of ¼ turn of set-screw (Fig. 8-20, Pos. 3) in the following sequence: z

70.1Ö 70.2 Ö 70.13 Ö 65.4 Ö 66.5 Ö 66.7

z

Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-20, Pos. 1) of the SRVs.

z

Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-20, Pos. 2).

z

Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-20, Pos. 3) clockwise to increase pressure, or counter-clockwise to decrease pressure.

z

Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-20, Pos. 2) and install cap (Fig. 8-20, Pos. 1).

NOTE: Now all gauges will show the same value of 350±5 bar. 10. Proceed with the other valves in the same manner.

WARNING Strong pulsation of the return line hoses indicates deviation in opening pressure of SRVs and must be avoided. Repeat the adjusting procedure until the oil returns well-balanced via all six secondary relief valves.

11. Reset the MRVs to 310+5 bar after the check / adjustment is finished, as follows: z

Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-20, Pos. 1).

z

Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-20, Pos. 2).

z

Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-20, Pos. 3) clockwise to increase pressure, or counter-clockwise to decrease pressure.

z

Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-20, Pos. 2) and install cap (Fig. 8-20, Pos. 1).

NOTE: It is important that the valve bodies of the MRVs and the SRVs are firmly tightened (with 300 Nm). Otherwise, the internal sealing is not properly, which results in loud flow noises and wrong adjustments.

Version 2010/1

8-41

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Fig. 8-21

8-42

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Checks and adjustments of the secondary relief valves (SRV)

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.2.17.2

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

BOOM CYLINDER "PISTON ROD SIDE" FSA +BHA

There is 1 secondary relief valve (SRV) installed in the main control blocks, to limit the maximum possible pressure peaks in the lines. Since the opening pressure of the SRVs is higher than the setting of the main relief valves (MRVs), it is necessary to increase the main relief pressure for testing and adjusting purposes. Valve

Pressure Test Port

Location

SRV 66.3

M11 (High pressure filter)

Control block III, section B3

SRV 66.8

M13 (High pressure filter)

Control block IV, section B1

MRV circuit III

M11 (High pressure filter)

Control block III

MRV circuit IV

M13 (High pressure filter)

Control block IV

1. Connect gauges to all above listed test ports. 2. Start engine and let it run at high idle. 3. Retract the boom cylinder to the stop position until the hydraulic system stalls. 4. Slowly increase the pump circuit pressure by turning in set-screws (Fig. 8-21, Pos. 3) of the MRVs in the control blocks, while observing the pressure gauges. Stop as soon as the pressure does not rise any further. The gauge pointers should remain at 350±5 bar. NOTE: If the piston rod side of the boom cylinders are protected by several SRVs, the pressure gauges show the pressure of the valve with the lowest setting. Even if the gauges show the required pressure, it is possible that one or more valves have a higher setting. To ensure that only the SRVs open during checks and adjustments it is necessary to further increase the setting of both MRVs. 5. Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-21, Pos. 1) of MRV. 6. Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-21, Pos. 2). 7. Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-21, Pos. 3) of both MRV's ½ a turn further in. 8. Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-21, Pos. 2) and install cap (Fig. 8-21, Pos. 1).

Version 2010/1

8-43

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Fig. 8-22

8-44

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Checks and adjustments of the secondary relief valves (SRV)

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

9. Adjust all SRVs equally, until all gauges show a pressure of 350 bar. z

Adjust in steps of ¼ turn of set-screw (Fig. 8-22, Pos. 3).

z

Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-22, Pos. 1) of SRVs.

z

Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-22, Pos. 2).

z

Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-22, Pos. 3) clockwise to increase pressure, or counter-clockwise to decrease pressure.

z

Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-22, Pos. 2) and install cap (Fig. 8-22, Pos. 1).

NOTE: All gauges will show the same value of 350 bar. 10. Proceed with the other valves in the same manner.

WARNING Strong pulsation of the return line hoses indicates deviation in opening pressure of SRVs and must be avoided. Otherwise, the internal sealing is not properly, which results in loud flow noises and wrong adjustments.

11. Reset the MRV's to 310+5 bar after the check / adjustment is finished, as follows: z

Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-22, Pos. 1).

z

Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-22, Pos. 2).

z

Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-22, Pos. 3) clockwise to increase pressure, or counter-clockwise to decrease pressure.

z

Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-22, Pos. 2) and install cap (Fig. 8-22, Pos. 1).

NOTE: It is important that the valve bodies of the MRVs and the SRVs are firmly tightened (with 300 Nm). Otherwise, the internal sealing is not properly, which results in loud flow noises and wrong adjustments.

Version 2010/1

8-45

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Fig. 8-23

8-46

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Checks and adjustments of the secondary relief valves (SRV)

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.2.17.3

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

STICK CYLINDER "PISTON SIDE" FSA

There are 4 secondary relief valves (SRV) installed, 3 at the distributor manifold (Fig. 8-23, Pos. 42) and 1 in main control block IV, to limit the maximum possible pressure peaks in the lines. Since the opening pressure of the SRVs is higher than the setting of the main relief valves (MRV), it is necessary to increase the main relief pressure for testing and adjusting purposes. Valve

Press. test port

Location

SRV 66.11

M13 (High pressure filter)

Control block IV, section A3

SRV 65.2

M20

Manifold (Fig. 8-23, Pos. 42), section G

SRV 70.8

M21.1

Manifold (Fig. 8-23, Pos. 42), section J

SRV 70.9

M13 (High pressure filter)

Control block IV

1. Connect gauges to all test ports listed above. 2. Start engine and let it run at high idle. 3. Extend the stick cylinder to the stop position until the hydraulic system stalls. 4. Slowly increase the pump circuit pressure by turning in set-screws (Fig. 8-23, Pos. 3) of the MRV in control block IV, while observing the pressure gauges. Stop as soon as the pressure does not rise any further. The gauge pointers should remain at 350±5 bar. NOTE: Since the piston side of the stick cylinders are protected by several SRVs, the pressure gauges show the pressure of the valve with the lowest setting. Even if the gauges show the required pressure, it is possible that one or more valves have a higher setting. To ensure that only the SRVs open during checks and adjustments, it is necessary to further increase the setting of the MRVs. 5. Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-23, Pos. 1) of MRV. 6. Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-23, Pos. 2). 7. Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-23, Pos. 3) of the MRV ½ a turn further in; the gauge pointers will remain at the value shown in step 4 (350±5 bar). 8. Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-23, Pos. 2) and install cap (Fig. 8-23, Pos. 1).

Version 2010/1

8-47

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Fig. 8-24

8-48

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Checks and adjustments of the secondary relief valves (SRV)

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

9. Adjust all 4 SRVs equally, until all gauges show a pressure of 350 bar. Adjust in steps of ¼ turn of set-screw (Fig. 8-24, Pos. 3) in the following sequence: z

65.2 Ö 70.8 Ö 70.9 Ö 66.11

z

Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-24, Pos. 1) of SRVs.

z

Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-24, Pos. 2).

z

Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-24, Pos. 3) clockwise to increase pressure, or counter-clockwise to decrease pressure.

z

Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-24, Pos. 2) and install cap (Fig. 8-24, Pos. 1).

NOTE: Now all gauges will show the same value of 350±5 bar. 10. Proceed with the other valves in the same manner in the following sequence: z

70.8 Ö 70.9 Ö 66.11

WARNING Strong pulsation of the return line hoses indicates deviation in opening pressure of SRVs and must be avoided. Repeat the adjusting procedure until the oil returns well-balanced via all four secondary relief valves.

11. Reset the MRV to 310+5 bar after the check / adjustment is finished, as follows: z

Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-24, Pos. 1).

z

Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-24, Pos. 2).

z

Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-24, Pos. 3) clockwise to increase pressure, or counter-clockwise to decrease pressure.

z

Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-24, Pos. 2) and install cap (Fig. 8-24, Pos. 1).

NOTE: It is important that the valve bodies of the MRVs and the SRVs are firmly tightened (with 300 Nm). Otherwise the internal sealing is not properly, which results in loud flow noises and wrong adjustments.

Version 2010/1

8-49

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Fig. 8-25

8-50

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Checks and adjustments of the secondary relief valves (SRV)

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.2.17.4

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

STICK CYLINDER "PISTON SIDE" BHA

There are 3 secondary relief valves (SRVs) installed in main control blocks I, II and IV to limit the maximum possible pressure peaks in the lines. Since the opening pressure of the SRVs is higher than the setting of the main relief valves (MRVs), it is necessary to increase the main relief pressure for testing and adjusting purposes. Valve

Press. test port

Location

SRV 66.4

M14 (High pressure filter)

Control block I, section B3

SRV 66.6

M13 (High pressure filter)

Control block II, section B2

SRV 66.12

M12 (High pressure filter)

Control block IV, section B3

MRV circuit I

M14 (High pressure filter)

Control block I

MRV circuit II

M13 (High pressure filter)

Control block II

MRV circuit IV

M12 (High pressure filter)

Control block IV

1. Connect gauges to all test ports listed above. 2. Start engine and let it run at high idle. 3. Retract the stick cylinder to the stop position until the hydraulic system stalls. 4. Slowly increase the pump circuit pressure by turning in set-screws (Fig. 8-25, Pos. 3) of the MRVs in the control blocks, while observing the pressure gauges. Stop as soon as the pressure does not rise any further. The gauge pointers should remain at 350±5 bar. NOTE: Since the piston side of the stick cylinders are protected by several SRVs, the pressure gauges show the pressure of the valve with the lowest setting. Even if the gauges show the required pressure, it is possible that one or more valves have a higher setting. To ensure that only the SRVs open during checks and adjustments, it is necessary to further increase the setting of the MRVs. 5. Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-25, Pos. 1) of MRV. 6. Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-25, Pos. 2). 7. Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-25, Pos. 3) of the MRV's ½ a turn further in, the gauge pointers will remain at the value shown at step 4 (350±5 bar). 8. Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-25, Pos. 2) and install cap (Fig. 8-25, Pos. 1).

Version 2010/1

8-51

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Fig. 8-26

8-52

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Checks and adjustments of the secondary relief valves (SRV)

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

9. Adjust all 3 SRVs equally, until all gauges show a pressure of 350 bar. z

Adjust in steps of ¼ turn of set-screw (Fig. 8-26, Pos. 3) in the following sequence:

z

66.4 Ö 66.6 Ö 66.12

z

Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-26, Pos. ) of SRVs.

z

Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-26, Pos. 2).

z

Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-26, Pos. ) clockwise to increase pressure, or counter-clockwise to decrease pressure.

z

Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-26, Pos. 2) and install cap (Fig. 8-26, Pos. 1).

NOTE: Now all gauges will show the same value of 350±5 bar. 10. Proceed with the other valves in the same manner in the following sequence: z

66.6 Ö 66.12

WARNING Strong pulsation of the return line hoses, indicates deviation in opening pressure of SRV's and must be avoided. Repeat the adjusting procedure until the oil returns well-balanced via all 3 secondary relief valves.

11. Reset the MRV to 310+5 bar after the check/adjustment is finished, as follows: z

Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-26, Pos. 1).

z

Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-26, Pos. 2).

z

Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-26, Pos. 3) clockwise to increase pressure, or counter-clockwise to decrease pressure.

z

Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-26, Pos. 2) and install cap (Fig. 8-26, Pos. 1).

NOTE: It is important that the valve bodies of MRV and SRV are firmly tightened (with 300 Nm). Otherwise the internal sealing is not properly, which results in loud flow noises and wrong adjustments.

Version 2010/1

8-53

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Fig. 8-27

8-54

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Checks and adjustments of the secondary relief valves (SRV)

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.2.18

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

STICK CYLINDER "PISTON ROD SIDE" FSA

There are 2 secondary relief valves (SRVs) installed in main control blocks I and IV to limit the maximum possible pressure peaks in the lines. Since the opening pressure of the SRVs is higher than the setting of the main relief valves (MRVs), it is necessary to increase the main relief pressure for testing and adjusting purposes. Valve

Pressure Test Port

Location

SRV 66.4

M14 (High pressure filter)

Control block I, section B3

SRV 66.12

M13 (High pressure filter)

Control block IV, section B3

MRV circuit I

M14 (High pressure filter)

Control block I

MRV circuit IV

M13 (High pressure filter)

Control block IV

1. Connect gauges to all test ports listed above. 2. Start engine and let it run at high idle. 3. Retract the stick cylinder to the stop position until the hydraulic system stalls. (Switch 20S098) 4. Slowly increase the pump circuit pressure by turning in set-screws (Fig. 8-27, Pos. 3) of MRVs in the control blocks, while observing the pressure gauges. Stop as soon as the pressure does not rise any further. The gauge pointers should remain at 350±5 bar. NOTE: Since the piston rod side of the stick cylinders are protected by several SRVs, the pressure gauges show the pressure of the valve with the lowest setting. Even if the gauges show the required pressure, it is possible that one or more valves have a higher setting. To ensure that only the SRVs open during checks and adjustments, it is necessary to further increase the setting of both MRVs. 5. Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-27, Pos. 1) of MRV. 6. Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-27, Pos. 2). 7. Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-27, Pos. 3) of both MRV's ½ a turn further in. 8. Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-27, Pos. 2) and install cap (Fig. 8-27, Pos. 1).

Version 2010/1

8-55

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Fig. 8-28

8-56

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Checks and adjustments of the secondary relief valves (SRV)

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

9. Adjust both SRVs equally, until all gauges show a pressure of 350 bar. Adjust in steps of ¼ turn of set-screw (Fig. 8-28, Pos. 3) in the following sequence: z

66.4 Ö 66.12

z

Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-28, Pos. ) of SRVs.

z

Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-28, Pos. 2).

z

Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-28, Pos. 3) clockwise to increase pressure, or counter-clockwise to decrease pressure.

z

Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-28, Pos. 2) and install cap (Fig. 8-28, Pos. 1).

NOTE: Now all gauges will show the same value of 350±5 bar. 10. Proceed with the other valves in the same manner.

WARNING Strong pulsation of the return line hoses indicates deviation in opening pressure of SRVs and must be avoided. Repeat the adjusting procedure until the oil returns well-balanced via all secondary relief valves.

11. Reset the MRVs to 310+5 bar after the check / adjustment is finished, as follows: z

Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-28, Pos. 1).

z

Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-28, Pos. 2).

z

Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-28, Pos. 3) clockwise to increase pressure, or counter-clockwise to decrease pressure.

z

Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-28, Pos. 2) and install cap (Fig. 8-28, Pos. 1).

NOTE: It is important that the valve bodies of MRV and SRV are firmly tightened (with 300 Nm). Otherwise the internal sealing is not properly, which results in loud flow noises and wrong adjustments.

Version 2010/1

8-57

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Fig. 8-29

8-58

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Checks and adjustments of the secondary relief valves (SRV)

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.2.18.1

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

STICK CYLINDER "PISTON ROD SIDE" BHA

There are 3 secondary relief valves (SRVs) installed at the distributor manifold (Fig. 8-29, Pos. 42) to limit the maximum possible pressure peaks in the lines. Since the opening pressure of the SRVs is higher than the setting of the main relief valves (MRVs), it is necessary to increase the main relief pressure for testing and adjusting purposes. Valve

Pressure Test Port

Location

SRV 70.8

M21.1

Manifold (Fig. 8-29, Pos. 42), section J

SRV 70.9

M21.2

Manifold (Fig. 8-29, Pos. 42), section J

SRV 70.10

M22

Manifold (Fig. 8-29, Pos. 42), section K

MRV circuit I

M14 (High pressure filter)

Control block I

1. Connect gauges to all test ports listed above. 2. Start engine and let it run at high idle. 3. Retract the stick cylinder to the stop position until the hydraulic system stalls. 4. Slowly increase the pump circuit pressure by turning in set-screws (Fig. 8-29, Pos. 3) of MRVs in the control blocks while observing the pressure gauges. Stop as soon as the pressure does not rise any further. The gauge pointers should remain at 350±5 bar. NOTE: Since the piston rod side of the stick cylinders are protected by several SRVs, the pressure gauges show the pressure of the valve with the lowest setting. Even if the gauges show the required pressure, it is possible that one or more valves have a higher setting. To ensure that only the SRVs open during checks and adjustments, it is necessary to further increase the setting of both MRVs. 5. Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-29, Pos. 1) of the MRV. 6. Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-29, Pos. 2). 7. Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-29, Pos. 3) of both MRVs ½ a turn further in. 8. Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-29, Pos. 2) and install cap (Fig. 8-29, Pos. 1).

Version 2010/1

8-59

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Fig. 8-30

8-60

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Checks and adjustments of the secondary relief valves (SRV)

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

9. Adjust all SRVs equally, until all gauges show a pressure of 350±5 bar. Adjust in steps of ¼ turn of set-screw (Fig. 8-30, Pos. 3) in the following sequence: z

70.8 Ö 70.9 Ö 70.10

z

Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-30, Pos. 1) of SRVs.

z

Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-30, Pos. 2).

z

Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-30, Pos. 3) clockwise to increase pressure, or counter-clockwise to decrease pressure.

z

Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-30, Pos. 2) and install cap (Fig. 8-30, Pos. 1).

NOTE: Now all gauges will show the same value of 350±5 bar. 10. Proceed with the other valves in the same manner in the following sequence: z

70.9 Ö 70.10

WARNING Strong pulsation of the return line hoses indicates deviation in opening pressure of SRVs and must be avoided. Repeat the adjusting procedure until the oil returns well-balanced via all secondary relief valves.

11. Reset the MRVs to 310+5 bar after the check / adjustment is finished, as follows: z

Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-30, Pos. 1).

z

Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-30, Pos. 2).

z

Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-30, Pos. 3) clockwise to increase pressure, or counter-clockwise to decrease pressure.

z

Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-30, Pos.2) and install cap (Fig. 8-30, Pos. 1).

NOTE: It is important that the valve bodies of MRV and SRVs are firmly tightened (with 300 Nm). Otherwise the internal sealing is not properly, which results in loud flow noises and wrong adjustments.

Version 2010/1

8-61

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Fig. 8-31

8-62

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Checks and adjustments of the secondary relief valves (SRV)

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.2.18.2

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

BUCKET CYLINDER "PISTON SIDE" FSA

There are 6 secondary relief valves (SRVs) installed, 4 at the distributor manifold (Fig. 8-31, Pos. 42), 1 in main control block III, and 1 in block IV, to limit the maximum possible pressure peaks in the lines. Since the opening pressure of the SRVs is higher than the setting of the main relief valves (MRVs), it is necessary to increase the main relief pressure for testing and adjusting purposes. Valve

Pressure Test Port

Location

SRV 66.1

M11 (High pressure filter)

Control block III, section A2

SRV 66.9

M13 (High pressure filter)

Control block IV, section A2

SRV 65.1

M17.1

Manifold (Fig. 8-31, Pos. 42), section C

SRV 70.4

M17.2

Manifold (Fig. 8-31, Pos. 42), section C

SRV 70.12

M24

Manifold (Fig. 8-31, Pos. 42), section M

SRV 65.3

M25

Manifold (Fig. 8-31, Pos. 42), section N

MRV circuit III

M11 (High pressure filter)

Control block III

MRV circuit IV

M13 (High pressure filter)

Control block IV

1. Connect gauges to all test ports listed above. 2. Start engine and let it run at high idle. 3. Extend the bucket cylinder to the stop position until the hydraulic system stalls. 4. Slowly increase the MRV pressure by turning in set-screws (Fig. 8-31, Pos. 3) of both MRVs in control blocks III and IV, while observing the pressure gauges. Stop as soon as the pressure does not rise any further. The gauge pointers should remain at 360–370 bar. NOTE: Since the piston side of the bucket cylinders are protected by several SRVs, the pressure gauges show the pressure of the valve with the lowest setting. Even if the gauges show the required pressure, it is possible that one or more valves have a higher setting. To ensure that only the SRVs open during checks and adjustments, it is necessary to further increase the setting of both MRVs. 5. Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-31, Pos. 1) of MRV. 6. Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-31, Pos. 2). 7. Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-31, Pos. 3) of both MRVs ½ a turn further in; the gauge pointers will remain at the value shown in step 4 (360–370 bar). 8. Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-31, Pos. 2) and install cap (Fig. 8-31, Pos. 1).

Version 2010/1

8-63

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Fig. 8-32

8-64

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Checks and adjustments of the secondary relief valves (SRV)

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

9. Adjust all 6 SRVs equally until all gauges show a pressure of 350±5 bar. Adjust in steps of ¼ turn of set-screw (Fig. 8-32, Pos. 3) in the following sequence: z

65.1 Ö 70.4 Ö 70.12 Ö 65.3 Ö 66.1 Ö 66.9

z

Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-32, Pos. 1) of SRVs.

z

Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-32, Pos. 2).

z

Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-32, Pos. 3) clockwise to increase pressure, or counter-clockwise to decrease pressure.

z

Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-32, Pos. 2) and install cap (Fig. 8-32, Pos. 1).

10. Reduce the pressure, at SRV 65.1 to a value below the required value, and then increase up to the required pressure (350±5 bar), while observing all gauges. NOTE: Now all gauges will show the same value of 350±5 bar, but only SRV 65.1 has the correct setting. 11. Proceed with the other valves in the same manner in the following sequence: z

70.4 Ö 70.12 Ö 65.3 Ö 66.1 Ö 66.9

WARNING Strong pulsation of the return line hoses indicates deviation in opening pressure of SRVs and must be avoided. Repeat the adjusting procedure until the oil returns well-balanced via all 6 secondary relief valves.

12. Reset the MRVs to 310+5 bar after the check / adjustment is finished, as follows: z

Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-32, Pos. 1).

z

Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-32, Pos. 2).

z

Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-32, Pos. 3) clockwise to increase pressure, or counter-clockwise to decrease pressure.

z

Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-32, Pos. 2) and install cap (Fig. 8-32, Pos. 1).

NOTE: It is important that the valve bodies of MRV and SRVs are firmly tightened (with 300 Nm). Otherwise the internal sealing is not properly, which results in loud flow noises and wrong adjustments.

Version 2010/1

8-65

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Fig. 8-33

8-66

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Checks and adjustments of the secondary relief valves (SRV)

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.2.18.3

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

BUCKET CYLINDER "PISTON SIDE" BHA

There are 3 secondary relief valves (SRVs) installed at the distributor manifold (Fig. 8-33, Pos. 42) to limit the maximum possible pressure peaks in the lines. Since the opening pressure of the SRVs is higher than the setting of the main relief valves (MRVs), it is necessary to increase the main relief pressure for testing and adjusting purposes. Valve

Pressure Test Port

Location

SRV 70.3

M17.1

Manifold (Fig. 8-33, Pos. 42), section C

SRV 70.4

M17.2

Manifold (Fig. 8-33, Pos. 42), section C

SRV 70.12

M24

Manifold (Fig. 8-33, Pos. 42), section M

MRV circuit III

M11 (High pressure filter)

Control block III

1. Connect gauges to all test ports listed above. 2. Start engine and let it run at high idle. 3. Extend the bucket cylinder to the final stop position until the hydraulic system stalls. 4. Slowly increase the pump circuit pressure by turning in set-screws (Fig. 8-33, Pos. 3) of MRV in control block III, while observing the pressure gauges. Stop as soon as the pressure does not rise any further. The gauge pointers should remain at 350±5 bar. NOTE: Since the piston side of the bucket cylinders are protected by several SRVs, the pressure gauges show the pressure of the valve with the lowest setting. Even if the gauges show the required pressure, it is possible that one or more valves have a higher setting. To ensure that only the SRVs open during checks and adjustments, it is necessary to further increase the setting of both MRVs. 5. Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-33, Pos. 1) of MRV. 6. Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-33, Pos. 2). 7. Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-33, Pos. 3) of both MRVs ½ a turn further in; the gauge pointers will remain at the value shown in step 4 (350±5 bar ). 8. Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-33, Pos. 2) and install cap (Fig. 8-33, Pos. 1).

Version 2010/1

8-67

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Fig. 8-34

8-68

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Checks and adjustments of the secondary relief valves (SRV)

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

9. Adjust all 3 SRVs equally until all gauges show a pressure of 350±5 bar. Adjust in steps of ¼ turn of set-screw (Fig. 8-34, Pos. 3) in the following sequence: z

70.3 Ö 70.4 Ö 70.12

z

Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-34, Pos. 1) of SRVs.

z

Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-34, Pos. 2).

z

Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-34, Pos. 3) clockwise to increase pressure, or counter-clockwise to decrease pressure.

z

Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-34, Pos. 2) and install cap (Fig. 8-34, Pos. 1).

10. Reduce the pressure at SRV 70.3 to a value below the required value, and then increase up to the required pressure (350±5 bar), while observing all gauges. NOTE: Now all gauges will show the same value of 350±5 bar, but only SRV 70.3 has the correct setting. 11. Proceed with the other valves in the same manner in the following sequence: z

70.4 Ö 70.12

WARNING Strong pulsation of the return line hoses indicates deviation in opening pressure of SRVs and must be avoided. Repeat the adjusting procedure until the oil returns well-balanced via all 3 secondary relief valves.

12. Reset the MRVs to 310+5 bar after the check / adjustment is finished, as follows: z

Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-34, Pos. 1).

z

Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-34, Pos. 2).

z

Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-34, Pos. 3) clockwise to increase pressure, or counter-clockwise to decrease pressure.

z

Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-34, Pos. 2) and install cap (Fig. 8-34, Pos. 1).

NOTE: It is important that the valve bodies of MRV and the SRVs are firmly tightened (with 300 Nm). Otherwise the internal sealing is not properly, which results in loud flow noises and wrong adjustments.

Version 2010/1

8-69

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Fig. 8-35

8-70

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Checks and adjustments of the secondary relief valves (SRV)

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.2.18.4

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

BUCKET CYLINDER "PISTON ROD SIDE" FSA

There are 2 secondary relief valves (SRVs) installed, 1 in main control block III, and 1 in block IV, to limit the maximum possible pressure peaks in the lines. Since the opening pressure of the SRVs is higher than the setting of the main relief valves (MRVs), it is necessary to increase the main relief pressure for testing and adjusting purposes. Valve

Pressure Test Port

Location

SRV 66.2

M11 (High pressure filter)

Control block III, section B2

SRV 66.10

M13 (High pressure filter)

Control block IV, section B2

MRV circuit III

M11 (High pressure filter)

Control block III

MRV circuit IV

M13 (High pressure filter)

Control block IV

1. Connect gauges to all test ports listed above. 2. Start engine and let it run at high idle. 3. Retract the bucket cylinder to the stop position until the hydraulic system stalls. 4. Slowly increase the pump circuit pressure by turning in set-screws (Fig. 8-35, Pos. 3) of MRVs in the control blocks, while observing the pressure gauges. Stop as soon as the pressure does not rise any further. The gauge pointers should remain at 350±5 bar. NOTE: Since the piston rod side of the bucket cylinders are protected by several SRVs, the pressure gauges show the pressure of the valve with the lowest setting. Even if the gauges show the required pressure, it is possible that one or more valves have a higher setting. To ensure that only the SRVs open during checks and adjustments, it is necessary to further increase the setting of the MRVs. 5. Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-35, Pos. 1) of MRV. 6. Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-35, Pos. 2). 7. Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-35, Pos. 3) of both MRVs ½ a turn further in. 8. Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-35, Pos. 2) and install cap (Fig. 8-35, Pos. 1).

Version 2010/1

8-71

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Fig. 8-36

8-72

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Checks and adjustments of the secondary relief valves (SRV)

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

9. Adjust both SRVs equally until all gauges show a pressure of 350±5 bar. Adjust in steps of ¼ turn of set-screw (Fig. 8-36, Pos. 3) in the following sequence: z

66.2 Ö 66.10

z

Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-36, Pos. 1) of SRVs.

z

Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-36, Pos. 2).

z

Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-36, Pos. 3) clockwise to increase pressure, or counter-clockwise to decrease pressure.

z

Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-36, Pos. 2) and install cap (Fig. 8-36, Pos. 1).

10. Reduce the pressure at SRV 66.2 to a value below the required value, and then increase up to the required pressure (350±5 bar), while observing all gauges. NOTE: Now all gauges will show the same value of 350±5 bar, but only SRV 66.2 has the correct setting. 11. Proceed with the other valve in the same manner.

WARNING Strong pulsation of the return line hoses indicates deviation in opening pressure of SRVs and must be avoided. Repeat the adjusting procedure until the oil returns well-balanced via all secondary relief valves.

12. Reset the MRVs to 310+5 bar after the check / adjustment is finished, as follows: z

Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-36, Pos. 1).

z

Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-36, Pos. 2).

z

Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-36, Pos. 3) clockwise to increase pressure, or counter-clockwise to decrease pressure.

z

Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-36, Pos. 2) and install cap (Fig. 8-36, Pos. 1).

NOTE: It is important that the valve bodies of MRV and SRVs are firmly tightened (with 300 Nm). Otherwise the internal sealing is not properly, which results in loud flow noises and wrong adjustments.

Version 2010/1

8-73

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Fig. 8-37

8-74

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Checks and adjustments of the secondary relief valves (SRV)

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.2.18.5

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

BUCKET CYLINDER "PISTON ROD SIDE" BHA

There are 3 secondary relief valves (SRVs) installed at the distributor manifold (Fig. 8-37, Pos. 42) to limit the maximum possible pressure peaks in the lines. Since the opening pressure of the SRVs is higher than the setting of the main relief valves (MRVs), it is necessary to increase the main relief pressure for testing and adjusting purposes. Valve

Pressure Test Port

Location

SRV 70.5

M18

Manifold (Fig. 8-37, Pos. 42), section D

SRV 70.7

M20

Manifold (Fig. 8-37, Pos. 42), section G

SRV 70.11

M23

Manifold (Fig. 8-37, Pos. 42), section L

MRV circuit IV

M11 (High pressure filter)

Control block III

1. Connect gauges to all above listed test ports. 2. Start engine and let it run at high idle. 3. Extend the bucket cylinder to the stop position until the hydraulic system stalls. 4. Slowly increase the pump circuit pressure by turning in set-screws (Fig. 8-37, Pos. 3) of MRV in control block III, while observing the pressure gauges. Stop as soon as the pressure does not rise any further. The gauge pointers should remain at 350±5 bar. NOTE: Since the piston rod side of the bucket cylinders are protected by several SRVs, the pressure gauges show the pressure of the valve with the lowest setting. Even if the gauges show the required pressure, it is possible that one or more valves have a higher setting. To ensure that only the SRVs open during checks and adjustments, it is necessary to further increase the setting of the MRV. 5. Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-37, Pos. 1) of MRV. 6. Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-37, Pos. 2). 7. Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-37, Pos. 3) of both MRVs ½ a turn further in; the gauge pointers will remain at the value shown in step 4 (350±5 bar). 8. Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-37, Pos. 2) and install cap (Fig. 8-37, Pos. 1).

Version 2010/1

8-75

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Fig. 8-38

8-76

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Checks and adjustments of the secondary relief valves (SRV)

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

9. Adjust all 3 SRVs equally until all gauges show a pressure of 350±5 bar. Adjust in steps of ¼ turn of set-screw (Fig. 8-38, Pos. 3) in the following sequence: z

70.5 Ö 70.7 Ö 70.11

z

Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-38, Pos. 1) of SRVs.

z

Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-38, Pos. 2).

z

Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-38, Pos. 3) clockwise to increase pressure, or counter-clockwise to decrease pressure.

z

Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-38, Pos. 2) and install cap (Fig. 8-38, Pos. 1).

10. Reduce the pressure at SRV 70.5 to a value below the required value, and then increase up to the required pressure (350±5 bar), while observing all gauges. NOTE: Now all gauges will show the same value of 350±5 bar, but only SRV 70.5 has the correct setting. 11. Proceed with the other valves in the same manner in the following sequence: z

70.7 Ö 70.11

WARNING Strong pulsation of the return line hoses indicates deviation in opening pressure of SRVs and must be avoided. Repeat the adjusting procedure until the oil returns well-balanced via all 3 secondary relief valves.

12. Reset the MRVs to 310+5 bar after the check/adjustment is finished, as follows: z

Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-38, Pos. 1).

z

Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-38, Pos. 2).

z

Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-38, Pos. 3) clockwise to increase pressure, or counter-clockwise to decrease pressure.

z

Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-38, Pos. 2) and install cap (Fig. 8-38, Pos. 1).

NOTE: It is important that the valve bodies of MRVs and SRVs are firmly tightened (with 300 Nm). Otherwise the internal sealing is not properly, which results in loud flow noises and wrong adjustments.

Version 2010/1

8-77

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Fig. 8-39

8-78

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Checks and adjustments of the secondary relief valves (SRV)

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.2.18.6

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

CLAM CYLINDER "PISTON ROD SIDE" FSA

There is one secondary relief valve (SRV) installed at the distributor manifold (Fig. 8-39, Pos. 42) to limit the maximum possible pressure peaks in the lines. Since the opening pressure of the SRV is higher than the setting of the main relief valves (MRVs), it is necessary to increase the main relief pressure for testing and adjusting purposes. Valve

Pressure Test Port

Location

SRV 70.6

M19

Manifold (Fig. 8-39, Pos. 42), section E

MRV cicuit II

M12 (High pressure filter)

Control block II

1. Connect gauges to the test ports listed above. 2. Start engine and let it run at high idle. 3. Retract the clam cylinder (open the bucket) to the stop position until the hydraulic system stalls. 4. Slowly increase the pump circuit pressure by turning in set-screws (Fig. 8-39, Pos. 3) of MRV in control block II, while observing the pressure gauges. Stop as soon as the pressure does not rise any further. The gauge pointers should remain at 350±5 bar. If necessary, correct the adjustment as follows: 1. Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-39, Pos. 1) of MRV. 2. Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-39, Pos. 2). 3. Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-39, Pos. 3) of the MRV ½ a turn further in; the gauge pointers will remain at the value shown in step 4 (350±5 bar). 4. Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-39, Pos. 2) and install cap (Fig. 8-39, Pos. 1). 5. Reduce the pressure at SRV 70.6 to a value below the required value, and then increase up to the required pressure (350±5 bar), while observing all gauges. 6. Reset the MRV to 310+5 bar after adjustment is finished, as follows: z

Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-39, Pos. 1).

z

Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-39, Pos. 2).

z

Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-39, Pos. 3) clockwise to increase pressure, or counter-clockwise to decrease pressure.

z

Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-39, Pos. 2) and install cap (Fig. 8-39, Pos. 1).

NOTE: It is important that the valve bodies of MRV and SRV are firmly tightened (with 300 Nm). Otherwise the internal sealing is not properly, which results in loud flow noises and wrong adjustments.

Version 2010/1

8-79

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Fig. 8-40

8-80

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Checks and adjustments of the secondary relief valves (SRV)

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.2.18.7

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

CLAM CYLINDER "PISTON SIDE" FSA

There are 2 secondary relief valves (SRVs) installed, 1 at distributor manifold (Fig. 8-40, Pos. 42), and 1 in main control block II, to limit the maximum possible pressure in the lines when closing the bucket. To avoid damages at the clam shell due to improper operation, the SRVs should be adjusted in a way that the pressure is just sufficient to keep the bucket closed. Valve

Pressure Test Port

Location

SRV 18

M18

Manifold (Fig. 8-40, Pos. 42), section K

SRV 45

M12 (High pressure filter)

Control block II

1. Connect gauges to all test ports listed above. 2. Start engine and let it run at high idle. 3. Raise the attachment and bring the back wall of the bucket into horizontal position. 4. Press the pedal "bucket closing" until the hydraulic system stalls. Release the pedal back to neutral position. The bucket must stay closed. That means the clam-cylinders must not be retracted by the force (weight) of the clam shell. Adjust the SRVs as follows: z

Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-40, Pos. 1) of SRVs.

z

Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-40, Pos. 2).

z

Turn set-screw (Fig. 8-40, Pos. 3) clockwise to increase pressure, or counter-clockwise to decrease pressure.

z

Tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-40, Pos. 2) and install cap (Fig. 8-40, Pos. 1).

5. Adjust both SRVs equally until the gauges show a pressure of 150±30 bar. NOTE: Since the piston side of the clam cylinders are protected by several SRVs, the pressure gauges show the pressure of the valve with the lowest setting. For standard buckets the pressure is 150 bar, reinforced or with heavy wear package attached, the pressure may be raised up to 180 bar. ###

Version 2010/1

8-81

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Fig. 8-41

8-82

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Checks and adjustments of the lowering speed

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.2.18.8

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS OF THE LOWERING SPEED

General On excavators equipped with face shovel attachment (FSA), there are two different operation modes for lowering the boom and stick: 1. Floating position activated, the lowering speed is restricted by the stroke limiters (Fig. 8-41, Pos. 1) of the single control blocks (Fig. 8-41, Pos. 2). (Standard adjustment: ’fully open’) 2. Floating position deactivated, the lowering speed has to be adjusted at the the flow restrictors (throttle valves) at the distributor manifold (Fig. 8-41, Pos. 42). On excavators equipped with backhoe attachment (BHA), the lowering speed has to be adjusted at the flow restrictors only (no floating system installed). Purpose of the flow restrictors: z

To avoid an interruption (stops during movements) of the pump delivery.

z

To provide smooth cylinder movement.

z

To limit the return oil flow through the control block to the maximum permissible volume.

Checks and adjustments: z

Standard test method is measuring the total cylinder running time (from start to final stop) by using a stop watch.

z

Basic adjustment of all restrictors as follows: z

For easy turning of set-screw (Fig. 8-41, Pos. 3), lower the attachment to ground, stop motor and allow pressure equalising by moving the joysticks several times.

z

Loosen the lock nut (Fig. 8-41, Pos. 4) and turn the bolt (Fig. 8-41, Pos. 3) cw. for more restriction and ccw. for less restricton. If more than one restrictor is used for one movement make sure all set-screws are equally adjusted.

NOTE: For the values to be set, refer to column "Nominal" in the PM-CLINIC data sheet for the respective attachment (FSA / BHA), see following illustrations (extracts – sample only). FSA:

BHA:

Version 2010/1

8-83

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

NOTE: During commissioning, a standard throttle valve adjustment has to be carried out. For safety reasons, the throttle valves are basically adjusted before the machine is leaving the factory. For more information, refer to PM CLINIC.

Fig. 8-42

8-84

Checks and adjustments of the lowering speed (boom cylinder FSA)

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Boom cylinder FSA Due to the 2 different operation modes for lowering the boom, the lowering speed must be adjusted twice: 1. Floating position activated 2. Floating position deactivated Maximum permissible lowering speed Refer to the PM-CLINIC sheet for your machine. Adjustments / checks (floating position activated): 1. Use a stop watch to measure the time for the cylinder movement (from start to final stop). NOTE: Pay attention to measure the time of the cylinder movement only. 2. Raise the fully extended attachment with empty bucket to the maximum height position (Fig. 8-42, Pos. A). 3. Run the engine at high idle. 4. Lower the attachment; do not press button 20S095 (floating position switch). Rapidly move the control lever 20S019 to the front end position (start stop watch when the boom starts moving) and hold the control lever in this position until the final position (Fig. 8-42, Pos. B) is reached (stop the stop watch). NOTE: Lower the boom so that the bucket stops just above the ground. 5. If the lowering speed is too high (measured time is less than the permissible time), the speed must be reduced by adjusting the stroke limiter of the single control block (Fig. 8-42, Pos. 61Q635). Adjust as follows: z

To decrease the lowering speed, loosen the lock nut (Fig. 8-42, Pos. 2) and turn the bolt (Fig. 8-42, Pos. 1) clockwise.

z

To increase the lowering speed, loosen the lock nut (Fig. 8-42, Pos. 2) and turn the bolt (Fig. 8-42, Pos. 1) counter-clockwise.

6. Check the lowering speed again and repeat the adjustment, if necessary. 7. If the adjustment is finished, tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-42, Pos. 2).

Version 2010/1

8-85

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Fig. 8-43

8-86

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Checks and adjustments of the lowering speed (boom cylinder FSA)

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Maximum permissible lowering speed: Refer to the PM-CLINIC sheet for your machine. Adjustments / checks (floating position deactivated). 1. Use a stop watch to measure the time for the cylinder movement. 2. Raise the fully extended attachment with empty bucket to the maximum height position (Fig. 8-43, Pos. A). 3. Run the engine at high idle. 4. Press push-button 20S095 and keep it depressed while lowering the attachment. Rapidly move the control lever (Fig. 8-43, Pos. 20S019) to the front end position (start the stop watch) and hold it in this position until the final position (Fig. 8-43, Pos. B) is reached (stop the stop watch). NOTE: Lower the boom so that the bucket stops just above the ground. 5. If the lowering speed is too high (measured time is less than the permissible time), the speed must be reduced by adjusting the throttle valves 70.1, 70.2 and 70.13 at the distributor manifold (Fig. 8-43, Pos. 42). Adjust as follows: z

To decrease the lowering speed, loosen the lock nut (Fig. 8-43, Pos. 2) and turn the bolt (Fig. 8-43, Pos. 1) clockwise.

z

To increase the lowering speed, loosen the lock nut (Fig. 8-43, Pos. 2) and turn the bolt (Fig. 8-43, Pos. 1) counter-clockwise.

NOTE: There are several throttle valves mounted in the return line. The return oil flow oil flow of the boom cylinder through the throttle valves must be set synchronously. All valves have to be adjusted in a way the bolts are turned in by the same amount of revolutions.

6. Check lowering speed again and repeat the adjustment, if necessary. 7. If the adjustment is finished, tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-43, Pos. 2).

Version 2010/1

8-87

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Fig. 8-44

8-88

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Checks and adjustments of the lowering speed (boom cylinder BHA)

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Boom cylinder BHA Maximum permissible lowering speed: Refer to the PM-CLINIC sheet for your machine. Adjustments / checks: 1. Use a stop watch to measure the time for the cylinder movement. 2. Raise the fully extended attachment with empty bucket to the maximum height position (Fig. 8-44, Pos. A). 3. Run the engine at high idle. 4. Rapidly move the control lever (Fig. 8-44, Pos. 20S019) to the front end position (start the stop watch) and hold it in this position until the final position of the boom (Fig. 8-44, Pos. B) is reached.(stop the stop watch). NOTE: Lower the boom so that the bucket stops just above the ground. 5. If the lowering speed is too high (measured time is less than the permissible time), the speed must be reduced by adjusting the throttle valves 70.1, 70.2 , 70.13 and 70.14 at the distributor manifold (Fig. 8-44, Pos. 42). Adjust as follows: z

To decrease the lowering speed, loosen the lock nut (Fig. 8-44, Pos. 2) and turn the bolt (Fig. 8-44, Pos. 1) clockwise.

z

To increase the lowering speed, loosen the lock nut (Fig. 8-44, Pos. 2) and turn the bolt (Fig. 8-44, Pos. 1) counter-clockwise.

NOTE: There are several throttle valves mounted in the return line. The return oil flow oil flow of the boom cylinder through the throttle valves must be set synchronously. All valves have to be adjusted in a way the bolts are turned in by the same amount of revolutions. 6. Check lowering speed again and repeat the adjustment, if necessary. 7. If the adjustment is finished, tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-44, Pos. 2).

Version 2010/1

8-89

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Fig. 8-45

8-90

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Checks and adjustments of the lowering speed (stick cylinder FSA)

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Stick cylinder FSA Due to the two different operation modes for lowering the stick, the lowering speed must be adjusted twice: 1. Floating position activated 2. Floating position deactivated Maximum permissible lowering speed: Refer to the PM-CLINIC sheet for your machine. Adjustments / checks (floating position activated): 1. Use a stop watch to measure the time for the cylinder movement. 2. Raise the fully extended attachment with empty bucket to the maximum height position (Fig. 8-45, Pos. A). 3. Run the engine at high idle. 4. Rapidly move the control lever (Fig. 8-45, Pos. 20S020) to the rear end position (start the stop watch) and hold it in this position until the final position (Fig. 8-45, Pos. B) is reached (stop the stop watch). 5. If the lowering speed is too high (measured time is less than the permissible time), the speed must be reduced by adjusting the stroke limiter of the single control block (Fig. 8-45, Pos. 60Q632, 60Q633 and 60Q634). Adjust as follows: z

To decrease the lowering speed, loosen the lock nut (Fig. 8-45, Pos. 2) and turn the bolt (Fig. 8-42, Pos. 1) clockwise.

z

To increase the lowering speed, loosen the lock nut (Fig. 8-45, Pos. 2) and turn the bolt (Fig. 8-42, Pos. 1) counter-clockwise.

NOTE: Since there are several single control blocks used for the stick movement, make sure that all stroke limiters are equally adjusted. 6. Check lowering speed again and repeat the adjustment, if necessary. 7. If the adjustment is finished, tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-45, Pos. 2).

Version 2010/1

8-91

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Fig. 8-46

8-92

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Checks and adjustments of the lowering speed (stick cylinder FSA)

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Maximum permissible lowering speed: Refer to the PM-CLINIC sheet for your machine. Adjustments / checks (floating position deactivated with push-button 20S098): 1. Use a stop watch to measure the time for the cylinder movement. 2. Raise the fully extended attachment with empty bucket to the maximum height position (Fig. 8-46, Pos. A). 3. Run the engine at high idle. 4. Press push-button 20S098 and keep it depressed while lowering the stick. Rapidly move the control lever (Fig. 8-46, Pos. 20S020) to the rear end position (start the stop watch) and hold it until the final position (Fig. 8-46, Pos. B) is reached (stop the stop watch). 5. If the lowering speed is too high (measured time is less than the permissible time), the speed must be reduced by adjusting the throttle valves 70.8 and 70.9 at the distributor manifold (Fig. 8-46, Pos. 42). Adjust as follows: z

To decrease the lowering speed, loosen the lock nut (Fig. 8-46, Pos. 2) and turn the bolt (Fig. 8-46, Pos. 2) clockwise.

z

To increase the lowering speed, loosen the lock nut (Fig. 8-46, Pos. 2) and turn the bolt (Fig. 8-46, Pos. 2) counter-clockwise.

NOTE: There are several throttle valves mounted in the return line. The return oil flow oil flow of the boom cylinder through the throttle valves must be set synchronously. All valves have to be adjusted in a way the bolts are turned in by the same amount of revolutions. 6. Check lowering speed again and repeat the adjustment, if necessary. 7. If the adjustment is finished, tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-46, Pos. 2).

Version 2010/1

8-93

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Fig. 8-47

8-94

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Checks and adjustments of the lowering speed (stick cylinder BHA)

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Stick cylinder BHA Maximum permissible lowering speed: Refer to the PM-CLINIC sheet for your machine. Adjustments / checks: 1. Use a stop watch to measure the time for the cylinder movement. 2. Raise the fully extended attachment with empty bucket to the maximum height position (Fig. 8-47, Pos. A). 3. Run the engine at high idle. 4. Rapidly move the control lever (Fig. 8-47, Pos. 20S020) to the rear end position (start the stop watch) and hold it until the final position (Fig. 8-47, Pos. B) is reached (stop the stop watch). 5. If the lowering speed is too high (measured time is less than the permissible time), the speed must be reduced by adjusting the throttle valves 70.8, 70.9 and 70.10 at the distributor manifold (Fig. 8-47, Pos. 42). Adjust as follows: z

To decrease the lowering speed, loosen the lock nut (Fig. 8-47, Pos. 2) and turn the bolt (Fig. 8-47, Pos. 1) clockwise.

z

To increase the lowering speed, loosen the lock nut (Fig. 8-47, Pos. 2) and turn the bolt (Fig. 8-47, Pos. 1) counter-clockwise.

NOTE: There are several throttle valves mounted in the return line. The return oil flow oil flow of the boom cylinder through the throttle valves must be set synchronously. All valves have to be adjusted in a way the bolts are turned in by the same amount of revolutions. 6. Check lowering speed again and repeat the adjustment, if necessary. 7. If the adjustment is finished, tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-47, Pos. 2).

Version 2010/1

8-95

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Fig. 8-48

8-96

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Checks and adjustments of the lowering speed (bucket cylinder FSA)

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Bucket cylinder FSA Maximum permissible lowering speed: Refer to the PM-CLINIC sheet for your machine. Adjustments / checks: 1. Use a stop watch to measure the time for the cylinder movement. 2. Raise the fully extended attachment with empty bucket to the maximum height position (Fig. 8-48, Pos. A). 3. Run the engine at high idle. 4. Rapidly move the control lever (Fig. 8-48, Pos. 20S019) to the r.h. end position (start the stop watch) and hold it until the final position (Fig. 8-48, Pos. B) is reached (stop the stop watch). 5. If the lowering speed is too high (measured time is less than the permissible time), the speed must be reduced by adjusting the throttle valves 70.4 and 70.12 at the distributor manifold (Fig. 8-48, Pos. 42). Adjust as follows: z

To decrease the lowering speed, loosen the lock nut (Fig. 8-48, Pos. 2) and turn the bolt (Fig. 8-48, Pos. 1) clockwise.

z

To increase the lowering speed, loosen the lock nut (Fig. 8-48, Pos. 2) and turn the bolt (Fig. 8-48, Pos. 1) counter-clockwise.

NOTE: There are several throttle valves mounted in the return line. The return oil flow oil flow of the boom cylinder through the throttle valves must be set synchronously. All valves have to be adjusted in a way the bolts are turned in by the same amount of revolutions. 6. Check lowering speed again and repeat the adjustment, if necessary. 7. If the adjustment is finished tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-48, Pos. 2).

Version 2010/1

8-97

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Fig. 8-49

8-98

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Checks and adjustments of the lowering speed (bucket cylinder BHA)

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Bucket cylinder BHA Maximum permissible lowering speed: Refer to the PM-CLINIC sheet for your machine. Adjustments / checks: 1. Use a stop watch to measure the time for the cylinder movement. 2. Raise the fully extended attachment with empty bucket to the maximum height position (Fig. 8-49, Pos. A). 3. Run the engine at high idle. 4. Rapidly move the control lever (Fig. 8-49, Pos. 20S019) to the r.h. end position (start the stop watch) and hold it until the final position (Fig. 8-49, Pos. B) is reached (stop the stop watch). 5. If the lowering speed is too high (measured time is less than the permissible time), the speed must be reduced by adjusting the throttle valves 70.3, 70.4 and 70.12 at the distributor manifold (Fig. 8-49, Pos. 42). Adjust as follows: z

To decrease the lowering speed, loosen the lock nut (Fig. 8-49, Pos. 2) and turn the bolt (Fig. 8-49, Pos. 1) clockwise.

z

To increase the lowering speed, loosen the lock nut (Fig. 8-49, Pos. 2) and turn the bolt (Fig. 8-49, Pos. 1) counter-clockwise.

NOTE: There are several throttle valves mounted in the return line. The return oil flow oil flow of the boom cylinder through the throttle valves must be set synchronously. All valves have to be adjusted in a way the bolts are turned in by the same amount of revolutions. 6. Check lowering speed again and repeat the adjustment, if necessary. 7. If the adjustment is finished, tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-49, Pos. 2).

Version 2010/1

8-99

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Fig. 8-50

8-100

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Checks and adjustments of the lowering speed (clam cylinder FSA)

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the attachment cylinder FSA and BHA

Clam cylinder BHA Maximum permissible lowering speed: Refer to the PM-CLINIC sheet for your machine. Adjustments / checks: 1. Use a stop watch to measure the time for the cylinder movement. 2. Open the clam of the empty bucket to the maximum height position (Fig. 8-50, Pos. A). 3. Run the engine at high idle. 4. Rapidly push the control pedal (Fig. 8-50, Pos. 20S023) to the end position (start the stop watch) and hold it until the final position (Fig. 8-50, Pos. B) is reached (stop the stop watch). 5. If the lowering speed is too high (measured time is less than the permissible time), the speed must be reduced by adjusting the throttle valve 70.6 at the distributor manifold (Fig. 8-50, Pos. 42). Adjust as follows: z

To decrease the lowering speed, loosen the lock nut (Fig. 8-50, Pos. 2) and turn the bolt (Fig. 8-50, Pos. 1) clockwise.

z

To increase the lowering speed, loosen the lock nut (Fig. 8-50, Pos. 2) and turn the bolt (Fig. 8-50, Pos. 1) counter-clockwise.

NOTE: There are several throttle valves mounted in the return line. The return oil flow oil flow of the boom cylinder through the throttle valves must be set synchronously. All valves have to be adjusted in a way the bolts are turned in by the same amount of revolutions. 6. Check lowering speed again and repeat the adjustment, if necessary. 7. If the adjustment is finished, tighten lock nut (Fig. 8-50, Pos. 2).

Version 2010/1

8-101

Hydraulics for the swing circuit

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.3

HYDRAULICS FOR THE SWING CIRCUIT

8.3.1

SWING CIRCUIT

Fig. 8-51

Swing circuit

8-102

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the swing circuit

Legend for Fig. 8-51: (1 + 3)

Main pumps

(9/III)

Control block

(10/I)

Control block

(16.1 + 16.2)

Manifold

(60.1 + 60.2)

Swing motors

Brief description (service circuits) The machine is equipped with a two speed swing system (also refer to the hydraulic and electric circuit diagram). The swing motors (Fig. 8-51, Pos. 60.1 + 60.2) are driven by the pumps (Fig. 8-51, Pos. 1 + 3). The oil flows from the pumps through high pressure filters to the control block (Fig. 8-51, Pos. 9/III) and (Fig. 8-51, Pos. 10/I). With the spools in neutral position, oil flows via the return oil line into the collector pipe (107) and further via the return oil lines (L6 + L7) back to the tank. On the way back to the tank the oil must flow through the back pressure valve (55) and the return oil filters (59.1 59.4). (For the back pressure valve function, refer to section 4.2 on page 4-4). When operating the control lever for "swinging", the pump line is connected in the control blocks (Fig. 8-51, Pos. 9/III and 10/I) with the corresponding service line (A1 or B1) to the swing motors (Fig. 8-51, Pos. 60.1 + 60.2). The oil flows from the control block through each of the swing brake valves (61.1 + 61.2; for description refer to section 8.3.7 on page 8-116) and the swing motors (Fig. 8-51, Pos. 60.1 + 60.2). Each swing gear includes one spring loaded multi-disk brake for locking the superstructure. The leak oil (case drain) flows through the lines (L18 + L19) and the leak oil filter (53) back to the tank.

Version 2010/1

8-103

Hydraulics for the swing circuit

Fig. 8-52

8-104

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Swing circuit

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Legend for Fig. 8-52: (1 + 3)

Main pumps

(9/III)

Control block

(10/I)

Control block

(14.1 + 14.2)

Remote control valve block

(16.1 + 16.2)

Manifold

(60.1 + 60.2)

Swing motors

(61K524) (61K525) (61K526) (61K527)

Directional solenoid valves

(61K565) (61K566)

Proportional solenoid valves

(57K620) (57K626)

Directional solenoid valves

(57Q627)

Proportional solenoid valves

(57K630) (57K631)

Directional solenoid valves

Hydraulics for the swing circuit

If swing speed switch 20S154 is activated, also proportional solenoid valve 61K566 and, depending on the swinging direction, directional solenoid valves 61K526 (swing right) or 61K527 (swing left) are energized. Simultaneously solenoid valves 57K630 and 57K626 (pump #1 fixed in ½ Qmax position) are energized, so that only a reduced oil flow from pump #1 will be added to increase the swing speed. I.e.: Swing speed fast = oil flow of pump #3 + reduced oil flow of pump #1

Description When the lever (Fig. 8-53, Pos. 20S020) is moved out of its neutral position, proportional solenoid valve 61K565 and solenoid valve 57K631 (pump #3 fixed in Qmax position) are energized. Simultaneously the directional solenoid valves 61K524 (swing right) or 61K525 (swing left) are energized. At the same time, by the function of proportional solenoid valve 57Q627, pilot pressure is present at port "X" of each brake valve block.

Fig. 8-53

I.e.: Swing speed low = only oil flow of pump #3

Version 2010/1

8-105

Hydraulics for the swing circuit

8.3.2

SWING MOTOR

Fig. 8-54

Axial piston motor A2FLM (with SL-bearing)

8-106

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Legend for Fig. 8-54:

Hydraulics for the swing circuit

Description of the SL-bearing (SL = Slipper Bearing)

(1)

Drive shaft

(2)

Housing

(3)

Case drain port

(4)

Retaining plate

(5)

Piston

(5a)

Pivot (center) pin

(6a)

Upper dead point

(6b)

Lower dead point

The slipper pads support themselves on the thrust washer (Fig. 8-54, Pos. 14) and discharge axially the tapered roller bearing (Fig. 8-54, Pos. 11). Without pressure, the slipper pads are kept on the thrust washer by means of spring (Fig. 8-54, Pos. 12).

(7)

Cylinder

Function

(8)

Control lens

(9)

End plate

(10)

Centering spring

The pressure oil inlet (Fig. 8-54, Pos. A or B) and consequent oil outlet (Fig. 8-54, Pos. B or A) determine the output drive direction of the drive shaft (Fig. 8-54, Pos. 1).

(11)

Taper roller bearing

Direction of rotation:

(12)

Spring

(13)

Slipper pads

(14)

Thrust washer

(15)

Roller bearing

(16)

Circlip

(17)

Sealing flange

(18)

Radial seal ring

Axial piston motor A2FLM The axial piston units of product group A2FM with fixed displacement can operate as a hydraulic motor only. The drive speed is proportional to the consumption capacity. The output torque increases with the pressure drop between high and low pressure side. The motor converts hydrostatic energy into mechanical energy.

Version 2010/1

The main part of the axial forces is supported by the slipper pads (Fig. 8-54, Pos. 13) which are installed on the driving circular side of the drive shaft. Each piston is allocated to one slipper pad. These slipper pads are located in the cylinder chamber and get pressurized via piston borings (Fig. 8-54, Pos. 5).

"Clockwise" = Direction of flow A to B "Counter-clockwise" = Direction of flow B to A with view onto drive shaft! Via the control lens (Fig. 8-54, Pos. 8), the oil is directed to the cylinder bores. The piston (Fig. 8-54, Pos. 5) is moved from the lower (Fig. 8-54, Pos. 6b) to the upper dead point (Fig. 8-54, Pos. 6a) by means of the force acting on it and causes the drive shaft to rotate. On further rotation of the drive shaft (additional pistons are pressurized), this piston is moved towards the lower dead point again, and oil of the cylinder chamber is forced out through the kidney formed openings of the control lens. This oil is fed back to the tank via the return line. If the supply and return line is changed, it changes the output drive direction of the drive shaft. By means of the angled arrangement of the cylinder (Fig. 8-54, Pos. 7) (bent axis design), a certain piston stroke is produced which results in a fixed displacement per revolution of the drive shaft. According to the size of the applied flow, this produces a specific output speed.The output torque at the drive shaft is dependent on the size of the motor and the required operating pressure.

8-107

Hydraulics for the swing circuit

8.3.3

SWING GEARBOX (L&S)

Fig. 8-55

Swing gearbox (L&S)

8-108

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Legend for Fig. 8-55: (1)

Drive housing

(2)

Drive shaft

(3)

Sun gear shaft

(4)

Multi-disk brake

(5)

Breather filter Drive shaft housing

(6)

Oil level gauge (dipstick) Drive shaft housing

(7)

Disk brake housing

(8)

Cylindrical roller bearing

(9)

Internal ring gear

(10)

Cylindrical roller bearing

(11)

Bearing ring

(12)

Cartridge

(13)

Spherical roller bearing

(14)

Oil drain plug, gearbox

(15)

Cylindrical roller bearing

(16)

Oil level gauge (dipstick) Gearbox

(17)

First planetary stage

(18)

Drive shaft to second stage

(19)

Second planetary stage

(20)

Radial seal ring

(21)

Drive pinion

(22)

Grease line port

Version 2010/1

Hydraulics for the swing circuit

The swing gear is of compact design with a two stage planetary gear including a multi-disk brake. The gear is bolted to the superstructure and fits firmly due to the machined diameter (Fig. 8-55, Pos. A) and the bolt torque. The torque loaded on the hydraulic motor is transmitted by drive shafts (Fig. 8-55, Pos. 2) and sun gear shaft (Fig. 8-55, Pos. 3) to the first planetary stage (Fig. 8-55, Pos. 17). The sun shaft of the first planetary stage (Fig. 8-55, Pos. 17) transmits the torque into the second planetary stage (Fig. 8-55, Pos. 19). By the planetary gears, the output drive shaft is rotated and transmits the torque to the pinion (Fig. 8-55, Pos. 21). The drive housing and the gearbox are filled with gear oil. Aeration is done by breather filters. To lubricate the pinion, the grease line port (Fig. 8-55, Pos. 22) is connected to the central lubrication system.

8-109

Hydraulics for the swing circuit

8.3.4

SWING GEARBOX (SIEBENHAAR)

Fig. 8-56

Swing gearbox (Siebenhaar)

8-110

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Legend for Fig. 8-56: (1)

Drive housing

(2)

Drive shaft

(3)

Sun gear shaft

(4)

Multi-disk brake

(5)

Equalizing reservoir

(6)

Oil level gauge (dipstick), gearbox

(7)

Oil level gauge (diptick), parking brake

(8)

Adapter (gearbox / brake housing)

(9)

First planetary stage

(10)

Sun wheel (drive shaft to second stage)

(11)

Annulus gear

(12)

Spherical roller bearing

(13)

Oil drain plug, gearbox

(14)

Bearing center

(15)

Grease line port

(16)

Cylindrical roller bearing

(17)

Drive pinion

(18)

Shaft sealing rings

(19)

Fixed bearing bushing

(20)

Second planetary stage

(21)

Cylindrical roller bearings

(22)

Cylindrical roller bearings

(23)

Oil drain plug, parking brake

(24)

Pressure oil port, parking brake

(25)

Oil drain plug, motor

(26)

Oil filler pipe, gearbox

(27)

Oil level gauge (dipstick), motor

Version 2010/1

Hydraulics for the swing circuit

The swing gear is of compact design with a two stage planetary gear including a multi-disk brake. The gear is bolted to the superstructure and fits firmly due to the machined diameter (Fig. 8-56, Pos. A) and the bolt torque. The torque loaded on the hydraulic motor is transmitted by drive shaft (Fig. 8-56, Pos. 2) and sun gear shaft (Fig. 8-56, Pos. 3) to the first planetary stage (Fig. 8-56, Pos. 9). Through the pivot carrier of the planetary wheels, the torque is transmitted to sun wheel (Fig. 8-56, Pos. 10) of the second planetary stage (Fig. 8-56, Pos. 20). By the planetary gears of the second stage, the output drive shaft is rotated and transmits the torque to the pinion (Fig. 8-56, Pos. 17). Drive housing, gearbox and brake housing are filled with oil. Aeration is done by breather filters. NOTE: In opposition to the parking brake installed to the L&S swing gear, the SIEBENHAAR slew parking brake is not splash lubricated through gearbox oil. To lubricate the pinion, the grease line port (Fig. 8-56, Pos. 15) is connected to the central lubrication system.

8-111

Hydraulics for the swing circuit

8.3.5

SLEW PARKING BRAKE (L&S)

Fig. 8-57

Sew parking brake (L&S)

8-112

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the swing circuit

Legend for Fig. 8-57: (1)

Disk housing

(2)

Thrust washer

(3)

Inner disks (lamellas)

(4)

Outer disks (lamellas)

(5)

Sinus (spacing) ring

(6)

Piston

(7)

Quad-rings with back-up rings

(8)

Quad-ring with back-up rings

(9)

Springs

(10)

Thrust washer

(11)

Circlip

(12)

Drive shaft

(13)

Oil pressure port

The spring loaded multi-disk brake is a safety brake; applied by spring force and released by oil pressure. The slew parking brake is a "wet brake", because the brake housing is splash lubricated by the gearbox oil. Function Brake applied: The outer disks (Fig. 8-57, Pos. 4) engaged to the housing by serration and the inner disks (Fig. 8-57, Pos. 3) in serrated connection with drive shaft (Fig. 8-57, Pos. 12) are pressed together by the springs (Fig. 8-57, Pos. 9). This results in a fixed connection between housing and drive shaft. Brake released: Oil pressure via port (Fig. 8-57, Pos. 13) reaches the bottom of the piston (Fig. 8-57, Pos. 6) and forces the piston upwards against the thrust washer (Fig. 8-57, Pos. 10). This function eliminates the spring force onto the disks so that the sinus (spacing) rings can keep the outer disks (Fig. 8-57, Pos. 4) apart, thus the brake is released. The releasing pressure is 19-20 bar, the maximum permissible pressure 60 bar.

Version 2010/1

8-113

Hydraulics for the swing circuit

8.3.6

SLEW PARKING BRAKE (SIEBENHAAR)

Fig. 8-58

Slew parking brake (Siebenhaar)

8-114

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Legend for Fig. 8-58: (1)

Outer disk (lamella)

(2)

Inner disk (lamella)

(3)

Oil drain plug

(4)

Pressure oil port

(5)

Piston

(6)

Springs

(7)

Ball bearing seal

(8)

Inner piston seal

(9)

Outer piston seal

(10)

Disk housing

(11)

Through-hole for attaching gearbox

(12)

Rotary shaft seal

(13)

Drive shaft

Hydraulics for the swing circuit

Function Brake applied: The outer disks (Fig. 8-58, Pos. 1) engaged to the housing by serration and the inner disks (Fig. 8-58, Pos. 2) in serrated connection with drive shaft (Fig. 8-58, Pos. 13) are pressed together by the springs (Fig. 8-58, Pos. 6). This results in a fixed connection between housing (Fig. 8-58, Pos. 11) and drive shaft. Brake released: Pressure oil runs through port (Fig. 8-58, Pos. 4) to the chamber between the piston (Fig. 8-58, Pos. 5) and the brake housing ring. The oil moves the piston upwards away from the brake disks (Fig. 8-58, Pos. 1 and 2) when the resulting force exceeds the force of the springs (Fig. 8-58, Pos. 6). When the piston is lifted, the spring force onto the disks is eliminated. The required releasing pressure is 19-20 bar, the maximum permissible pressure 60 bar.

The spring loaded multi-disk brake is a safety brake; applied by spring force and released by oil pressure. The slew parking brake is a "wet brake", because the brake disks are lubricated by the oil filling in the brake housing.

Version 2010/1

8-115

Hydraulics for the swing circuit

8.3.7

SWING BRAKE VALVE

Fig. 8-59

Swing brake valve

8-116

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Legend for Fig. 8-59:

Hydraulics for the swing circuit

(Fig. 8-59, Pos. 1 or 2) and opens the check valves (Fig. 8-59, Pos. 3 or 4). That means by the check valves (Fig. 8-59, Pos. 3 or 4) the service lines are connected to the pressure increasing valve.

(1)

Anti-carvitation valve circuit A

(2)

Anti-cavitation valve circuit B

(3)

Check valve circuit B

(4)

Check valve circuit A

(5)

Pressure increasing valve (item 6 - 13)

(6)

Pilot pressure piston

(7)

Intermediate piston

(8)

Spring

(9)

Valve poppet

(10)

Jet bore

(11)

Spring of main piston

(12)

Jet bore of main piston plug

(13)

Main piston

Function of the double stage valve

(Y)

Leak oil

When ever a swing motion is carried out or the foot brake is used, pilot pressure arrives the pressure increasing valve (Fig. 8-59, Pos. 5) at port "X". The pilot pressure pre-loads these valves.

(T)

Return oil

(A)

Service line from control block

(A’)

Service line to the motor

(B)

Service line from control block

(B’)

Service line to the motor

Ports:

Pressure test ports: (MA)

Circuit A

(MB)

Circuit B

Function When ever a swing motion is carried out or the foot brake is used, pilot pressure arrives at the pressure increasing valve (Fig. 8-59, Pos. 5) at port "X". The pilot pressure pre-loads these low stages. The oil for the hydraulic motor from the control block arrives at the service line port A or B, depending if a R.H. or a L.H. swing motion is carried out with max. MRV pressure.

Whenever the pressure is higher than the setting of the pressure increasing valve, this valve opens and dumps the oil into the return line (Fig. 8-59, Pos. T) to tank. The pressure can be checked at the test ports MA or MB. If after a swing motion the joystick is put into neutral position without using the foot brake, the superstructure is turned by inertial force and the hydraulic motor acts as a pump because it is driven by the swing gear. In this period the pressure in the service line is lower than the pressure in the return line, because there is a back pressure valve at the tank line, and oil is forced through the anti-cavitation valves into the service line.

By applying pilot pressure via the external port X to piston (Fig. 8-59, Pos. 6), the pre-tensioning of the pressure spring (Fig. 8-59, Pos. 8) is increased by the amount of the piston stroke "S", which results in the actual valve setting. The system pressure is in front of the main piston (Fig. 8-59, Pos. 13) and via the jet bore (Fig. 8-59, Pos. 12) also in the chamber of the spring (Fig. 8-59, Pos. 11) and via the jet bore (Fig. 8-59, Pos. 10) at the pressure relief valve poppet (Fig. 8-59, Pos. 9). Due to the force balance, the piston (Fig. 8-59, Pos. 13) is kept in its position supported by the spring (Fig. 8-59, Pos. 11). Does the system pressure exceed the setting of the valve (Fig. 8-59, Pos. 9), this valve opens a channel to the dump line port (Fig. 8-59, Pos. Y). Due to the drop of force, the piston (Fig. 8-59, Pos. 13) is moved to the right. The pressure line gets connected with the return line (Fig. 8-59, Pos. T). The shuttle valves 270.1 and 270.2 stabilize the pilot pressure for the double stage valve (lower stage) to avoid pressure sequences when starting swinging.

The ports A and B are internally connected to the ports A’ and B’, and these ports in turn with the hydraulic motor. The operating pressure, either at port A or B closes the anti-cavitation valves Version 2010/1

8-117

Hydraulics for the swing circuit

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.3.8

ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "SWING LEFT"

Fig. 8-60

Electric / hydraulic flowchart "swing left"

8-118

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the swing circuit

Legend for Fig. 8-60: (20S020)

Control lever (joystick)

(20S022)

Control pedal swing brake

(-X)

Direction (axis) of joystick

(-10V)

Signal voltage (maximum)

(11X_…)

Terminal rail with number

(11T050 / 50a / 50b)

Ramp time modules

(11T007)

Amplifier module – swing (61K565 + 61K524 / 61K525 - Block III)

(11T007a)

Amplifier module – swing (61K566 + 61K526 / 61K527 - Block I)

(11T016)

Amplifier module – swing brake

(11K080)

Relay - Contacts 7/11 only closed while rotating with swing speed switch 20S154 activated and not lifting the boom.

(11Q190)

Relay - Swing brake without ramp time - Contacts 5/9 and 6/10 only closed while using the brake pedal

(14.1 + 14.2)

Remote control valve block

(61K565 + 61K566)

Proportional solenoid valve

(61K524 + 61K526)

Directional solenoid valve

(61QK627)

Proportional solenoid valve

(I + III)

Main control blocks I + III

(16.2)

Distributor manifold

(61.1 + 61.2)

Swing brake valve block

(DSV)

Double stage valve

(60.1 + 60.2)

Swing motor

(270.1 + 270.2)

Shuttle valve

The electrical signal Signal voltage of joystick (Fig. 8-60, Pos. 20S020) arrives via ramp time modules (Fig. 8-60, Pos. 11T050/a) at terminal 5 of the amplifier modules (Fig. 8-60, Pos. 11T007 + 11T007a) and further to the proportional and directional solenoid valves of the remote control blocks (Fig. 8-60, Pos. 14.1 + 14.2). Simultaneously, signal voltage arrives via ramp time modules (Fig. 8-60, Pos. 11T050b) at terminal 5 of the amplifier modules (Fig. 8-60, Pos. 11T016) and further to the proportional valve (Fig. 8-60, Pos. 57Q627). Pilot pressure When the proportional and directional solenoid valves are energized, pilot pressure oil flows to the pressure ports of the main control blocks and to the double stage valves (Fig. 8-60, Pos. DSV). Main hydraulic oil flow Now the oil of the main pumps flows through the main control blocks (Fig. 8-60, Pos. I + III) and arrives via swing brake valves (Fig. 8-60, Pos. 61.1 + 61.2) at the swing motors (Fig. 8-60, Pos. 60.1 + 60.2).

Version 2010/1

8-119

Hydraulics for the swing circuit

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.3.9

ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART "SWING RIGHT"

Fig. 8-61

Electric / hydraulic flowchart "swing right"

8-120

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the swing circuit

Legend for Fig. 8-61: (20S020)

Control lever (joystick)

(20S022)

Control pedal swing brake

(+X)

Direction (axis) of joystick

(+10V)

Signal voltage (maximum)

(11X_…)

Terminal rail with number

(11T050 / 50a / 50b)

Ramp time modules

(11T007)

Amplifier module – swing (61K565 + 61K524/61K525 - Block III)

(11T007a)

Amplifier module – swing (61K566 + 61K526/61K527 - Block I)

(11T016)

Amplifier module – swing brake

(11K080)

Relay – Contacts 7/11 only closed while rotating with swing speed switch 20S154 activated and not lifting the boom.

(11Q190)

Relay – Swing brake without ramp time – Contacts 5/9 and 6/10 only closed while using the brake pedal

(14.1 + 14.2)

Remote control valve block

(61K565 + 61K566)

Proportional solenoid valve

(61K524 + 61K526)

Directional solenoid valve

(57Q627)

Proportional solenoid valve

(I + III)

Main control blocks I + III

(16.1)

Distributor manifold

(61.1 + 61.2)

Swing brake valve block

(DSV)

Double stage valve

(60.1 + 60.2)

Swing motor

(270.1 + 270.2)

Shuttle valve

The electrical signal Signal voltage of joystick (Fig. 8-61, Pos. 20S020) arrives via ramp time modules (Fig. 8-61, Pos. 11T0E50,-a) at terminal 5 of the amplifier modules (Fig. 8-61, Pos. 11T007 + 11T007a) and further to the proportional and directional solenoid valves of the remote control blocks (Fig. 8-61, Pos. 14.1 + 14.2). Simultaneously, signal voltage arrives via ramp time modules (Fig. 8-61, Pos. 11T050b) at terminal 5 of the amplifier modules (Fig. 8-61, Pos. 11T016) and further to the proportional valve (Fig. 8-61, Pos. 57Q627). Pilot pressure When the proportional and directional solenoid valves are energized, pilot pressure oil flows to the pressure ports of the main control blocks and to the double stage valves (Fig. 8-61, Pos. DSV). Main hydraulic oil flow Now the oil of the main pumps flows through the main control blocks (Fig. 8-61, Pos. I + III) and arrives via swing brake valves (Fig. 8-61, Pos. 61.1 + 61.2) at the swing motors (Fig. 8-61, Pos. 60.1 + 60.2).

Version 2010/1

8-121

Hydraulics for the swing circuit

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.3.10

CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS FOR THE SWING CIRCUIT

Fig. 8-62

Checks and adjustments for the swing circuit

8-122

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Legend for Fig. 8-62: (M33)

Test port – pressure increasing valve

(M41)

"X1" pressure – fixed pump No. 3 (X1 = 45 bar)

(M42)

"X1" pressure – fixed pump No. 1 (X1 = 45 bar)

(M32)

Reduced "X3" pressure – to pump No. 1

(255.4)

Pressure reducing valve – reduced "X3" pressure (½ Qmax)

(57K626)

Solenoid valve – flow reduction (pump No. 1)

(57K630)

Solenoid valve – fixed pump (pump No. 1)

(57K631)

Solenoid valve – fixed pump (pump No. 3)

Hydraulics for the swing circuit

4. Read pressure while swinging. Required values at 5 turns: 20S154 = ON (fast)

20S154 = OFF (slow)

M33 = 15 bar

M33 = 45 bar

M41 = 45 bar

M41 = 45 bar

M42 = 45 bar

M42 = 34 bar

time = 75–80 sec

time = 150–160 sec

WARNING WARNING Do not exceed the maximum permissible swing speed of 5 turns within 75 sec.

NOTE: Note down the pressures and speeds in sec. as reference values. If adjustment is necessary:

1. Connect pressure gauges to test ports M33, M41 and M42. 2. Start the engine and let it run at high idle. 3. Move the control lever (Fig. 8-63, Pos. 20S020) to the end position (L.H. or R.H.) with activated and deactivated swing speed switch (Fig. 8-63, Pos. 20S154). Swing 5 turns and start counting the time in seconds .

5. Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-62, Pos. 2). 6. Adjust the pressure with set-screw (Fig. 8-62, Pos. 1). 7. Tighten lock nut and remove the gauges.

Fig. 8-63 Version 2010/1

8-123

Hydraulics for the swing circuit

Fig. 8-64

8-124

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Checks and adjustments for the swing circuit

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the swing circuit

NOTE: It is important that the complete MRV and the double stage valve is firmly tightened (with 300 Nm). Otherwise, internal leaks could occur which result in: problems of incorrect adjustment, loud flow noises, abnormal swing movements and high temperatures. NOTE: Whenever pressure checks are carried out, they must be carried out for both, R.H. and L.H. swinging to make sure the shuttle valves in the control lines and the check valves in the brake valve blocks are in good condition. NOTE: Because the swing motors are working hydraulically in combined operation, the pressure gauge shows the pressure of the double stage valve with the lowest setting. Even if the gauge shows the required pressure, it is possible that one valve has a higher setting. Therefore, lower the pressure on one valve below the required pressure, and then increase up to required pressure. Proceed with next valve in the same manner. High pressure check / adjustment 1. Connect gauges to test ports M11 and M14 at the high pressure filters. 2. Disconnect the pilot pressure lines from the double stage valve and close the lines with a suitable plug (Fig 8-64, Pos. 6). 3. Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-64, Pos. 3) of both double stage valves (DSV) and screw in set-screw (Fig. 8-64, Pos. 4) until piston (Fig. 8-64, Pos. 5) comes to stop. 4. Start the engine and let it run at high idle. 5. Lower attachment to ground and apply the slew parking brake with switch 20S029. 6. Adjust the MRVs to ~350 bar. 7. Actuate either L.H. or R.H. rotation (20S154 ON) until the hydraulic system stalls. Read the pressure, required = 330±5 bar. 8. If the gauge shows a lower or higher value, the valves must be adjusted: z

Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-64, Pos. 1) of the second stage (330 bar) of the DSV.

z

Adjust pressure with set-screw (Fig. 8-64, Pos. 2) to ~340 bar. If the pressure can not be raised, turn set-screw (Fig. 8-64, Pos. 2) of the second DSV a ¼ turn (cw.) further in.

z

Secure by tightening lock nut (Fig. 8-64, Pos. 1).

z

Reduce the pressure with set-screw (Fig. 8-64, Pos. 2) to a value of ~320 bar, and then raise the pressure up to the required value of 330 bar.

z

Secure adjusted set-screw (Fig. 8-64, Pos. 2) by tightening lock nut (Fig. 8-64, Pos. 1).

z

Reduce the pressure with set-screw (Fig. 8-64, Pos. 2) of the first DSV to a value of ~320 bar, and then raise the pressure up to the required value of 330 bar.

z

Secure adjusted set-screw (Fig. 8-64, Pos. 2) by tightening lock nut (Fig. 8-64, Pos. 1).

Version 2010/1

8-125

Hydraulics for the swing circuit

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Ho

Fig. 8-65

8-126

Checks and adjustments for the swing circuit

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the swing circuit

Low pressure check / adjustment (swing brake pedal with pilot pressure line still disconnected) 9. Actuate either L.H. or R.H. rotation (20S154 ON) until the hydraulic system stalls. z

Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-65, Pos. 3) of both DSVs and reduce the pressure equally with set-screws (Fig. 8-65, Pos. 4) to a value of 130±5 bar, secure setting with lock nut (Fig. 8-65, Pos. 3).

z

Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-65, Pos. 3) of the first DSV.

z

Reduce the pressure with set-screw (Fig. 8-65, Pos. 4) of the first DSV to a value of about 110 bar, and then raise up to the required pressure of 130±5 bar.

z

Secure adjusted set-screw (Fig. 8-65, Pos. 4) by tightening lock nut (Fig. 8-65, Pos. 3).

z

Loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-65, Pos. 3) of the second DSV.

z

Reduce the pressure with set-screw (Fig. 8-65, Pos. 4) of the second DSV to a value of about 110 bar, and then raise up to the required pressure of 130±5 bar.

z

Secure adjusted set-screw (Fig. 8-65, Pos. 4) by tightening lock nut (Fig. 8-65, Pos. 3).

10. Re-plug and connect the pilot pressure lines. 11. Re-set MRVs to 310+5 bar and remove the gauges after the check / adjustment is finished.

WARNING Strong pulsation of the return line hoses indicates deviation in opening pressure of DSVs and must be avoided. Repeat the adjusting procedure until the oil returns well-balanced via both double stage valves.

Brake pilot pressure – check / adjustment 1. Connect the gauge to test port M27. 2. Start the engine and let it run at high idle. 3. Press down the swing brake pedal (20S022) fully and read the pressure. The pressure must be 24±1 bar. If adjustment is required: 4. Adjust the output (mA) of the amplifier (11T016) with potentiometer R2 until the pressure of 24±1 bar is reached. NOTE: For basic values for the amplifiers, refer to the electric circuit diagram of your shovel.

Version 2010/1

8-127

Hydraulics for the swing circuit

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.3.11

FUNCTION CHECK FOR THE HYDRAULIC SWING BRAKE

Fig. 8-66

Function check for hydraulic swing brake

8-128

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the swing circuit

Legend for Fig. 8-66: (M39)

Test port

(20S022)

Switch – position of acces ladder

(20S105)

Switch – lock lever

(57K620)

Solenoid valve – hydraulic swing brake ON - OFF

(57Q627)

Proportional solenoid valve – hydraulic swing brake

Safety circuit (automatic actuation) The hydraulic swing brake will be applied automatically when the access ladder and/or the service arm of the central refilling system is not in its completely upper position and/or if the lock lever is not in the lower end position. Brake apply pressure 1. Connect a gauge to test port M39 (Fig. 8-66). 2. Start the engine and let it run at high idle. 3. Lift the access ladder to the upper end position. 4. Check the pressure at test port M39 under the following conditons: z

Lock lever in lower end position and ladder completely up. No message should appear on the monitor.

0 bar => released.

z

Lock lever in lower end position and ladder completely down. Message G00091 "Pilot control cut out" should appear.

45 bar => applied.

z

Lock lever in upper end position and ladder completely up. Message G00091 "Pilot control cut out" should appear.

45 bar => applied.

Operation circuit (manual actuation through joystick or brake pedal) To shorten the braking angle of the superstructure, either the brake pedal must be actuated or a counter action of the joystick is required. As a result, proportional valve 57Q627 will vary the pilot pressure at the double stage valves (DSV) in relation to the lever deflection. 5. Apply the slew parking brake. Therefore, move switch (Fig. 8-68, Pos. 20S029) into position "1". 6. Actuate either the joystick (L.H. or R.H.) or the swing brake pedal and read the pressure. Required: 0 24 bar (variable, i.e. proportional to the lever deflection) 7. Disconnect the pressure gauge. NOTE: In case of malfunction, check the electrical control system and the function of solenoid valve 57K6120 and/or 57Q627.

Version 2010/1

8-129

Hydraulics for the swing circuit

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.3.12

FUNCTION CHECK FOR THE SLEW PARKING BRAKE

Fig. 8-67

Function check for the slew parking brake

8-130

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Legend for Fig. 8-67: (20P047)

Monitor MH 801

(M1.2)

Pressure test port (X2 – pilot pressure)

(57Q505)

Solenoid valve – slew parking brake ON - OFF

(252.1)

Pressure reducing valve

Parking brake release pressure 1. Connect gauge to test port (Fig. 8-67, Pos. M1.2). 2. Start engine, let it run at high idle and read the pressure. Required = 45±1 bar. If not, the pilot pressure adjustment must be corrected (refer to section 5.3.2 on page 5-36). 3. Apply the slew parking brake. Therefore, move switch (Fig. 8-68, Pos. 20S029) into position "1", now the following message G00247 should appear:

Hydraulics for the swing circuit

4. Actuate either L.H. or R.H. swinging, the machine should not turn.

WARNING WARNING If the machine turns, the parking brakes must be repaired.

5. Release the slew parking brake. Therefore, move switch (Fig. 8-68, Pos. 20S029) into position "0"; now the swing function must be executable again, and message G00247 should disappear from the monitor. NOTE: In case of malfunction, check the electrical control system and the function of solenoid valve 57Q505. Function check of relays 56K250a & b 1. Connect a pressure gauge to test port (Fig. 8-67, Pos. M5).

z

Slew ring gear house brake

2. Start the engine and let it run at high idle. Pilot pressure X2 = 45±1 bar.

z

Instruction message 26: Slew ring gear house brake ON

3. Move switch position "0".

(Fig. 8-68,

Pos. 20S029)

into

4. Unplug / reconnect solenoid valve 57Q505 to allow pressure relief / increase from pilot pressure line to slew parking brake. 5. Select the "Real Time Monitor Menu" at the monitor and check whether the signal of 57Q505 has changed from "1" to "0". NOTE: 20S029 in position "0" Ö 57Q505= 1 = 45 bar Ö at Real Time Monitor 56K250a = 1 and 56K250b = 1 Ö Slew parking brake OFF 20S029 in position "1" Ö 57Q505= 0 = 0 bar Ö at Real Time Monitor 56K250a = 0 and 56K250b = 0 Ö Slew parking brake ON

Fig. 8-68

Version 2010/1

8-131

Hydraulics for the travel circuit

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.4

HYDRAULICS FOR THE TRAVEL CIRCUIT

8.4.1

TRAVEL CIRCUIT

Fig. 8-69

Travel circuit

8-132

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Legend for Fig. 8-69: (2 + 4)

Main pumps

(II + IV)

Control blocks

(15.1 + 15.2)

Remote control valve blocks

(19)

Rotary distributor

(21.1 + 21.2)

Travel motors

(41)

Main oil reservoir

(55)

Back pressure valve

(56.1 + 56.2)

Travel brake valves

(57.1 + 57.2)

Travel parking (house) brakes

(M4)

Pressure test port for parking brake release pressure

(57Q516)

Solenoid valve for travel parking brake

(L9)

Case drain (leak oil) line

(St)

Pilot pressure line to the travel parking brake

Hydraulics for the travel circuit

Description (control circuits) (Also use the hydraulic and electric circuit diagram). When the pedals 20S021a and 20S021b are moved out of their neutral position, the proportional solenoid valves 61K567 & 61K570 and the directional solenoid valves 61K528 or 61K529 (R.H. crawler) and 61K534 or 61K535 (L.H. crawler) are energized simultaneously.

Fig. 8-70

Version 2010/1

(20S021a) Control pedal – left track

A – forward => 61K570 + 61K535

(20S021b) Control pedal – right track

A – forward => 61K567 +61K528

B – reverse => 61K570 + 61K534

B – reverse => 61K567 +61K529

8-133

Hydraulics for the travel circuit

Fig. 8-71

8-134

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Travel circuit

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the travel circuit

Description (Also use the hydraulic and electric circuit diagram.) The travel motors (Fig. 8-71, Po. 21.1 and 21.2) are driven by the pumps (Fig. 8-71, Pos. 2 and 4). The oil flows from the pumps through the high pressure filters to the control blocks (Fig. 8-71, Pos. II and IV). In neutral position of the spools the oil flows via the return oil lines into the return manifold (107) and further via the return oil lines (L6 and L7) into the collector pipe (54), and further through the filter back to the tank. On its way to the tank the oil must flow through the back pressure valve (Fig. 8-71, Pos. 55) and the return oil filter (59.1 - 59.4). (For back pressure valve function refer to section 4.2 on page 4-4.) When operating the foot pedal for "Travelling" the pump line of each control block is connected with the corresponding service line (A1 or B1) via the rotary distributor (Fig. 8-71, Pos. 19) and travel brake valves (Fig. 8-71, Pos. 56.1 and 56.2) to the travel motors (Fig. 8-71, Pos. 21.1 and 21.2). The travel brake valve acts as a flow control valve in order to avoid the travel motors picking up speed when travelling downhill. Each travel gear includes a spring loaded multi-disk brake (house brakes 57.1 and 57.2). They are used as parking brakes, automatically applied by the function of 57Q516 whenever the engine is switched OFF, or the ladder or the refilling arm is in bottom position. The leak oil (case drain) flows through the line (Fig. 8-71, Pos. L9) and the leak oil filter (53) back to the tank.

Version 2010/1

8-135

Hydraulics for the travel circuit

8.4.2

TRAVEL MOTOR

Fig. 8-72

Travel motor

8-136

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Legend for Fig. 8-72:

Hydraulics for the travel circuit

Function The pressure oil inlet (Fig. 8-72, Pos. A or B) and consequent oil outlet (Fig. 8-72, Pos. B or A) determine the output drive direction of the drive shaft (Fig. 8-72, Pos. 1).

(1)

Drive shaft

(2)

Housing

(3)

Case drain port

(4)

Retaining plate

(5)

Piston

"Clockwise"

= Direction of flow A to B

(5a)

Pivot (center) pin

"Counter-clockwise"

= Direction of flow B to A

(6a)

Upper dead point

(6b)

Lower dead point

(7)

Cylinder

(8)

Control lens

(9)

End plate

(10)

Taper roller bearing

(11)

Roller bearing

(12)

Thrust washer

(13)

Circlip

(14)

Circlip

(15)

Sealing flange

(16)

Radial seal ring

Direction of rotation:

with view onto drive shaft! Via the control lens (Fig. 8-72, Pos. 8), the oil is directed to the cylinder bores. The piston (Fig. 8-72, Pos. 5) is moved from the lower (Fig. 8-72, Pos. 6b) to the upper point (Fig. 8-72, Pos. 6a) by means of the force acting on it and causes the drive shaft to rotate. On further rotation of the drive shaft (additional pistons are pressurized), this piston is moved towards the lower point again and oil of the cylinder chamber is forced out through the kidney formed openings of the control lens. This oil is fed back to the tank via the return line. If the supply and return line are interchanged, the output drive direction of the drive shaft is changed. By means of the angled arrangement of the cylinder (Fig. 8-72, Pos. 7) (bent axis design), a certain piston stroke is produced which results in a fixed displacement per revolution of the drive shaft.

Axial Piston Motor A2FLM The axial piston units of product group A2FM with fixed displacement can operate as a hydraulic motor only. The drive speed is proportional to the consumption capacity.

According to the size of the applied flow, this produces a specific output speed. The output torque at the drive shaft is dependent on the size of the motor and the required operating pressure.

The output torque increases with the pressure drop between high and low pressure side. The motor converts hydrostatic energy into mechanical energy.

Version 2010/1

8-137

Hydraulics for the travel circuit

8.4.3

ROTARY JOINT

Fig. 8-73

Rotary joint

8-138

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Legend for Fig. 8-73: (1)

Rotor

(2)

Rotary distributor housing

(3)

Cover

(4)

Bearing ring (splitted)

(5)

Sealing element

(6)

Seal

(7)

Rotor guide rings

(8)

O-ring

(9)

Plug screws

(10)

Mover

Ports: (A - D)

Service lines

(K1 / K2)

Control oil track tensioning

(L)

Leak oil

(ST)

Control oil

(T)

Return oil to tank

Hydraulics for the travel circuit

Function During operation superstructure and under carriage constantly rotate towards each other. Nevertheless, the travel oil motors must be supplied with hydraulic oil in every position in which the superstructure is moved in regard to the undercarriage. Oil is directed by the control blocks to the ports (Fig. 8-73, Pos. A - D) of the housing (Fig. 8-73, Pos. 2). The oil flows to the outlet ports (Fig. 8-73, Pos. A - D), of the rotor (Fig. 8-73, Pos. 1), via ring grooves as well as longitudinal and cross holes. The rotor is bolted to the under carriage. The sealing of the ring grooves among one another is done by sealing elements (Fig. 8-73, Pos. 5). The hydraulic connection for case drain, house brake and the track tensioning cylinders is done via the ports (Fig. 8-73, Pos. L, St, K1 and K2). Entering of dirt is prevented by the seal ring (Fig. 8-73, Pos. 6) and the collar of the cover (Fig. 8-73, Pos. 3). The rotor (Fig. 8-73, Pos. 1) is at the top and bottom section guided in the housing by the guide rings (Fig. 8-73, Pos. 7).

The letters punch marked, beside the ports are marked as they are used in the hydraulic diagram. Task The rotary distributor (joint) permits a hydraulic connection between the superstructure and the undercarriage, that means between the rotating and the stationary part.

Version 2010/1

8-139

Hydraulics for the travel circuit

8.4.4

TRAVEL GEARBOX (L&S)

Fig. 8-74

Travel gearbox (L&S)

8-140

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the travel circuit

Legend for Fig. 8-74: (1)

Input drive shaft

(2)

Spur gear

(3)

Sun gear first stage

(4)

Planetary ring gear first stage

(5)

Planetary carrier first stage

(6)

Planetary ring gear second stage

(7)

Sun gear second stage

(8)

Planetary carrier second stage

(9)

Side frame mounting flange

(10)

Motor adapter and brake housing

(11)

Multi-disk house brake

The travel gear consists of one spur gear set and two planetary stages. The travel gearbox is fitted to the side frame with bolts. Function The spur gear (Fig. 8-74, Pos. 2) is driven by a hydraulic motor and the input drive shaft (Fig. 8-74, Pos. 1). The planetary carrier (Fig. 8-74, Pos. 5) of the fist stage is driven by the sun gear (Fig. 8-74, Pos. 3) which is connected to the spur gear (Fig. 8-74, Pos. 2). The planetary gears are revolving in the planetary ring gear of the housing. As a result of the fixed housing, the planetary carrier will be turned. The planetary carrier (Fig. 8-74, Pos. 8) of the second stage is turned by the sun gear (Fig. 8-74, Pos. 7) which is connected to the sprocket drive shaft.

Version 2010/1

8-141

Hydraulics for the travel circuit

8.4.5

TRAVEL GEARBOX (ZOLLERN)

Fig. 8-75

Travel gearbox (Zollern)

8-142

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the travel circuit

Legend for Fig. 8-75: (1)

Input drive shaft

(2)

Parking brake housing

(3)

Motor adapter

(4)

Spur gear

(5)

Sun gear, first stage

(6)

Planetary ring gear, first stage

(7)

Planetary carrier, first stage

(8)

Planetary ring gear, second stage

(9)

Sun gear, second stage

(10)

Planetary carrier, second stage

(11)

Side frame mounting flange

The travel gear consists of one spur gear set and two planetary stages. The travel gearbox is fitted to the side frame with bolts. Function The spur gear (Fig. 8-75, Pos. 4) is driven by a hydraulic motor connected to the input drive shaft (Fig. 8-75, Pos. 1) by means of the hollow shaft ot the parking brake (Fig. 8-75, Pos. 2) . The planetary carrier (Fig. 8-75, Pos. 7) of the first stage is driven by the sun gear (Fig. 8-75, Pos. 5) which is connected to the spur gear (Fig. 8-75, Pos. 4). The planetary gears are revolving in the planetary ring gear (Fig. 8-75, Pos. 6) of the housing. As a result of the fixed housing, the planetary carrier (Fig. 8-75, Pos. 7) will be turned. The planetary carrier of the first stage propels the sun gear (Fig. 8-75, Pos. 9) of the second stage. Like in the first stage, the planetary gears are revolving in a planetary ring gear (Fig. 8-75, Pos. 8) of the housing. The planetary carrier of the second stage (Fig. 8-75, Pos. 10) simultaneously acts as the sprocket drive hub.

Version 2010/1

8-143

Hydraulics for the travel circuit

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.4.6

TRAVEL PARKING BRAKE (GEAR HOUSE BRAKE)

Fig. 8-76

Travel parking brake (gear house brake) ZOLLERN (exemplarily)

8-144

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Legend for Fig. 8-76: (1)

Outer disk carrier (brake housing)

(2)

Intermediate ring (hydraulic unit with piston)

(3)

Seals

(4)

Piston

(5)

Pressure oil port

(6)

Motor flange

(7)

Compression spring

(8)

Travel gear housing

(9)

Inner disk carrier / drive sleeve

(10)

Inner brake disk

(11)

Outer brake disk

The spring loaded multi-disk brake is a safety brake; applied by spring force and released by oil pressure.

Hydraulics for the travel circuit

Function Brake applied: By means of toothings, the outer disks (Fig. 8-76, Pos. 11) are engaged to the housing (Fig. 8-76, Pos. 1), the inner disks (Fig. 8-76, Pos. 10) to the disk carrier / drive sleeve (Fig. 8-76, Pos. 9). Inner and outer disks are pressed together by the piston (Fig. 8-76, Pos. 4) with the force of the springs (Fig. 8-76, Pos. 7). This results in a fixed connection between housing and inner disk carrier / drive sleeve (Fig. 8-76, Pos. 11). Brake released: Pressure oil runs through port (Fig. 8-76, Pos. 5) to the chamber between intermediate ring (Fig. 8-76, Pos. 2) and piston (Fig. 8-76, Pos. 4). When the resulting force of the oil pressure exceeds the force of the compression springs, the piston is moved away form the brake disks to the motor flange. Now the disk are not longer pressed against each other, the brake is released. The minimum releasing pressure is 19-20 bar, the maximum permissible pressure 60 bar. The ZOLLERN parking brake is a "dry brake", no oil is permissible in the housing / on the brake disks.

WARNING WARNING The parking brake in the L&S gearbox has a similar design, but is a so called "wet brake" with an oil filling in the brake housing.

NOTE: For more information refer to the OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL of the corresponding machine.

Version 2010/1

8-145

Hydraulics for the travel circuit

8.4.7

TRAVEL BRAKE VALVE

Fig. 8-77

Travel brake valve

8-146

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the travel circuit

Task Travel brake valves control the oil flow from the hydraulic motor to the tank depending on the operating pressure. This braking action prevents the motors from overspeeding and cavitation. Function Spring force keeps the spool in the lowest flow position. With increasing operating pressure, the opening for the return oil flow becomes larger. On its way to the hydraulic motor, the oil flows from A to A1 and from B to B1 respectively, depending on the selected travel motion. Example Operating pressure at port A moves the spool (Fig. 8-77, Pos. 1) against the force of the spring (Fig. 8-77, Pos. 2) and opens the way for the return oil (Fig. 8-77, Pos. B1 to B). The check valve (Fig. 8-77, Pos. 3) prevents a direct oil flow from B1 to B. If the operating pressure decreases to such an extend that the spring force overcomes the pressure, the flow to the tank becomes restricted, resulting in braking the travel motion of the machine.

Version 2010/1

8-147

Hydraulics for the travel circuit

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.4.8

ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART “TRAVEL FORWARD”

Fig. 8-78

Electric / hydraulic flowchart “travel forward”

8-148

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the travel circuit

Legend for Fig. 8-78: (20S021a)

Foot pedal left crawler

(20S021b)

Foot pedal right crawler

(+10V)

Signal voltage (maximum)

(11X_…)

Terminal rail with number

(11T051) (11T052)

Ramp time module

(11T012)

Amplifier module – left crawler

(11T013)

Amplifier module – right crawler

(15.1 + 15.2)

Remote control valves

(61K567) (61K570)

Proportional solenoid valve

(61K528) (61K535)

Directional solenoid valve

(II + IV)

Main control blocks

(19)

Rotary joint

(21.1 + 21.2)

Hydraulic motors

(56.1 + 56.2)

Travel brake valves

Electrical signal flow The signal voltage of the foot pedals (Fig. 8-78, Pos. 20S021a + 20S021b) arrives via ramp time module (Fig. 8-78, Pos. 11T051 + 11T052) at terminal 5 of the amplifier modules (Fig. 8-78, Pos. 11T012 and 11T013) and runs further to the proportional and directional solenoid valves of the remote control blocks (Fig. 8-78, Pos. 15.1 and 15.2). Hydraulic signal flow (pilot pressure) When the proportional and directional solenoid valves are energized, pilot pressure oil flows to the pilot pressure ports of the main control blocks according to the amplifier output signal [mA]. Hydraulic oil flow Now the oil of the main pumps flows through the main control blocks (Fig. 8-78, Pos. II and IV) and arrives via rotary joint (Fig. 8-78, Pos. 19) and travel brake valves (Fig. 8-78, Pos. 56.1 and 56.2) at the hydraulic travel motors.

Version 2010/1

8-149

Hydraulics for the travel circuit

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.4.9

ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC FLOWCHART “TRAVEL BACKWARDS”

Fig. 8-79

Electric / hydraulic flowchart “travel backwards”

8-150

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the travel circuit

Legend for Fig. 8-79: (20S021a)

Foot pedal left crawler

(20S021b)

Foot pedal right crawler

(-10V)

Signal voltage (maximum)

(11X_…)

Terminal rail with number

(11T051) (11T052)

Ramp time module

(11T012)

Amplifier module – left crawler

(11T013)

Amplifier module – right crawler

(15.1 + 15.2)

Remote control valves

(61K567) (61K570)

Proportional solenoid valve

(61K529) (61K534)

Directional solenoid valve

(II + IV)

Main control blocks

(19)

Rotary joint

(21.1 + 21.2)

Hydraulic motors

(56.1 + 56.2)

Travel brake valves

Electrical signal flow The signal voltage of the foot pedals (Fig. 8-79, Pos. 20S021a + 20S021b) arrives via ramp time module (Fig. 8-79, Pos. 11T051 + 11T052) at terminal 5 of the amplifier modules (Fig. 8-79, Pos. 11T012 and 11T013) and runs further to the proportional and directional solenoid valves of the remote control blocks (Fig. 8-79, Pos. 15.1 and 15.2). Hydraulic signal flow (pilot pressure) When the proportional and directional solenoid valves are energized, pilot pressure oil flows to the pilot pressure ports of the main control blocks. Hydraulic oil flow Now the oil of the main pumps flows through the main control blocks (Fig. 8-79, Pos. II and IV) and arrives via rotary joint (Fig. 8-79, Pos. 19) and travel brake valves (Fig. 8-79, Pos. 56.1 and 56.2) at the hydraulic travel motors.

Version 2010/1

8-151

Hydraulics for the travel circuit

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.4.10

CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS FOR THE TRAVEL CIRCUIT

Fig. 8-80

Checks and adjustments for the travel circuit

8-152

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Legend for Fig. 8-80:

Hydraulics for the travel circuit

Adjusting the SRVs: 1. Set the MRVs to 310+5 bar.

(1)

Protective cap

(2)

Lock nut

(3)

Set-screw

(19)

Rotary joint

(56.1 + 56.2)

Travel brake valves

(68.3 + 68.4)

Anti-cavitation valves L.H.

3. Lower the pressure at the required SRV to 290 bar, and then increase it up to the required pressure of 310 bar. Proceed with next valves in the same manner.

(68.3 + 68.4)

Anti-cavitation valves R.H.

4. Replug solenoid valve 57Q516.

(M12 – M28.4)

Pressure test ports

2. Carefully engage the desired travel motion and keep the pedal in final position to built up max. pressure.

How to adjust MRVs and SRVs:

Pressure check of the secondary relief valves (SRV)

1. Remove protective cap (Fig. 8-80, Pos. 1) and loosen lock nut (Fig. 8-80, Pos. 2).

1. Connect pressure gauge to the required test ports:

2. Adjust pressure with set-screw (Fig. 8-80, Pos. 3).

z

z

L.H. track M12 = Operating pressure for the L.H. motor M28.1 = SRV pressure L.H., travel forward M28.2 = SRV pressure L.H., travel backward R.H. track M13 = Operating pressure for the R.H.-motor M28.3 = SRV pressure R.H., travel forward M28.4 = SRV pressure R.H., travel backward

2. Unplug solenoid valve 57Q516 (located at the valve cartridge block) to keep the parking brake applied.

3. Secure the adjustment by tightening lock nut (Fig. 8-80, Pos. 2) and replace cap (Fig. 8-80, Pos. 1). 4. Re-check pressure setting. NOTE: It is important that the complete MRV valve and the SRV valve is firmly tightened (with 300 Nm). Otherwise internal leaks could occur, which result in: problems of correct adjustment, loud flow noises and hydraulic temperatures higher than normal.

3. Start the engine and let it run at high idle. 4. Carefully engage the desired travel motion and keep the pedal in final position to built up max. pressure. 5. Slowly increase the MRV pressure while observing the pressure gauge. The displayed value must remain at 310+5 bar. If the gauge shows a smaller or greater value, the SRV must be adjusted. NOTE: A faulty anti-cavitation valve (Fig. 8-80, Pos. 68.3 + 68.4, 68.6 + 68.7) or a leaking seal of the rotary joint (Fig. 8-80, Pos. 19) can influence the SRV pressure reading / setting. Repair or replace faulty parts, if necessary.

Version 2010/1

8-153

Hydraulics for the travel circuit

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

8.4.11

FUNCTION CHECK FOR THE TRAVEL PARKING BRAKE

Fig. 8-81

Function check for the travel parking brake

8-154

Version 2010/1

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Hydraulics for the travel circuit

Legend for Fig. 8-81: (252.1)

Pressure reducing valve

(20P047)

Monitor MH 801

(M1.2 – M4)

Pressure test ports

(57Q516)

Solenoid valve

Travel parking brake release pressure 1. Connect a pressure gauge to test port (M1.2). 2. Start the engine and let it run at high idle. 3. Read the pressure (required = 45±1 bar). If differing from the nominal value, the pilot pressure adjustment must be corrected (refer to section 5.3 on page 5-32). 4. Disconnect solenoid valve 57Q516. Now the following message should appear over 56K251a/b: z

G00175 "Trouble travel gear house brake"

5. Operate the travel pedals; the machine should not travel.

WARNING If the machine moves, the travel parking brake is defective and must be repaired.

6. Replug solenoid valve 57Q516. Now the trouble message should disappear and travelling should be possible again. NOTE: In case of malfunction check the electrical control system and the function of the solenoid valve 57Q516. NOTE: If the signals for 56K251a/b on the Real Time Monitor screen show "1", the travel parking brake should be released by the pressurized oil: Real Time Monitor "0" Ù Travel parking brake applied (ON) Real Time Monitor "1" Ù Travel parking brake released (OFF)

Version 2010/1

8-155

Hydraulics for the travel circuit

8-156

OPERATING HYDRAULICS

Version 2010/1

HYDRAULIC TRACK TENSIONING SYSTEM

9. HYDRAULIC TRACK TENSIONING SYSTEM

Version 2010/1

9-1

General

HYDRAULIC TRACK TENSIONING SYSTEM

9.1

GENERAL

Fig. 9-1

Overall view of the hydraulic track tensioning system

9-2

Version 2010/1

HYDRAULIC TRACK TENSIONING SYSTEM

General

Legend for Fig. 9-1: (19)

Rotary joint

(62.1)

Shut-off cock at the track tensioning valve block (130)

(62.2)

Service / transport shut-off cock for L.H. side

*("O" = open / "C" = closed)

(62.3)

Service / transport shut-off cock for R.H. side

*("O" = open / "C" = closed)

(82.1 + 82.2)

Bladder accumulator, 5 liters (pre-charge gas pressure: 150 bar)

(83.1 – 83.4)

Track tensioning cylinders

(89.1 + 89.2)

Membrane accumulator, 0,7 liter (pre-charge gas pressure: 31 bar)

(130)

Track tensioning valve block

(L11)

Supply line (travel parking brake circuit)

(M29.1 + M29.5)

Bleeder and hydraulic pressure test ports at the tensioning cylinders, L.H. side

(M29.2 + M29.6)

Bleeder and hydraulic pressure test ports at the tensioning cylinders, R.H. side

(M29.3)

Bleeder and hydraulic pressure test port at the bladder accumulator (82.1), L.H.-side.

(M29.4)

Bleeder and hydraulic pressure test port at the bladder accumulator (82.2), R.H.-side.

General information The hydraulic track tensioning system automatically ensures the correct tension of the tracks. The track tensioning pressure (35 bar) provides the force to move the guide wheels to the front until the correct track tension is obained. The track safety function is controlled by valve block 130 with a double stage valve (35/310 bar). Pressure peaks due to external forces acting on the idlers will be absorbed by means of the pressure accumulators of the first (31 bar / 89.1 + 89.2) and second stage (150 bar / 82.1 + 82.2). Heavy shocks and high pressure peaks will be eliminated by the double stage valve of the 310 bar section in the valve block (130).

CAUTION After the assembly and during comissioning, before the shovel moves for the first time, each track tensioning cylinder has to be bled via the test ports (29.1 / 29.2 / 29.5 / 29.6) until air-free oil is draining off.

CAUTION Under normal operating conditions, the shut-off cocks (62.2 & 62.3) inside the side frames must always be open. Only for service or repair reasons, the cocks may be shut.

CAUTION The accumulators (89.1, 89.2, 82.1, 82.2) are to be maintained frequently (every 3000 hours) because of the gas pressure charge. See KMG tool catalogue for the charging tool box. After 30,000 hours, the accumulators are to be replaced by new ones.

Version 2010/1

9-3

Functional description

9.2

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

Fig. 9-2

Circuit diagram of the hydraulic track tensioning system

9-4

HYDRAULIC TRACK TENSIONING SYSTEM

Version 2010/1

HYDRAULIC TRACK TENSIONING SYSTEM

Functional description

X2 pressure (45 bar) is supplied by the travel parking brake circuit via valve 57Q516 in case the access ladder and the refilling arm are in upper end position. The pressure for the track tensioning system is limited to 35 bar by the pressure reducing valve (47) with a built-in non-return valve to prevent high pressure peaks in the pilot pressure circuit. When the tensioning cylinders (83.1 – 83.4) are moved in by external forces, the non-return valves (137.1 & 137.2) will be closed. A certain amount of the displaced oil from the tensioning cylinders is taken up by the pressure accumulators First stage: At a pressure higher than 31 bar, oil is taken up by the membrane accumulators (89.1 & 89.2) mounted at the side frames. Second stage: At a pressure higher than 150 bar, oil is taken up by the bladder accumulators (82.1 & 82.2) in the middle of the car body. The system pressure can rise up to 310 bar according to the setting of the double stage valve (140) inside the valve block (130). When the external forces fall below the forces of the track tensioning cylinders, the oil taken up by the accumulators is pushed back into the track tensioning cylinders (83.1 – 83.4). If not the whole amount of oil could be taken up the accumulators beforehand, oil is added from the pilot pressure circuit (35 bar) when the tensioning cylinders move in their initial position.

Version 2010/1

9-5

Pressure double stage valve

HYDRAULIC TRACK TENSIONING SYSTEM

9.3

PRESSURE DOUBLE STAGE VALVE

Fig. 9-3

Pressure double stage valve

9-6

Version 2010/1

HYDRAULIC TRACK TENSIONING SYSTEM

Pressure double stage valve

Legend for Fig. 9-3: (1)

Pilot valve with valve seat

(2)

Valve poppet

(3)

Compression spring

(4)

Main valve with sleeve

(5)

Main piston

(6)

Closing spring

(7)

Set screw – low pressure (35 bar)

(8)

Set screw – high pressure (310 bar)

(9)

Piston

(10)

Pin

(11 + 12)

Jet bore

(13 +14)

Lock nut

Description The pressure double stage valve is a remote controlled secondary relief valve at 310 bar. Function The valve poppet (Fig. 9-3, Pos. 2) is connected to port "P" via jet bores (Fig. 9-3, Pos. 11 and 12). If static pressure increases above the set pressure value, the valve poppet (Fig. 9-3, Pos. 2) opens and allows the oil to flow freely to the tank (Fig. 9-3, Pos. T1). This oil generates a pressure drop in the spring chamber of the main spool, the closing force of the spring (Fig. 9-3, Pos. 6) is cancelled, and the main piston (Fig. 9-3, Pos. 5) opens to allow the oil flow to the tank (Fig. 9-3, Pos. T2).

Version 2010/1

9-7

Tensioning cylinder

9.4

TENSIONING CYLINDER

Fig. 9-4

Tensioning cylinder

9-8

HYDRAULIC TRACK TENSIONING SYSTEM

Version 2010/1

HYDRAULIC TRACK TENSIONING SYSTEM

Tensioning cylinder

Legend for Fig. 9-4: (1)

Cylinder tube

(2)

Piston

(3)

Piston guide ring

(4)

Piston guide strap

(5)

Seal ring

(6)

O-ring

(7)

Scraper

(8)

Retracting device

(M)

Bleeder port

(P)

Oil supply

Version 2010/1

9-9

Adjustments / checks

9.5

ADJUSTMENTS / CHECKS

Fig. 9-5

Adjustments / checks on hydraulic track tensioning system

9-10

HYDRAULIC TRACK TENSIONING SYSTEM

Version 2010/1

HYDRAULIC TRACK TENSIONING SYSTEM

Adjustments / checks

Legend for Fig. 9-4: (47)

Pressure reducing valve – track tensioning system (35 bar)

(57Q516)

Solenoid valve – travel parking brake

(257.1)

Safety relief valve (SRV) – safety valve for travel parking brake / track tensioning system (55 bar)

(M4)

Test port – travel parking brake operating pressure (35 bar)

Basic check 1. Connect a pressure gauge to test port M4. 2. Start the engine and let it run at high idle. 3. Ensure that the access ladder and the refilling arm are in the upper end position (as the pre-condition for releasing the travel parking brake). 4. Read the pressure (nominal value: 55 bar). 5. Stop the engine. 6. The pressure should now drop to 0 bar because solenoid valve is de-energized, allowing the oil to flow back to the tank. 7. Disconnect the pressure gauge. NOTE: If the pressure reading differs substantially from the nominal value, the pre-set pressure reducing valve is presumably defective and should be replaced.

Version 2010/1

9-11

Adjustments / checks

9-12

HYDRAULIC TRACK TENSIONING SYSTEM

Version 2010/1

ACCESS LADDER, HYDRAULICALLY OPERATED

10. ACCESS LADDER, HYDRAULICALLY OPERATED

Version 2010/1

10-1

General

ACCESS LADDER, HYDRAULICALLY OPERATED

10.1

GENERAL

Fig. 10-1

Overall view of the hydraulic access ladder

10-2

Version 2010/1

ACCESS LADDER, HYDRAULICALLY OPERATED

General

Legend for Fig. 10-1: (A)

Access ladder in upper position (working position)

(B)

Access ladder in lowered position

(1)

Stop bar

(2)

Pull chain for emergency lowering of the access ladder

(3)

Hydraulic cylinder

(70B091)

Monitor and control sensor This sensor monitors the ladder position and controls the moving speed of the ladder. In case the sensor (70B122) fails to function properly, the sensor (70B091) prevents unintended movement of the ladder.

(70B122)

Safety sensor, located on ladder pivot bracket Cut out of the pilot control system and actuation of the hydraulic swing brake with the ladder in lowered position.

(70S084)

Ladder control switch for lowering and lifting the ladder

(70S084a)

Safety switch for emergency lowering of the access ladder. When the chain (Fig. 10-12. Pos. 2) is being pulled down with the engine running, the pilot control system is made inoperative preventing further movement of the shovel.

The access ladder is hydraulically operated by the hydraulic cylinder (Fig. 10-1, Pos. 3) with the pilot pressure X2 of 45 bar. The movement of the ladder is controlled by the function of switch (70S084). Lifting the ladder is only possible with the engine running. The lowering movement is possible by hydraulic force with the engine running or by force of gravity with the engine at standstill. NOTE: If the ladder is not in the upper end position (70S122 not activated), the pilot control is switched off via relais 11K111a and 11K111b. Solenoid valve 57K620 activates the hydraulic slew parking brake and a message appears on the display in the operators cab.

Version 2010/1

10-3

Function of Hydraulically Operated Access Ladder

ACCESS LADDER, HYDRAULICALLY OPERATED

10.2

FUNCTION OF HYDRAULICALLY OPERATED ACCESS LADDER

Fig. 10-2

Function of hydraulically operated access ladder

Legend for Fig. 10-2: (2)

Main pump

(258.3)

Pressure relief valve (safety valve 70 bar)

(8.1)

Pilot pump

(258.4)

Shuttle valve

(33)

Pilot pressure filter

(258.5+.6)

Check valve

(101)

Hydraulic cylinder

(258.7)

Orifice

(157)

Solenoid valve 57Q623a/b

(57Q625)

Solenoid valve (lowering speed control) (OFF => reduced speed)

(252.1)

Pressure relief valve (45+3 bar), X2 pressure

(57Q623a)

Solenoid valve (ON => ladder up)

(252.2)

Pressure relief valve (60+3 bar), X4 pressure

(57Q623b)

Solenoid valve (ON => ladder down)

(258.1)

Solenoid valve 57Q625

10-4

Version 2010/1

ACCESS LADDER, HYDRAULICALLY OPERATED

Function of Hydraulically Operated Access Ladder

Prime drive is running The pump (Fig. 10-2, Pos. 8.1) delivers the oil through the filter (Fig. 10-2, Pos. 33) to port A of the pressure relief valve (Fig. 10-2, Pos. 252.2). The pressure relief valve (Fig. 10-2, Pos. 252.2) maintains the adjusted pressure of 60+3 bar, called "X4“-pressure. By the function of pressure relief valve (Fig. 10-2, Pos. 252.1), the “X4“-pressure will be reduced to 45+3 bar (called "X2“-pressure) and is present at port P of solenoid valve 57Q623a/b. If solenoid valve 57Q623a or b is energized, the oil flows to the cylinder, and the ladder will move up or down. By the function of shuttle valve (Fig. 10-2, Pos. 258.4) both service lines are connected to safety valve (Fig. 10-2, Pos. 258.3), which limits the pressure to 70 bar. Return oil from cylinder (Fig. 10-2, Pos. 101) flows back via solenoid valve 57Q623a/b to solenoid valve 57Q625. 57Q625 = ON => Maximum cylinder speed, return oil flow is not restricted when both proximity switches 70B122 and 70B091 are not activated (ladder between top and bottom end position) 57Q625 = OFF => Reduced cylinder speed, return oil flow is restricted by orifice (Fig. 10-2, Pos. 258.7) when one of the proximity switches 70B122 (ladder up) or 70B091 (ladder down) is activated (i.e. cushioning function just before the final upper or lower end position is reached). If the ladder is in the “top position”, the activated sensor 70B122 de-energizes 57Q625 and energizes 57Q623a, with the result that the cylinder of the ladder is always charged (held) with pressure in this position. If switch 70S084 is in neutral position and the ladder is in “bottom position”, sensor 70B091 de-energises all solenoids (Fig. 10-2, Pos. 57Q625 and 57Q6123 a+b) and the ladder is “blocked”.

Version 2010/1

10-5

Function of Hydraulically Operated Access Ladder

Fig. 10-3

10-6

ACCESS LADDER, HYDRAULICALLY OPERATED

Electric circuit diagram of the hydraulically operated access ladder

Version 2010/1

ACCESS LADDER, HYDRAULICALLY OPERATED

Function of Hydraulically Operated Access Ladder

Engine is not running and the ladder is in the “final upper position” With switch (70S084) activated in position "ladder down", the solenoid valves 57Q623b and 57Q625 are energized. 57Q6123b connects the piston side of the cylinder to the return line, so that the oil can return to the tank without resistance. Now the ladder can move down on its own (due to the force of gravity). The operator has to push the ladder slightly until it starts moving down on its own. In case the operator switches off the key switch (20S001), the "ladder down" function will be available via the MTC for approx. 30 min. After this time, the self-holding circuit (11Q100) switches off the MTC, and the travel alarm sounds twice. After that, the key switch (20S001) has to be switched on again for lowering the ladder. In case the operator switches off the key switch (20S001), and acitvates switch (70S084) in position "ladder down" until the ladder reaches the bottom end position (70B091 active), the self-holding circuit (11Q100) switches off the MTC after 2 minutes, the travel alarm will then sound twice.

WARNING z

Make sure that there are no obstacles in the moving range of the ladder! Stop raising the ladder by releasing the control switch (70S084) if there are any obstacles in the moving range!

z

Mount the ladder only in completely lowered position!

z

Do not lift persons or objects (tools) with the hydraulic access ladder! Serious injury or death could occur!

Version 2010/1

10-7

Adjustments / Checks

10.3

ADJUSTMENTS / CHECKS

Fig. 10-4

Adjustments / checks

10-8

ACCESS LADDER, HYDRAULICALLY OPERATED

Version 2010/1

ACCESS LADDER, HYDRAULICALLY OPERATED

Adjustments / Checks

Legend for Fig. 10-4: (1)

Stop bar

(2)

Inner pivot bracket of the access ladder

(3)

Pull chain for emergency lowering of the access ladder

(4) + (6)

Lock nut

(5) + (7)

Set screw

(A)

Access ladder in upper position (working position)

(B)

Access ladder in lowered position

(M1.1)

Test port – X4 pressure (60+3 bar)

(M1.2)

Test port – X2 pressure, pilot pressure (45+3 bar)

(M35.1)

Test port – hydraulic cylinder pressure, access ladder “piston side”

(252.1)

Pressure relief valve (45+3 bar) – X2 pressure (pilot pressure)

(252.2)

Pressure relief valve (60+3 bar) – X4 pressure (pump support pressure)

(258.3)

Pressure relief valve (safety valve 70 bar)

(70S084)

Ladder control switch for lowering and lifting the ladder

(70SS84a)

Pull switch for emergency lowering of the access ladder. When the chain (3) is being pulled down with the engine running, the pilot control system is made inoperative preventing further movement of the shovel. (Operator warning system)

(70B091)

Monitor and control sensor, located on ladder pivot bracket. This sensor monitors the ladder position and controls the moving speed of the ladder. In case the sensor (70B122) fails to function properly, the sensor (70B091) prevents unintended movement of the ladder.

(70B122)

Safety sensor, located on ladder pivot bracket. Cut out of the pilot control system and actuation of the hydraulic swing brake with the ladder in lowered position.

1. Connect pressure gauges to test ports (M1.1), (M1.2) and (M35.1). 2. Start the engine and let it run at high idle. 3. Lift the access ladder to the upper end position using switch (70S084). 4. Increase the X4 pressure to 80 bar at pressure relief valve (252.2) by loosening the lock nut (Fig. 10-4, Pos. 4) and then turning in set screw (Fig. 10-4, Pos. 5). 5. Increase the X2 pressure to 75 bar at pressure relief valve (252.1) by loosening the lock nut (Fig. 10-4, Pos. 6) and then turning in set screw (Fig. 10-4, Pos. 7). 6. Check the setting of pressure relief valve (258.3) at test port (M35.1); required: 70 bar. If the gauge does not show the proper pressure, the entire valve has to be replaced by a new, bench tested safety valve! 7. Reset valve (252.2) to 60+3 bar and reset valve (252.1) to 45+3 bar. 8. At last, tighten the lock nuts (Fig. 10-4, Pos. 4 and 6).

Version 2010/1

10-9

Adjustments / Checks

10-10

ACCESS LADDER, HYDRAULICALLY OPERATED

Version 2010/1

CENTRAL REFILLING SYSTEM (SERVICE ARM)

11. CENTRAL REFILLING SYSTEM (SERVICE ARM)

Version 2010/1

11-1

General

CENTRAL REFILLING SYSTEM (SERVICE ARM)

11.1

GENERAL

Fig. 11-1

Overall view of the central refilling system

11-2

Version 2010/1

CENTRAL REFILLING SYSTEM (SERVICE ARM)

General

Legend for Fig. 11-1: (1)

Hydraulic cylinder

(2)

Pull switch 55S087

(3)

Service arm

(4)

Proximity switch 55B023

(5)

Enabling switch 20S094 for the hydraulic service arm operation

Basics The hydraulically operated service arm for diesel driven machines is primarily important to refuel the machine easily. Therefore, it is important to have a basic central refilling system directly connected to the service truck. In order to move the service arm, first of all it is necessary to move the service arm enabling switch 20S094 at the cabin dashboard into position "1". After that, the service arm can be lowered/raised by pulling switch 55S087. NOTE: As long as the pull switch 55S087 is activated, the service arm continues to move up/down. If the pull switch is released, the service arm stops. NOTE: When the service arm enabling switch 20S094 at the cabin dashboard is switched to ON position ("1"), pilot control for shovel movements is switched to OFF.

WARNING Before initiating a service arm movement, make sure nobody is in range of the moving arm.

Version 2010/1

11-3

Function

CENTRAL REFILLING SYSTEM (SERVICE ARM)

11.2

FUNCTION

Fig. 11-2

Electric circuit diagram of the central refilling system

Legend for Fig. 11-2: (2)

Main pump

(8.1)

Pilot pump

(33)

Pilot oil filter

(115)

Hydraulic cylinder

(252.1)

Pressure relief valve – X2 pressure (45+3 bar)

(252.2)

Pressure relief valve – X4 pressure (60+3 bar)

(259.3+.4)

Check valves

(259.5)

Orifice

(57Q624a)

Solenoid valve: refilling arm UP

(57Q624b)

Solenoid valve: refilling arm DOWN

(57Q624c)

Solenoid valve: position with nonreturn valve => service arm locked

11-4

Version 2010/1

CENTRAL REFILLING SYSTEM (SERVICE ARM)

Function

Pre-condtion: the engine is running. NOTE: In addition to the hydraulic diagram in Fig. 11-2, also see the respective electric circuit diagram. The pump (Fig. 11-2, Pos. 8.1) delivers oil through filter (Fig. 11-2, Pos. 33) to port A of pressure relief valve (Fig. 11-2, Pos. 252.2). The pressure relief valve (Fig. 11-2, Pos. 252.2) maintains the adjusted pressure of 60+3 bar, called X4 pressure. By means of the pressure relief valve (Fig. 11-2, Pos. 252.1), the X4 pressure will be reduced to 45+3 bar (called X2 pressure), that is present at port P of solenoid valve 57Q624a/b. If the solenoid valves 57Q624a and 57Q624c are energized, pressurized oil flows to the piston side of the service arm cylinder, and the service arm will move up. If the solenoid valves 57Q624b and 57Q624c are energized, pressurised oil flows to the rod side of the service arm cylinder, and the service arm will move down. Under working conditions, solenoid valve 57Q624c is permanently energized to hold the service arm in the upper position under pressure. When the solenoid valve is de-energized by key switch 20S001 in OFF position, the service arm position is held by the non-return valve in solenoid valve 57Q624c. All solenoid valves 57Q624a/b and c are MTC controlled. The pull switch 55S087 is also connected to the MTC and acts as a remote control. The service arm can only be moved down or up with activated key switch 20S001 and activated "service arm enabling switch" 20S094 in the operators cab. The proximity switch 55B023 signalizes the MTC that the service arm is in the upper position. If the service arm enabling switch 20S094 is activated, the pilot pressure is cut off. Pilot pressure is also cut off when the service arm is out of range of the proximity switch 55B023 in order to prevent damage to the lowered service arm.

Version 2010/1

11-5

Function

11-6

CENTRAL REFILLING SYSTEM (SERVICE ARM)

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM

12. HINTS FOR READING THE HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM

Version 2010/1

12-1

General

HINTS FOR READING THE HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM

12.1

GENERAL

Fig. 12-1

Example of a hydraulic circuit diagram

12-2

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM

General

NOTE: The illustration is only used exemplarily. Use the circuit diagram corresponding to your machine for details. Legend for Fig. 12-1:

Item

Number/Code [Example]

Description

Explanation

A

Diagram no. and type of the specified machine

948 552 40 b PC4000-D

Diagram no. is only valid for the specified machine.

B

Defined serial no.

08199



C

Sheet no. / total number of sheets

01 / 02

1st of two sheets

D

Diagram title

Hydraulikplan KS

"Hydraulikplan KS" (KS: Klappschaufel) = "Hydraulic Diagram FSA" (FSA: Front Shovel Attachment) / "Hydraulikplan TL" (TL: Tieflöffel) = "Hydraulic Diagram BHA" (BHA: Backhoe Attachment)

E

Coordinates to specify the location of a component

1 C 10

Page 1, coordinate C vertically and coordinate 10 horizontally

F

Component no.

9

No. for main control block III

G

Line no. with cross reference

L20/ 2D4

Line no. 20; coming from / going to sheet 2 coordinates D4

H

Assignment of main control block spools to machine functions, function priorities



The rectangles respresent the main control block spools (numbered from bottom up); when devided in two parts, spool "a…" (left) and spool "b…" (right) are used for different components. Rectangles appearing on the lower right stand for additional components for special functions.

J

Block diagram for assignment of pumps to main control blocks



Position of main pumps (with no.) on the PTO and the associated main control block (with control spool designations)

K

See Fig. 12-2 on next page: Switching points for functions acc. to PTO and hydraulic oil temperatures and type of oil



The machine control determines the switching points according to the applied oil type/viscosity; therefore, the correct type has to be entered via VHMS.

Further remarks: z

All components are shown in neutral and pressureless position.

z

A wide continuous black line shows a main component or assembly (e.g.: valve and filter panel, main pump, hydraulic tank, …).

z

A continuous black line shows a main hydraulic line. This line is temporarily or permanently loaded with high or pilot pressure.

z

A broken line represents a return, drain or control oil line.

z

A black dot shows a connection point. The position of this connection is not explicitly defined.

z

A white dot shows a connection or port of a component with a well-defined position at the component (e.g.: via port marking/number).

Version 2010/1

12-3

Hydraulic symbols

12.2

HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS

Fig. 12-2

Example of a hydraulic circuit diagram

12-4

HINTS FOR READING THE HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM

Hydraulic symbols

NOTICE The illustration is only used exemplarily. Use the original circuit diagram for better readability.

z z

There are symbols described on the following pages not marked in Fig. 12-2.

z

The list of hydraulic symbols is not intended to be exhaustive. For more information, refer to standard ISO 1219.

12.2.1 Lines, unions Item

Symbol

Description

1.

Used as / at / on

Oil supply line, hose or pipe

Suction line or pressurized line of main hydraulic circuit, pilot pressure circuit or auxiliary circuits

Return oil line, hose or pipe

Return lines connected to the return oil filter chamber of the main oil tank

Case drain line (leak oil), hose or pipe

Return line connected to the case drain oil filter chamber of the main oil tank

Control oil line, hose or pipe

Pilot control, pump regulation line, parking brake control line

Crossed line

Pipes or hoses not connected with each other

Connection point

Connection of hydraulic lines without a well-defined position

Component connection point

Connection to components like valve blocks, tanks, pumps. Connection with a well-defined position at a component.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Version 2010/1

12-5

Hydraulic symbols

HINTS FOR READING THE HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM

12.2.1 Lines, unions Item

Symbol

Description

Used as / at / on

8. Plugged connection point, plugged with any kind of plug

Shut (currently not used) connection point

Plugged connection point, plugged with any kind of plug

Shut (currently not used) connection point

Compensator, compensates line differences in length due to vibration and change in temperature

Oil reservoir outlet to the suction tank

Quick coupling, special union with integrated check valve

Tank drain couplings and lines to be removed frequently, e.g. at lubrication systems with removable barrels.

Orifice restriction, not adjustable, with stated orifice diameter [mm]

E.g.: oil cooler inlet

Pressure test port, with a special quick coupling

HP filter, fan valve block.... at all important circuits

Distributor block

Connection of lines with the same destination, e.g. return lines to tank

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

12-6

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM

Hydraulic symbols

12.2.2 Components, valves Item

Symbol

15.

Description

Used as / at / on

Accumulator, filled with nitrogen with the specified pressure for the accumulator

Input line to the remote control valves, return oil collecting tube, track tensioning system

Screen filter (min screening size: 1.0 mm)

Installed in suction lines to the pumps, oil tank outlet and return oil collecting tube.

Oil cooler

Hydraulic oil cooler, PTO oil cooler

Breather filter

On top of PTO or hydraulic oil tank

Spray nozzles, inside a case for cooling and lubrication

Gearbox (PTO) cooling and lubrication system

16.

17.

18.

19.

12.2.3 Sensors Item 20.

Symbol

Description

Used as / at / on

Pressure switch / sensor Input = pressure Output = electrical signal (analogue or digital)

E.g.: return/leak oil tank (digital), high pressure filter (analogue)

Pressure switch Input = pressure Output = digital

E.g.: Filter monitoring PTO lubrication

21.

Version 2010/1

12-7

Hydraulic symbols

HINTS FOR READING THE HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM

12.2.3 Sensors Item

Symbol

22.

23.

Description

Used as / at / on

Temperature sensor Input = temperature Output = electrical signal, proportional to the temperature

E.g.: hydraulic tank

Level sensor Input = fluid level Output = electrical signal, analogue or digital

Hydraulic tank

12.2.4 Valves, valve components Item

Symbol

Description

Used as / at / on

24. Manually operated lever

Valve in track tensioning system to hold the cylinders’ position

Electric / magnetic operated unit Solenoid

Solenoid valves

Pilot pressure controlled unit

Pressure relief valves, disc brakes

Spring (fixed force)

Solenoid valves

Spring (adjustable spring force)

Pressure relief valves

25.

26.

27.

28.

12-8

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM

Hydraulic symbols

12.2.4 Valves, valve components Item 29.

30.

31.

Symbol

Description

Used as / at / on

Check valve In drawn position: free flow from right to left, blocked flow from left to right

E.g.: main pump outlet, swing brake valve block, anti cavitation valves at main control blocks

Check valve, spring loaded Opens in flow direction only against spring force (if pressure exceeds spring force)

Double check valve In shown position: valve only allows flow from left to bottom or from right to bottom

Slew brake control

Shut-off valve with monitoring switc, The adjustable switch monitors the valve position

Main shut-off valve between oil tank and suction tank

2/2 control valve, manually operated (with lever); check valve

Track tensioning system

3/2 control valve, manually operated; change-over valve

Change-over valve of pump regulation

4/2 directional control valve, electrically controlled (4/2 solenoid valve) Neutral position: P-A and B-T connected

Slew parking brake, travel parking brake, ladder control

Variable throttle valve, hydraulically controlled, pilot control port pressureless = maximum restriction

Travel brake valve located at the car body

32.

33.

34.

35.

36.

Version 2010/1

12-9

Hydraulic symbols

HINTS FOR READING THE HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM

12.2.4 Valves, valve components Item 37.

38.

Symbol

Description

Used as / at / on

3/2 directional control solenoid valve, seat design = leak oil free; 3/2 way solenoid valve, neutral = ports P–A connected

4/3 direction control solenoid valve, 4/3 solenoid valve; in neutral position all ports closed

Ladder control, service arm control

External pilot controlled proportional floating valve

PC3000 and PC4000 FSA: at stick and boom

39.

40. Main control valve with standard function Neutral position: open pump flow (P–T), control port flushing (T–a, T–b), closed pressure ports A and B. Position b: closed circulation port (P–T), ports P–B and A–T connected. Position a: closed circulation port (P–T), ports P–A and B–T connected.

41.

Main control valve with pressureless lowering function (lowering function marked with additional symbol " ") Neutral position: open pump flow (P–T), control port flushing (T–a, T–b), closed pressure ports A and B. Position b: closed circulation port (P–T), ports P–B and A–T connected. Position a: open pump flow P–T, closed pressure port A, ports B–T connected.

12-10

Standard control valve for bi-directional motors and double-acting cylinders

Control valve for pressureless lowering. Used to assist the floating function of boom and/or stick.

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM

Hydraulic symbols

12.2.4 Valves, valve components Item 42.

Symbol

Description

Used as / at / on

Main control valve with floating function (floating function marked with additional symbol " ") Neutral position: open pump flow (P–T), control port flushing (T–a, T–b), closed pressure ports A and B. Position b: closed circulation port (P–T), ports P–B and A–T connected, check valve prevents flow BÖP. Position a: open pump flow P–T and P–A, ports B–A connected with check valve to prevent flow TÖB.

43.

Floating valve for boom and/or stick

Pressure reducing valve assembly Variable inlet pressure at port P and constant lower output pressure at port A, adjustable output pressure (set to 35 bar)

Pressure reducing valve to provide reduced operating pressure for travel parking brakes and slew parking brakes

Pressure relief valve, directly controlled and adjustable

Safety valve in ladder control circuit

Pressure relief valve with anti-cavitation valve (check valve) assembly, external drain at port Y

Secondary relief valve at main control blocks

Throttle check valve with secondary relief valve, throttle and secondary valve mechanically adjustable, external drain at port Y

Distribution manifold normally in the line to the cylinder, piston side

Pressure increasing valve, pressure relief valve with variable setting, pilot pressure controlled via port X, low pilot pressure = low relief pressure

Slew brake valve block, track tensioning system

44.

45.

46.

47.

Version 2010/1

12-11

Hydraulic symbols

HINTS FOR READING THE HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM

12.2.4 Valves, valve components Item

Symbol

Description

Used as / at / on

48. Proportional pressure valve, to reduce the supply pressure P at port A proportional to the solenoid current

Remote control valves, pump regulation

4-port proportional valve, directly operated by a solenoid

Pump regulation

Pressure relief valve, mechanically and hydraulically adjustable via pilot port X, pilot valve drain port Y

Radiator and oil cooler fan drive

49.

50.

12.2.5 Pump, motor, cylinder Item 51.

Symbol

Description

Used as / at / on

Single-acting cylinder, only moving in one direction when pressurized, returning by external forces

Track tensioning system

Double-acting cylinder, operated in both directions by pressurized oil

Attachment

Drive shaft of a motor or pump with one direction

Main pumps

Hydraulic pump, fixed volume per REV, suction port S, pressure outlet P

Pilot pump, engine coolant fan, oil cooler fan, PTO lubrication pump

52.

53.

54.

12-12

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM

Hydraulic symbols

12.2.5 Pump, motor, cylinder Item

Symbol

Description

Used as / at / on

55. Hydraulic pump, variable output volume per REV with external case drain

Main pump

Hydraulic pump assembly with pump bearing lubrication, one direction and external case drain

Main pump

Variable hydraulic pump with charge pump and external drive shaft bearing lubrication

Main pump

Hydraulic motor can be used in both directions, with external case drain L

Oil cooler fan motors

Motor with disc brake, disc brake spring loaded: pressureless pilot line = maximum brake torque

Travel motor, slew motor

56.

57.

58.

59.

Version 2010/1

12-13

Hydraulic symbols

HINTS FOR READING THE HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM

12.2.5 Pump, motor, cylinder Item

Symbol

Description

Used as / at / on

60.

Lubrication pump drive, differential cylinder with integrated control valves

Lubrication pump station for central lubrication system and slew ring lubrication system

61. Slew brake valve assembly Acts as a hydraulically back pressure system parallel to a slew motor with variable pressure setting and independent pressure side. Input port A or B and outlet on the opposite side, relieve port T

Slew service brake system on top of the slew motor

62.

63.

64.

12-14

Rotary joint, upper part with connections to the superstructure hydraulic, and lower part with connections to the car body

Hydraulically connection between superstructure and car body

Travel brake valve block with secondary pressure relief valve in the line to the travel motors. The return oil flow is restricted according to the pressure inlet.

Mounted in the supply line to the travel motors

Hydraulic oil tank with leak and return oil filter, back pressure valve and sensors

Main hydraulic oil tank

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM

Hydraulic symbols

12.2.5 Pump, motor, cylinder Item

Symbol

Description

Used as / at / on

65.

Main pump with charge pump, variable displacement individual for each pump, controlled via proportional solenoid valve

Version 2010/1

Main pumps

12-15

Hydraulic symbols

12-16

HINTS FOR READING THE HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

13. HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

Version 2010/1

13-1

General

13.1

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

GENERAL

In this chapter you’ll find information about: z

the (new) designation of electrical components (reference code)

z

the graphical symbols used

z

the layout of the electric wiring diagram

z

hints for a fast look-up of electrical components in the electric wiring diagram.

NOTE: The electric wiring diagram is solely intended for wiring purposes. For information on operating sequences or the process logic, refer to the CoDeSys visualisation software.

13-2

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

13.2

Reference designation of the electrical components

REFERENCE DESIGNATION OF THE ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

Each electrical component is well-defined by a code containing two single reference designations, see following table. Code "aabcdd–x"

Meaning

Remarks

aabcdd–x

aa : Area code (location reference designation)

See chap. 13.2.1 for details

aabcdd–x

b : Product reference designation, component identifying letter acc. to IEC 61346-2

See chap. 13.2.2 for details

aabcdd–x

c : 2 = Pre-heating / 3 = CAN bus / 5 and 6 = valves

aabcdd–x

dd : Further product reference designation

aabcdd–x

–x : Powertrain (–1 and –2)

Because this reference designation was just introduced at KMG, and differs from the previously used designation, this chapter also contains a table with the new and old component designation are listed side by side, refer to section 13.6 on page 13-21.

13.2.1

AREA CODE

The first two letters of the product code of the electrical components indicate its location, see following table: Area code

CAN*

10

Location Cab base

11

X

ELV board (DC / 0…60 V)

12

X

Low voltage board (AC / 60…400 V)

13

Cab base bottom compartment

14



15

Customer board in the cab base

16

Switch board, pre-heating hydraulic oil

17

Air condition at cab base

18

Air condition switch board, HV cabinet

19

Air condition switch board, LV cabinet

20

X

Cab

21

Customer board in the cab

30

Drive

31

Fuel tank

32

High voltage cabinet (400 V and up)

33

Low voltage in the high voltage cabinet

34

Air condition at the high voltage cabinet

40

Version 2010/1

X

Hydraulic oil tank

13-3

Reference designation of the electrical components

Area code

CAN*

Location

41

Oil cooler (hydraulic)

50

Machinery house

51

X

Engine / motor room

52

Engine / motor

54

Counterweight

55

Service arm

56

X

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

Pump compartment

57

Control panel, PTO

59

Suction tank

60

Superstructure

61

Control blocks, remote control valves

62

Lubrication system

63

Reserve oil tank, engine

65

Engine coolant pre-heating

67

Crane

68

Compressor

70

Stairs, access ladder

71

Battery box

80

Loader attachment

90

Undercarriage

91

X

Cable drum

92

Rotary joint

93

Slip ring

94

Junction box, cable drum

* : "X" = Location with CAN node

13-4

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

13.2.2

Reference designation of the electrical components

COMPONENT IDENTIFYING LETTER

According to IEC 61346-2, it is now the function / purpose of the electrical component within the circuit that determines its identifying letter in the reference designation (refer to section 13.2 on page 13-3). Letter

Component fuction / purpose

Examples

A

Double function (basic functions are equivalent)

VHMS display, multimonitor

B

Converting physical values into processable signals

End switch, binary or analog sensor, transducer, camera

C

Saving/storing of energy, information, or material

Battery, data memory

E

Supplying rays, heat, or coldness

Heater, lamp

F

Protective devices

Fuse, circuit breaker, power circuit breaker, emergency shut-off switch, safety lock switch, insulation monitor, motor overload switch, ground fault circuit interruptor

G

Initiate energy signals, material flow signals, referBattery, generator ence signals

K

Information processing (without F)

Relay, time relay, controller, phase protective relay

M

Supply mechanical energy (linear or rotating)

E-motor, actuation coil

P

Exposition of information

Display, signal transducer, gauge, clock, counter or operating hours, LED, printer, counter, sevensegment display

Q

Switching or modifying material flow or energy flow Contactor, power relay, battery main switch, dis(without F) connecting switch, starter, power switch

R

Limiting, damping, stabilizing, blocking of energy, information, or material

"Z-diode, diode, throttle, resistance, series resistance, capacitor module, cut-in unit

S

Converting manual mechanical signals into processable signals

Switch, buttton, selector switch, setpoint sensor/ transmitter

T

Converting energy or information without modifica- Current transformer, voltage transformer, amplifier, tion of the kind of energy and the information con- aerial, measurement transformer, transformator, tent rectifier, charger, inverter

U

Supporting, retaining, carrying, holding up of objects

Isolator, cable duct, switchboard, wiring rack, cable drum

V

Processing material, energy, information signals

Mains filter, frequency filter

W

Guiding, channeling, transferring energy, material, Conductor, wiring, rail, bus, fiber optic cable, slipinformation ring

X

Connecting objects

Version 2010/1

Terminal, terminal block, terminal strip, connector, socket, cable connector

13-5

Graphical symbols

13.3

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

GRAPHICAL SYMBOLS

The circuit symbols used in the wiring diagram are based upon IEC (International Electrical Commission) standard IEC 60617, which differ from the symbols in accordance with the standards NEMA ICS 19-2002 (R2007), ANSI Y32.2/IEEE 315/315A, CSA Z99 for the North American market. The symbols shown in the table below only present an excerpt of the standards, not an exhaustive list of all symbols relating to the standards.

Description

Junction of conductors

Symbol acc. to IEC

or

Symbol acc. to NEMA ICS/ANSI/IEEE

or

Connection of conductors (node) Terminal Line of effect, general symbol Line of effect, denoting small interval Line of separation between functional units Shielding Earth, general symbol ’Ground’, general symbol Protective earth / Protective ground Connector with plug and socket

or

Isolating point, lug, closed Passive components Resistor, general symbol

or

or

Variable resistor, general Resistor with sliding contact, potentiometer Winding, inductance, general Capacitor, general symbol

or or

or

Variable capacitor Visual indicator, general symbol

13-6

(* with color indication)

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

Description Indicator light, general symbol

Symbol acc. to IEC

Graphical symbols

Symbol acc. to NEMA ICS/ANSI/IEEE

or

or

Buzzers Horn, claxon Drives Manual operation, general use Operated by pushing Operated by pulling Operated by turning Operated by key Operated by rollers, sensors Stored energy mechanism, general symbol Operated by motor Emergency switch Operated by electromagnetic overcurrent protection Operated by thermal overcurrent protection Electromagnetic operation Control by fluid level Electromechanical, electromagnetic operating devices Electromechanical operating device, general symbol, relay coil, general symbol Electromechanical operating device with ONdelay Electromechanical device with OFF-delay

or or (× : device code letter)

Electromechanical device with ON- and OFFdelay Electromechanical device of a thermal relay

Version 2010/1

or

13-7

Graphical symbols

Description

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

Symbol acc. to IEC

Symbol acc. to NEMA ICS/ANSI/IEEE

Contacts N/O contact

or

N/C contact

or

Changeover contact with interruption

or TC or TDC

Early-make N/O contact of a contact assembly

TO or TDO

Late-break N/C contact of a contact assembly N/O contact, delayed when closing N/C contact, delayed when reclosing

or

or or

Control devices Push-button (not stay-put) Spring-return switches with N/C contact, manually operated by pushing, e.g. push-button Spring-return switches with N/O and N/C contact, manually operated by pushing Spring-return switches with latching position and one N/O contact, manually operated by pushing Spring-return switches with latching position and one N/C contact, manually operated by striking (e.g. mushroom button) Position switches (N/O contacts), limit switches (N/O contacts) Position switches (N/C contacts), limit switches (N/C contacts) Proximity switches (N/C contacts), actuated by the proximity of iron Proximity switches, inductive, N/O contacts Proximity switches, block diagram Under-pressure relays, N/O contacts Pressure switches, N/C contact

or or

Float switches, N/O contact Float switches, N/C contact

13-8

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

Description

Symbol acc. to IEC

Graphical symbols

Symbol acc. to NEMA ICS/ANSI/IEEE

Switchgear Contactors (N/O contacts)

(× : code letter)

Three-pole switch-disconnector Three-pole circuit-breaker Fuse, general symbol Transformers, current transformers Transformers with two windings

Current transformer

or

or

or

Machines Generator Motor, general symbol

or or

DC motor, general symbol AC motor, general symbol Three-phase asynchronous motor with squirrel-cage rotor

or

Three-phase asynchronous motor with slipring rotor Semiconductor components Semiconductor diode, general symbol Limiting diode Zener diode Light-emitting diode (LED), general symbol Bi-directional diode, diac Thyristor, general symbol

Version 2010/1

13-9

Drawing concept

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

13.4

DRAWING CONCEPT

Fig. 13-1

Cover page of the KMG electric circuit diagram

13-10

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

Drawing concept

Komatsu circuit diagrams Each page of the circuit diagram has the following information in the bottom right hand corner: z

Diagram number (Fig. 13-1, Pos. 5); – example: 942 123 40 d

z

Machine type (Fig. 13-1, Pos. 6) – example: PC4000-6D

z

Machine number(s), the diagrams are valid for (Fig. 13-1, Pos. 7) – example: 08210 and following

z

Diagram title (Fig. 13-1, Pos. 8) and contents – example: "Elektroplan" [German for "electric circuit diagram"] and "Table of contents"

z

Current page number and total number of pages (Fig. 13-1, Pos. 4) – example: 01/175

Each page is numbered from 8 (at the left corner) to 1 (at the right corner) along the top and bottom lines, and lettered down from F (at the top) to A (at the bottom) along the left and right side lines (see Fig. 13-1, Pos. 3). This coordinate system allows to indicate the location of components, as well as to locate a component on a given page more easily.

Table of contents In the table of contents on the first pages, the pages (Fig. 13-1, Pos. 1) are listed in ascending order, for each page the title (Fig. 13-1, Pos. 2, with area code relating to the units presented on the page, where applicable) is listed. The english version of the table of contents is to be found following the german version. Example: "103 51 bus connector node 17, 18, 19" => On page 103, the bus connectors for nodes 17, 18, and 19, to be found in the engine room (area code 51), are shown.

Version 2010/1

13-11

Drawing concept

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

Cross reference list The pages following the table of contents contain the cross reference list.

Fig. 13-2

Cross reference list

In the cross reference list, all electrical parts/components are listed in alphabetical order (Fig. 13-2, Pos. 2 and 3). In front of the components’ designation, the relevant page number (Fig. 13-2, Pos. 1) on which the component is drawn, is given. NOTE: Following the cross reference list, but still in front of the circuit diagram pages, you’ll find: – the FAQ (about how information is represented in the diagrams) – information about the structure of the reference designations. NOTE: The underscore in cross references like "40X_41.5" stands for a connection to a terminal block.

13-12

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

Drawing concept

This page was left blank intentionally.

Version 2010/1

13-13

Drawing concept

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

Eletrical wiring diagrams – explanations The following illustrations shall show up some basics about the wiring diagrams and how information is presented.

Fig. 13-3

13-14

Wiring diagram (example)

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

Drawing concept

Legend for Fig. 13-3: (1)

Phase / wire designation

(2)

Cross reference to further connection (e.g. "158.1" : continuation on page 158, column 1)

(3)

Notation of temperature switch (63B204: pre-heating reserve oil tank)

(4)

Notation of circuit breaker (12F206a: heater in cab support)

(5)

Required wire cross-section area in mm² (e.g.: 2.5 mm² = AWG 14)

(6)

Separation line for an electrical module / assembly group

(7)

Cable connector designation and pin number

(8)

Connection to a terminal block (e.g. pin 19 of terminal block 11X_51)

(9)

Contacts of relay 12K201 (Fig. 13-3, Pos. 10). The switching contacts are always drawn at the bottom below the associated relay. For switching contacts in usage, a cross reference is given alongside; for contacts not used, only ":" is shown. In the example, only the switching contacts 43 an 44 are used, the contacts are shown in detail on page 69, section/column 1.

(10)

Relay coil

(11)

Notation of heating resistor (e.g.: 63E212)

(12)

Functional unit’s name for the wiring diagram sector shown above

(13)

Protective earthing (PE)

(14)

Ground wire / machine ground (e.g.: 12GND)

(15)

Designation for optional design (e.g.: TT = low-temperature design)

Version 2010/1

13-15

Drawing concept

Fig. 13-4

13-16

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

Wiring diagram (example)

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

Drawing concept

Legend for Fig. 13-4: (1)

Designation of CAN-bus node

(2)

Separating line for functional unit (40K311, ICN-D, CAN-bus node 11)

(3)

Notation of input resistance of CAN-bus node ICN-D (at socket 3, pin 8)

(4)

Identification for logic input signal also used in the flowchart (first line), first letter in second line identifying type of port (SB_… : input / OB_… : output)

(5)

Notation of pressure switch (40B024: filter monitoring of air filter at the hydraulic tank)

(6)

Functional unit’s name for the wiring diagram sector shown above

(7)

Color code of connecting line (e.g.: "BN" = brown), refer to cable color identification table below.

(8)

Connector identification

(9)

Cross reference/location of the complete assembly group, if only a part of the group is shown here. In the example, onyl the relevant resistor between pins 9 and 10 of the resistor array 40R008 is shown in th drawing for the functional unit (hydraulic oil tank monitoring); the complete resitor array is shown on page 143, section/column 2.

(10)

Cross reference/location of the complete assembly group, if only a part of the group is shown here. In the example, onyl the relevant diode between pins 1 and 2 of the diode array 40R014 is shown in th drawing for the functional unit (hydraulic oil tank monitoring); the complete diode array is shown on page 143, section/column 1.

NOTE: All circuits are shown without current, and all relays and switches in neutral position.

Cable color identification Refer to the following table if the identification of cable colors in wiring diagrams may be unclear due to different existing systems of color codes. Color English

Color code Standard IEC 60757*

German (current)

German (previous)

BK

SW

sw

BN

BR

br

Black

German Schwarz

Brown

Braun

Red

Rot

RD

RT

rt

Orange

Orange

OG

OR

or

Yellow

Gelb

YE

GE

ge

Green

Grün

GN

GN

gn

Blue

Blau

BU

BL

bl

Violet

Violett

VT

VI

vi

Grey

Grau

GY

GR

gr

White

Weiß

WH

WS

ws

Pink

Rosa

PK

RS

rs

Turquoise

Türkis

TQ

TK

tk

* IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission

Version 2010/1

13-17

Drawing concept

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

Wiring diagram sequence The layout of the wiring diagram, especially the order of the contents, is shown in the following chart. Location (in ascending order) Emergency equipment Power supply / ground Circuit breaker Circuit breaker, controller Sensors Bus connectors (CAN-bus) Node / controller Power supply / ground Bus connections (CAN) Diode and resistor arrays (built-in) Input digital and analog Output digital and analog Node / controller Power supply / ground Bus connections (CAN) Diode and resistor arrays (built-in) Input digital and analog Output digital and analog ... Other elements Location Emergency equipment Power supply / ground Circuit breaker Circuit breaker, controller Sensors Bus connectors (CAN-bus) Node / controller Power supply / ground Bus connections (CAN) Diode and resistor arrays (built-in) Input digital and analog Output digital and analog Node / controller ... ... Other elements ... (Location) Accessories Settings Additional information Correlation hand-lever deflection – movements Pump and control block layout Coding of connectors DIP switch setting ...

13-18

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

Drawing concept

Search hints In order to find the required information fast and easily, the following hints may be useful. 1. A component at a certain location is to be looked-up in the wiring diagram, the component designation is missing / unrecognizable: => if needed, look-up the location reference designation (area code) for the relevant place of the machine in the "List of location reference designations" following the FAQ. => Look-up the page number the wiring diagram starts for the desired location in the table of contents. => If the functional unit the component belongs to is identified, look-up the page number for the functional unit in the table of contents for the entries for the relevant location reference code. => Identify the electrical component on the specified page(s). 2. The component’s product reference code is known / identifiable: => Go to the cross reference list following the table of contents. => Look-up the component’s product reference designation and the corresponding page number in the alphabetically sorted list. => Identify the electrical component on the specified page.

Version 2010/1

13-19

Cable marking

13.5

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

CABLE MARKING

On all blue wires there is a printed code approx. every 10 cm.

Fig. 13-5

Example for cable marking

The code next to the cable end shows where the cable end has to be connected, the code further away from the end gives information about what is connected at the other end of the wire.

13-20

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

13.6

Table of new and old component designations

TABLE OF NEW AND OLD COMPONENT DESIGNATIONS

The following table lists components of all KMG excavator models. Therefore, it possibly contains components not existing at the particular machine. New code

Previous code

10a000

Component Cab support

10B001

6B1

Temperature cab support

10B002

3B2

Temperature switch for heater in LV switch cabinet

10B005

2S5

Door switch in LV switch cabinetLV switch cabinet

10B006a

2B6a

Temperature switch for air condition in LV switch cabinet

10B007a

2B7a

Dampness switch for air condition in LV switch cabinet

10B351

Fire suppression system pressure switch

10B451

9B1

Temperature transmitter for fire suppression system LV switch cabinet

10B452

9B2

Temperature transmitter for fire suppression system LV switch cabinet

10B463

E63

Camera cab support

10E008

7H8

Emergency light cab support (Electric)

10E009

7H9

Emergency light cab support (Electric)

10E025

3R25

Heater in LV switch cabinet

10E026

3R26

Heater in LV switch cabinet

10E046

H46

Lighting cab support (Diesel)

10E055

H55

Lighting at stage for cab

10E144e

H144e

Additional light cab support left

10E144f

H144f

Additional light cab support left

10E144g

H144g

Additional light cab support right

10E144h

H144h

Additional light cab support right

10E231

1H1

Heater for cab support

10G007

M3

Compressor for warning horn

10G010

M10

Excess pressure blower (old cab)

10K032

E32/X14

Load limit regulation

10K300

E46

VHMS controller

10P001

1P1

Battery charging device emergency-lighting, charging-current-display

10P003-1

0P3-1

Cos-Phi-display motor 1

10P003-2

0P3-2

Cos-Phi-display motor 2

12P004-1

0P4-1

KWh_counter_motor_1

12P004-2

0P4-2

KWh_counter_motor_2

10P008

1P8

Battery charging device emergency-lighting, charging-voltage-display

10Q104

*K4M

Power switch for air condition compressor in HV switch cabinet at cab support wall

Version 2010/1

13-21

Table of new and old component designations

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

New code

Previous code

Component

10Q204

+K4M-1

Power switch for air condition compressor in LV switch cabinet at cab support wall

10R100

R100

Terminal resistor at hydraulic tank (in need)

10R101

R101

Terminal resistor at VHMS controller

10S017

S17

Switch for cab support lighting

10T055

E55

Charging device

10T058

E58

Satellite communication ORBCOMM controller (option)

10W322

WLAN-Interface cable between MTC and cab floor (MTCPC)

10X037

Socket connector for satellite communication (option)

10X300

X35d

CAN-Bus-T-Splitter at VHHV controller too QUANTUM for terminal resistor

10X300a

X35d

CAN-Bus-T-Splitter at VHHV controller too MH801 display for terminal resistor

10X300b

X35d

CAN-Bus-Connector in cab support

10X306

CAN-Bus-Connector

10X307

CAN-Bus-Connector

10X309

X35d

CAN-Bus-Connector in cab support

10X322

WLAN-Interface connector in cab floor (MTCPC)

10X335b

CAN-Bus-T-Splitter prepared for Modular-Mining-System-Interface (MMS) hub (Diesel)

10X335c

CAN-Bus-Connector between cab support and cab

11a000

Extra low voltage switch panel (DC)

11B142

E42

Direction of rotation

11B143

E43

Speed of rotation

11B144

Speed of rotation from gyroscop (in preparation!)

11F001

F1

Circuit breaker 15 (+24V DC) (50A)

11F001a

F1a

Circuit breaker 30 (+24V DC) (50A)

11F001b

F1b

Main circuit breaker for pilot control (50 A)

11F001c

F1c

Circuit breaker for working light, lighting superstructure and ladder (50A)

11F001d

F1d

Main circuit breaker cab (50A)

11F001e

F1e

Main circuit breaker TT (50A)

11F001f

F1f

Circuit breaker motor controller QUANTUM (16A)

11F002

F2

Circuit breaker warning light, compressor signal horn (16A)

11F003

F3

Circuit breaker für pilot control (32A)

11F005

F5

Circuit breaker windscreen wiper (16A)

11F005a

F5a

Circuit breaker windscreen wiper wash system (6A)

11F006

F6

Circuit breaker for emergency line and key switch

11F006a

F6a

Circuit breaker service light pump room and engine room (25A) and sockets

11F006b

F6b

Circuit breaker cab indoor light, socket cab support (25A), washbasin pump, cigarette lighter

11F006c

F6c

Circuit breaker sockets in motor- and pump room (16A)

13-22

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

New code

Previous code

11F006d

Table of new and old component designations

Component Circuit breaker cab indoor light (16A)

11F007

F7

Circuit breaker light cab roof right (10A)

11F007a

F7a

Circuit breaker light cab roof left (10A)

11F008

F8

Circuit breaker light oil cooler (10A)

11F008a

F8a

Circuit breaker light counterweight (10A)

11F008c

F8c

Circuit breaker light oil cooler (16A)

11F008d

F8d

Circuit breaker light oil cooler (16A)

11F008e

F8e

Circuit breaker light oil cooler (16A)

11F009

F9

Circuit breaker air-condition (50A)

11F009c

F9c

Circuit breaker air-condition control panel

11F011

F11

Circuit breaker motor controller QUANTUM (16A)

11F012

F12

Circuit breaker key switch (6A)

11F013

F13

Circuit breaker for power supply of binary sensors (6A)

11F013a

F13a

Circuit breaker for power supply of analog sensors (6A)

11F014

F14

Circuit breaker for power supply of CAN-node-outputs (20A)

11F015a

F15a

Circuit breaker VHMS controller and VHMS monitor MH801 (10A)

11F016

F17

Circuit breaker PWM-amplifier for cooler fan speed (6A)

11F017

F17

Circuit breaker self-holding (16A)

11F018

F18

Circuit breaker slew park brake (6A)

11F019

F19

Circuit breaker light oil cooler (16A)

11F026

F26

Circuit breaker cab over pressure blower (16A)

11F028

F28

Circuit breaker pilot control supply (10A)

11F028a

F28a

Circuit breaker pilot control supply (10A)

11F029

F29

Circuit breaker pilot control supply (10A)

11F029a

f29a

Circuit breaker pilot control supply (10A)

11F032

F32

Circuit breaker camera system (10A)

11F034

F34

Circuit breaker transfer pump (32A)

11F043

F43

Circuit breaker motor start relay, travel brake, hydr. slew brake, service arm (16A)

11F046

F46

Circuit breaker fan air condition (TT)

11F047

F47

Circuit breaker mixing-valve and fan for cab heater (TT)

11F048

F48

Circuit breaker radio, reading lamp (6A)

11F049

F49

Circuit breaker customer enhancements (16A)

11F059

F59

Main circuit breaker for stabilized battery voltage (50A)

11F061

F61

Circuit breaker load limit regulation (10A)

11F062

F62

Circuit breaker refrigerator, mirror (16A)

11F063

F63

Circuit breaker operator seat heater blower (10A)

11F065

F65

Circuit breaker light superstructure and ladder (16A)

11F066

F66

Circuit breaker engine oil refilling system (16A)

Version 2010/1

13-23

Table of new and old component designations

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

New code

Previous code

Component

11F067

F67

Circuit breaker socket in cab (25A)

11F068

F68

Circuit breaker socket in cab (25A)

11F070

F70

Circuit breaker VHMS supply (10A)

11F071

F71

Circuit breaker independent cab heater Hydronic M (25A)

11F075

F75

Circuit breaker sensor wire for control battery voltage (6A)

11F084

F84

Circuit breaker hydraulic oil level (6A)

11F100

Supply control outputs node 3 (10A)

11F101

Supply control outputs node 4 (10A)

11F102

Supply control outputs node 5 (10A)

11F103

Supply control outputs node 9 (10A)

11F104

Supply control outputs node 10 (10A)

11F105

Supply control outputs node 11 (10A)

11F106

Supply control outputs node 12 (10A)

11F107

Supply control outputs node 13 (10A)

11F108

Supply control outputs node 14 (10A)

11F109

Supply control outputs node 15 (10A)

11F110

Supply control outputs node 16 (10A)

11F111

Supply control outputs node 17 (10A)

11F112

Supply control outputs node 18 (10A)

11F113

Supply control outputs node 19 und 20 (10A)

11F114

Supply control outputs node 21 (10A)

11F115

Supply control outputs node 6 (10A)

11F116

Supply control outputs node 7 (10A)

11F117

Supply control outputs node 8 (10A)

11F121

Bus node supply, switched (10A)

11F122

Bus node supply (10A)

11F123

Bus node supply (10A)

11F306

3F6

Supply for cab heater monitoring

11F310c

3F10c

Circuit breaker for blower under operator seat for blower after-running

11G003

A3

Test modul (-10V bis +10V)

11K003-1

K3-1

Engine 1 running (> 300 1/min), generator field current switch on

11K003-2

K3-2

Engine 2 running (> 300 1/min), generator field current switch on

11K032

D32

Safety relay with cut-off delay for zero position signal

11K044a

Safety line (before safety contactors)

11K050

K50

Bucket switch off

11K058

K58

Pilot control boom up (PC4000)

11K064-1

K64-1

Engine enable

11K064-2

K64-2

Engine enable

13-24

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

Table of new and old component designations

New code

Previous code

Component

11K065-1

K65

Enable engine-controller 1

11K065-2

K65

Enable engine-controller 2

11K071

K71

Pilot control bucket fill

11K074

K74

Pilot control stick out

11K075

K75

Boom down (PC5500)

11K076

K76

Pilot control left crawler (PC4000)

11K076a

K76a

Stick out (PC5500)

11K077

K77

Pilot control crawler: left crawler (PC5500)

11K077a

Pilot control crawler: right crawler (PC5500)

11K078

K78

Pilot control right crawler (PC4000)

11K079

K79

Boom up (PC5500)

11K080

K80

Control block 1 switch on

11K111a

K111a

Supply pilot control

11K111b

K111b

Supply pilot control redundant

11K126

K126

Supply relay monitoring for pilot control

11K160

K160

Boom floating position OFF

11K170

K170

Stick floating position OFF

11K176

K76

Stick in (PC5500)

11K177

K177

Travel cut off forward

11K177a

Travel cut off forward (Parallel to 11K177)

11K178

K78

Bucket dump (PC5500)

11K178

K178

Travel cut-off backward

11K178a

Travel cut-off backward (Parallel too 11K178)

11K179

K179

Travel cut-off backward left crawler

11K180

K180

Travel cut-off backward right crawler

11K301

MTC (Master Turbo Controller) (central controller in cab support)

11K302

CAN-Node 2 (ICND)

11K303

CAN-Node 3 (ICNV)

11K304

CAN-Node 4 (ICNV)

11K305

CAN-Node 5 (ICNV)

11P001

H1-1

Operating hour meter motors

11P029

H29

Operating hour meter crawler

11P063

H63

LED load limit regulation activ

11P094-1

H94-1

Quantum fluid signal lamp motor 1 (white)

11P094-2

H94-2

Quantum fluid signal lamp motor 2 (white)

11P095-1

H95-1

Quantum warning signal lamp motor 1 (yellow)

11P095-2

H95-2

Quantum warning signal lamp motor 2 (yellow)

11P096-1

H96-1

Quantum stop signal lamp motor 1 (rot)

Version 2010/1

13-25

Table of new and old component designations

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

New code

Previous code

Component

11P096-2

H96-2

Quantum stop signal lamp motor 2 (red)

11P138

H138

LED error load limit regulation

11P143-1

H143-1

Signal lamp motor oil pump 1

11P143-2

H143-2

Signal lamp motor oil pump 2

11Q010

Self holding of MTC; MTC output for travel alarm control by relay and diode

11Q020

K20

Horn

11Q023

K23 / 4K23

Superstructure lighting contactor

11Q023a

K23a / 4K23a

Additional superstructure lighting contactor (option)

11Q044

K44

Control voltage on by key switch-contactor for diesel shovels

11Q044a

K44a

Control voltage on by key switch-contactor for diesel shovels (parallel to 11Q044)

11Q044c

Q44c

Emergency stop circuit

11Q044d

Q44d

Emergency stop circuit

11Q045a

Main supply for pilot control

11Q045b

Main supply for pilot control

11Q045c

Main supply for pilot control

11Q045d

Main supply for pilot control

11Q045e

Main supply for pilot control

11Q090

K90

Emergency lighting ladder

11Q100

K100

Self holding control contactor

11Q111

K111c

Supply pilot control power contactor (10A)

11Q122

K122

Connect control voltage battery with battery for starter

11Q190

K190

Select slew brake signal source beetween lever and pedal

11R005

A5a

Pull-up/-down resistors

11R013

Diode array (3A)

11R016

Diode array (3A)

11R017

Diode array (3A)

11S041-1

S41-1

Test speed engine 1 : 1800 1/min

11S041-2

S41-2

Test speed engine 2 : 1800 1/min

11S097

S97

Programming mode switch VHMS

11S145

Windscreen wiper arm (QUIT-button)

11C004

A4

Pilot control capacitor modul bucket

11C004a

A4a

Pilot control capacitor modul boom

11C005

A5a

Pilot control capacitor modul slew gear / stick

11C006

A6

Pilot control capacitor modul crawler / clam

11T007

A7

Pilot control amplifier slew gear

11T007a

A7a

Pilot control amplifier slew gear

11T008

A8

Pilot control amplifier stick

11T008a

A8a

Pilot control amplifier stick

13-26

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

Table of new and old component designations

New code

Previous code

Component

11T008b

A8b

Pilot control amplifier stick

11T009

A9

Pilot control amplifier bucket

11T009a

A9a

Pilot control amplifier bucket

11T009b

A9b

Pilot control amplifier bucket

11T010

A10

Pilot control amplifier boom

11T010a

A10a

Pilot control amplifier boom

11T010b

A10b

Pilot control amplifier boom

11T010c

A10c

Pilot control amplifier boom

11T011

A11

Pilot control amplifier clam

11T012

A12

Pilot control amplifier crawler left

11T013

A13

Pilot control amplifier crawler right

11T016

A16

Pilot control amplifier slew brake

11T017

E17

Electronic bucket limitation (EBL)

11T048

E48

Ramp modul stick

11T049

E49

Ramp modul boom

11T049a

E49a

Ramp modul boom

11T049b

E49b

Ramp modul boom

11T049c

E49c

Ramp modul boom

11T050

E50

Ramp modul slew gear

11T050a

E50a

Ramp modul slew gear

11T050b

E50b

Ramp modul slew brake

11T051

E51

Ramp modul crawlers

11T052

E52

Ramp modul clam

11T059

E59

Ramp modul bucket

11T080

R80

Measuring transducer for battery voltage

11X027a

VHMS: Download- and programming connector in cab

11X027b

X27b

VHMS: Download- and programming connector in cab support

11X030

X30

Socket cab support

11X093

Terminal strip in cab support too slip ring

11X193

Connector at cab support too slip ring

11X301

CAN-Bus-T-Splitter MTC

11X302

CAN-Bus-T-Splitter Node 2

11X303

CAN-Bus-T-Splitter Node 3

11X304

CAN-Bus-T-Splitter Node 4

11X305

CAN-Bus-T-Splitter Node 5

12a000

Low voltage switch panel (Also low voltage for pre-heating for Diesel TT)

12B403a-1

Winding temperature measuring transducer Pt100 motor 1

12B403b-1

Winding temperature measuring transducer Pt100 motor 1

Version 2010/1

13-27

Table of new and old component designations

New code

Previous code

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

Component

12B403c-1

Winding temperature measuring transducer Pt100 motor 1

12B403d-1

Bearing temperature measuring transducer Pt100 motor 1

12B403e-1

Bearing temperature measuring transducer Pt100 motor 1

12B404a-2

Winding temperature measuring transducer Pt100 motor 2

12B404b-2

Winding temperature measuring transducer Pt100 motor 2

12B404c-2

Winding temperature measuring transducer Pt100 motor 2

12B404d-2

Bearing temperature measuring transducer Pt100 motor 2

12B404e-2

Bearing temperature measuring transducer Pt100 motor 2

12F076

1F76

Circuit breaker charging current (125A)

12F201

1F1

Circuit breaker charging device (16A)

12F202

1F2

Circuit breaker pre-heating motor oil (6A)

12F203

1F3

Circuit breaker pre-heating power take off (PTO) (6A)

12F204

1F4

Circuit breaker pre-heating battery (6A)

12F205

1F5

Circuit breaker pre-heating suction oil tank (6A)

12F206

1F6a

Circuit breaker heater RESERVE - oil tank (6A)

12F206a

1F6a

Circuit breaker heater in cab support (20A)

12F209-1

1F9-1

Circuit breaker pre-heating coolant (25A)

12F209-2

1F9-2

Circuit breaker pre-heating coolant (25A)

12F267

1F8

Circuit breaker pre-heating hydraulic oil (25A)

12F401

2F1

Circuit breaker air condition control for HV and LV switch cabinet

12F401a

1Q1a

Power protection switch for secondary protection for transformer 1

12F401b

1Q1b

Power protection switch for secondary protection for transformer 2

12F402

2F2

Circuit breaker air condition HV switch cabinet

12F403

2F3

Circuit breaker air condition LV switch cabinet

12F404-1

0F4-1

Motor protection relay motor 1

12F404-2

0F4-2

Motor protection relay motor 2

12F405

1F5

Triphasic lightning- and over voltage protection for system voltage

12F405a

1F5a

Triphasic lightning- and over voltage protection for system voltage

12F406a

Power supply vacuum contactor motor 1

12F406b

Power supply vacuum contactor motor 2

12F407

5Q7

Motor protection switch drive cable drum

12F409

0F9

Protection switch for voltage signal too KWh-counter

12F410

1F10

Threefold circuit breaker for lightning protection and over voltage protection 1

12F410a

1F10a

Threefold circuit breaker for lightning protection and over voltage protection 2

12F411

4F11

Circuit breaker socket cab

12F412

4F12

Circuit breaker socket in machinery room

12F412a

4F12a

Circuit breaker socket in machinery room

12F412b

4F12b

Circuit breaker socket in machinery room

13-28

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

Table of new and old component designations

New code

Previous code

Component

12F412c

4F12c

Circuit breaker socket in machinery room

12F414

4F10

Circuit breaker socket cab

12F416

4F16

Circuit breaker welding socket machinery room

12F417

F17

Circuit breaker radio, ladder, fire suppressin system (25A)

12F420-1

3F20-1

Circuit breaker motor standstill heater 0.47 KW

12F420-2

3F20-2

Circuit breaker motor standstill heater 0.47 KW

12F421

3F21

Circuit breaker heater and lighting for slip-ring-box

12F422

3F22

Circuit breaker terminal box heater

12F424

3F24

Circuit breaker for heater at HV switch cabinet

12F424a

3F24a

Circuit breaker for heater at HV switch cabinet

12F425

3F25

Circuit breaker for heater in LV switch cabinet

12F426

3F26

Circuit breaker for heater air condition motors

12F427

3F27

Circuit breaker heaters control

12F431

1F2

Isolation monitoring

12F432

7F1

Battery charging device emergency lighting secondary double circuit breaker

12F433

7F2

Circuit breaker emergency lighting HV switch cabinet

12F434

2Q2

Power protection switch for air condition compressor LV switch cabinet

12F435

1Q2

Motor protection relay

12F436

2Q1

Power protection switch for air condition compressor HV switch cabinet

12F437

2Q3a

Power protection switch for air condition compressor cab

12F438

0F6

Threefold circuit breaker between voltage converters

12F439

4F17

Circuit breaker welding socket ladder

12F440-1

Circuit breaker blower control cab heater

12F440-2

Circuit breaker blower control cab heater

12F441

1F4

12F442

Phase sequence relay Power supply cab heater

12F451

4Q1

(RCD) Residual current device for cab sockets, machinery room and options

12F452

4Q2

(RCD) Residual current device for welding sockets machinery room and ladder (Option)

12F453

5Q3

Motor protection switch crane on machinery room

12F454

5Q4

Motor protection switch air compressor

12F456

1F6

Circuit breaker phase sequence relay

12F462

1F12

Circuit breaker charging device supply

12F462a

1F10a

Circuit breaker charging device supply

12F462b

1F10b

Circuit breaker charging device supply

12F463

4Q2

Power protection switch for working lighting with sodium discharge lamp

12F464

4Q3

Power protection switch for working lighting with sodium discharge lamp

12F465

4Q4

Power protection switch for working lighting with sodium discharge lamp

12F466

4Q5

Power protection switch for working lighting with sodium discharge lamp

Version 2010/1

13-29

Table of new and old component designations

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

New code

Previous code

Component

12F467

4Q6

Power protection switch for working lighting with sodium discharge lamp

12F468

4Q7

Power protection switch for working lighting with sodium discharge lamp

12F469

4Q8

Power protection switch for working lighting with sodium discharge lamp

12F470

4Q9

Power protection switch for working lighting with sodium discharge lamp

12F476a

1F76a

Secondary double circuit breaker charging device 1

12F476b

1F76b

Secondary double circuit breaker charging device 2

12F476c

Secondary circuit breaker charging device 1

12F476d

Secondary circuit breaker charging device 2

12F476e

Secondary circuit breaker charging device emergency lighting

12F515

5F15

Circuit breaker heater at cable drum switch cabinet

12K010

1K10

SF6-monitoring

12K201

1K1

Independent heater on

12K209

1K9

Hydraulic oil level

12K306

CAN-Node 6 (ICND)

12K307

CAN-Node 7 (ICND)

12K308

CAN-Node 8 (ICNV)

12K403a

9K3

Fire warning system maschinery room, suppression system switch cabinets ANSUL

12K403b

9K3

Fire warning system maschinery room, suppression system switch cabinets ANSUL

12K408-1

1K8-1a

Auxiliary contactor vacuum contactor motor 1

12K408-2

1K8-2a

Auxiliary contactor vacuum contactor motor 2

12K408a-1

1K8a-1

Auxiliary relay 1 for vacuum contactor 1

12K408a-2

1K8a-2

Auxiliary relay 1 for vacuum contactor 2

12K408b-1

1K8b-1

Auxiliary relay 2 for vacuum contactor 1 redundant

12K408b-2

1K8b-2

Auxiliary relay 2 for vacuum contactor 2 redundant

12K452

K152

Safety relay for switch off heating cartridge under refrigerator for TT 60°

12K453

K152a

Safety relay for switch off heating cartridge under refrigerator for TT 100°

12K481a

K181

Safety relay for switch off heating cartridge under operator seat for TT 60°

12K481b

Safety relay for switch off heating cartridge under operator seat for TT 60°

12K481c

Safety relay for switch off heating cartridge under operator seat for TT 60°

12K481d

Safety relay for switch off heating cartridge under operator seat for TT 60°

12K482a

K182

Safety relay for switch off heating cartridge under operator seat for TT 100°

12K482b

Safety relay for switch off heating cartridge under operator seat for TT 100°

12K482c

Safety relay for switch off heating cartridge under operator seat for TT 100°

12K482d

Safety relay for switch off heating cartridge under operator seat for TT 100°

12K482-re

Reset electric cab heater

12Q201

Pre-heating, manual power switch for power supply

12Q209-1

Pre-heating, level motor oil

13-30

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

Table of new and old component designations

New code

Previous code

Component

12Q401

3K1

Relay heater HV switch cabinet

12Q402

3K2

Relay heater LV switch cabinet

12Q403

5K3

Motor contactor air compressor

12Q404

2K4

Powers switch for air condition compressor cab

12Q405

3K5

Contactor for heating cartridge b under operator seat (4 KW)

12Q406

3K6

Contactor for heating cartridge c under operator seat (6 KW)

12Q407

3K7

Contactor for heating cartridge a under operator seat (2 KW)

12Q411

2K1

Relay air condition HV switch cabinet

12Q411a

2K1a

Relay air condition LV switch cabinet

12Q421-1

1K21-1

Standstill heater motor 1

12Q421-2

1K21-2

Standstill heater motor 2

12Q444

1K44

Key switch on for electric shovels

12Q452e

Blower after-running for heater under operator seat

12Q481e

Blower after-running for heater under refrigerator

12Q490a

4K1a

Contactor working lighting sodium discharge lamp

12Q490b

4K1b

Contactor working lighting sodium discharge lamp

12Q490c

4K1c

Contactor working lighting sodium discharge lamp

12Q490d

4K1d

Contactor working lighting sodium discharge lamp

12R402

1R2

Battery charging device emergency lighting shunt

12R403

4L1

Power supply unit working lighting sodium discharge lamp

12R404

4L2

Power supply unit working lighting sodium discharge lamp

12R405

4L3

Power supply unit working lighting sodium discharge lamp

12R406

4L4

Power supply unit working lighting sodium discharge lamp

12R407

4L5

Power supply unit working lighting sodium discharge lamp

12R408

4L6

Power supply unit working lighting sodium discharge lamp

12R409

4L7

Power supply unit working lighting sodium discharge lamp

12R410

4L8

Power supply unit working lighting sodium discharge lamp

12R420

Resistor array

12R421

Diode array

12S561

1S161

Test key for isolation monitoring

12T082

R82

Measuring transducer for battery voltage (emergency voltage supply)

12T401

1A1

Measuring transducer temperature transformator 1

12T402

1A2

Measuring transducer temperature transformator 1

12T407

0T7

Voltage transformer for load limit regulation and X2-box-controller

12T408-1

0T8-1

Current- / Voltage converter for load limit regulation motor 1 5A AC / 10V AC

12T408-2

0T8-2

Current- / Voltage converter for load limit regulation motor 2 5A AC / 10V AC

12T410-1

0T10-1

Current transformer KWh-counter L1 motor 1

12T410-2

0T10-2

Current transformer KWh-counter L1 motor 2

Version 2010/1

13-31

Table of new and old component designations

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

New code

Previous code

Component

12T411-1

0T11-1

Current transformer KWh-counter L2 motor 1

12T411-2

0T11-2

Current transformer KWh-counter L2 motor 2

12T412-1

0T12-1

Current transformer KWh-counter L3 motor 1

12T412-2

0T12-2

Current transformer KWh-counter L3 motor 2

12T431

Signal rectifier for voltage, current 1 and current 2

12T431-1

Signal rectifier point of connection for current 1

12T431-2

Signal rectifier point of connection for current 2

12T431-3

Signal rectifier point of connection for voltage

12X001

1X1

Terminal strip on LV-switch panel

12X306

CAN-Bus-T-Splitter Node 6

12X307

CAN-Bus-T-Splitter Node 7

12X308

CAN-Bus-T-Splitter Node 8

13a000

Under-floor from cab support

13B090

B90

Ambient air temperature

13E003

2M3a

Air condition compressor cab

13E101

2R1

Heater air condition compressor HV switch cabinet

13E208

1R8

Pre-heating for battery control voltage

13E209

1R9

Pre-heating for battery control voltage

13G008

G8

Battery control voltage

13G009

G9

Battery control voltage

13M001

**M1V

Air condition compressor motor cab

13Q003

Battery main switch control voltage

13T002

1U2

Battery charging device 75A

13T003

1U3

Battery charging device 75A

13T004

1U4

Battery charging device 75A

14a000 15a000

Board for customer extensions in cab support

16a000

Switch box pre-heating hydraulic oil

16F260

Circuit breaker pre-heating hydraulic oil heating element 4E60 (3x10A)

16F261

Circuit breaker pre-heating hydraulic oil heating element 4E61 (3x10A)

16F262

Circuit breaker pre-heating hydraulic oil heating element 4E62 (3x10A)

16F263

Circuit breaker pre-heating hydraulic oil heating element 4E63 (3x10A)

16F264

Circuit breaker pre-heating hydraulic oil heating element 4E64 (3x10A)

16F265

Circuit breaker pre-heating hydraulic oil on

16K267

Switch off pre-heating hydraulic oil for low hydraulic oil level

16P267

Hydraulic oil pre-heating ready

16P268

Hydraulic oil pre-heating on

16Q260

Pre-heating hydraulic oil heating element 4E60 on

13-32

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

New code

Previous code

Table of new and old component designations

Component

16Q261

Pre-heating hydraulic oil heating element 4E61 on

16Q262

Pre-heating hydraulic oil heating element 4E62 on

16Q263

Pre-heating hydraulic oil heating element 4E63 on

16Q264

Pre-heating hydraulic oil heating element 4E64 on

16Q265

Pre-heating hydraulic oil on

16S267

Pre-heating hydraulic oil on

17a000

Air condition at cab support

17B001a

*B1Ta

Thermostat evaporator LV switch cabinet

17B001b

*B1Tb

Thermostat evaporator LV switch cabinet

17B001f

*B1F

Pressure switch condenser LV switch cabinet (Lower pressure limit)

17B011f

*B11F

Pressure switch condenser LV switch cabinet (Upper pressure limit)

17E001

2M2

Air condition compressor LV switch cabinet

17E101

*2R1

Heater air condition compressor LV switch cabinet

17F001

*A1P

Motor protection relay for compressor motor for LV switch cabinet

17G001

*M1G

Blower evaporator LV switch cabinet

17G021

*M21M

Blower liquefier LV switch cabinet

17G022

*M22M

Blower liquefier LV switch cabinet

17K004

2E4

Air condition LV switch cabinet

17M001

*M1V

Compressor motor LV switch cabinet

18a000

Board for air condition HV switch cabinet

18F001

*F1M

Circuit breaker blower evaporator HV switch cabinet

18F002

*F2M

Circuit breaker blower liquefier HV switch cabinet

18F003

*F3M

Circuit breaker blower liquefier HV switch cabinet

18F004

*F1A

Circuit breaker for blower HV switch cabinet

18K401

2E1-1

Board air condition HV switch cabinet at wall in cab support

18Q001

*K1M

Power relay blower evaporator HV switch cabinet

18Q002

*K2M

Power relay blower liquefier HV switch cabinet

18Q003

*K3M

Power relay blower liquefier HV switch cabinet

19a000

Control panel for air condition LV switch cabinet

19F001

*F1M

Circuit breaker blower evaporator LV switch cabinet

19F002

*F2M

Circuit breaker blower liquefier LV switch cabinet

19F003

*F3M

Circuit breaker blower liquefier LV switch cabinet

19F004

*F1A

Circuit breaker for blower LV switch cabinet

19K404

2E4-1

Board air condition LV switch cabinet at wall in cab support

19Q001

*K1M

Power relay blower evaporator LV switch cabinet

19Q002

*K2M

Power relay blower liquefier LV switch cabinet

19Q003

*K3M

Power relay blower liquefier LV switch cabinet

20a000

Version 2010/1

Cab

13-33

Table of new and old component designations

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

New code

Previous code

Component

20B001

B1N

Thermostat air condition

20B003

3B3

Temperature switch overheat control for heating element under operator seat 60°

20B003a

3B3a

Temperature switch overheat control for heating element under operator seat 100°

20B004

3B4

Temperature switch overheat control for heating element under refrigerator 60° for TT

20B004a

3B4a

Temperature switch overheat control for heating element under refrigerator 100° for TT

20E001

Heater under operator seat

20E001a

3H1a

Heating element a under operator seat (2 KW)

20E001b

3H1b

Heating element b under operator seat (2 KW)

20E001c

3H1c

Heating element c under operator seat (2 KW)

20E002

Heating device under refrigerator

20E002a

3H2a

Heating element a under refrigerator for TT (2 KW)

20E002b

3H2b

Heating element b under refrigerator for TT (2 KW)

20E002c

3H2c

Heating element c under refrigerator for TT (2 KW)

20E013

E13

Cigarette lighter

20E026

E26

Air condition cab

20E034

9R4

Igniter fire suppression system

20E035

9R5

Resistor fire suppression system

20E036

9R6

Resistor fire suppression system

20E044

E44

Refrigerator

20E044a

E44a

Cab indoor lighting

20E044b

E44b

Cab indoor lighting

20E044c

E44c

Cab indoor lighting

20E044d

E44d

Cab indoor lighting

20E045

H45

Lighting pantry

20E047a

H47a

Lighting ladder at cab

20E048

H48

Working light cab roof left

20E048a

E48a

Working light cab roof left

20E048b

H48b

Working light cab roof right

20E048c

H48c

Working light cab roof right

20E090

R90

Operator seat heater

20E160

H160

Reading lamp

20G009

M9

Blower air condition

20G010

M10

Excess pressure blower (new cab)

20G027

M27

Water pump washbasin

20G501

Y3a

Pump windscreen wash system

13-34

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

New code

Previous code

Table of new and old component designations

Component For activ independent heater mixing-valve-control switch over from air condition too pre-heating

20K048 20K056

E56

Control panel independent heater Hydronic M

20K057

E57

Timer independent heater Hydronic M

20K166

K166

Switch over blower control between air condition and pre-heating

20K167

K167

Pre-heating on (TT)

20K309

CAN-Node 9 (ICND)

20K310

CAN-Node 10 (ICNV)

20K351

9E1

Fire warning system ANSUL for electric machinery room or fire suppression system ANSUL for diesel machinery room

20K352

9E2

Fire suppression system ANSUL for LV- and HV switch cabinetHV switch cabinet

20K464

E64

Control unit camera cab support

20K467

E67

Control unit camera counterweight left

20K470

E70

Control unit camera counterweight right

20K473

Control unit camera cable delivery

20M004

M4

Windscreen wiper motor upper

20M004a

3M4a

Blower motor under operator seat for TT

20M004b

3M4b

Blower motor under refrigerator for TT

20M007

M7

Windscreen wiper motor lower

20M025

M25

Operator seat adjust

20P022

H22

Acoustic signal for messages

20P025

E25

Radio

20P026

M26

Mirror right

20P026a

M26a

Mirror left

20P047

E47

VHMS monitor MH801

20P056

H56

Acoustic shutdown pre-warning

20P072

H72

Speaker

20P073

H73

Speaker

20P093a

H93a

Rotaflare light left

20P093b

H93b

Rotaflare light right

20P145-1

H145-1

VHMS-diagnostic lamp red 1

20P145-2

H145-2

VHMS-diagnostic lamp red 2

20P146-1

H146-1

VHMS-diagnostic lamp yellow 1

20P146-2

H146-2

VHMS-diagnostic lamp yellow 2

20P465

E65

Monitor camera cab support

20P468

E68

Monitor camera counterweight left

20P471

E71

Monitor camera counterweight rechts

20P474

E74

Monitor camera cable delivery

Version 2010/1

13-35

Table of new and old component designations

New code

Previous code

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

Component

20Q048a

Mixing valve control by pre-heating

20Q048b

Mixing valve control by air condition

20Q067

K67

Excess pressure blower cab

20Q097

Y97

Mixing valve for heater

20Q166

K166

Blower on by independent heater (TT)

20Q166a

Use constant blower speed signal from independent heater (10 V)

20Q166b

Use analog blower speed signal from air condition

20Q166c

Use blower supply from independent heater

20Q166d

Use blower supply from air condition

20Q167a

Swtich on independent heater if pre-heating system is switched on

20Q167b

Switch on independent heater by timer signal of independent heater

20Q193

K193

Windscreen wiper lower stop

20Q194

K194

Windscreen wiper upper stop

20Q195

K195

Windscreen wiper lower slow

20Q196

K196

Windscreen wiper lower fast

20Q197

K197

Windscreen wiper upper slow

20Q198

K198

Windscreen wiper upper fast

20R009

Resistor array

20R019

Diode array

20R101

Terminal resistor CAN-Bus

20R353

9R3

Terminal resistor fire sensor 10 V constant voltage generation for heater-blower-motor speed-signal in case of activ independent heater

20R560 20S001

S1

Key switch

20S004-1

S4-1

Motor / Engine start button 1

20S004-2

S4-2

Motor / Engine start button 2

20S005-1

S5-1

Motor / Engine stop button 1

20S005-2

S5-2

Motor / Engine stop button 2

20S006

S6

Horn contact

20S010

S10

Windscreen wiper wash system switch

20S011

S11

Windscreen wiper mode switch

20S016

S16

Switch cab indoor light

20S018a

S18a

Switch lighting ladder

20S019

E19

Lever right

20S020

E20

Lever left

20S021a

E21a

Pedal move, left crawler

20S021b

E21b

Pedal move, right crawler

20S022

E22

Pedal slew brake

20S023

E23

Pedal left (BC), clam close

13-36

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

Table of new and old component designations

New code

Previous code

Component

20S024

E24

Pedal right (BC), clam open

20S026a

E26a

Control panel air condition

20S029

S29

Switch slew parking brake

20S030

S30

Engine speed switch

20S034

S34

EBL-bypass

20S036

S36/0S36

Emergency shutdown cab

20S038

S38

Switch cab light

20S040

S40

Switch excess pressure blower cab

20S042

S42

Truck counter 2

20S053

S53

Service enable motor control QUANTUM for both engines

20S055

S55

Rotaflare light on

20S082

S82

Truck counter 1

20S086

S86

Operator seat adjust

20S088

S88

Mirror adjustment

20S089

S89

Operator seat heater on

20S094

S94

Enable service arm

20S095

S95

Floating position switch

20S096

S96

Mirror heater on

20S098

S98

Floating position switch

20S099

S99

CLS 2, central lubrication system attachment, manual lubrication

20S105

S105

Lock lever at operator seat

20S120

4S20/S20

Switch superstructure lighting

20S120a

S20a

Switch superstructure lighting (option)

20S124

S24

CLS 1, central lubrication system 1, button for manual lubrication cycles

20S126

S26

SLS, slew lubrication system, manual lubrication

20S154

S154

Slew speed mode

20W323

WLAN-Interface cable between cab floor and dashboard (MTCPC)

20X015-1

QUANTUM 1, RS232-Interface in cab

20X015-2

QUANTUM 2, RS232-Interface in cab

20X027a

X27a

VHMS: Download or programming in cab

20X031

X31

Socket cab outside

20X032

X32

Socket cab inside

20X033

X33

Socket cab inside

20X034

X34

Socket cab inside

20X035

X35

Socket cab inside

20X052-1

Diagnose connector in cab, QUANTUM 1, J1587

20X052-2

Diagnose connector in cab, QUANTUM 2, J1587

20X093a

Version 2010/1

X11a

Connector rotaflare light left

13-37

Table of new and old component designations

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

New code

Previous code

Component

20X093b

X11b

Connector rotaflare light right

20X110

X13

Service connector in der cab, load limit regulation

20X309

CAN-Bus-T-Splitter Node 9

20X323

WLAN-Interface connector in cab (MTCPC)

20X335b

CAN-Bus-T-Splitter to dispatch monitor HUB in cab support

20X335d

CAN-Bus-T-Splitter to dispatch monitor display in cab

20X335e

CAN-Bus-T-Splitter to service connector MH801

20X336

Service connector MH801 in cab

20X399

CAN-Bus-T-Splitter Node 10

20X401

4X1

Socket cab

20X402

4X2

Socket cab

30a000

Drive

30B701

6B1

Temperature sensor in HV switch cabinet

30B703A

0B3-1

Temperature sensor transformer A

30B703B

0B3-2

Temperature sensor transformer B

30B704A

0B3-1

Temperature sensor transformer A

30B704B

0B3-2

Temperature sensor transformer B

30B705A

0B3-1

Temperature sensor transformer A

30B705B

0B3-2

Temperature sensor transformer B

30B706

2B6

Temperature switch air condition in HV switch cabinet

30B707

2B7

Dampness switch air condition in HV switch cabinet

30B753

9B3

Temperature sensor HV switch cabinet fire suppression system

30B754

9B4

Temperature sensor HV switch cabinet fire suppression system

30B755

9B5

Temperature sensor HV switch cabinet fire suppression system

30B810

0S10

Limit switch at HV switch cabinet

30B811

0S11

Limit switch at transformer room

30E721

3R21

Heater for HV switch cabinet

30E722

3R22

Heater for HV switch cabinet

30E722a

3R22a

Heater am HV switch cabinet

30E723

Heater transformer room

30E802

7H2

Lighting in HV switch cabinet

30T706A

0T6-1

Transformer system voltage A

30T706B

0T6-2

Transformer system voltage B

31a000

Diesel tank

31B063

B63

Level fuel tank

31G140

Y140

Fuel pump Hydronic M

31Q599-1

Y99-1

Fuel valve motor 1

31Q599-2

Y99-2

Fuel valve motor 2

13-38

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

New code

Previous code

32a000

Table of new and old component designations

Component HV - switch cabinet

32B802

6B2

Temperature switch at HV switch cabinet

32F701-1

0F1-1

Circuit breaker for motor 1

32F701-2

0F1-2

Circuit breaker for motor 2

32F702

0F2

HV primary circuit breaker for system transformer 1 and 2

32F703-1

0F3-1

Over voltage protection at motor 1 (discharger)

32F703-2

0F3-2

Over voltage protection at motor 2 (discharger)

32F707

0F7

Over voltage protection in high voltage (VDR-resistor)

32Q700

0Q1

Main switch

32Q701-1

0K1-1

Vacuum contactor motor 1

32Q701-2

0K1-2

Vacuum contactor motor 2

32T701-1

0T1-1

Current transformer phase 1 motor 1

32T701-2

0T1-2

Current transformer phase 1 motor 2

32T702-1

0T2-1

Current transformer phase 2 motor 1

32T702-2

0T2-2

Current transformer phase 2 motor 2

32T703-1

0T3-1

Current transformer phase 3 motor 1

32T703-2

0T3-2

Current transformer phase 3 motor 2

32T704

0T4

Voltage transformer between high voltage and low voltage

32T705

0T5

Voltage transformer between high voltage and low voltage

33a000 33X003

Low voltage in HV switch cabinet 0X3

34a000

Terminal strip in HV switch cabinet Air condition at HV switch cabinet

34B001

3B1

Temperature switch heater at HV switch cabinet

34B001a

*B1Ta

Thermostat evaporator HV switch cabinet

34B001b

*B1Tb

Thermostat evaporator HV switch cabinet

34B001f

*B1F

Pressure switch capacitor HV switch cabinet (lower pressure limit)

34B006

2B6

Temperature switch air condition at HV switch cabinet

34B007

2B7

Dampness switch air condition at HV switch cabinet

34B011f

*B11F

Pressure switch capacitor HV switch cabinet (upper pressure limit)

34E801

2M1

Air condition compressor HV switch cabinet

34E802

*2R1

Heater air condition compressor HV switch cabinet

34F001

*A1P

Motor protection relay compressor drive HV switch cabinet

34G001

*M1G

Blower evaporator HV switch cabinet

34G021

*M21M

Blower liquefier HV switch cabinet

34G022

*M22M

Blower liquefier HV switch cabinet

34K801

2E1

Air condition HV switch cabinet

34M801

*M1V

Compressor motor HV switch cabinet

40a000

Version 2010/1

hydraulic oil tank

13-39

Table of new and old component designations

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

New code

Previous code

Component

40B004

B4

Very low hydraulic oil level

40B024

B24

Hydraulic oil tank air filter monitoring

40B031

S31

Shut-off valve oil tank open

40B050

B50

Oil level too low (Refill indicator)

40B068

B68

Level return oil chamber (Nur PC8000)

40B105

B105

Level hydraulic oil

40B111

B111

Temperature sensor transfer pump

40B163

B163

Pressure return oil chamber

40B164

B164

Pressure leak oil chamber

40B165

B165

Pressure oil cooler

40B166

B166

Pressure preload valve return oil

40B260

1B60

Pre-heating temperature switch heating element 4E60

40B261

1B61

Pre-heating temperature switch heating element 4E61

40B262

1B62

Pre-heating temperature switch heating element 4E62

40B263

1B63

Pre-heating temperature switch heating element 4E63

40B264

1B64

Pre-heating temperature switch heating element 4E64

40B265

1B65

Pre-heating temperature switch heating element 4E65

40B267

1B67

Pre-heating temperature switch hydraulic oiltank

40E260

Pre-heating hydraulic oil heating element

40E261

Pre-heating hydraulic oil heating element

40E262

Pre-heating hydraulic oil heating element

40E263

Pre-heating hydraulic oil heating element

40E264

Pre-heating hydraulic oil heating element

40E265

Pre-heating hydraulic oil heating element

40G018

M8

Transfer pump hydraulic oil

40K311

CAN-Node 11 (ICND)

40K312

CAN-Node 12 (ICND)

40K313

CAN-Node 13 (ICNV)

40K601

Y101

Reducing preload pressure oil cooler

40Q062

K62 / 5K62

Electronic relay 35 A for transfer pump 30 A

40R008

Pull-up/-down-resistors (resistor array)

40R014

Diode array

40R101

Terminal resistor CAN-Bus

40S035

S35

Transfer pump on

40X310

CAN-Bus-Connector

40X311

CAN-Bus-T-Splitter Node 11

40X312

CAN-Bus-T-Splitter Node 12

40X313

CAN-Bus-T-Splitter Node 13

13-40

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

New code

Previous code

Component

40X314

CAN-Bus-Connector

41a000

Oil cooler

41E050

H50

Light oil cooler

41E050a

H50a

Light oil cooler

41E050b

H50b

Light oil cooler

41E050c

H50c

Light oil cooler

41E050d

H50d

Light oil cooler

50a000 50B353

Table of new and old component designations

Machinery room 9S3

50Q352

Fire sensor Set free extinguishing medium (igniter)

50R352

9R2

Terminal resistor fire sensor

50S058

S58/1S58

Service safty switch

50X020

X20

External start socket

50X201

Main supply connector for pre-heating

51a000

Motor room

51B110

B110

Intake air temperature

51E041

H43

Lighting pump room

51E041a

H43a

Lighting pump room

51E041e

H43c

Lighting motor room

51E041f

H43d

Lighting motor room

51E219-1

Pre-heating coolant

51E219-2

Pre-heating coolant

51K001a-1

K1a-1

Engine start relay motor 1

51K001a-2

K1a-2

Engine start relay motor 2

51K001b-1

K1b-1

Engine start relay motor 1 redundant

51K001b-2

K1b-2

Engine start relay motor 2 redundant

51K003b-1

K3b-1

Engine running 1

51K003b-2

K3b-2

Engine running 2

51K003c-1

K3c-1

Engine running 1

51K003c-2

K3c-2

Engine running 2

51K045-1

K45-1

Engine speed control 1

51K045-2

K45-2

Engine speed control 2

51K164-1

K164-1

Relay for RESERVE - system motor oil tank not empty for motor 1

51K164-2

K164-2

Relay for RESERVE - system motor oil tank not empty for motor 2

51K317

CAN-Node 17 (ICND)

51K318

CAN-Node 18 (ICNV)

51K319

CAN-Node 19 (ICNV)

51R008

Pull-up/-down-resistors (resistor array)

Version 2010/1

13-41

Table of new and old component designations

New code

Previous code

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

Component

51R009

Pull-up/-down-resistors (resistor array)

51R013

Diode array (3 A)

51R017

Diode array (3 A)

51S015a

S15a

Lighting pump room / motor room

51S033d

S33d

Emergency stop button engine room (only PC5500 and PC8000)

51T017

E7

Measuring transducer charging-/discharging current

51T018-1

E8-1

Measuring transducer engine speed engine 1

51T018-2

E8-2

Measuring transducer engine speed engine 2

51X008

X8

Socket engine room

51X316

CAN-Bus-Connector

51X317

CAN-Bus-T-Splitter Node 17

51X318

CAN-Bus-T-Splitter Node 18

51X319

CAN-Bus-T-Splitter Node 19

51X320

CAN-Bus-Connector

51X403

4X3

Socket machinery room

51X404

4X4

Socket machinery room

51X405

4X5

Socket machinery room optional

51X405a

4X5a

Socket machinery room optional

51X406

4X6

Welding socket machinery room

52a000

Motor

52B002-1

0B2-1

Motor winding temperature sensor motor 1

52B002-2

0B2-2

Motor winding temperature sensor motor 2

52B002a-1

0B2a-1

Motor winding temperature sensor motor 1

52B002a-2

0B2a-2

Motor winding temperature sensor motor 2

52B002b-1

0B2b-1

Motor winding temperature sensor motor 1

52B002b-2

0B2b-2

Motor winding temperature sensor motor 2

52B006-1

0B6-1

Motor bearing temperature sensor motor 1 power take-off side

52B006-2

0B6-2

Motor bearing temperature sensor motor 2 power take-off side

52B007-1

0B7-1

Motor bearing temperature sensor motor 1 not power take-off side

52B007-2

0B7-2

Motor bearing temperature sensor motor 2 not power take-off side

52B018-1

B18-1

Monitoring engine intake air filter engine 1

52B018-2

B18-2

Monitoring engine intake air filter engine 2

52B019-1

B19-1

Monitoring engine intake air filter engine 1

52B019-2

B19-2

Monitoring engine intake air filter engine 2

52B064-1

3B64-1

Speed sensor, magnetic pickup 1

52B064-2

3B64-2

Speed sensor, magnetic pickup 2

52B093-1

3B93-1

Engine pre lub pressure reached

52B093-2

3B93-2

Engine pre lub pressure reached

13-42

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

Table of new and old component designations

New code

Previous code

Component

52B101-1

0S1-1

Capacitor pressure switch at motor 1

52B101-2

0S1-2

Capacitor pressure switch at motor 2

52B102-1

0S2-1

Capacitor pressure switch at motor 1

52B102-2

0S2-2

Capacitor pressure switch at motor 2

52B201-1

1B1

Pre-heating temperature switch motor oil

52B201-2

1B1

Pre-heating temperature switch motor oil

52C001-1

0C1-1

Capacitor pressure switch at motor 1

52C001-2

0C1-2

Capacitor pressure switch at motor 2

52E017-1

3R17-1

Motor standstill heater 0.,47 KW

52E017-2

3R17-2

Motor standstill heater 0.47 KW

52E201-1

1R1

Pre-heating motor oil 1

52E201-2

1R1

Pre-heating motor oil 2

52F0039-1

Circuit breaker pre lub pump 1 (300 A)

52F0039-2

Circuit breaker pre lub pump 2 (300 A)

52G005-1

3G5-1

Generator

52G005-2

3G5-2

Generator

52G006-1

3M6-1

Pre lub pump

52G006-2

3M6-2

Pre lub pump

52G045-1

3E45-1

Motor oil refilling system

52G045-2

3E45-2

Motor oil refilling system

52K014-1

3E14-1

Engine controller QUANTUM 1

52K014-2

3E14-2

Engine controller QUANTUM 2

52K030-1

3D30-1

Timer engine pre lub 1

52K030-2

3D30-2

Timer engine pre lub 2

52M001-1

3M1-1

Starter 1 (engine 1)

52M001-2

3M1-2

Starter 1 (engine 2)

52M002-1

3M2-1

Starter 2 (engine 1)

52M002-2

3M2-2

Starter 2 (engine 2)

52M101-1

0M1-1

E-Motor 1

52M101-2

0M1-2

E-Motor 2

52Q002a-1

3K2a-1

Starter 1 for engine 1 on

52Q002a-2

3K2a-2

Starter 1 for engine 2 on

52Q002b-1

3K2b-1

Starter 2 for engine 1 on redundant

52Q002b-2

3K2b-2

Starter 2 for engine 2 on redundant

52Q004-1

Y4

Magnetic clutch air condition

52Q030a-1

3K30a-1

Pre lub pump 1 on

52Q030a-2

3K30a-2

Pre lub pump 2 on

52Q502a-1

Y2-1

Cold start engine 1 valve a

Version 2010/1

13-43

Table of new and old component designations

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

New code

Previous code

Component

52Q502a-2

Y2-2

Cold start engine 2 valve a

52Q502b-1

Y2a-1

Cold start engine 1 valve b

52Q502b-2

Y2a-2

Cold start engine 2 valve b

54a000

Counterweight

54B466

E66

Camera counterweight left

54B469

E69

Camera counterweight right

54E144

H144

Light counterweight

54E144a

H144a

Light counterweight

54E144b

H144b

Light counterweight to cable drum

54S007

S7

Operator warning system, pull key

54S008

S8

Operator warning system, pull key

54S051

S54

Ground shutdown, pull switch

54S052

S54a

Ground shutdown, pull switch

54X008b

X8c

Socket counterweight

55a000

Service arm

55B023

S23

Service arm near upper position

55P052

H52

Hydraulic tank full

55P076

H76

CLS 1 Central lubrication system full

55P078

H78

SLS Slew lubrication system full

55P080

H80

CLS 2 Central lubrication system attachment full

55P139

H139

Signal lamp fuel tank full

55P142-1

H142-1

Signal lamp motor oil tank 1 full

55P142-2

H142-1

Signal lamp motor oil tank 2 full

55S043

S43

Lamp test service arm

55S087

S87

Pull switch service arm

56a000

Pump room

56E041b

H41

Lighting pump room

56E041c

H41a

Lighting pump room

56E041d

H41b

Lighting pump room

56K053-1

E53-1

Blower speed PWM-Converter for coolant 1

56K053-2

E53-2

Blower speed PWM-Converter for coolant 2

56K250a

K250a

Slew gear parking brake

56K250b

K250b

Slew gear parking brake

56K251a

K251a

Travel parking brake

56K251b

k251b

Travel parking brake

56K252a

K252a

Hydraulic slew gear parking brake

56K252b

k252b

Hydraulic slew gear parking brake

56K253a

13-44

Ladder up

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

New code

Previous code

Table of new and old component designations

Component

56K253b

Ladder up redundant

56K254a

Ladder down

56K254b

Ladder down redundant

56K255a

Service arm up

56K255b

Service arm up redundant

56K256a

Service arm down

56K256b

Service arm down redundant

56K314

CAN-Node 14 (ICND)

56K315

CAN-Node 15 (ICNV)

56K316

CAN-Node 16 (ICNV)

56R008

Resistor array

56R013

Diode array

56R014

Diode array

56S015

S15

Lighting pump room / motor room

56X008a

X8a

Socket pump room

56X313

CAN-Bus-Connector at switch cabinet pump room

56X314

CAN-Bus-T-Splitter Node 14

56X315

CAN-Bus-T-Splitter Node 15

56X316

CAN-Bus-T-Splitter Node 16

56X317

CAN-Bus-Connector at switch cabinet pump room

57a000

Control plate, pump

57B016

B16

Pressure brake slew gear

57B017-1

B17-1

Pressure gear lubrication

57B017-2

B17-2

Pressure gear lubrication

57B021-1

B21-1

Filter fan drive cooler

57B021-2

B21-2

Filter fan drive cooler

57B022-1

B22-1

Filter pump regulation

57B022-2

B22-2

Filter pump regulation

57B027-1

B27-1

Filter gear oil

57B027-2

B27-2

Filter gear oil

57B028-1

B28-1

Filter fan drive oil cooler

57B028-2

B28-2

Filter fan drive oil cooler

57B048

B48

Pressure travel parking brake

57B049-1

B49-1

Gear oil temperature

57B049-2

B49-2

Gear oil temperature

57B085-1

B85-1

X1-Pressure, motor / engine 1

57B085-2

B85-2

X1-Pressure, motor / engine 2

57B086

B86

X2-Pressure

Version 2010/1

13-45

Table of new and old component designations

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

New code

Previous code

Component

57B097-1

B97-1

Pump support pressure X4-1

57B097-2

B97-2

Pump support pressure X4-2

57B175-1

B175-1

Total loss gear oil

57B175-2

B175-2

Total loss gear oil

57B202-1

1B2

Pre-heating temperature switch PTO 1

57B202-2

1B2

Pre-heating temperature switch PTO 1

57E202-1

1R2, 3R23-1

Pre-heating heater PTO 1

57E202-2

1R2, 3R23-2

Pre-heating heater PTO 2

57E203-1

1R3, 3R24-1

Pre-heating heater PTO 1

57E203-2

1R3, 3R24-2

Pre-heating heater PTO 2

57K506a-1

Y6a-1

Fan drive oil cooler minimum

57K506a-2

Y6a-2

Fan drive oil cooler minimum

57K506b-1

Y6b-1

Fan drive oil cooler medium

57K506b-2

Y6b-2

Fan drive oil cooler medium

57K517

Y17

Pump control, Qmin-off

57K517a

Y17a

Pump control, Half-Qmax-off

57K548

Y48

Slew motor pivoting angle (only PC5500)

57K553-1

Y53-1

Gear oil cooler preload pressure

57K553-2

Y53-2

Gear oil cooler preload pressure

57K561-1

Y61-1

Load limit regulation valve

57K561-2

Y61-2

Load limit regulation valve

57K602-1

Y102-1

Switch off pump support pressure

57K602-2

Y102-2

Switch off pump support pressure

57K620

Y120

Hydraulic brake

57K626

Y126

Pump control, 57K517 at pump 1

57K630

Y130

Pump control, fixed pump 1 for slew gear

57K631

Y131

Pump control, fixed pump 3 for slew gear

57K636-1

Y136-1

Proportional valve fan coolant

57K636-2

Y136-2

Proportional valve fan coolant

57K646

Y146

Loss reduction pump 2+4

57K647

Y147

Loss reduction pump 3

57K648

Y148

Loss reduction pump 1

57K658f

Control pump 1 F

57K658r

Control pump 1 R

57K659f

Control pump 2 F

57K659r

Control pump 2 R

57K660f

Control pump 3 F

57K660r

Control pump 3 R

13-46

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

New code

Previous code

Table of new and old component designations

Component

57K661f

Control pump 4 F

57K661r

Control pump 4 R

57K662f

Control pump 5 F

57K662r

Control pump 5 R

57K663f

Control pump 6 F

57K663r

Control pump 6 R

57K664f

Control pump 7 F

57K664r

Control pump 7 R

57K665f

Control pump 8 F

57K665r

Control pump 8 R

57Q505

Y5

Slew gear parking brake

57Q516

Y16

Travel parking brake

57Q623a

Y123a

Valve ladder up

57Q623b

Y123b

Valve ladder down

57Q624a

Y124a

Valve service arm up

57Q624b

Y124b

Valve service arm down

57Q624c

Y124c

Valve service arm enable

57Q625

Y125

Valve ladder fast

57Q627

Y127

Proportional valve brake

57S033c

S33c

Emergency stop button control- and filter panel

59a000

Suction oil tank

59B015

B15

Temperature hydraulic oil

59B162

B162

Pressure suction oil tank

59B203

1B3

Pre-heating temperature switch suction oil tank

59E210

1R10

Pre-heating suction oil tank

59E211

1R11

Pre-heating suction oil tank

60a000

Superstructure

60B059

S59

Angle limit beetween supertructure and undercarriage

60B098

B98

Inductive proximity at sprocket

60B099

B99

Inductive proximity at sprocket

60B472

E72

Camera counterweight cable delivery

60E030

3R30

Pipe heater for fire suppression system

60E049

H49

Outside lighting superstructure atrium center

60E049a

H49a

Outside lighting superstructure atrium center

60E049b

H49b

Outside lighting superstructure atrium center

60E049c

H49c

Outside lighting superstructure atrium center

60E144c

H144c

Light superstructure left

60E144d

H144d

Light superstructure right

Version 2010/1

13-47

Table of new and old component designations

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

New code

Previous code

Component

60E148

4H48

Working lighting sodium discharge lamp 400W

60E149

4H49

Working lighting sodium discharge lamp 400W

60E150

4H50

Working lighting sodium discharge lamp 400W

60E150a

4H50a

Working lighting sodium discharge lamp 400W

60E244

4H144

Working lighting sodium discharge lamp 400W

60E244a

4H144a

Working lighting sodium discharge lamp 400W

60E244b

4H144b

Working lighting sodium discharge lamp 400W

60E244c

4H144c

Working lighting sodium discharge lamp 400W

60P140

H140

Travel alarm

60P351

9H1

Horn for fire ralarm

60S152

S152

Switch lighting superstructure

61a000

Control blocks, Remote control panels

61B087a

B87a

Input pressure control block 1

61B087b

B87b

Input pressure control block 2

61B087c

B87c

Input pressure control block 3

61B087d

B87d

Input pressure control block 4

61B158a

pressure pump 1

61B158b

pressure pump 2

61B158c

pressure pump 3

61B158d

pressure pump 4

61B158e

pressure pump 5

61B158f

pressure pump 6

61B158g

pressure pump 7

61B158h

pressure pump 8

61K071

Y71

Speed bucket BH

61K520

Y20

Directional spool valve boom up (PC4000-6)

61K521

Y21

Directional spool valve boom down (PC4000-6)

61K522

Y22

Directional spool valve bucket fill BC (PC4000-6)

61K523

Y23

Directional spool valve bucket dump BC (PC4000-6)

61K524

Y24

Directional spool valve slew gear left (PC4000-6)

61K525

Y25

Directional spool valve slew gear right (PC4000-6)

61K526

Y26

Directional spool valve slew gear left (PC4000-6)

61K527

Y27

Directional spool valve slew gear right (PC4000-6)

61K528

Y28

Proportional valve crawler right forward (PC4000-6)

61K529

Y29

Proportional valve crawler right backward (PC4000-6)

61K530

Y30

Directional spool valve stick in BH (PC4000-6)

61K531

Y31

Directional spool valve stick out BH (PC4000-6)

61K532

Y32

Directional spool valve boom up (PC4000-6)

13-48

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

Table of new and old component designations

New code

Previous code

Component

61K533

Y33

Directional spool valve boom down (PC4000-6)

61K534

Y34

Directional spool valve crawler left forward (PC4000-6)

61K535

Y35

Directional spool valve crawler left backward (PC4000-6)

61K536

Y36

Directional spool valve bucket fill BH (PC4000-6)

61K537

Y37

Directional spool valve bucket dump BH (PC4000-6)

61K538

Y38

Directional spool valve stick in BH (PC4000-6)

61K539

Y39

Directional spool valve stick out BH (PC4000-6)

61K540

Y40

Directional spool valve boom up (PC4000-6)

61K541

Y41

Directional spool valve boom down (PC4000-6)

61K542

Y42

Stick in (PC4000-6)

61K543

Y43

Stick out (PC4000-6)

61K544

Y44

Bucket fill (PC4000-6)

61K545

Y45

Bucket dump (PC4000-6)

61K546

Y46

Boom up (PC4000-6)

61K547

Y47

Boom down (PC4000-6)

61K563

Y63

Speed boom (PC4000-6)

61K564

Y64

Speed bucket BC (PC4000-6)

61K565

Y65

Speed slew gear (PC4000-6)

61K566

Y66

Proportional valve speed slew gear (PC4000-6)

61K567

Y67

Proportional valve speed crawler right (PC4000-6)

61K568

Y68

Proportional valve speed stick BH (PC4000-6)

61K569

Y69

Proportional valve speed boom (PC4000-6)

61K570

Y70

Proportional valve speed crawler left (PC4000-6)

61K572

Y72

Proportional valve speed stick BH (PC4000-6)

61K573

Y73

Proportional valve speed boom (PC4000-6)

61K574

Y74

Proportional valve speed stick (PC4000-6)

61K575

Y75

Proportional valve speed bucket (PC4000-6)

61K576

Y76

Proportional valve speed boom (PC4000-6)

61K620

Y20

Proportional valve speed crawler left (PC5500-6)

61K620a

Y20a

Directional spool valve crawler left forward (PC5500-6)

61K620b

Y20b

Directional spool valve crawler left backward (PC5500-6)

61K621

Y21

Proportional valve speed stick (PC5500-6)

61K621a

Y21a

Directional spool valve stick out (PC5500-6)

61K621b

Y21b

Directional spool valve stick in (PC5500-6)

61K622

Y22

Proportional valve speed bucket (PC5500-6)

61K622a

Y22a

Directional spool valve bucket fill (PC5500-6)

61K622b

Y22b

Directional spool valve bucket dump (PC5500-6)

61K623

Y23

Proportional valve speed boom (PC5500-6)

Version 2010/1

13-49

Table of new and old component designations

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

New code

Previous code

Component

61K623a

Y23a

Directional spool valve boom up (PC5500-6)

61K623b

Y23b

Directional spool valve boom down (PC5500-6)

61K624

Y24

Proportional valve speed clam BC (PC5500-6)

61K624

Y24

Proportional valve speed bucket BH (PC5500-6)

61K624a

Y24a

Directional spool valve bucket fill BH (PC5500-6)

61K624a

Y24a

Directional spool valve clam close BC (PC5500-6)

61K624b

Y24b

Directional spool valve bucket dump BH (PC5500-6)

61K624b

Y24b

Directional spool valve clam open BC (PC5500-6)

61K625

Y25

Proportional valve speed stick BH (PC5500-6)

61K625

Y25

Proportional valve speed bucket BC (PC5500-6)

61K625a

Y25a

Directional spool valve bucket fill BC (PC5500-6)

61K625a

Y25a

Directional spool valve boom up BH (PC5500-6)

61K625b

Y25b

Directional spool valve bucket dump BC (PC5500-6)

61K625b

Y25b

Directional spool valve boom down BH (PC5500-6)

61K626

Y26

Proportional valve speed boom BC (PC5500-6)

61K626a

Y26a

Directional spool valve boom up BC (PC5500-6)

61K626b

Y26b

Directional spool valve boom down BC (PC5500-6)

61K627

Y27

Directional spool valve speed stick (PC5500-6)

61K627a

Y27a

Directional spool valve stick in (PC5500-6)

61K627b

Y27b

Directional spool valve stick out (PC5500-6)

61K628

Y28

Proportional valve speed crawler right (PC5500-6)

61K628a

Y28a

Directional spool valve crawler right backward (PC5500-6)

61K628b

Y28b

Directional spool valve crawler right forward (PC5500-6)

61K629

Y29

Proportional valve speed boom (PC5500-6)

61K629a

Y29a

Directional spool valve boom up (PC5500-6)

61K629b

Y29b

Directional spool valve boom down (PC5500-6)

61K630

Y30

Proportional valve speed bucket (PC5500-6)

61K630a

Y30a

Directional spool valve bucket fill (PC5500-6)

61K630b

Y30b

Directional spool valve bucket dump (PC5500-6)

61K631

Y31

Proportional valve speed stick (PC5500-6)

61K631a

Y31a

Directional spool valve stick in BH (PC5500-6)

61K631a

Y31a

Directional spool valve stick out BC (PC5500-6)

61K631b

Y31b

Directional spool valve stick out BH (PC5500-6)

61K631b

Y31b

Directional spool valve stick in BC (PC5500-6)

61K632

Y32

Proportional valve speed slew gear (PC5500-6)

61K632a

Y32a

Directional spool valve slew gear right (PC5500-6)

61K632b

Y32b

Directional spool valve slew gear left (PC5500-6)

61Q632a

Y132a

Floating position stick (PC4000)

13-50

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

New code

Previous code

Component

61Q633a

Y133a

Floating position stick (PC4000)

61Q635a

Y135a

Floating position boom (PC4000)

61S033b

S33b

Emergency stop button valve block

62a000

Table of new and old component designations

Lubrication systems

80B043

B43

CLS 1 Central lubrcation system 1 end line pressure switch for lubrication line (for CLS 1 if CLS 2 installed !)

62B046

B46

SLS Slew lubrication system end line pressure switch for lubrication line

62B108-H

B108

CLS 1 Central lubrcation system container level monitoring

62B108-M

B108

CLS 1 Central lubrcation system container level monitoring

62B108b-H

B108b

CLS 1 Central lubrcation system changing barrel pre-warning

62B108b-M

B108b

CLS 1 Central lubrcation system changing barrel pre-warning

62B108c-H

B108c

CLS 1 Central lubrcation system changing barrel empty

62B108c-M

B108c

CLS 1 Central lubrcation system changing barrel empty

62B109-H

B109

SLS Slew lubrcation system container level monitoring

62B109-K

B109

SLS Slew lubrcation system container level monitoring

62B109-M

B109

SLS Slew lubrcation system container level monitoring

62B109b-H

B109b

SLS Slew lubrcation system changing barrel pre-warning

62B109b-K

B109b

SLS Slew lubrcation system changing barrel pre-warning

62B109b-M

B109b

SLS Slew lubrcation system changing barrel pre-warning

62B109c-H

B109c

SLS Slew lubrcation system changing barrel empty

62B109c-K

B109c

SLS Slew lubrcation system changing barrel empty

62B109c-M

B109c

SLS Slew lubrcation system changing barrel empty

62B112b

B112b

CLS 2 lubrication system attachment changing barrel pre-warning

62B112c

B112c

CLS 2 lubrication system attachment changing barrel empty

62B173

B173

CLS 2 lubrication system attachment container level monitoring

62B208

B108

CLS 1 Central lubrcation system container level monitoring binary

62B209

B109

SLS Slew lubrcation system container level monitoring binary

62B273

B173

CLS 2 lubrication system attachment container level monitoring binary

62Q507-H

Y7

CLS 1 Central lubrcation system lubrication pump on

62Q507-M

Y7

CLS 1 Central lubrcation system lubrication pump on

62Q507a-H

Y7a

CLS 1 Central lubrcation system release lubrication line

62Q507a-M

Y7a

CLS 1 Central lubrcation system release lubrication line

62Q509-H

Y9

SLS Slew lubrcation system lubrication pump on

62Q509-K

Y9

SLS Slew lubrcation system lubrication pump on

62Q509-M

Y9

SLS Slew lubrcation system lubrication pump on

62Q509a-H

Y9a

SLS Slew lubrcation system release lubrication line

62Q509a-K

Y9a

SLS Slew lubrcation system release lubrication line

62Q509a-M

Y9a

SLS Slew lubrcation system release lubrication line

62Q642-M

Y142

CLS 2 lubrication system attachment lubrication pump on

Version 2010/1

13-51

Table of new and old component designations

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

New code

Previous code

Component

62Q642a-M

Y142a

CLS 2 lubrication system attachment release lubrication line

63a000

Reserve motor oil tank

63B103-1

B103-1

Engine oil tank empty 1

63B103-2

B103-2

Engine oil tank empty 2

63B106-1

B106-1

Level motor oil tank

63B106-2

B106-2

Level motor oil tank

63B204-1

1B4

Pre-heating temperature switch reserve oil tank

63B204-2

1B4

Pre-heating temperature switch reserve oil tank

63E212-1

1R12

Pre-heating reserve oil tank

63E212-2

1R12

Pre-heating reserve oil tank

65a000

Coolant pre-heater

65B210-1

Temperature switch coolant

65B210-2

Temperature switch coolant

65F210

Circuit breaker coolant pre-heating transformer secondary side (10A)

65F211

Circuit breaker coolant pre-heating transformer secondary side (10A)

65F212

Circuit breaker coolant pre-heating pump motor (3A)

65F213

Circuit breaker coolant pre-heating control transformer primary side (3A)

65G211-1

Pump coolant pre-heating

65G211-2

Pump coolant pre-heating

65K202-1

Pre-heating control coolant

65K202-2

Pre-heating control coolant

65Q210-1

Coolant pre-heating heater on

65Q210-2

Coolant pre-heating heater on

65Q211-1

Pump coolant pre-heating on

65Q211-2

Pump coolant pre-heating on

65T202-1

Control voltage transformer coolant pre-heating

65T202-2

Control voltage transformer coolant pre-heating

67a000

Crane

67M012

5M12

68a000

Motor crane machinery room (option) Compressor

68M013

5M13

Motor air compressor (option)

68S010a

5S10a/5S16

Switch air compressor

70a000

Ladder

70B091

S91

Ladder down

70B122

S22

Ladder up

70E047

H47

Lighting ladder

70E047a

H47a

Lighting ladder

70S018

S18

Switch lighting ladder

13-52

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

New code

Previous code

Component

70S033a

S33a/0S33a

Emergency stop button ladder

70S084

S84

Ladder turn switch up / down

70S084a

S84a

Pull switch ladder down

70X406a

4X6a

Welding socket ladder

71a000

Table of new and old component designations

Battery box

71B050

1B50

Temperature transmitter batteries

71B051

1B51

Temperature transmitter batteries

71B052

1B52

Temperature transmitter Batteries emergency lighting

71B250

1B50

Battery temperature transmitter

71E204

Pre-heating start battery

71E205

Pre-heating start battery

71E206

Pre-heating start battery

71E207

Pre-heating start battery

71G001

G1

Battery 1

71G002

G2

Battery 2

71G003

7G1

Battery 3 (E: Emergency lighting)

71G004

7G2

Battery 4 (E: Emergency lighting)

71Q002

S2

Battery main switch control battery

71Q003

S3

Battery main switch for starter 2 and functional earth

71Q004

S2

Battery main switch for starter 1

71Q007

7S1

Battery main switch battery emergency light

71T003

R3

Shunt for measurement of charging- and discharging current

80a000

Attachment

80B020

B20

Pendulum bucket

80B043

B43

CLS 1 Central lubrcation system 1 end line pressure switch lubrication line for CLS 1 without CLS 2

80B174

B174

CLS 2 Central lubrcation system 2 (attachment lubrication system) end line pressure switch lubrication line

90a000

Undercarriage

91a000

Cable drum

91B006a

8S6a

Tight cable

91B006b

8S6b

Slacking cable

91B904a

8S4a

Full cable drum

91B904b

8S4b

Empty cable drum

91B908a

8S8a

Diagonally pulling

91B908b

8S8b

Diagonally pulling

91B909a

8S9a

Diagonally pulling

91B909b

8S9b

Diagonally pulling

91B911

8S11

Antenna style switch

Version 2010/1

13-53

Table of new and old component designations

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

New code

Previous code

Component

91B912

8S12

Ground collision detection

91B913

8S13

Ground collision detection

91B914

8S14

Antenna style switch

91B915

8S15

Antenna style switch

91B917

0S17

Limit switch at cable drum (body)

91B918

0S18

Limit switch at cable drum (body)

91B919

8S10

Antenna style switch

91B979

8F79

Temperature monitoring cable drum motor

91B980

8B79

Transducer for Pt100 at cable drum motor

91E929

3R20

Heating cable drum

91E927

Heater in switch cabinet cable drum

91E929

3R27

Heater in cable drum switch cabinet

91F911

8F13

Circuit breaker rotor circuit

91K320

CAN-Node 20 (ICND)

91K321

CAN-Node 21 (ICNV)

91M906

8M6

Drive motor cable drum

91Q907

8K8

Contactor for cable drum wound up

91Q908

8K11

Contactor for cable drum unwound

91Q911

8K7

Contactor for cable drum high torque

91R901

8R1

3 phasic series resistor for torque reduction

91R973

CAN-BUS-Terminal-Resistor at cable drum

91R974

Resistor array

91R975

Diode array (3A)

91R976

Resistor array

91S901

8S1

Mode selection switch cable drum

91S933e

S33e/0S33e

Emergency stop button cable drum

91U007

Terminal box for controller at cable drum

91U008

X8

Switch cabinet at cable drum

91W901

0E1

Slip-ring-box in cable drum

91X007 91X008

Terminal strip in switch cabinet at cable drum (controller switch cabinet) X8

Terminal strip in switch cabinet at cable drum

91X191

Connector for internal wiring at cable drum

91X194

Connector from controller 91U007 terminal box to HV terminal box

91X291

Connector for internal wiring at cable drum

91X319

CAN-Bus-Connector

91X320

CAN-Bus-T-Splitter Node 20

91X321

CAN-Bus-T-Splitter Node 21

91X391

Connector for internal wiring at cable drum (from terminal box controller to terminal box contactors, low voltage)

13-54

Version 2010/1

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

New code

Previous code

Table of new and old component designations

Component

92a000

Rotary transmission (hydr.)

93a000

Slip-ring-box (elec.)

93B004

0S4

Limit switch at slip-ring-box

93B004a

0S4a

Limit switch at slip-ring-box

93E918

3R18

Heater slip-ring-box HV room

93E918b

3R18b

Heater slip-ring-box LV room

93E993

3H3

Lighting slip-ring-box

93T909

0T9

Transformer slip-ring-box for lighting

93W901

0E2

Slip-ring-box in cable drum

93W902

0E2

Slip-ring-box between undercarriage and superstructure

93X011

3X2

Terminal strip in Slip-ring-box to cab support

94a000

Terminal box cable drum

94B919

0S19

Limit switch flap-terminal box

94E919

3R19

Heater terminal box cable drum

94F901

0F01

Over voltage protection phase 1

94F902

0F02

Over voltage protection phase 2

94F903

0F03

Over voltage protection phase 3

94F904

0F04

Over voltage protection pilot wire

94F905

Over voltage protection pilot wire

94X091

0X4

Terminal strip in terminal box

94X902

0X2

HV socket

Version 2010/1

13-55

Table of new and old component designations

13-56

HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

14. VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Version 2010/1

14-1

General

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

14.1

GENERAL

Fig. 14-1

Data flow and control of the Vehicle Health Monitoring System

14-2

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

General

The Vehicle Health Monitoring System (VHMS) is an electronic on-board monitoring system which includes the functions REAL TIME MONITOR, basic adjustments, and history reporting. Details are as follows: z

System and component monitoring based on fault code detection and storage of faults and other events, incl. trend snapshot data etc.

z

Selected subsystems and components, generation of trending, histogram, and cumulative data to be used as a predictive maintenance aid.

z

PC-based downloads via VHMS Technical Analysis Tool Box.

z

Single serial data connection to the MTC controller, and CAN bus transfer between VHMS controller and VHMS monitor MH801.

z

MTC evaluation ON/OFF function for testing and troubleshooting.

Operating Principle The VHMS system with a keyboard below the monitor allows comfortable operation and quick access to all information about the machine status and maintenance calls. The Diesel engine, a Komatsu SDA16V160 (QSK 60), is equipped with ECMs (Electronic Control Modules). This control system is called QUANTUM. For communication with the shovel control system the Quantum system is connected to the CAN bus #1. Condition monitoring on the shovel systems is established by the MTC (Master Turbo Controller), also called X2Controller, in serial connection with the VHMS controller. The MTC is equipped with a read & write memory and a real time monitoring system. The access to the VHMS controller is established via laptop and a serial interface, using the respective software. The control system components VHMS & monitor, MTC-Controller & nodes, and Quantum are connected as follows: VHMS Quantum

CAN bus #1

MTC-Controller Nodes

internal CAN bus

MTC-Controller VHMS-Controller

RS232 (serial connection)

VHMS-Controller => VHMS monitor MH801

CAN bus #2

As optional equipment the ORBCOMM and the MODULAR MINING SYSTEM are available. View onto the VHMS monitor with key pad in the dashboard

Version 2010/1

14-3

Specifications for Operators

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

14.2

SPECIFICATIONS FOR OPERATORS

Fig. 14-2

Sequence of displays and opening screen

14-4

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Specifications for Operators

Legend for Fig. 14-2: (1)

The monitor displays the condition of the machine, the maintenance status, and messages for the operator & the maintenance staff

(2)

Buttons for changing the screens and for settings on the operator level

(3)

Key pad for entering data and the Personal Identification Number (PIN)

(4)

Main key switch on the dashboard

(5)

Opening message

(6)

Acknowledgement button for the opening message

14.2.1

SEQUENCE OF DISPLAYS

Fig. 14-3

Initialization screen

When the main key switch (Fig. 14-2, Pos. 4) is turned ON, the initialization screen (KOMATSU logo) (Fig. 14-3) is displayed for approx. 3 seconds. NOTE: The standard system offers three languages, ENGLISH - GERMAN - SPANISH, or according to customer’s request. Changing of the present language can be carried out in the main menu settings, refer to section 14.2.8 on page 14-18, Fig. 14-11.

14.2.2

OPENING SCREEN

The second display (Fig. 14-2, Pos. 5) is a general information for the operator. NOTE: Press button F6 (Fig. 14-2, Pos. 6) to acknowledge this message. The monitor will display the Main Gauge Screen 1, refer to Fig. 14-4.

Version 2010/1

14-5

Specifications for Operators

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

14.2.3

MAIN GAUGE SCREENS 1 TO 3

Fig. 14-4

Main gauge screens 1 to 3

14-6

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Specifications for Operators

Symbol explanation for Fig. 14-4: Main Gauge Screen 1 of 3 °C 1/min

Celsius, ambient temperature Engine speed

Time

Truck counter 1

Truck counter 2

Engine oil pressure

Engine coolant temperature

Hydraulic oil temperature

Fuel level

Version 2010/1

14-7

Specifications for Operators

Fig. 14-5 14-8

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Main gauge screens 1 to 3 Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Specifications for Operators

Symbol explanation for Fig. 14-5: Main Gauge Screen 2 of 3

Battery, board power supply

Voltage

Gear oil temperature

Engine oil temperature

Main Gauge Screen 3 of 3

Central Lubrication System (CLS)

Slew Lubrication System (SLS)

Engine oil level

Hydraulic oil level

Definition of the gauge range colours Green Red

Normal operating range Serious trouble, act immediately. Engine derate or shutdown may happen.

NOTE: If the pointer of any gauge moves into a red range (upper or lower) the corresponding symbol will also have a red background. If this happens, in most cases an automatic message display will inform the operator in plain text about the failure and the necessary action to be taken. For a typical display refer to section 14.2.9 on page 14-26.

Version 2010/1

14-9

Specifications for Operators

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Symbols and functions of the buttons F1 - F6

14-10

F1

This button is used to scroll through the Main Gauge Screens 1, 2, and 3. If other screens are selected, the function of this button changes accordingly.

F2

This button switches to the Fuel Consumption Screen, for details refer to section 14.2.4 on page 14-11.

F3

This button switches to the Failure Message Screen for the operator. The colour of the icon above this button changes to yellow if a current message is pending in the Failure History. The icon remains yellow as long as the cause for the message exists, even if the message was cancelled.

F4

This button switches to the Main Gauge Screen for changing the display from Time to Service Meter Reading (SMR) or to Date and vice versa, refer to section 14.2.6 on page 14-15.

F5

This button switches to the Maintenance Monitor. The colour of the icon above this button changes to yellow or red if maintenance is due, for details refer to section 14.2.7 on page 14-16.

F6

This button switches to the main screen Settings for Operator, for details refer to section 14.2.8 on page 14-18.

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

14.2.4

FUEL CONSUMPTION SCREEN

Fig. 14-6

Fuel consumption screen

Version 2010/1

Specifications for Operators

14-11

Specifications for Operators

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Measuring the Fuel Consumption Starting from one of the three Main Gauge Screens press button F2, the screen changes to Fuel Consumption Screen (Fig. 14-6, Pos. 1). The fields in the screen (Fig. 14-6, Pos. 1) can be either blank or filled with the data of the last measurement. If you want to start a new fuel consumption measurement, push the START button F1. The date and the local time will be inserted into the Start Time frame and the START command above button F1 changes to STOP, refer to screen (Fig. 14-6, Pos. 2). Push the RETURN button F5 to go back to the Main Gauge Screen 1. When the time period for fuel consumption measurement is over, for example after 10 hours, select the Fuel Consumption Screen from any of the three Main Gauge Screens by pushing button F2. The displayed Fuel Consumption Screen shows the starting date and time of the fuel consumption measurement. Push the STOP button F1. The current date and time is inserted into the Stop Time field and the split fuel consumption calculated during the previous time period is inserted into the Fuel Consumption Frame. The STOP button F1 changes to START again, refer to screen (Fig. 14-6, Pos. 3). Push the return button F5 to return to the Main Gauge Screen 1.

14-12

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Specifications for Operators

14.2.5

FAILURE MESSAGE SCREEN FOR THE OPERATOR

Fig. 14-7

Main Gauge Screen 1/3 and Failure Message History

Version 2010/1

14-13

Specifications for Operators

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Failure Messages for the Operator The Failure Message Screen (Fig. 14-7) can be selected from the Main Gauge Screens 1, 2, or 3 by pressing button F3. The colour of the icon above the button F3 changes to yellow if a current message is pending in the Failure Message History for the operator.

Fig. 14-8

Failure Message

Legend for Fig. 14-8: F3

Scroll down - shifts down to the next message, if several messages are present

F4

Scroll up - shifts up to the previous message, if several messages are present

F5

Return - switches back to the Main Gauge Screen

If the cause for any failure message, which is shown on the Failure Message Screen for operators does not exist any longer, the message will be removed from the operator’s failure history. The time and the date of the removed failure message are added to the already stored failure information in the failure memory for the service level.

14-14

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Specifications for Operators

14.2.6

MAIN GAUGE SCREENS - CHANGING OF TIME / SMR / DATE

Fig. 14-9

Changing Time, SMR, Date

If button F4 of the Main Gauge Screen is pressed, the center information in the headline changes in the sequence: Time => Service Meter Reading (SMR) => Date => Time ... The selected information (Time, SMR, or Date) will be shown in the headline of all three Main Gauge Screens. Version 2010/1

14-15

Specifications for Operators

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

14.2.7

MAINTENANCE MONITOR

Fig. 14-10

Maintenance Monitor

14-16

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Specifications for Operators

The Maintenance Monitor can be selected from the Main Gauge Screens 1, 2, or 3 by pressing the maintenance button F5. The colour of the icon background above the button changes to yellow if maintenance is due. The colour will change to red if maintenance is overdue. Fig. 14-10 shows a Maintenance Monitor of a new machine which has been operated for 10 hours. There are 240 hours left before the 250 hour maintenance is due and 2990 hours before the 3000 hours maintenance is due. For returning to the Main Gauge Screen press button F5. Specifics to be observed Higher maintenance also includes lower maintenance. (Lower maintenance must also be carried out!) Maintenance Interval Overview Maintenance interval

Remark

250 h

Includes maintenance: 50 h • 10 h

500 h

Includes maintenance: 250 h • 50 h • 10 h

(750 h)

Is a follow-up maintenance of 250 h

1000 h

Includes maintenance: (750 h) • 500 h • 250 h • 50 h • 10 h

... 2000 h

Includes: PM-CLINIC

... 3000 h

Includes maintenance: 1000 h • 750 h • 500 h • 250 h • 50 h • 10 h

Exception: For the 3000 h maintenance it is not necessary to carry out the 2000 h maintenance also. The maintenance cycles are rigidly linked to the running time meter. Only running time hours are taken into consideration (no minutes or seconds). The routine visual checks and inspections after every 10 and 50 operating hours are not called up on the Maintenance Monitor. Carry out these checks and inspections according to the OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUEL section 4. The engine maintenance has to be carried out according to the separate ENGINE OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUEL filed in the volume 2 binder. REMARK For detailed maintenance cycle information refer to the OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL, section MAINTENANCE. NOTE: On new machines an INITIAL SERVICING after the first 250 and 1000 operating hours is required in addition to the periodic maintenance intervals displayed on the monitor. Carry out all maintenance items according to the OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUEL, section 4. Maintenance Confirmation by Service Personnel Maintenance indicated with yellow or red background behind the icon above the maintenance button F5 should be confirmed by service personnel in the Service Menu subsequent to the execution of the maintenance. With each confirmation the actual maintenance number is increased by 1. The message in the Service Menu for Maintenance Confirmation then turns to white instead of yellow. For more information about the Maintenance Confirmation screen refer to section 14.4.8 on page 14-84.

Version 2010/1

14-17

Specifications for Operators

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

14.2.8

SETTINGS FOR OPERATORS

Fig. 14-11

Maintenance Monitor

14-18

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Specifications for Operators

The user menu Settings for Operators can be selected from the Main Gauge Screens 1, 2, or 3 by pressing the button F6. Selection of the Setting Screens The settings selection menu offers seven different setting screens, starting with USER ID and ending with the Language selection. Use the buttons F3 and F4 to scroll through all the seven selection items. Select the designated setting item and push button F6 in order to open the selected setting screen. Button F5 switches back to the Main Gauge Screen 1. The setting screens on the following pages appear in the same sequence as shown in the Main Setting Screen. Settings for Operators USER ID Screen Entering the USER ID (Operator Identification Number)

Fig. 14-12

Entering User ID

In order to personalize different operators, it is possible to enter any up to 10-digits USER ID (Operator Identification Number) via the key pad, refer to (Fig. 14-12). In order to acknowledge the USER ID press button F6. The display then changes to the Main Setting Screen for operators. NOTE: - If 10 digits are entered, each further entry will be ignored. - If any USER ID has been entered, the ID is saved together with the continuous machine operation records in the VHMS memory.

Version 2010/1

14-19

Specifications for Operators

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Reset Truck Counter 1 & 2

Fig. 14-13

Resetting Truck Counter 1

When the upper screen (Fig. 14-13, Pos. 1) is displayed, press button F6 to reset Truck Counter 1 to zero. The screen then changes to the Main Setting Screen. If you don’t want to reset the truck counter, press button F5 to return to the Main Setting Screen for operators again. The reset of Truck Counter 2 is performed analogously.

14-20

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Specifications for Operators

Screen Adjustment

Fig. 14-14

Screen Adjustment

Legend for Fig. 14-14: (1)

Day screen

(2)

Night screen

Version 2010/1

14-21

Specifications for Operators

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Screen Adjustment Day and Night The Day Screen (Fig. 14-14, Pos. 1) will be displayed during the day when the main working lights are switched off. The screen changes automatically to the Night mode when the main working lights are switched on, refer to Pos. 2 in the previous illustration (Fig. 14-14). The adjustment of both screens is done in the same way. The function of the buttons for Screen Adjustment (Fig. 14-14) is as follows: F2

Select the DEFAULT setting (factory setting) of Brightness, Contrast, and Back Light

F3

Decrease Brightness, Contrast, and Back Light

F4

Increase Brightness, Contrast, and Back Light

F5

Leave the adjustment screen and return to the Main Setting Screen for operators

F6

Save the current adjustment and jump to the next adjustment mode (Brightness >> Contrast >> Back Light)

Screen Adjustment z

Brightness adjustment In the first display of the screen the brightness field is highlighted yellow. For increasing the brightness press button F4 until the desired condition is obtained. For decreasing the brightness press button F3 until the desired condition is obtained. Press button F6 in order to save the selected brightness adjustment and to change over to the contrast adjustment.

z

Contrast adjustment The contrast field is now highlighted yellow. For increasing the contrast press button F4 until the desired condition is obtained. For decreasing the contrast press button F3 until the desired condition is obtained. Press button F6 in order to save the selected contrast adjustment and to change over to the back light adjustment.

z

Back Light adjustment The back light field is now highlighted yellow. For increasing the back light press button F4 until the desired condition is obtained. For decreasing the back light press button F3 until the desired condition is obtained. Press button F6 in order to save the selected back light adjustment and to return to the Main Setting Screen for operators.

If you want to leave the above adjustment screens without saving any adjustment, press button F5 and return to the Main Setting Screen for operators.

14-22

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Specifications for Operators

Date Adjustment Screen

Fig. 14-15 z

Date adjustment

Date adjustment In the first display of this adjustment screen ’Date’ is highlighted yellow and the year is highlighted orange, refer to Fig. 14-15. Press button F3 (down) or F4 (up) in order to adjust the correct year. If button F1 is pressed one time, the month is highlighted and can be adjusted, using the buttons F3 and F4 again. Press button F1 again in order to change to the adjustment mode of the day. Press button F6 in order to save the adjustment(s) of year, month, or day and to return to the Main Setting Screen for operators. Press button F5 if you want

Screen for Clock Adjustment and Daylight Saving Time ON/OFF

Fig. 14-16

Adjustment for Clock and Daylight Saving Time

NOTE: Via the screen for Clock Adjustment (Fig. 14-16) the clock time can be adjusted, and the Daylight Saving Time can be switched ON/OFF. REMARK If the Daylight Saving Time is switched ON, the Day Screen will be displayed during the day when the main working lights are switched off. The display changes automatically to the Night Screen when the main working lights are switched on.

Version 2010/1

14-23

Specifications for Operators

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

z

Clock adjustment In the first display of this adjustment screen ’Time’ is highlighted yellow and the hours are highlighted orange, refer to Fig. 14-16. Press button F3 (down) or F4 (up) in order to adjust the correct hours. If button F1 is pressed one time, the minutes are highlighted and can be adjusted, using the buttons F3 and F4 again. Press button F6 in order to save the adjustment(s) of the clock time and to return to the Main Setting Screen for operators.

z

Switching the Daylight Saving Time ON/OFF If you are in the clock adjustment mode for minutes (the minutes are highlighted) press button F1. ’Daylight Saving Time’ will be highlighted yellow. Press the button F3 or F4 in order to select the ON or OFF condition. The selected condition is highlighted green. Press button F6 if you want to save the adjustment(s) of the clock time and to return to the Main Setting Screen for operators.

If you want to leave the above adjustment screens without saving any adjustment, press button F5 and return to the Main Setting Screen for operators. Language Selection Screen

Fig. 14-17 z

Language selection

Language selection Select the desired language using button F3 or F4. Press button F6 in order to save the language selection and to return to the Main Setting Screen for operators. If you want to leave the above selection screen without saving any selection, press button F5 and return to the Main Setting Screen for operators.

14-24

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Specifications for Operators

This page was left blank intentionally.

Version 2010/1

14-25

Specifications for Operators

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

14.2.9

AUTOMATIC MESSAGES

Fig. 14-18

View onto the Main Gauge Screen indicating any pending message(s)

Fig. 14-19

Example of a message with red background

Fig. 14-20

Example of a message with yellow background

14-26

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Specifications for Operators

Legend for Fig. 14-19 and 14-20: (1)

Top Message: Short failure description

(2)

Instruction Message: Follow the displayed instruction(s)

(3)

Error Code: G = Shovel message C = Engine message (Cummins)

(4)

Number of the currently displayed message

(5)

Total number of existing messages

F1

CANCEL button When this button is pressed, the currently displayed message disappears and is listed in the failure history for operators. The message will be displayed again if any different USER ID (operator identification number) is entered.

F3

PAUSE button (green) When this button is pressed, automatic rolling up of messages is stopped and the displayed message will be frozen on the screen for two minutes. After that the button changes to RESET (red) and automatic roll up of current messages starts again. A new message will overwrite a frozen message.

F4

JUMP button This button switches to the previous displayed menu, normally to the Main Gauge Screen 1. After two minutes the display jumps automatically back to the last displayed Automatic Message, and rolling up of messages starts again. If any menu select button was pressed during the two minutes standard period, the display will also jump back to Automatic Message when the two minutes are over. A new message will overwrite any menu display and rolling up of messages starts again.

If any failure or information condition occurs during operation, the background of the exclamation mark (!) over button F3 is coloured yellow. Then the present display is automatically replaced by an Automatic Message. If there are several messages at the same time, the system displays these messages one after the other. Each message is displayed for a few seconds. The message text informs the operator about the type of failure and the action to be taken. Carry out the action which is recommended on the screen. NOTE: The Top Messages have background colours which indicate the trouble condition as follows: z

RED

Shut-down - act immediately Refer to Fig. 14-19 for a typical message with red background.

z

YELLOW

Caution - inform service Refer to Fig. 14-20 for a typical message with yellow background.

z

GREEN

Information Refer to Fig. 14-21 for a typical message with green background.

Version 2010/1

14-27

Specifications for Operators

Fig. 14-21

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Example of a message with green background

Legend for Fig. 14-21: (1)

Top message: Information description

(2)

Help text

(3)

Message (error) Code: G = Shovel message C = Engine message (Cummins)

(4)

Number of the currently displayed message

(5)

Total number of existing messages

NOTE: For all available Top Messages in the system refer to section 14.2.10 on page 14-29.

14-28

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Specifications for Operators

14.2.10 TABLES OF ALL MESSAGES PROVIDED BY THE SYSTEM The following charts of Top Messages (Error Codes) cover all shovels with X2-Controller. G-Codes

For the excavators PC3000 - PC4000 - PC5500 - PC8000 (Diesel & Electric), including optional equipment, refer to section 14.2.10.1

C-Codes TIER 2

for the Diesel engines QSK38 & QSK60 - Emission Standard TIER 2 refer to section 14.2.10.2 on page 14-39

C-Codes TIER 1

for the Diesel engines KTA38 & QSK60 - Emission Standard TIER 1 refer to section 14.2.10.3 on page 14-46

Instruction Messages

for the G-Codes & C-Codes, refer to section 14.2.10.4 on page 14-52

That means, that not all listed Error Codes and Instruction Messages may be applied to each shovel.

NOTE: Messages w/o color code are not displayed. These messages are stored in the history memory only.

Explanation of the columns in the following Error Code charts Error Code

Error Codes: G = Shovel message, C = Engine message (Cummins)

Colour Code of Top Message

0 = Red, 1 = Yellow, 2 = Green

Instruction Message No.

Number of the Instruction Message, which is displayed together with the Error Code (numbers 1 - 58)

Display

1 = displayed once, 2 = displayed at each occurrence, N = NOT displayed

Acoustic Signal

Y = an acoustic signal sounds if the relating error occurs

Memory

The error/message is saved in a History Memory: 1 = Service & Operator History, 2 = Service History, 3 = Operator History, 5 = VHMS History

G-Code/C-Code

Text of the Error Code or Message

Version 2010/1

14-29

Specifications for Operators

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

G = Shovel C = Engine

0 = RED 1 = YELLOW 2 = GREEN

Display

Colour Code of Top Message

Instruction Message No.

Error Code

Acoustic Signal

14.2.10.1 TABLE OF G-CODES

G00001

0

1

2

1

Trouble Shut-Off (gate) valve

G00002

2

37

2

3

Test speed 1800 1/min engine 1

G00003

1

38

1

1

Trouble pump controller

G00005

1

39

1

3

Low hydraulic oil level

G00007

0

2

2

1

Trouble hydraulic oil level

G00012

1

17

1

3

Central lubrication system grease level too low

G00013

1

17

1

3

Slew ring gear lubr. system grease level too low

G00020

0

4

2

1

Trouble Shut-Off (gate) valve (Start blocked)

G00031

2

-

2

3

Set engine to low idle

G00032

1

2

1

1

Trouble starter

G00033

1

2

1

1

Trouble VHMS-Controller

G00034

1

2

1

1

Trouble VHMS-Display

G00035

0

34

2

1

Trouble totally loss gear oil (PTO 1)

G00039

2

-

2

3

Actuate engine speed selector switch

G00040

0

10

2

1

Emergency shut-down pump compartment

G00042

1

2

1

1

Trouble monitoring screen at hydr. cooler entry

G00043

1

2

2

Y

1

Trouble output short-circuit

G00048

0

2

2

Y

1

Trouble emergency safety circuit

G00053

1

56

2

Y

1

Reset emergency safety circuit

G00060

0

6

2

1

Fire in the power house

G00061

0

2

2

1

Trouble monitoring, engine 1 speed too low

G00062

0

2

2

1

Trouble monitoring, engine 1 speed too high

G00063

0

2

1

1

Trouble monitoring hydraulic oil temp

14-30

Y

Y

G-Code Memory

(Message Code)

Version 2010/1

G = Shovel C = Engine

0 = RED 1 = YELLOW 2 = GREEN

Display

Colour Code of Top Message

Instruction Message No.

Error Code

Acoustic Signal

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

G00064

0

2

1

1

Trouble monitoring hydraulic oil level

G00065

1

2

1

1

Very low hydraulic oil level

G00066

0

2

2

1

Trouble hydraulic oil temperature

G00067

1

2

1

1

Trouble battery voltage too high

G00069

1

2

1

1

Trouble monitoring oil temperature gear (PTO 1)

G00070

1

2

2

Y

1

Trouble oil temperature gear (PTO 1)

G00071

1

2

2

Y

1

Trouble gear lubrication (PTO 1)

N

2

Trouble monitoring hydraulic oil level

G00073

N

2

Trouble monitoring remote engine oil level 1

G00074

N

2

Trouble monitoring grease pressure (central)

G00075

N

2

Trouble monitoring grease pressure (slew ring gear)

G00076

N

2

Trouble monitoring pressure suction tank

G00077

N

2

Trouble monitoring grease level (central)

G00078

N

2

Trouble monitoring grease level (slew ring gear)

G00079

N

2

Trouble monitoring pressure oil cooler 1

G00080

N

2

Trouble monitoring pressure preload valve

1

Trouble lubrication system

G00072

G-Code Memory

(Message Code)

G00081

0

2

2

G00086

2

12

2

Y

3

SHUTDOWN

G00087

2

2

Y

3

Stop all movements for low idle

G00089

1

2

2

3

EBL bypassed

G00090

0

8

2

1

Trouble power supply

G00091

0

9

2

3

Pilot control cut out

Version 2010/1

Y

Specifications for Operators

14-31

G = Shovel C = Engine

0 = RED 1 = YELLOW 2 = GREEN

Display

Colour Code of Top Message

Instruction Message No.

Error Code

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Acoustic Signal

Specifications for Operators

G00092

0

10

2

3

Emergency shut-down at access ladder

G00093

0

10

2

3

Emergency shut-down at valve block

G00094

0

10

2

3

Emergency shut-down at hydraulic control panel

G00095

0

10

2

3

Emergency shut-down in cabin

G00096

0

14

2

3

Pilot control cut out

G00099

0

48

2

1

Trouble power supply

G00100

0

11

2

3

Maintenance safety switch

G00102

1

2

2

Y

3

Switch off wiper

G00103

1

47

2

Y

1

Faulty switch 20M004

G00104

1

15

2

Y

1

Trouble battery current

G00105

1

16

2

Y

1

Trouble battery charging current too low

G00106

1

49

2

Y

1

Faulty switch 20M007

G00107

1

2

1

Y

1

Trouble slew parking brake control 56K250a

G00108

1

2

1

Y

1

Trouble slew parking brake control Output to 56K250a

G00109

1

2

1

Y

1

Trouble slew parking brake control 56K250b

G00110

1

2

1

Y

1

Trouble slew parking brake control Output to 56K250b

G00111

1

2

1

Y

1

Trouble travel parking brake control 56K251a

G00112

1

2

1

Y

1

Trouble travel parking brake control Output to 56K251a

G00113

1

2

1

Y

1

Trouble travel parking brake control 56K251b

G00114

1

2

1

Y

1

Trouble travel parking brake control Output to 56K251b

G00115

1

2

1

Y

1

Trouble slew hydraulic brake control 56K252a

G00116

1

2

1

Y

1

Trouble slew hydraulic brake control Output to 56K252a

14-32

Y

G-Code Memory

(Message Code)

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

G = Shovel C = Engine

0 = RED 1 = YELLOW 2 = GREEN

Display

Acoustic Signal

Memory

Colour Code of Top Message

Instruction Message No.

Error Code

G00117

1

2

1

Y

1

Trouble slew hydraulic brake control 56K252b

G00118

1

2

1

Y

1

Trouble slew hydraulic brake control Output to 56K252b

G00140

1

17

1

1

Trouble monitoring X1-1 Pressure

G00141

1

17

1

1

Trouble monitoring X2-Pressure

G00143

1

2

N

2

Trouble monitoring 61B087a

G00144

1

2

N

2

Trouble monitoring 61B087b

G00145

1

2

N

2

Trouble monitoring 61B087c

G00146

1

2

N

2

Trouble monitoring 61B087d

G00147

1

17

1

1

Trouble monitoring gear lubrication (PTO 1)

G00148

1

17

1

1

Trouble monitoring fuel level

G00149

0

2

N

2

Trouble monitoring ambient temperature

G00151

1

17

1

1

Trouble monitoring gear (PTO) oil filter 1

G00152

1

17

1

1

Trouble monitoring oil filter pump lubrication

G00154

1

17

1

1

Trouble monitoring return oil filter

G00155

1

17

1

1

Trouble monitoring leak oil filter

G00159

1

17

1

1

Trouble monitoring breather filter

G00160

1

17

1

1

Trouble monitoring engine air cleaner 1

G00161

1

17

1

1

Trouble monitoring battery voltage

G00162

1

17

1

1

Trouble monitoring charging-/discharging current

G00163

1

17

1

1

Trouble monitoring pilot control

G00164

1

17

1

1

Trouble air cleaner 1

(Message Code)

Version 2010/1

Specifications for Operators

G-Code

14-33

G = Shovel C = Engine

0 = RED 1 = YELLOW 2 = GREEN

Display

Colour Code of Top Message

Instruction Message No.

Error Code

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Acoustic Signal

Specifications for Operators

G00165

1

17

1

1

Trouble breather filter hydraulic oil tank

G00166

1

17

1

1

Trouble oil filter gear (PTO 1)

G00169

1

17

1

1

Trouble return oil filter hydraulic oil tank

G00170

1

17

1

1

Trouble leak oil filter hydraulic oil tank

G00176

1

17

1

1

Trouble battery voltage too low

G00177

1

17

1

1

Trouble battery charging circuit

G00178

1

17

1

1

Trouble battery charging current too high

G00179

1

17

1

1

Trouble control pressure X1-1

G00180

1

17

1

1

Trouble pilot pressure X2 too low

G00181

1

17

1

1

Trouble pilot pressure X2 too high

G00184

1

20

1

Y

1

Central lubrication system empty

G00185

1

20

1

Y

1

Trouble central lubrication system

G00186

1

20

1

Y

1

Trouble central lubrication system

G00187

1

20

1

Y

1

Slew ring gear lubrication system empty

G00188

1

20

1

Y

1

Trouble slew ring gear lubrication system

G00189

1

20

1

Y

1

Trouble slew ring gear lubrication system

G00207

1

2

1

Y

1

Engine remote oil tank 1 empty

G00216

1

2

2

Y

1

Trouble software not compatible

G00220

1

2

2

Y

1

Trouble transfer pump motor overheated

14-34

G-Code Memory

(Message Code)

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

G = Shovel C = Engine

0 = RED 1 = YELLOW 2 = GREEN

Display

Acoustic Signal

Memory

Colour Code of Top Message

Instruction Message No.

Error Code

G00222

1

2

2

Y

1

Load limiting clam defective

G00223

1

2

2

Y

1

Trouble starter control 51K001a-1

G00224

1

2

2

Y

1

Trouble starter control Output to 51K001a-1

G00225

1

2

2

Y

1

Trouble starter control 51K001b-1

G00226

1

2

2

Y

1

Trouble starter control Output to 51K001b-1

G00231

1

2

2

Y

1

Trouble pilot control lever 20S019

G00232

1

2

2

Y

1

Trouble pilot control lever 20S020

G00233

1

2

2

Y

1

Trouble pilot control 11Q045

G00234

1

2

2

Y

1

Trouble pilot control 11K111a

G00235

1

2

2

Y

1

Trouble pilot control Output to 11K111a

G00236

1

2

2

Y

1

Trouble pilot control 11K111b

G00237

1

2

2

Y

1

Trouble pilot control Output to 11K111b

G00238

1

2

2

Y

1

Trouble supply by key switch 11Q044

G00239

1

2

2

Y

1

Trouble electrical matter

G00240

2

21

1

1

Trouble hydraulic oil temperature

G00242

2

22

2

3

Engine 1 already running

G00243

2

23

1

3

Fill up fuel tank

G00245

0

24

2

1

Engine shutdown from ground

G00246

2

25

2

3

Hydraulic oil temperature

G00247

2

26

2

3

Slew ring gear house brake

G00249

1

27

2

3

Hydraulic oil temperature

(Message Code)

Version 2010/1

Y

Specifications for Operators

G-Code

14-35

G = Shovel C = Engine

0 = RED 1 = YELLOW 2 = GREEN

Display

Colour Code of Top Message

Instruction Message No.

Error Code

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Acoustic Signal

Specifications for Operators

G00252

0

10

2

1

Emergency shut-down at access ladder

G00253

0

10

2

1

Emergency shut-down at valve block

G00254

0

10

2

1

Emergency shut-down at hydraulic control panel

G00255

0

10

2

1

Emergency shut-down in cabin

G00257

2

30

2

3

Hydraulic oil temperature

G00261

1

11

2

1

Maintenance Safety Switch

G00262

1

20

1

Y

1

Trouble screen at hydr. cooler entry clogged

G00308

0

3

2

Y

1

Trouble CAN-Bus or CAN-Hardware

G00309

1

2

1

Y

1

Trouble ladder up 56K253a

G00310

1

2

1

Y

1

Trouble ladder up Output to 56K253a

G00311

1

2

1

Y

1

Trouble ladder up redundant 56K253b

G00312

1

2

1

Y

1

Trouble ladder up redundant Output to 56K253b

G00313

1

2

1

Y

1

Trouble ladder down 56K254a

G00314

1

2

1

Y

1

Trouble ladder down Output to 56K254a

G00315

1

2

1

Y

1

Trouble ladder down redundant 56K254b

G00316

1

2

1

Y

1

Trouble ladder down redundant Output to 56K254b

G00317

1

2

1

Y

1

Trouble service arm up 56K255a

G00318

1

2

1

Y

1

Trouble service arm up Output to 56K255a

G00319

1

2

1

Y

1

Trouble service arm up redundant 56K255b

G00320

1

2

1

Y

1

Trouble service arm up redundant Output to 56K255b

14-36

G-Code Memory

(Message Code)

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

G = Shovel C = Engine

0 = RED 1 = YELLOW 2 = GREEN

Display

Acoustic Signal

Memory

Colour Code of Top Message

Instruction Message No.

Error Code

G00321

1

2

1

Y

1

Trouble service arm down 56K256a

G00322

1

2

1

Y

1

Trouble service arm down Output to 56K256a

G00323

1

2

1

Y

1

Trouble service arm down redundant 56K256b

G00324

1

2

1

Y

1

Trouble service arm down redundant Output to 56K256b

G00325

1

2

1

Y

1

Trouble service arm input

G00326

1

2

1

Y

1

Trouble ladder input

G00327

1

2

1

Y

1

Trouble parking brake input

G00328

1

2

1

Y

1

Trouble start input

G00329

1

38

2

Y

1

Protection switch tripped

G00330

1

2

2

Y

1

Trouble pilot control 11Q111

(Message Code)

Specifications for Operators

G-Code

G00401

N

5

Shutdown: Engine / Motor shutdown at bottom - off

G00402

N

5

Shutdown: Engine / Motor shutdown at bottom - on

1

Communication failure PLC VHMS-Controller

2

Manual Trigger

G00417

1

2

MFA0

2

Y

N

G00419

1

2

2

Y

1

Source voltage error

G00420

1

2

2

Y

1

Connector sel error

G00421

1

2

2

Y

G00422

1

2

2

Y

1

Can-net sys (J1939)

G00423

1

2

2

Y

1

Application sys error

G00425

1

2

2

1

Settings impossible to take over into the PLC

G00426

N

5

250 h Maintenance performed

G00427

N

5

500 h Maintenance performed

G00428

N

5

1000 h Maintenance performed

G00429

N

5

2000 h Maintenance performed

Version 2010/1

Farm sys error

14-37

0 = RED 1 = YELLOW 2 = GREEN

G-Code Memory

G = Shovel C = Engine

Acoustic Signal

(Message Code)

Colour Code of Top Message

Display

Error Code

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Instruction Message No.

Specifications for Operators

G00430

N

5

3000 h Maintenance performed

G00431

N

5

Messages switched off

G00432

N

5

Messages switched on

G00433

N

5

PLC-Evaluation switched off

G00434

N

5

PLC-Evaluation switched on

G00451

N

5

Shutdown: Shut-Off (gate) valve (Start bl.) - off

G00452

N

5

Shutdown: Shut-Off (gate) valve (Start bl.) - on

G00453

N

5

Shutdown: Shut-Off (gate) valve - off

G00454

N

5

Shutdown: Shut-Off (gate) valve - on

G00455

N

5

Shutdown: Hydraulic oil level - off

G00456

N

5

Shutdown: Hydraulic oil level - on

G00457

N

5

Shutdown: Hydr. oil temp. too high - off

G00458

N

5

Shutdown: Hydr. oil temp. too high - on

G00459

N

5

Shutdown: Trouble Lubrication system - off

G00460

N

5

Shutdown: Trouble Lubrication system - on

G00461

N

5

Shutdown: Monitoring engine speed too low - off

G00462

N

5

Shutdown: Monitoring engine speed too low - on

G00463

N

5

Shutdown: Monitoring engine speed too high - off

G00464

N

5

Shutdown: Monitoring engine speed too high - on

G00465

N

5

Shutdown: Fire suppression system - off

G00466

N

5

Shutdown: Fire suppression system - on

1

Communication failure MH800 VHMS-Controller

G00491

1

2

2

Y

G00501

N

5

Shutdown: Total loss gear oil 1 - off

G00502

N

5

Shutdown: Total loss gear oil 1 - on

G00533

14-38

2

13

2

Engine state is "Warm-up".

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Specifications for Operators

0 = RED 1 = YELLOW 2 = GREEN

C115

0

34

1

(Message Code)

Menory

G = Shovel C = Engine

Display

Colour Code of Top Message

Instruction Message No.

Error Code

Acoustic Signal

14.2.10.2 TABLE OF C-CODES - DIESEL ENGINES WITH EMISSION STANDARD TIER 2

Y

1

Engine Speed Signal Lost

C-Code TIER 2

C135

N

2

Oil Press Ckt Failed High

C141

N

2

Oil Press Ckt Failed Low

C143

0

33

1

Y

1

Low Oil Press

C144

1

20

2

Y

1

Coolant Temp Ckt Failed High

C145

1

20

2

Y

1

Coolant Temp Ckt Failed Low

C146

1

40

1

Y

1

Coolant Temp Above Normal

C151

0

33

2

Y

1

High Coolant Temp

C153

N

2

Int Man Temp 1 Ckt Failed High

C154

N

2

Int Man Temp 1 Ckt Failed Low

1

High Int Man Temp 1

C155

0

32

2

Y

C156

N

2

Int Man Temp 2 Ckt Failed High

C157

N

2

Int Man Temp 2 Ckt Failed Low

1

High Int Man Temp 2

C158

0

32

2

Y

C159

N

2

Int Man Temp 3 Ckt Failed High

C161

N

2

Int Man Temp 3 Ckt Failed Low

1

High Int Man Temp 3

C162

0

32

2

Y

C163

N

2

Int Man Temp 4 Ckt Failed High

C164

N

2

Int Man Temp 4 Ckt Failed Low

1

High Int Man Temp 4

C165

0

32

2

Y

C187

N

2

Sensor Supply 2 Ckt Failed Low

C195

N

2

Coolant Level Ckt Failed High

C196

N

2

Coolant Level Ckt Failed Low

C197

N

2

Coolant Level Below Normal

C212

N

2

Oil Temp Ckt Failed High

C213

N

2

Oil Temp Ckt Failed Low

1

Engine Oil Temp to High

C214

0

32

2

Y

C221

N

2

Ambient Air Press Failed High

C222

N

2

Ambient Air Press Failed Low

C223

N

2

Centinel Burn Valve Below Normal

Version 2010/1

14-39

0 = RED 1 = YELLOW 2 = GREEN

C-Code TIER 2 Menory

G = Shovel C = Engine

Acoustic Signal

(Message Code)

Colour Code of Top Message

Display

Error Code

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Instruction Message No.

Specifications for Operators

C224

N

2

Centinel Burn Valve Above Normal

C227

N

2

Sensor Supply 2 Ckt Failed High

1

Very Low Coolant Pressure

C228

0

32

2

Y

C231

N

2

Coolant Press Ckt Failed High

C232

N

2

Coolant Press Ckt Failed Low

C234

0

32

2

Y

1

Engine overspeed

C235

0

31

2

Y

1

Low Coolant Level

C238

N

2

Sensor Supply 3 Ckt Failed Low

C245

N

2

Fan Control Circuit Failed Low

1

High Fuel Temp

C261

0

31

1

Y

C263

N

2

Fuel Temp Ckt Failed High

C265

N

2

Fuel Temp Ckt Failed Low

1

Very High Fuel Temp

C266

0

33

2

C271

1

40

1

1

Fuel Pump Press 1 Ckt Failed Low

C272

1

40

1

11

Fuel Pump Press 1 Ckt Failed High

C322

1

40

1

1

Injector Sol Driver Cyl 1 Below Normal

C323

1

40

1

1

Injector Sol Driver Cyl 5 Below Normal

C324

1

40

1

1

Injector Sol Driver Cyl 3 Below Normal

C325

1

40

1

1

Injector Sol Driver Cyl 6 Below Normal

C331

1

40

1

1

Injector Sol Driver Cyl 2 Below Normal

C332

1

40

1

1

Injector Sol Driver Cyl 4 Below Normal

N

2

ECM Hardware Issue Non Mission\n\ Disabling

1

1

Injector Power Supply Failed

C352

N

2

Sensor Supply 1 Ckt Failed Low

C386

N

2

Sensor Supply 1 Ckt Failed High

1

Very Low Oil Pressure

1

WIF Indicator Warning

1

Engine Oil Temp Above Normal

2

J1939 Datalink Can Not Transmit

C343 C351

0

34

C415

0

32

2

C418

1

31

1

C421

1

40

1

C426

Y

Y

Y

N

C441

1

31

1

Y

1

Low Battery Voltage

C442

1

31

1

Y

1

High Battery Voltage

14-40

Version 2010/1

0 = RED 1 = YELLOW 2 = GREEN

C449

0

31

2

(Message Code)

Menory

G = Shovel C = Engine

Display

Colour Code of Top Message

Instruction Message No.

Error Code

Acoustic Signal

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Y

2

High Rail Pressure

C-Code TIER 2

C451

N

2

Rail Press Ckt Failed High

C452

N

2

Rail Press Ckt Failed Low

1

1

High Intake Manifold Temp

C527

N

2

Dual Output A Failed High

C529

N

2

Dual Output B Failed High

C546

N

2

Fuel Del Pressure Ckt Failed High

C547

N

2

Fuel Del Pressure Ckt Failed Low

1

High Crankcase Pressure

C488

1

31

C556

0

32

2

C559

1

40

1

1

Rail Pressure 1 Below Normal

C621

N

2

Low Power Cylinder 1

C622

N

2

Low Power Cylinder 3

C623

N

2

Low Power Cylinder 5

C624

N

2

Low Power Cylinder 7

C625

N

2

Low Power Cylinder 9

C626

N

2

Low Power Cylinder 11

C627

N

2

Low Power Cylinder 13

C628

N

2

Low Power Cylinder 15

C631

N

2

Low Power Cylinder 2

C632

N

2

Low Power Cylinder 4

C633

N

2

Low Power Cylinder 6

C634

N

2

Low Power Cylinder 8

C635

N

2

Low Power Cylinder 10

C636

N

2

Low Power Cylinder 12

C637

N

2

Low Power Cylinder 14

C638

N

2

Low Power Cylinder 16

C671

N

2

Exh Temp Ckt Failed Low Cylinder 1

C672

N

2

Exh Temp Ckt Failed Low Cylinder 3

C673

N

2

Exh Temp Ckt Failed Low Cylinder 5

C674

N

2

Exh Temp Ckt Failed Low Cylinder 7

C675

N

2

Exh Temp Ckt Failed Low Cylinder 9

Version 2010/1

Y

Specifications for Operators

14-41

0 = RED 1 = YELLOW 2 = GREEN

C-Code TIER 2 Menory

G = Shovel C = Engine

Acoustic Signal

(Message Code)

Colour Code of Top Message

Display

Error Code

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Instruction Message No.

Specifications for Operators

C676

N

2

Exh Temp Ckt Failed Low Cylinder 11

C677

N

2

Exh Temp Ckt Failed Low Cylinder 13

C678

N

2

Exh Temp Ckt Failed Low Cylinder 15

1

1

Engine Crankshaft Speed Erratic

C721

N

2

Exh Temp Ckt Failed Low Cylinder 2

C722

N

2

Exh Temp Ckt Failed Low Cylinder 4

C723

N

2

Exh Temp Ckt Failed Low Cylinder 6

C724

N

2

Exh Temp Ckt Failed Low Cylinder 8

C725

N

2

Exh Temp Ckt Failed Low Cylinder 10

C726

N

2

Exh Temp Ckt Failed Low Cylinder 12

C727

N

2

Exh Temp Ckt Failed Low Cylinder 14

C728

N

2

Exh Temp Ckt Failed Low Cylinder 16

C731

N

1

Engine Speed Cam/Crank Misalignment

1

Rapid rise int man temp 1

N

2

Power Lost with Ignition On

C689

C783

1

0

40

32

C1117

2

Y

C1357

1

31

1

1

Remote Oil Level Below Normal

C1362

1

31

1

1

High Lube Oil Filter Restriction

C1363

1

40

1

1

Int Man Press 1 Below Normal

C1367

N

2

Pre Filter Oil Press Ckt Failed High

C1368

N

2

Pre Filter Oil Press Ckt Failed Low

C1373

N

2

Ether Injection Ckt Failed

C1377

N

2

Post Filter Oil Press Ckt Failed High

C1378

N

2

Post Filter Oil Press Ckt Failed Low

C1383

N

2

Int Man Press 1 Failed High

C1384

N

2

Int Man Press 1 Failed Low

C1385

N

2

Int Man Press 2 Failed High

C1386

N

2

Int Man Press 2 Failed Low

1

J1939 Engine Commanded Shutdown

C1387

0

34

2

Y

C1411

N

2

Gen Output Freq Ckt Failed High

C1412

N

2

Droop Adj Ckt Failed High

C1418

N

2

Gain Adj Ckt Failed High

14-42

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Display

Acoustic Signal

Menory

Colour Code of Top Message

Instruction Message No.

Error Code

Specifications for Operators

C1427

2

2

Y

2

Overspeed Shutdown Relay Driver Error

C1428

2

2

Y

2

Low Oil Press Shutdown Relay Driver Err

C1429

2

2

Y

2

High Eng Temp Shutdown Relay Driver Err

(Message Code) G = Shovel C = Engine

0 = RED 1 = YELLOW 2 = GREEN

C-Code TIER 2

C1431

N

2

Oil Pressure Relay Driver Error

C1432

N

2

High Engine Temp Relay Driver Error

C1517

1

31

1

1

ECM Detects Most Severe Fault

C1518

1

31

1

1

ECM Detects Moderately Severe Fault

C1519

1

31

1

1

ECM Detects Least Severe Fault

C1521

N

2

Exh Temp Ckt Failed High Cylinder 3

C1522

N

2

Exh Temp Ckt Failed High Cylinder 5

C1523

N

2

Exh Temp Ckt Failed High Cylinder 7

C1524

N

2

Exh Temp Ckt Failed High Cylinder 9

C1525

N

2

Exh Temp Ckt Failed High Cylinder 11

C1526

N

2

Exh Temp Ckt Failed High Cylinder 13

C1527

N

2

Exh Temp Ckt Failed High Cylinder 15

C1529

N

2

Exh Temp Ckt Failed High Cylinder 2

C1531

N

2

Exh Temp Ckt Failed High Cylinder 6

C1532

N

2

Exh Temp Ckt Failed High Cylinder 8

C1533

N

2

Exh Temp Ckt Failed High Cylinder 10

C1534

N

2

Exh Temp Ckt Failed High Cylinder 12

C1535

N

2

Exh Temp Ckt Failed High Cylinder 14

C1536

N

2

Exh Temp Ckt Failed High Cylinder 16

C1542

N

2

Engine oil level sensor Ckt Failed High

C1543

N

2

Engine oil level sensor Ckt Failed Low

C1548

40

N

2

Injector Sol Driver 7 Below Normal

C1549

40

N

2

Injector Sol Driver 8 Below Normal

C1551

40

N

2

Injector Sol Driver 10 Below Normal

C1552

40

N

2

Injector Sol Driver 11 Below Normal

C1553

40

N

2

Injector Sol Driver 12 Below Normal

C1554

40

N

2

Injector Sol Driver 13 Below Normal

C1555

40

N

2

Injector Sol Driver 14 Below Normal

Version 2010/1

14-43

Display

Colour Code of Top Message

Instruction Message No.

Error Code

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Acoustic Signal

Specifications for Operators

C1556

40

N

2

Injector Sol Driver 15 Below Normal

C1557

40

N

2

Injector Sol Driver 16 Below Normal

31

1

1

ECM Critical Internal Failure

C1618

N

2

Exh Temp Ckt Failed High Cylinder 1

C1619

N

2

Exh Temp Ckt Failed High Cylinder 4

C1622

N

2

Injector Sol Driver 9 Below Normal

1

1

Int Man Press 2 Below Normal

C1843

N

2

Crankcase Press Ckt Failed High

C1844

N

2

Crankcase Press Ckt Failed Low

C1845

N

2

WIF Indicator Ckt Failed High

C1846

N

2

WIF Indicator Ckt Failed Low

C1847

N

2

Engine Coolant Temp Exception

1

1

WIF Indicator Above Normal

N

2

Engine Oil Change Interval Exceeded

G = Shovel C = Engine

C1597

C1638

C1852

0 = RED 1 = YELLOW 2 = GREEN

1

1

1

40

31

C1891

C-Code TIER 2 Menory

(Message Code)

C1911

1

31

1

1

Inj Rail Pressure Above Normal

C1984

1

31

1

1

Int Man Temp 2 Above Normal

C1985

1

31

1

1

Int Man Temp 3 Above Normal

C1986

1

31

1

1

Int Man Temp 4 Above Normal

N

2

Engine Speed Above Normal

C1992 C2121

0

32

2

Y

1

High Exhaust Temp Cyl 1

C2122

0

32

2

Y

1

High Exhaust Temp Cyl 3

C2123

0

32

2

Y

1

High Exhaust Temp Cyl 5

C2124

0

32

2

Y

1

High Exhaust Temp Cyl 7

C2125

0

32

2

Y

1

High Exhaust Temp Cyl 9

C2126

0

32

2

Y

1

High Exhaust Temp Cyl 11

C2127

0

32

2

Y

1

High Exhaust Temp Cyl 13

C2128

0

32

2

Y

1

High Exhaust Temp Cyl 15

C2131

0

32

2

Y

1

High Exhaust Temp Cyl 2

C2132

0

32

2

Y

1

High Exhaust Temp Cyl 4

C2133

0

32

2

Y

1

High Exhaust Temp Cyl 6

14-44

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

G = Shovel C = Engine

0 = RED 1 = YELLOW 2 = GREEN

Display

Acoustic Signal

Menory

Colour Code of Top Message

Instruction Message No.

Error Code

C2134

0

32

2

Y

1

High Exhaust Temp Cyl 8

C2135

0

32

2

Y

1

High Exhaust Temp Cyl 10

C2136

0

32

2

Y

1

High Exhaust Temp Cyl 12

C2137

0

32

2

Y

1

High Exhaust Temp Cyl 14

C2157

0

32

2

Y

1

Rapid Rise Int Man Temp 2

C2158

0

32

2

Y

1

Rapid Rise Int Man Temp 3

C2159

0

32

2

Y

1

Rapid Rise Int Man Temp 4

(Message Code)

Specifications for Operators

C-Code TIER 2

C2185

N

2

Sensor Supply 4 Ckt Above Normal

C2186

N

2

Sensor Supply 4 Ckt Below Normal

C2215

1

40

1

1

Fuel Pump Pressure Below Normal

C2261

1

31

1

1

Fuel Pump Del Pressure Above Normal

C2262

1

40

1

1

Fuel Pump Del Pressure Below Normal

C2265

N

2

Lift Pump Supply Ckt Failed High

C2266

N

2

Lift Pump Supply Ckt Failed Low

C2311

N

2

Fuel Injection Valve Ckt Error

C2321

N

2

Engine Crankshaft Speed - Data Erratic

C2322

N

2

Engine Camshaft Speed - Data Erratic

C2377

N

2

Fan Control Ckt Failed High

C2474

N

2

Turbocharger 1 Speed - Data Erratic

Version 2010/1

14-45

Specifications for Operators

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

G = Shovel C = Engine

0 = RED 1 = YELLOW 2 = GREEN

C112

1

35

C113

Acoustic Signal

(Message Code)

Colour Code of Top Message

Display

Error Code

Instruction Message No.

14.2.10.3 TABLE OF C-CODES - DIESEL ENGINES WITH EMISSION STANDARD TIER 1

Y N

C-Code TIER 1

Timing Fueling Mismatch Timing Act Shorted High

C115

0

34

Y

Speed Signal Lost

C116

1

35

Timing Rail Press Ckt Failed High

C117

1

35

Timing Rail Press Ckt Failed Low

C118

N

Timing Rail Press Ckt Failed Low

C119

N

Fuel Pump Press Ckt Failed Low

C121

N

1 Eng Speed Signal Lost

C122

N

LB Boost Ckt Failed High

C123

N

LB Boost Ckt Failed Low

C124

1

31

1

High Boost LB

C125

N

Low Boost LB

C126

N

High Boost RB

C127

N

Low Boost RB

C128

N

RB Boost Ckt Failed High

C129

N

RB Boost Ckt Failed Low

C131

N

Throttle Ckt Failed High

C132

N

Throttle Ckt Failed Low

C133

N

PTO Circuit Shorted High

C134

N

PTO Circuit Shorted Low

C135

N

Oil Press Ckt Failed High

C136

N

Pre Filter Oil Press Ckt Failed High

C137

N

Pre Filter Oil Press Ckt Failed Low

C141

N

Oil Press Ckt Failed Low

C143

0

33

Low Oil Press

C144

N

Coolant Temp Ckt Failed High

C145

N

Coolant Temp Ckt Failed Low

C147

N

Freq Throttle OOR High

C151

14-46

0

33

Y

High Coolant Temp

Version 2010/1

G = Shovel C = Engine

0 = RED 1 = YELLOW 2 = GREEN

Acoustic Signal

(Message Code)

Colour Code of Top Message

Display

Error Code

Instruction Message No.

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

C-Code TIER 1

C153

N

LBF IMT Ckt Failed High

C154

N

LBF IMT Ckt Failed Low

C155

0

33

Y

High IMT LBF

C156

N

LBR IMT Ckt Failed High

C157

N

LBR IMT Ckt Failed Low

C158

0

32

Y

High IMT LBR

C159

N

RBF IMT Ckt Failed High

C161

N

RBF IMT Ckt Failed High

C162

0

32

Y

High IMT RBF

C163

N

RBR IMT Ckt Failed High

C164

N

RBR IMT Ckt Failed Low

C165

0

32

Y

High IMT RBR

C212

N

Oil Temp Ckt Failed High

C213

N

Oil Temp Ckt Failed Low

C214

1

31

Y

High Oil Temp

C219

N

Remote Oil Level Low

C221

N

Ambient Air Press Failed High

C222

N

Ambient Air Press Failed Low

C223

N

CORS Burn Valve Open Circuit

C225

N

CORS Makeup Valve Open Circuit

C231

N

Coolant Press Ckt Failed High

C232

N

Coolant Press Ckt Failed Low

C233

0

33

Y

Low Coolant Press

C234

0

32

Y

Engine Overspeed

C235

1

31

Y

Low Coolant Level

C237

N

Multi Unit Sync Error

C252

N

Oil Level Signal Invalid

C253

0

33

C254

0

34

FSOV Open Cicuit

C259

1

31

FSOV Mech Stuck Open

Version 2010/1

Y

Specifications for Operators

Oil Level Low

14-47

G = Shovel C = Engine

0 = RED 1 = YELLOW 2 = GREEN

C261

0

33

Acoustic Signal

(Message Code)

Colour Code of Top Message

Display

Error Code

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Instruction Message No.

Specifications for Operators

Y

C-Code TIER 1

High Fuel Temp

C263

N

Fuel Temp Ckt Failed High

C265

N

Fuel Temp Ckt Failed Low

C299

N

Hot Shutdown

C316

N

Fuel Pump Open Circuit

C318

N

Fuel Pump Mech Stuck

C343

N

ECM Hardware Issue Non Mission Disabling

C346

N

ECM Software / Hardware Failure

C349

N

Output Shaft Speed above normal

C384

N

Ether Solenoid Ckt Failed

C422

N

Coolant Level Signal Invalid

C423

1

35

Timing Press Incorrect

C426

N

J1939 Datalink Can Not Transmit

C427

N

J1939 Datalink Can Not Transmit

C431

N

Idle Validation Invalid

C432

N

Idle Validation Invalid

C441

1

31

Y

Low Battery Voltage

C442

1

31

Y

High Battery Voltage

C451

N

Rail Press Ckt Failed High

C452

N

Rail Press Ckt Failed Low

C455

1

31

Rail Actuator Open Ckt

C467

1

35

Desired Timing Not Achieved

C468

1

40

Desired Rail Press not Achieved

C473

N

Remote Oil Level Signal Invalid

C487

N

Ether Bottle Empty

C489

N

AXG Speed Low Error

C514

1

40

Rail Actuator Mech Stuck

C524

N

Alt Droop SW Val Fault

C527

N

Dual Output A Shorted High or Open Ckt

C528

N

Alt Torque SW Val Fault

14-48

Version 2010/1

G = Shovel C = Engine

0 = RED 1 = YELLOW 2 = GREEN

C529

Acoustic Signal

(Message Code)

Colour Code of Top Message

Display

Error Code

Instruction Message No.

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

N

C-Code TIER 1

Dual Output B Shorted High or Open Ckt

C551

0

32

Throttle Validation Switch High Error

C553

1

31

Rail Press OOR High

C554

1

40

Rail Press Incorrect

C555

0

33

C611 C612

Y N

1

31

High Blowby Press Engine Hot Shutdown High Oil Filter Rest

C616

N

High Turbo Comp Inlet Temp LBR

C621

N

Low Power #1 LB

C622

N

Low Power #2 LB

C623

N

Low Power #3 LB

C624

N

Low Power #4 LB

C625

N

Low Power #5 LB

C626

N

Low Power #6 LB

C627

N

Low Power #7 LB

C628

N

Low Power #8 LB

C631

N

Low Power #1 RB

C632

N

Low Power #2 RB

C633

N

Low Power #3 RB

C634

N

Low Power #4 RB

C635

N

Low Power #5 RB

C636

N

Low Power #6 RB

C637

N

Low Power #7 RB

C638

N

Low Power #8 RB

C641

0

32

High Exh Temp #1 LB

C642

0

32

High Exh Temp #2 LB

C643

0

32

High Exh Temp #3 LB

C644

0

32

High Exh Temp #4 LB

C645

0

32

High Exh Temp #5 LB

C646

0

32

High Exh Temp #6 LB

Version 2010/1

Specifications for Operators

14-49

Acoustic Signal

(Message Code)

Colour Code of Top Message

Display

Error Code

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Instruction Message No.

Specifications for Operators

C-Code TIER 1

G = Shovel C = Engine

0 = RED 1 = YELLOW 2 = GREEN

C647

0

32

High Exh Temp #7 LB

C648

0

32

High Exh Temp #8 LB

C649

N

Change Lubricating Oil and Filter

C651

0

32

High Exh Temp #1 RB

C652

0

32

High Exh Temp #2 RB

C653

0

32

High Exh Temp #3 RB

C654

0

32

High Exh Temp #4 RB

C655

0

32

High Exh Temp #5 RB

C656

0

32

High Exh Temp #6 RB

C657

0

32

High Exh Temp #7 RB

C658

0

32

High Exh Temp #8 RB

C661

N

High Power #1 LB

C662

N

High Power #2 LB

C663

N

High Power #3 LB

C664

N

High Power #4 LB

C665

N

High Power #5 LB

C666

N

High Power #6 LB

C667

N

High Power #7 LB

C668

N

High Power #8 LB

C671

N

Exh Temp Ckt Failed Low #1 LB

C672

N

Exh Temp Ckt Failed Low #2 LB

C673

N

Exh Temp Ckt Failed Low #3 LB

C674

N

Exh Temp Ckt Failed Low #4 LB

C675

N

Exh Temp Ckt Failed Low #5 LB

C676

N

Exh Temp Ckt Failed Low #6 LB

C677

N

Exh Temp Ckt Failed Low #7 LB

C678

N

Exh Temp Ckt Failed Low #8 LB

C694

N

LBR Turbo Comp Inlet Temp Sesnor Ckt Failed High

C695

N

LBR Turbo Comp Inlet Temp Sesnor Ckt Failed Low

C711

N

High Power #1 RB

14-50

Version 2010/1

G = Shovel C = Engine

0 = RED 1 = YELLOW 2 = GREEN

Acoustic Signal

(Message Code)

Colour Code of Top Message

Display

Error Code

Instruction Message No.

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

C-Code TIER 1

C712

N

High Power #2 RB

C713

N

High Power #3 RB

C714

N

High Power #4 RB

C715

N

High Power #5 RB

C716

N

High Power #6 RB

C717

N

High Power #7 RB

C718

N

High Power #8 RB

C719

N

Blowby Press Ckt Failed High

C721

N

Exh Temp Ckt Failed Low #1 RB

C722

N

Exh Temp Ckt Failed Low #1 RB

C723

N

Exh Temp Ckt Failed Low #1 RB

C724

N

Exh Temp Ckt Failed Low #1 RB

C725

N

Exh Temp Ckt Failed Low #1 RB

C726

N

Exh Temp Ckt Failed Low #1 RB

C727

N

Exh Temp Ckt Failed Low #1 RB

C728

N

Exh Temp Ckt Failed Low #1 RB

C729

N

Blowby Press Ckt Failed Low

C753

N

Cam Sync Error

C777

N

Ambient Derate Error

C783

0

32

C2154

Y N

Specifications for Operators

Rapid rise in left bank front intake temp. Post Oil Filter Press Ckt Failed High

C2155

Post Oil Filter Press Ckt Failed Low

C2157

0

32

Y

Rapid rise in left bank rear intake temp.

C2158

0

32

Y

Rapid rise in right bank front intake temp.

C2159

0

32

Y

Rapid rise in right bank rear intake temp.

Version 2010/1

14-51

Specifications for Operators

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

14.2.10.4 TABLE OF AVAILABLE INSTRUCTION MESSAGES Message No.

14-52

Instruction Message

1

Engine stopped because of main Shut-Off (gate) valve. - Open the Shut-Off (gate) valve. - If failure exist further, inform service.

2

Inform service.

3

Stop the engine. - Inform service.

4

Start blocked because of main Shut-Off (gate) valve. - Open the Shut-Off (gate) valve. - If failure exist further, inform service.

5

Start blocked - Inform service.

6

The fire suppression system has been actuated. - Inform the fire brigade. - Evacuate endangered persons. - Fight the fire. - Inform service.

7

Bucket motion switched off. - Inform service.

8

No 24V at circuit breaker 11F013 - If failure exist further, inform service.

9

Ladder end switch or lock lever contact open or service arm down or unlock. - If failure exist further, inform service.

10

Emergency shut-down switch was actuated. - Unlock before restarting. - If failure exist further, inform service.

11

Engine switched off by Maintenance Safety Switch in the engine room.

12

Operate the machine into the parking position.

13

Please wait! No high idle !

14

Enable switch for refilling arm active - If failure exist further, inform service.

15

Load of the batteries too high. - Inform service.

16

Batteries are not being charged. - Inform service.

17

Inform service till end of shift and then press cancel button.

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Message No.

Instruction Message

18

Slew ring gear house brake OFF - Inform service till end of shift and then press cancel button.

19

Travel gear house brake OFF - Inform service till end of shift and then press cancel button.

20

Inform service and then press cancel button.

21

Hydraulic oil far below operating temperature ! - Pre-heat hydraulic oil or warm up at low idle speed and reduced power.

22

Engine runs (starter motor inactive).

23

A fuel reserve only is still in the tank - Order tanker.

24

Engine shutdown has been actuated from ground man.

25

Hydraulic oil below operating temperature. - Operate with reduced power !

26

Slew ring gear house brake ON

27

Hydraulic oil overheat - engine power derated

28

The VHMS is by-passed. - Reset by-pass switch.

29

Engine shutdown by keyswitch before proper engine cool down. - Before you switch off the engine, cool down the engine in the low idle for 2-3 minutes.

30

Hydraulic oil far below operating temperature ! - Pre-heat hydraulic oil or warm up at low idle speed and reduced power.

31

Continue shift but advise service.

32

Stop engine call service.

33

Derate active, continue to work. Later shutdown possible. Inform service.

34

Call service because of shutdown.

35

Interrupt work and inform service about Speed Derate .

36

Continue work until next PM (Schedule work for next PM)

37

Switch Testspeed in cab base forces the engine to run constantly 1800 1/min.

Version 2010/1

Specifications for Operators

14-53

Specifications for Operators

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Message No.

14-54

Instruction Message

38

If failure exist further, inform service.

39

Inform service if attachment in defined position.

40

Continue to work and inform service about Power Derate.

41

Cable Drum at limit. - Move the shovel in an other direction.

42

Motor overheated. Wait until cooldown. - If failure exists further, inform service.

43

Switch off and restart motor - If failure exists further, inform service.

44

Switch off and restart motor (It may be necessary to wait for cool down) - If failure exists further, inform service.

46

Switch off windscreen wiper and call service.

47

Only upper windscreen wiper! Inform service.

48

No 24V at circuit breaker 11F013a - If failure exist further, inform service.

49

Only lower windscreen wiper! Inform service.

50

Reverse travel cut out by cable drum.

51

Cable drum-motor temperature too high. Allow motor to cool down.

52

Permanently switch off by device overheating. Inform service.

53

Temporary switch off by heating-air overheating. Inform service.

54

Wait during one minute after last start of motor.

55

Risk of collision with the cable drum!

56

Key switch off and back on !

57

Cool down period !

58

Travel gear house brake ON

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Flow Charts (1-4) VHMS Main Screens

14.3

FLOW CHARTS (1-4) VHMS MAIN SCREENS

Fig. 14-22

Main screen flow chart for the Operater Level (1 of 1)

Version 2010/1

14-55

Flow Charts (1-4) VHMS Main Screens

Fig. 14-23 14-56

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Main screen flow chart for the Service Level (1 of 3) Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Fig. 14-24

Flow Charts (1-4) VHMS Main Screens

Main screen flow chart for the Service Level (2 of 3)

Version 2010/1

14-57

Flow Charts (1-4) VHMS Main Screens

Fig. 14-25 14-58

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Main screen flow chart for the Service Level (3 of 3) Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

14.4

VHMS SERVICE LEVEL

Fig. 14-26

Entering the Service Level

VHMS Service Level

Legend for Fig. 14-26: (1)

Keep key 4 pressed

(2)

Enter digits 123 and release key 4

Version 2010/1

14-59

VHMS Service Level

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

The Service Level can be activated from all of the three Main Gauge Screens in the operator mode only. If one of the Main Gauge Screens is open, keep key 4 of the key pad pressed and simultaneously enter the digits 1, 2, 3. Then release key 4. Refer to illustration (Fig. 14-26). The following screen will appear:

Fig. 14-27

Input Service ID -1-

Enter the Service ID number and press F6 to confirm.

Fig. 14-29

Input Service ID -3-

14.4.1

EXPLANATION OF THE BUTTON SYMBOLS (SERVICE LEVEL)

NOTE: The function of the buttons depends on the menu context.

NOTE: The Service ID number 0400008152 is programmed ex factory.

Functions of the buttons F1 to F6 Go to the next screen. F1 Go to the previous screen. F2

Fig. 14-28

Move the cursor down or left in a menu.

F4

Move the cursor up or right in a menu.

Input Service ID -2-

If the entered Service ID was not correct, the display changes to the following screen. Enter the correct Service ID and press F6 to confirm. The number of attempts to enter the Service ID is not limited. NOTE: If you are unsure about the correct Service ID number, please contact your supervisor or your dealer if necessary.

14-60

F3

F5

F6

Leave the sub-menu and go back to the previous main menu. Confirm any setting, or switch any function ON or OFF (1 or 0).

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

14.4.2

SERVICE MENU SELECT SCREEN

After the log-in with the Service ID, the following 8 options of the SERVICE MENU SELECT screen are available:

Fig. 14-30

Fig. 14-31

Legend for Fig. 14-30 and 14-31:

01

z Real Time Monitor Shifts to the menu which allows to display real-time controller data, refer to section 14.4.3 on page 14-62.

02

z PM-Clinic Shifts to the menu which displays PM-Clinic data, refer to section 14.4.4 on page 14-78.

03

z Serial/GCC No. Setting Registers the serial numbers of the excavator model, the engine, and the VHMS monitor, refer to section 14.4.5 on page 14-80.

04

z Memory Clear Shifts to the menu which allows to clear the records in the VHMS memory, refer to section 14.4.6 on page 14-81.

05

z Failure History Shifts to the screen which displays the event and error history for service, refer to section 14.4.7 on page 14-83.

06

z Maintenance Shifts to the menu which allows to manage the data of the Maintenance Monitor, refer to section 14.4.8 on page 14-84.

07

z Snapshot Shifts to the menu which allows to manage the saving options of machine data in manual snapshots, refer to section 14.4.9 on page 14-85.

08

z Setting Shifts to the menu which allows to manage specific settings of machine data, refer to section 14.4.10 on page 14-86.

Service Menu - items 01 - 06

Service Menu - items 03 - 08

Version 2010/1

VHMS Service Level

14-61

VHMS Service Level

14.4.3

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

REAL TIME MENU SELECT SCREEN

NOTE: For entering the Service Menu refer to section 14.4 on page 14-59.

14.4.3.1

REAL TIME MENU, OPTION: 01 ENGINE 1

Press F3 or F4 to move up or down in the menu.

Use the three REAL TIME MENU SELECT screens to open sub-screens for all 15 options. The sub-screens are called REAL TIME MONITOR. i

Fig. 14-33

Real Time Menu, selection 01

Select menu option 01 Engine 1 and press button F6.i

Fig. 14-34

Real Time Monitor - Engine 1, 1 of 6

Press F1 or F2 to toggle the screens.i

Fig. 14-32

REAL TIME MENU - options 1 -15

The following REAL TIME MONITOR screens display all relevant controller data in real-time. Use the realtime data for testing & adjustment work and for troubleshooting.

14-62

Fig. 14-35

Real Time Monitor - Engine 1, 2 of 6

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Fig. 14-36

Real Time Monitor - Engine 1, 3 of 6

VHMS Service Level

Fig. 14-39

Real Time Monitor - Engine 1, 6 of 6

14.4.3.2

REAL TIME MENU, OPTION: 02 PTO 1

Press F3 or F4 to move up or down in the menu.

Fig. 14-37

Real Time Monitor - Engine 1, 4 of 6

Fig. 14-40

Real Time Menu, selection 02

Select menu option 02 PTO 1 and press button F6.

Fig. 14-38

Real Time Monitor - Engine 1, 5 of 6

Fig. 14-41

Version 2010/1

Real Time Monitor - PTO 1, 1 of 1

14-63

VHMS Service Level

14.4.3.3

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

REAL TIME MENU, OPTION: 03 HYDRAULIC

Press F3 or F4 to move up or down in the menu.

Fig. 14-42

Fig. 14-45

Real Time Monitor - Hydr. Press. 3 of 4

Fig. 14-46

Real Time Monitor - Hydr. Press. 4 of 4

Real Time Menu, selection 03

Select menu option 03 Hydraulic and press F6.

Fig. 14-43

Real Time Monitor - Hydr. Press. 1 of 4

Press F1 or F2 to toggle the screens.

Fig. 14-44

14-64

Real Time Monitor - Hydr. Press. 2 of 4

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

VHMS Service Level

14.4.3.4

REAL TIME MENU, OPTION: 04 SLEW

Select option 05 Electrical Equipm. and press F6

Fig. 14-47

Real Time Menu, selection 04

Fig. 14-50

Real Time Monitor - Electr. Equipm. 1 of 2

Select menu option 04 Slew and press F6.

Press F1 or F2 to toggle the screens.

Fig. 14-48

Fig. 14-51

Real Time Monitor - Electr. Equipm. 2 of 2

14.4.3.6

REAL TIME MENU, OPTION: 06 EMERGENCY STOP

Real Time Monitor - Slew 1 of 1

REMARK The entries SLEW SPEED ANALOG 11B144 and SLEW POSITION 60B059 only apply to PC5500 (automatic slew speed system).

Press F3 or F4 to move up or down in the menu.

14.4.3.5

REAL TIME MENU, OPTION: 05 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

Press F3 or F4 to move up or down in the menu.

Fig. 14-52

Fig. 14-49

Real Time Menu, selection 06

Real Time Menu, selection 05

Version 2010/1

14-65

VHMS Service Level

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Select option 06 Emergency Stop and press F6.

Select option 07 Manual Switch and press F6.

Fig. 14-53

Fig. 14-56

Real Time Monitor - Emerg. Stop 1 of 2

Real Time Monitor - Manual Switch 1 of 4

Press F1 or F2 to toggle the screens.

Press F1 or F2 to toggle the screens.

Fig. 14-54

Real Time Monitor - Emerg. Stop 2 of 2

Fig. 14-57

Real Time Monitor - Manual Switch 2 of 4

14.4.3.7

REAL TIME MENU, OPTION: 07 MANUAL SWITCH

Fig. 14-58

Real Time Monitor - Manual Switch 3 of 4

Press F3 or F4 to move up or down in the menu.

Fig. 14-55

14-66

Real Time Menu, selection 07

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

VHMS Service Level

Press F1 or F2 to toggle the screens.

Fig. 14-59

Real Time Monitor - Manual Switch 4 of 4

Fig. 14-62

Real Time Monitor - Centr. Lube 2 of 2

14.4.3.8

REAL TIME MENU, OPTION: 08 CENTRAL LUBE SYSTEM 1

14.4.3.9

REAL TIME MENU, OPTION: 09 SLEW RING GEAR LUBE SYSTEM

Press F3 or F4 to move up or down in the menu.

Press F3 or F4 to move up or down in the menu.

Fig. 14-60

Real Time Menu, selection 08

Select option 08 Central Lube System 1 and press F6.

Fig. 14-63

Real Time Menu, selection 09

Select 09 Slew ring gear Lube System and press F6.

Fig. 14-61

Real Time Monitor - Centr. Lube 1 of 2 Fig. 14-64

Version 2010/1

Real Time Monitor - Slew ring lube 1 of 2

14-67

VHMS Service Level

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Press F1 or F2 to toggle the screens.

Press F1 or F2 to toggle the screens.

Fig. 14-65

Fig. 14-68

Real Time Monitor - Slew ring lube 2 of 2

Real Time Monitor - Windscr. Wiper 2 of 2

14.4.3.10 REAL TIME MENU, OPTION: 10 WINDSCREEN WIPER

14.4.3.11 REAL TIME MENU, OPTION: 11 LADDER

Press F3 or F4 to move up or down in the menu.

Press F3 or F4 to move up or down in the menu.

Fig. 14-66

Fig. 14-69

Real Time Menu, selection 10

Real Time Menu, selection 11

Select option 10 Windscreen Wiper and press F6.

Select option 11 Ladder and press F6.

Fig. 14-67

Fig. 14-70

14-68

Real Time Monitor - Windscr. Wiper 1 of 2

Real Time Monitor - Ladder 1 of 5

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

VHMS Service Level

Press F1 or F2 to toggle the screens.

Fig. 14-71

Real Time Monitor - Ladder 2 of 5

Fig. 14-74

Real Time Monitor - Ladder 5 of 5

14.4.3.12 REAL TIME MENU, OPTION: 12 SERVICE ARM Press F3 or F4 to move up or down in the menu.

Fig. 14-72

Real Time Monitor - Ladder 3 of 5

Fig. 14-75

Real Time Menu, selection 12

Select option 12 Service arm and press F6.

Fig. 14-73

Real Time Monitor - Ladder 4 of 5

Fig. 14-76

Version 2010/1

Real Time Monitor - Service arm 1 of 5

14-69

VHMS Service Level

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Press F1 or F2 to toggle the screens.

Fig. 14-77

Real Time Monitor - Service arm 2 of 5

Fig. 14-80

Real Time Monitor - Service arm 5 of 5

14.4.3.13 REAL TIME MENU, OPTION: 13 PILOT CONTROL Press F3 or F4 to move up or down in the menu.

Fig. 14-78

Real Time Monitor - Service arm 3 of 5

Fig. 14-81

Real Time Menu, selection 13

Select option 13 Pilot control and press F6.

Fig. 14-79

Real Time Monitor - Service arm 4 of 5

Fig. 14-82

14-70

Real Time Monitor - Pilot control 1 of 6

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

VHMS Service Level

Press F1 or F2 to toggle the screens.

Fig. 14-83

Real Time Monitor - Pilot control 2 of 6

Fig. 14-86

Real Time Monitor - Pilot control 5 of 6

Fig. 14-84

Real Time Monitor - Pilot control 3 of 6

Fig. 14-87

Real Time Monitor - Pilot control 6 of 6

14.4.3.14 REAL TIME MENU, OPTION: 14 OTHER ITEMS Press F3 or F4 to move up or down in the menu.

Fig. 14-85

Real Time Monitor - Pilot control 4 of 6

Fig. 14-88

Real Time Menu, selection 14

Select option 14 Other items and press F6

Version 2010/1

14-71

VHMS Service Level

Fig. 14-89

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Real Time Monitor - Other items 1 of 4

Fig. 14-92

Real Time Monitor - Other items 4 of 4

Press F1 or F2 to toggle the screens.

14.4.3.15 REAL TIME MENU, OPTION: 15 OUTPUT SIGNALS Press F3 or F4 to move up or down in the menu.

Fig. 14-90

Real Time Monitor - Other items 2 of 4

Fig. 14-93

Real Time Menu, selection 15

For testing and troubleshooting the Output Signals can be switched on (1) and off (0). For the appropriate procedure refer to Output Signals with deactivated MTC-Evaluation on page 77. Select option 15 Output Signals and press F6.

Fig. 14-91

Real Time Monitor - Other items 3 of 4

Fig. 14-94

Real Time Monitor - Output Signals 1/24

Press F1 or F2 to toggle the screens. 14-72

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

VHMS Service Level

Fig. 14-95

Real Time Monitor - Output Signals 2/24

Fig. 14-98

Real Time Monitor - Output Signals 5/24

Fig. 14-96

Real Time Monitor - Output Signals 3/24

Fig. 14-99

Real Time Monitor - Output Signals 6/24

Fig. 14-97

Real Time Monitor - Output Signals 4/24

Fig. 14-100 Real Time Monitor - Output Signals 7/24

Version 2010/1

14-73

VHMS Service Level

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Fig. 14-101 Real Time Monitor - Output Signals 8/24

Fig. 14-104 Real Time Monitor - Output Signals 11/24

Fig. 14-102 Real Time Monitor - Output Signals 9/24

Fig. 14-105 Real Time Monitor - Output Signals 12/24

Fig. 14-103 Real Time Monitor - Output Signals 10/24

Fig. 14-106 Real Time Monitor - Output Signals 13/24

14-74

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

VHMS Service Level

Fig. 14-107 Real Time Monitor - Output Signals 14/24

Fig. 14-110 Real Time Monitor - Output Signals 17/24

Fig. 14-108 Real Time Monitor - Output Signals 15/24

Fig. 14-111 Real Time Monitor - Output Signals 18/24

Fig. 14-109 Real Time Monitor - Output Signals 16/24

Fig. 14-112 Real Time Monitor - Output Signals 19/24

Version 2010/1

14-75

VHMS Service Level

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Fig. 14-113 Real Time Monitor - Output Signals 20/24

Fig. 14-114 Real Time Monitor - Output Signals 21/24

Fig. 14-116 Real Time Monitor - Output Signals 23/24

Fig. 14-117 Real Time Monitor - Output Signals 24/24

Fig. 14-115 Real Time Monitor - Output Signals 22/24

14-76

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

14.4.3.16 OUTPUT SIGNALS WITH DEACTIVATED MTCEVALUATION

z

VHMS Service Level

Press button F6 (ON /OFF) to switch the solenoid valve 57K506b-1 ON (= 1) manually.f

As an on-board assistance for troubleshooting, the output signals of the REAL TIME MONITOR selection "15 Output Signals" can manually be switched on (1) and off (0), if the MTC-evaluation is deactivated. NOTE: For the procedure how to activate and deactivate the MTC-evaluation, refer to section 14.4.10.5 on page 14-90, PLC-evaluation ON/ OFF. Terminology (MTC & PLC) MTC is a synonym for PLC. Both acronyms indicate the same main control module. MTC is the acronym of Master Turbo Controller PLC is the acronym of Programmable Logic Controller WARNING If you need to deactivate the MTC-evaluation for testing, strictly observe the operating instructions for deactivation & activation of the MTC-evaluation. Refer to section "PLC-evaluation ON/OFF on page 91".

SAMPLE: Assumption It is necessary to check if voltage is present in the wiring of 57K506b-1 and at the solenoid valve itself.

Fig. 14-118 Output signal manually switched ON z

Now check the voltage in the circuit of solenoid valve 57K506b-1 and repair if necessary.

z

After check and repair are finished:

1. Switch the solenoid valve OFF (= 0) again in this case. 2. Activate the MTC-evaluation again, refer to "PLC-evaluation ON/OFF on page 91". 3. Switch off the main key switch (20S001) for more than 5 seconds, in order to cause a reset. After such a reset the MTC-evaluation is activated again and the electrical component is switched to its primary condition again by the system.

Procedure z

Stop the engine.

z

Turn the main key switch 20S001 to ON position.

z

Enter the service level on the VHMS monitor.

z

Deactivate the MTC-evaluation, refer to "PLCevaluation ON/OFF on page 91".

z

On the SERVICE MENU SELECT screen, select and open the entry 01 Real Time Monitor. Refer to Fig. no. 14-30.

z

Select and open the last option 15 Output signals. Refer to Fig. no. 14-93.

z

Move to the screen 16/ 24 REAL TIME MONITOR (Output Signals Control panel).

z

Use buttons F3 or F4 and select the second entry VALVE FAN DRIVE 1 MED.

Version 2010/1

14-77

VHMS Service Level

14.4.4

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

PM-CLINIC

NOTE: For entering the Service Menu refer to section 14.4 on page 14-59. The PM-Clinic Menu provides the following features: 1. General data of the machine and operating conditions are displayed, refer to Fig. 14-120 & 14-121. 2. Power Check relevant data can be frozen and also displayed by actuating: z

Button F4 in Fig. 14-123.

z

Push button 20S082 (R.H. control lever), which is normally used as truck counter.

3. The frozen data can be stored 3 times.

14.4.4.1

GENERAL

Press F3 or F4 to move up or down in the menu.

Fig. 14-121 PM-CLINIC - screen GENERAL 2 of 2 Press F6 to get into the second PM-CLINIC menu POWER CHECK Menu. In case data are already stored in the Menu POWER CHECK (Fig. 14-123) the following screen (Fig. 14122) appears before screen POWER CHECK (Fig. 14123) opens.

Fig. 14-119 Service Menu - 02 PM-CLINIC selected Select 02 PM-CLINIC and press F6.

Fig. 14-122 Delete PM-Clinic data - Yes/No If you want to save the current PM-Clinic data, delete the previously saved data by pressing button F6. If you don’t want to delete all PM-Clinic data, press button F5 in order to open the following screens of PM-Clinic POWER CHECK.

Fig. 14-120 PM-CLINIC - screen GENERAL 1 of 2 Press F1 or F2 to toggle the screen.

14-78

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

14.4.4.2

POWER CHECK

VHMS Service Level

After pressing button F6 in screen POWER CHECK 3/3 (Fig. 14-124) the following screen appears:

The POWER CHECK screens should assist you if you want to check or identify: (a) engine performance/engine output power (b) pressure adjustment/hydraulic system problems There are 3 screens POWER CHECK for freezing data under different conditions. NOTE: In order to obtain a complete POWER CHECK, the F6 button should only be pressed after the 3rd screen (Fig. 14-124) "POWER CHECK 3/3" has been frozen. Fig. 14-125 Record PM-Clinic data - Yes/No Press button F6 if you want to record the data. Press button F5 for exit if you don’t want to record the data. The system returns to the POWER CHECK screen

Fig. 14-123 PM-CLINIC - POWER CHECK 1/3 It is possible to store the values of 3 different POWER CHECKS in the screens 1/3, 2/3, and 3/3. Press button F1 or F2 to monitor the POWER CHECK data of all 3 screens. If you want to freeze the data, press button F4 to move the yellow mark to Hold at the bottom of the display (Fig. 14-124). If Hold is highlighted yellow, press button F4 to freeze the current PM-CLINIC data. To show the current data again, press button F3. The yellow mark moves to Monitoring again (Fig. 14-123).

Fig. 14-124 PM-CLINIC - POWER CHECK 3/3

Version 2010/1

14-79

VHMS Service Level

14.4.5

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

SERIAL/GCC NO. SETTING

NOTE: For entering the Service Menu refer to section 14.4 on page 14-59. Use this option to display the serial number of: (a) the excavator (b) the Diesel engine (c) the VHMS monitor MH801 Press F3 or F4 to move up or down in the menu.

Fig. 14-126 Service Menu - item 03 selected Select 03 Serial/GCC No. Setting and press F6.

Fig. 14-127 Screen SERIAL NO SETTING

14-80

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

14.4.6

VHMS Service Level

MEMORY CLEAR

NOTE: For entering the Service Menu refer to section 14.4 on page 14-59.

14.4.6.1

INPUT MEMORY CLEAR ID

Use this option to enter the Memory Clear ID, which enables the user to delete memory data. With this function it is made sure that only authorized service personnel may delete saved data. Press F3 or F4 to move up or down in the menu. Fig. 14-129 Input Memory Clear ID Enter the Identification Number (ID) for clearing the memory and press F6 to confirm.

Fig. 14-128 Service Menu - item 04 selected Select 04 Memory Clear and press F6. Entry of the Identification Number Fig. 14-130 Memory Clear ID is typed in If 04 Memory Clear is selected in the Service Menu Selection screen, the display changes to the Input Memory Clear ID screen.

If the entered ID is not correct, the display changes to the following screen. Enter the ID number again.

The ID number entry is done via the key pad. The ID number is a number with up to 10 digits (same as the Service ID number). The enterd number is compared with the number which is registered in the VHMS controller. If the check result is correct, the display changes to the MEMORY CLEAR screen (Fig. 14-132), refer to section 14.4.6.2 on page 14-82.

Fig. 14-131 Enter Memory Clear ID again

Version 2010/1

14-81

VHMS Service Level

14.4.6.2

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

MEMORY CLEAR SCREEN

NOTE: For entering the Memory Clear ID refer to section 14.4.6.1 on page 14-81. After the correct Memory Clear ID is entered, the following MEMORY CLEAR menu will open. Press button F3 or F4 to move up or down in the menu and select the requested data set (01 - 06) which should be cleared in the memory.

Fig. 14-132 Memory Clear Menu - item 01 selected Confirm your selection by pressing button F6.

Fig. 14-133 Memory Clear - confirmation for deletion Press button F6 to confirm the deletion of the selected data or press F5 to exit. The deletion procedure is the same for all 6 entries in the above MEMORY CLEAR menu (Fig. 14-132).

14-82

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

14.4.7

VHMS Service Level

FAILURE HISTORY

NOTE: For entering the Service Menu refer to section 14.4 on page 14-59. Press F3 or F4 to move up or down in the menu.

The chart FAILURE HISTORY(for Service) is displayed in the reverse order of the failure occurrence. The failure message which was saved lastly, is shown at the top of the displayed chart. As long as any listed failure is not rectified, the failure detection end time is not displayed. If you want to delete any failure record from the displayed chart: (a) Press button F3 or F4 to select any failure record. (b) Press F6 to delete the selected failure record. If you want to delete more failure records from the chart, proceed analogously.

Fig. 14-134 Service Menu - item 05 selected Select 05 Failure History and press button F6.

Fig. 14-135 Screen FAILURE HISTORY Legend for Fig. 14-135: (1)

Frame which indicates the selected failure message (using buttons F3 or F4)

(2)

Failure detection start time

(3)

- Number in the failure history chart (2) - failure code (G00253) - failure text message (Emergency ...)

(4)

Failure detection end time

(5)

Total number of saved failure messages in this failure history

Version 2010/1

14-83

VHMS Service Level

14.4.8

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

MAINTENANCE MONITOR

Press F6 to reset the selected service meter.

NOTE: For entering the Service Menu refer to section 14.4 on page 14-59. Press F3 or F4 to move up or down in the menu.

Fig. 14-138 Maintenance Monitor - reset function

Fig. 14-136 Service Menu - item 06 selected

NOTE: In this section only the selection of the 250h Maintenance is described as a sample. The procedure is the same for all remaining Maintenance entries on the MAINTENANCE MONITOR (Fig. 14-137).

Select 06 Maintenance and press F6.

Fig. 14-137 Maintenance Monitor - overview Maintenance Confirmation by the Service Personnel Maintenance indicated with yellow or red background colour should be confirmed by service personnel in the Service Menu subsequent to the execution of the respective maintenance. After that the selection in the Service Menu, used for maintenance confirmation, is without any function. The confirmation of the maintenance is stored in the VHMS controller. Example: 250h maintenance is required (red marked), service meter reading is -2 hours.

14-84

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

14.4.9

VHMS Service Level

SNAPSHOT

NOTE: For entering the Service Menu refer to section 14.4 on page 14-59. Press F3 or F4 to move up or down in the menu.

Fig. 14-142 Snapshot running 5:34 minutes When data capturing is completed, the following screen appears for 2 seconds. Fig. 14-139 Service Menu - item 07 selected Select 07 Snapshot and press F6.

Fig. 14-143 Snapshot finished

Fig. 14-140 Snapshot - Start Monitor Press the START button F1 in the upper screen (Fig. 14-140) in order to save the (manual) SNAPSHOT data in the VHMS controller.

After that the screen changes back to the SNAPSHOT start monitor (Fig. 14-140). For any analysis of the manual SNAPSHOT data it is necessary to download these data onto a laptop. REMARK For download and analysis the VHMS-Setting Tool and the VHMS-Analizing Tool are required.

NOTE: If certain troubles occur, machine data at the time of the failure occurrence are saved automatically (automatic Snapshot). For details refer to the respective TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL.

Fig. 14-141 Snapshot started and running 1 minute

Version 2010/1

14-85

VHMS Service Level

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

14.4.10 SETTINGS NOTE: For entering the Service Menu refer to section 14.4 on page 14-59.

Enter the requested number of minutes via the key pad, for example 30.

This option allows you to determine the basic operating and system conditions (settings) via the VHMS system. Press F3 or F4 to move up or down in the menu.

Fig. 14-146 Enter CLS 1 PAUSE TIME Press button F6 to confirm the entered value.

Fig. 14-144 Service Menu - item 08 selected Select 08 Setting and press button F6.

14.4.10.1 CENTRAL LUBRICATION SYSTEM (CLS 1), SCREEN 1/8

Lubrication Cycle Counter Setting Use buttons F3 or F4 to select the Lubrication Cycle Counter (Fig. 14-145) and then press F6 to enter the Lubrication Cycle Counter setting screen. REMARK It is recommended to keep the counter reading over the live time of the machine. If necessary enter the number of the last download.

Fig. 14-145 SETTINGS 1/8 - CLS 1 SETTINGS Options on screen CLS 1 SETTINGS (Fig. 14-145): Pause Time Setting Use buttons F3 or F4 to select the CLS 1 Pause time and then press button F6 to open the Pause time setting screen (Fig. 14-146). Only values between 10 and 60 minutes can be selected.

14-86

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

14.4.10.2 SWING LUBRICATION SYSTEM (SLS), SCREEN 2/8

VHMS Service Level

Lubrication Cycle Counter Setting Use buttons F3 or F4 to select the Lubrication Cycle Counter and then press button F6 to enter Lubrication Cycle Counter Setting screen. REMARK It is recommendable to keep the counter reading over the live time of the machine. If necessary enter the number of the last download.

Fig. 14-147 SETTINGS 2/8 - SLS SETTINGS Press F1 or F2 to move up or down in the menu. Options on screen SLS SETTINGS 2/8 (Fig. 14-147): Pause Time Setting Use buttons F3 or F4 to select the Pause time and then press button F6 to enter the Pause time setting screen (Fig. 14-148). Only values between 10 and 20 minutes can be selected. Enter the requested number of minutes via the key pad, for example 13.

Fig. 14-148 Enter SLS SETTINGS Press button F6 to confirm the entered value.

Version 2010/1

14-87

VHMS Service Level

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

14.4.10.3 QMIN - QMAX - SETTING, SCREEN 3/8

14.4.10.4 OTHER SETTINGS 1/2, SCREEN 4/8

The settings Qmin and Qmax are provided for testing and adjustment procedures on the pump regulation system. Refer to the relevant descriptions in section 7 of this Service Manual.

Fig. 14-150 SETTINGS 4/8-OTHER SETTINGS (1/2) Press F3 or F4 to move up or down in the menu.

Fig. 14-149 SETTINGS 3/8 - Qmin-Qmax-SETTING Press button F1 or F2 to move up or down in the menu and then press button F6 to confirm your selection. Qmin This setting is e.g. used for the adjustment of the secondary relief valves.

NOTE: This screen only displays current information without any option for settings. REMARK For changing the settings of e.g. Language, Date, Time, and Daylight saving time refer to section 14.2.8 on page 14-18 "Settings for Operators". Hydraulic Oil & PTO Gear Oil Definition Table

Qmax This setting is e.g. used for the adjustment of the backpressure valve. AUTOMATIC This is the standard setting for machine operation (pump regulation). NOTE: If the setting Qmax is activated engine start is not possible. Always remember to activate the setting AUTOMATIC (pump regulation) again for normal machine operation, after any testing or adjustment under the condition of Qmin or Qmax is finished.

14-88

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

VHMS Service Level

Fig. 14-151 Hydraulic Oil & PTO Gear Oil Definition Table

Version 2010/1

14-89

VHMS Service Level

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

14.4.10.5 OTHER SETTINGS 2/2, SCREEN 5/8

PTO Gear Oil Viscosity Use this option to save the specification of the used PTO gear oil in the system. This saved information takes effect on the monitoring and controlling characteristics during machine operation. Select Oil viscosity gear and press button F6.

Fig. 14-152 SETTINGS 5/8-OTHER SETTINGS (2/2) Press button F3 or F4 to move up or down in the menu, and press button F6 to open the selected submenu. Fig. 14-154 PTO gear oil selection chart Hydraulic Oil Viscosity Use this option to save the specification of the used hydraulic oil in the system. This saved information takes effect on the monitoring and controlling characteristics during machine operation. Select Oil viscosity hydraulic and press button F6.

Fig. 14-155 PTO gear oil selection chart Refer to the Hydraulic Oil & PTO Gear Oil Definition Table (Fig. 14-151) and choose the required PTO gear oil specification according to the specific temperature conditions.

Fig. 14-153 Hydraulic oil selection chart

Press button F3 or F4 to select the required PTO gear oil specification on the above screen (Fig. 14-155) and press button F6 for confirmation.

Press button F1 or F2 to toggle the 5 screens. Refer to the Hydraulic Oil & PTO Gear Oil Definition Table (Fig. 14-151) and choose the required hydraulic oil specification according to the specific temperature conditions. Press button F3 or F4 to select the required hydraulic oil specification on the above screen (Fig. 14-153) and press button F6 for confirmation.

14-90

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Messages ON/OFF Use this option to avoid and eliminate unnecessary failure messages during certain service activities. In the OFF-state, setting works are not interrupted by accidentally generated messages and the memory will not be filled with messages caused by testing operations. Control and monitoring functions remain active. Every setting modification of the function Messages ON/OFF is saved in the service memory. Press button F3 or F4 to move up or down in the menu.

VHMS Service Level

If the MTC-evaluation is switched OFF, it is possible to manipulate the switch status (0/1) of the electrical components which are displayed on the Real Time Monitor, option 15 Output Signals, refer to section 14.4.3.15 on page 14-72. But always remember that all monitoring and control functions of the MTC controller are deactivated in this OFF-state. The MTC does no longer evaluate input signals and it does not transmit any control output signals. Every setting modification of the option PLC-evaluation ON/OFF is saved in the service memory. CAUTION As long as the PLC-evaluation is switched OFF, all monitoring and control functions of the MTC controller are inoperative.

Pre-conditions for the deactivation of the PLCevaluation z The engine must stand still. z

Fig. 14-156 Message OFF selected

The main key switch (20S001) must be in ON position.

If the option Messages ON/OFF is selected, press button F6 to deactivate messages (= OFF). After testing or service work is finished, activate the messages again by switching Messages ON/OFF to ON again. Optionally switch off the main key switch (20S001) for more than 5 seconds, in order to cause a reset. After such a reset the function Messages ON/OFF is set to ON again by the system. Fig. 14-157 PLC-evaluation OFF selected PLC-evaluation ON/OFF Use this option to deactivate the MTC-evaluation, if testing or troubleshooting procedures must be performed without any intervention of the MTC controller. Terminology (MTC & PLC) MTC is a synonym for PLC. Both acronyms indicate the same main control module. MTC is the acronym of Master Turbo Controller PLC is the acronym of Programmable Logic Controller

Version 2010/1

Use buttons F3 or F4 to select PLC-evaluation ON/ OFF. Then press button F6 to deactivate the PLC (= OFF). After testing or service work is finished, activate the MTC again by switching PLC-evaluation ON/OFF to ON again. Optionally switch off the main key switch (20S001) for more than 5 seconds, in order to cause a reset. After such a reset the function PLC-evaluation ON/OFF is set to ON again by the system.

14-91

VHMS Service Level

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

14.4.10.6 SHUTDOWN BYPASS ON/OFF For purposes of initial start-up and during troubleshooting it is possible to bypass trouble conditions which may cause a shutdown. Refer to the following 3 screenshots.

Even if the automatic shutdown is deactivated, a corresponding message is generated at the moment when the trouble condition for a shutdown is met. Every setting modification of the function SHUTDOWN BYPASS ON/OFF is saved in the service memory.

WARNING Only activate the Shutdown Bypass in case of emergency. Fatal injury and serious damage of the machine may occur.

Press button F1 or F2 to toggle the 3 screens.

CAUTION If you consciously deactivate the automatic Shutdown for troubleshooting, always make sure that there is no risk for personal injury and damage of the machine.

REMARK If you feel unsure about the function SHUTDOWN BYPASS ON/OFF contact your supervisor.

Fig. 14-158 Shutdown Bypass ON/OFF (1/3)

Explanation of the Function Logic (1) SHUTDOWN BYPASS OFF - Standard setting The BYPASS of any trouble condition is switched OFF (Bypass = deactivated). In this case the trouble condition is not bypassed and it does trigger a shutdown, if the trouble condition is met (Shutdown = activated)

Fig. 14-159 Shutdown Bypass ON/OFF (2/3)

(2) SHUTDOWN BYPASS ON - Exceptional setting The BYPASS of any trouble condition is switched ON (Bypass = activated). In this case the trouble condition is bypassed and it does not trigger a shutdown, even if the trouble condition is met (Shutdown = deactivated) An activated SHUTDOWN BYPASS remains active until the setting of of the SHUTDOWN BYPASS is switched to OFF again. z

If the SHUTDOWN BYPASS is not switched to OFF again, this condition is only stored in the Failure History (Service Level) after next start, invisible for the operator.

14-92

Fig. 14-160 Shutdown Bypass ON/OFF (3/3) Use buttons F3 and F4 to select the desired shutdown option. Then press button F6 (ON/OFF) to confirm your selection.

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

VHMS Service Level

Automatic Shutdown Functions (Standard Setting = OFF) There are 3 different kinds of system intervention which are combined in the term SHUTDOWN. Refer to the below samples:

Fig. 14-161 Different kinds of SHUTDOWN Legend for Fig. 14-161

(1)

z Engine shutdown In case the hydraulic oil level is definitely too low, the engine is shutdown

(2)

z Bucket cut off In case the lubrication is disturbed, the bucket movement is cut off after a specified time period

(3)

z Start blocked In case the main gate valve is not open, engine start is blocked

(4)

Spare option

Version 2010/1

14-93

Interface-Connection VHMS-Controller

14.5

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

INTERFACE-CONNECTION VHMS-CONTROLLER

Fig. 14-162 Interface-connection VHMS-controller

14-94

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Legend for Fig. 14-162 (1)

VHMS monitor (MH801)

(2)

MTC-controller (11K301)

(3)

Interface panel on the rear of the operator’s console

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

11X027a - VHMS Setting Tool - VHMS Analysis Tool 20X323 (LAN connector) - CoDeSys Software - Visualization 20X336 - Service Connector for the VHMS Monitor (MH801) 20X052-1 QUANTUM Service Connector

14.5.1

Interface-Connection VHMS-Controller

VHMS-CONTROLLER

The VHMS-Controller (10K300) provides interfaces and options for the user as follows: - Data link to the VHMS monitor - Data link to the MTC-controller - Data link to Quantum (engine control) - VHMS programming - Input of operator settings - Input of machine settings - Reading out machine troble codes - Download of snapshot data - Download of VHMS memory data - Trouble shooting features & assistance - Service link to Quantum (engine control)

REMARK Data cables, hardware devices, and software tools for data exchange via the VHMS interface connections are optional equipment. For detailed information about the VHMS software refer to the Troubleshooting Manual of your machine.

Version 2010/1

14-95

Wiring of the VHMS-Controller

14.6

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

WIRING OF THE VHMS-CONTROLLER

Fig. 14-163 VHMS-Controller connectors 14-96

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Wiring of the VHMS-Controller

Legend for Fig. 14-163 (1)

z VHMS-Controller (10K300) Mounted in the cab base

(2)

LED indicator During standard operation the controller is continuously counting up a loop of digits. In case of any malfunction the counting loop is stopped.

(3)

Type label

(4)

Connector panel

(5)

Supply voltage indicator

(6)

z LED green ON = supply voltage (24V) OK

(7)

LED yellow ON = supply voltage error

z

z

CN2-B (green) Remark: not used

CN3-A (white) Remark: Pin 1 = tacho check (to Quantum unit 52K014) Pin 9 = connection check Pin 4, 12, 13 = RS232 interface to MTC Pin

Function

1

D_IN8

4

RS232 TX2

9

GND

12

RS232 RX2

13

RS232 GND

Pin layout of the sockets at the VHMS-Controller:

CN1 (white) Remark: Supply voltage & ground Pin

Function

6

VBB_IN

7

VBB_IN

Pin

Function

8

VB_IN

12

GND

9

VB_IN

11

GND

12

GND

18

Flash_write

19

GND

20

GND

CN3-B (white)

CN2-A (green) Remark: for optional equipment ORBComm Pin

Function

17

(low active input)

Version 2010/1

14-97

Wiring of the VHMS-Controller

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

CN4-A (white) Remark: Pin 4, 12, 13 = CAN bus to Quantum Pin 5, 6, 14 = CAN bus to VHMS monitor and service connector 20X336 PIN 9, 10, 11 = RS232 interface to 20X027a and 11X027b CAN 0 = interface to VHMS monitor CAN 1 = interface to Quantum 20X027a = download or programming in cab 20X027b = download or programming in cab base Pin

Function

4

CAN 1 +

5

CAN 0 Shield

6

CAN 0 +

9

RS232 GND

10

RS232 RX0

11

RS232 TX0

12

CAN 1 -

13

CAN 1 Shield

14

CAN 0 -

CN4-B (white) Remark: for optional equipment ORBComm RS232 interface to ORBComm controller Pin

Function

3

RS232 GND

4

RS232 TX1

9

GND (shield)

10

RS232 RX1

CN5 (black) Remark: not used

14-98

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Wiring of the VHMS-Controller

This page was left blank intentionally.

Version 2010/1

14-99

Global Layout of the MTC Control System VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

14.7

GLOBAL LAYOUT OF THE MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Fig. 14-164 Global layout of the MTC control system 14-100

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM Global Layout of the MTC Control System

Legend for Fig. 14-164: (1)

VHMS monitor (MH801) including key pad - located in the operator’s cab

(2)

VHMS controller - located in the cab support

(3)

Engine control modules (3 pcs) "Quantum system" - fitted at the engine

(4)

CAN bus - between VHMS controller and VHMS monitor

(5)

CAN bus - between VHMS controller and Quantum

(6)

Serial interface (RS 323) - between MTC and VHMS controller

(7)

MTC [MTC = Master Turbo Controller]

(8)

CAN bus - internal CAN bus between MTC and nodes

(9)

Node, type ICN-V and type ICN-D, [ICN = Intelligent CAN Node] - interface between internal CAN bus and electr. machine components

(10)

CAN node type ICN-V (9 pcs)

(11)

CAN node type ICN-D (6 pcs)

(12)

INPUT (status signal from component) - binary and analog inputs, e.g. signal from any switch

(13)

OUTPUT (control signal to component) - digital outputs, e.g. signal to any solenoid valve

NOTE: Optional equipment as ORBCOMM or MODULAR MINING SYSTEM can be connected to the system. Refer to the specific documents and Wiring Diagrams.

Version 2010/1

14-101

Global Layout of the MTC Control System VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

14.7.1

MTC (MASTER TURBO CONTROLLER)

14.7.1.1

MTC-FLOWCHART

Fig. 14-165 MTC-Flowchart

14.7.1.2

MTC FEATURES

The MTC is a shock & vibration resistant (4G) controller for mobile configuration. It is dust & water resistant and works within a temperature range of -40°C to +85°C without any separate heating or cooling equipment. It is equipped with a motherboard with 32-Bit / 396 MHz and Floating Point Unit (parallel working process). The task time is < 1 µs.

The second part of the Microcontroller is the “Watch Dog” function. It includes system check, LED´s, and Input / Output sensing. Data storing features are: Compact Flash Card for data storing, real-time watching, and FRAM for safe data storing. There are also 2 DIGITAL main inputs & 2 DIGITAL main outputs (max. 400mA short cut resistant) including detection of wiring connection.

It runs with the software system CoDeSys V2.3.9.10 It is equipped with the following connections: 4x Main CAN open – connections, 2x RS 232 Serial ports, Ethernet port 10/100Mbit – Download / Upload / TCP/IP / UDP / USB connection for Firmware Upload.

14-102

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM Global Layout of the MTC Control System

14.7.1.3

MTC-FIRMWARE AND SOFTWARE

The MTC is programmed with Firmware and Software. FIRMWARE The Firmware internally operates and manages the MTC unit, independent of the kind of the machine. SOFTWARE The Software is a machine-specific application which manages the excavator’s control system. Therefore it is essential that the Software version and the machine model properly fit together. It is possible to replace the programs (Firmware and Software) of the MTC. For such a procedure a specific version of the CoDeSys software must be installed on the used laptop. Via LAN connection such a software upload can be done comfortably. The CoDeSys software can also be used as a Visualization, which is an important tool for troubleshooting. For more details of the CoDeSys Visualization refer to the Visualization User Manual and to the Troubleshooting Manual of your machine.

For the details of the: z

MTC Firmware & Software

z

CoDeSys software

z

Visualization

z

Appropriate equipment

z

Communication procedures with the MTC

refer to the Troubleshooting Manual of your machine. CAUTION Before trying to change any software of the MTC, always make sure that: - the complete required equipment is present - the correct software packages are present - a qualified service technican will perform the procedure Otherwise a complete shutdown of the machine may result.

Version 2010/1

14-103

Global Layout of the MTC Control System VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

14.7.1.4

VIEW ONTO THE MTC UNIT AND ITS CONNECTORS

Fig. 14-166 View onto the MTC unit and its connectors

14-104

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM Global Layout of the MTC Control System

Legend for Fig. 14-166: (1)

MTC unit [Master Turbo Controller]

(2)

Left hand side MTC connectors

(3)

LED panel1 of the MTC unit

(4)

Right hand side MTC connectors

(5)

MTC ground connection (housing)

(6)

LAN connection to cab / laptop

(7)

Digital output

(8)

Supply voltage (24V) connection

(9)

CAN bus connection

(10)

Serial port COM 2 (RS 232) to VHMS controller

1The

LEDs are showing operation conditions and they also blink out those trouble codes which cause a shutdown.

For the description of the LED panel and the operating mode of the LEDs refer to the OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL or to the TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL of your machine.

Version 2010/1

14-105

Global Layout of the Internal CAN bus

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

14.8

GLOBAL LAYOUT OF THE INTERNAL CAN BUS

14.8.1

GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT A CAN BUS SYSTEM

Fig. 14-167 Control system - conventional layout [A] and CAN bus layout [B] The acronym CAN means: Controller Area Network Legend for Fig. 14-167: [A]

Wiring in a conventional control circuit

[B]

Wiring in control circuit with CAN bus

(1)

Low voltage switch board (11a000) and controller (A = PLC / B = MTC) in the cab base

(2)

Long wiring between low voltage switch board and each electrical component (including intermediate connectors for cable sections)

(3)

Electrical component (e.g. switch or solenoid valve)

(4)

Short wiring between nodes and electrical component

(5)

Internal CAN bus, leading from the MTC to each node

(6)

Node, type ICN-V and type ICN-D, [ICN = Intelligent CAN Node] - interface between internal CAN bus and electrical machine components

(7)

End resistor (120 Ω) of the CAN bus

(8)

INPUT - Status signals from the machine components

(9)

OUTPUT - Control signals from the MTC-controller

14-106

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

14.8.1.1

GENERAL CAN BUS DESCRIPTION

The comparison of the wiring in a conventional control circuit and in a control circuit with CAN bus shows that the total length of the wiring between the controller and the electrical components in the CAN bus system is visibly shorter. Also the number of connectors is reduced, as several cable sections in the wiring between the controller and the machine components are no longer needed. In a CAN bus system all system components (input & output) are connected to a common data line via short branch lines. Therefore the system wiring is reduced and additional components may be connected easily.

14.8.1.2

Global Layout of the Internal CAN bus

CAN BUS TROUBLESHOOTING

The CAN bus system is equipped with effective selfdiagnosis tools. CAN troubles are displayed via the VHMS monitor and/or blinked out at the MTC-controller. With the help of a visualization software the location of any trouble can easily be determined. For troubleshooting in the CAN bus system a special CAN-Test Box is available. For details refer to the Tools and Accessories Catalogue. For the appropriate and qualified troubleshooting procedures refer to the TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL of your machine.

The interfaces between the CAN bus and the electrical machine components are called Nodes. It is a fundamental idea of the CAN bus layout that the nodes are as close to the machine components as possible. However, the data flow must be controlled by an access method (protocol) in order to manage the well organized data transfer in one common data line. The MTC unit (refer to section 14.7 on page 14-100) and the Nodes (refer to section 14.9 on page 14-112) are essential components for the control and mangement of the CAN bus system. The status information from the electrical components as well as the control signals from the MTC are not continuously present in the CAN bus cable. Status information and control signals of each component are packed in data packages which are called Data Frames. These Data Frames are sent through the CAN bus periodically in small fractions of a second. The control components MTC & Nodes send and receive the Data Frames. Also they organize and manage a safety system, to make sure that defined and complete information packages are received by the designated components. Each Data Frame contains a protocol for its identification. A CAN bus cable consists of only 3 wires, which are: z

CAN high (H)

z

CAN low (L)

z

Shield

In a CAN bus system 2 voltages are present. Depending on the kind of system the CAN high voltage is in a range of up to approx. 6V. The CAN low voltage is up to approx. 3.5V.

Version 2010/1

14-107

Global Layout of the Internal CAN bus

14.8.1.3

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

CAN BUS WIRING

Fig. 14-168 Detail of the CAN bus wiring1 1

For the entire overview refer to the complete Wiring Diagrams of the respective machine.

14-108

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Global Layout of the Internal CAN bus

Legend for Fig. 14-168: (1)

CAN bus wire CAN high (H)

(2)

CAN bus wire CAN low (L)

(3)

CAN bus wire shield

(4)

CAN bus branch connector

(5)

Node, type ICN-D, [ICN = Intelligent CAN Node] interface between internal CAN bus and electrical machine components

(6)

Node pin - connection CAN high to node

(7)

Node pin - connection CAN low to node

(8)

Node pin - connection shield to node

(9)

CAN bus End Resistor

(10)

Annotation in the Wiring Diagram: Length of branch cable max. 1m

(11)

View onto a standard CAN bus connector (male & female)

Version 2010/1

14-109

Global Layout of the Internal CAN bus

14.8.1.4

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

CAN BUS END RESISTOR

A CAN bus does not build a closed wiring circuit as a conventional electrical circuit system in general does. As a result there is an "open" end. At this end the wires CAN high and CAN low must be connected by an End Resistor. The resistance of these End Resistors is 120 Ω each. A CAN bus can be split, and in this case an End Resistor needs to be connected to each end of the CAN bus. The following chart gives an overview over the fitted End Resistors on your machine. End Resistors - Overview Component Code2

No.

Location Code1

CAN bus

1

10

1

Cab base, CAN bus VHMS-controller to Quantum

10R100

2

10

2

Cab base, CAN bus VHMS-controller to VHMS monitor

10R101

3

20

internal

Operator’s cab, node 9

20R101

4

40

internal

Hydraulic oil tank, node 13

40R101

Description

1, 2

For a detailed explanation of the Location Code & Component Code definition refer to section 13. HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM in this Service Manual. View onto End Resistors

Fig. 14-169 View onto 2 different types of End Resistor

14-110

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Global Layout of the Internal CAN bus

This page was left blank intentionally.

Version 2010/1

14-111

The Nodes in the CAN bus System

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

14.9

THE NODES IN THE CAN BUS SYSTEM

14.9.1

GLOBAL LAYOUT

Fig. 14-170 Exemplary Drawing of a CAN bus and its Nodes

14-112

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

The Nodes in the CAN bus System

Legend for Fig. 14-170: (1)

Internal CAN bus, leading from the MTC to each node

(2)

MTC-controller and low voltage switch board (11a000) in the cab base

(3)

Node (type ICN-V or type ICN-D)

(4)

Wiring between node and electrical machine component

(5)

Electrical machine component (e.g. switch or solenoid valve)

(6)

INPUT - Status signals from the machine components

(7)

OUTPUT - Control signals from the MTC-controller

(8)

End resistor (120 Ω) of the CAN bus

14.9.2

INTRODUCTION

The Nodes are the interfaces between the CAN bus and the electrical machine components. They are located as close as possible to the machine components to permit a short wiring of the machine components. The Nodes organize: (a) the INPUTS from the machine components into the CAN bus (b) the CONTROL OUTPUTS from the MTC-controller to the actuating elements via CAN bus There are 2 different types of Nodes in the CAN bus system, ICN-V and ICN-D.

Version 2010/1

14-113

The Nodes in the CAN bus System

14.9.2.1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

ICN-V FEATURES

The acronym ICN-V means: Intelligent Can Node-Variable (application sample: Valves) The features of the ICN-V node are: - Designed for mobile use - Compact design - Solid housing - Equipped with one 55-pin central plug - Optional dual node design (in that case the housing is equipped with two 55-pin central plugs) - DIP-switches for individual adaption - Especially for the control of hydraulic components - 4 digital inputs, each to be configured as 0...10V or 0...20mA analog inputs - 8 digital Inputs & Outputs max. 4A, variable programmable - 2 separate power outputs (operating voltage) max. 0.1A - The outputs are short cut safe - CAN bus interface with CAN open protocol - Load dump safety 8...32V - Temperature range -40°C...+ 85°C

View onto ICN-V Nodes (dual & single)

Fig. 14-171 View onto ICN-V Nodes (dual & single) Legend for Fig. 14-171: (1)

Dual ICN-V Node

(2)

Single ICN-V Node

(3)

55-pin central plug for dual node function LH (shown sample: 11K303)

(4)

55-pin central plug for dual node design RH (shown sample: 11K304)

(5)

55-pin central plug for single node function (shown sample: 40K313)

14-114

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

14.9.2.2

The Nodes in the CAN bus System

ICN-D FEATURES

The acronym ICN-D means: Intelligent Can Node-Digital (application sample: Dashboard) The features of the ICN-D node are: - Designed for mobile use - e.g. for installation in the dashboard - max. 64 configurable inputs / outputs - 28 digital inputs - 6 analog inputs 0...10V - 2 analog inputs 0...20mA - 4 separate input slots - 16 digital outputs - 4 digital inputs / outputs - 2 separate power sources 5, 7.5 / 8.2, 10V - 2 separate power output sources 10mA / 300Ω - Load dump safety 8...32V - Temperature range -40°C...+85°C - CAN bus interface with CAN open protocol - DIP-switches for individual adaption

View onto a ICN-D Node

Fig. 14-172 View onto a ICN-D Node

Version 2010/1

14-115

The Nodes in the CAN bus System

14.9.3

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

NODE DIP-SWITCHES

All nodes of both node types are equipped with DIP-switches at the circuit board. These DIP-switches must be adjusted according to the requirement of each mounting location in the system. Ex factory the design of all used ICN-V nodes is identical and the design of all used ICN-D nodes is identical as well. If any node needs replacement its DIP-switches must be adjusted as defined in the Wiring Diagram of the respective machine. In the Wiring Diagram the adjustment of the DIP-switches is shown as in the below sample. Exemplary iew onto the DIP-switch setting specification

Fig. 14-173 Exemplary View onto the DIP switch setting specification

NOTE: When replacing any Node unit always check and adjust the DIP-switch setting according to the relevant Wiring Diagram to avoid malfunction or shutdown of the machine.

14-116

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

14.9.4

NODE BOX

The Nodes in the CAN bus System

.

The node units which need to be installed at the outside of the machine are mounted in Node Boxes on the roof of the machine. Inside these boxes the electrical components are installed on 3 levels. 1st level: Wiring connections, resistors, and diodes 2nd level: CAN bus connections 3rd level: Nodes (ICN-V and ICN-D) Refer to the following figure which shows a typical node box and the arrangement of the 3 levels inside.

Fig. 14-174 View onto the 3 levels inside a Node Box

Fig. 14-175 View onto an open Node Box

To reach the 3 levels inside the Node Box open the door of the Node Box. Now there is access to the 1st level switch board (3).

Legend for Fig. 14-175

Fold the 1st level switch board forward and down. Now there is access to the 2nd level switch board (4) on the backside of the folded frame. The 3rd level switch board (5) is mounted at the inside of the Node Box backwall. Refer to the following photographs (Fig. 14-175).

Version 2010/1

(1)

Node Box

(2)

1st level switch board - Wiring connections, resistors, and diodes

(3)

Door of the Node Box

(4)

2nd level switch board - CAN bus connections

(5)

3rd level switch board - ICN-V node(s) and ICN-D node(s) 14-117

The Nodes in the CAN bus System

14.9.5

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

NODE LOCATIONS ON THE MACHINE

Fig. 14-176 Node location overview Legend for Fig. 14-176: (11)

Location: Low voltage switch board in the cab base

(20)

Location: Operator’s cab

[40]

Location: Hydraulic oil tank (node box on top of the roof)

[51]

Location: Engine room (node box on top of the roof)

[56]

Location: Pump compartment (node box on top of the roof)

14-118

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

14.9.5.1

The Nodes in the CAN bus System

NODE & LOCATION CHART

The following chart lists all Nodes and the relating Locations of the MTC control circuit on a PC4000-6D with MTCcontroller. For further details refer to the Wiring Diagrams of the respective machine. Node No.

Node Type

Component Code1

2

ICN-D

11K302

3

ICN-V

11K303

4

ICN-V

11K304

5

ICN-V

11K305

9

ICN-D

20K309

10

ICN-V

20K310

11

ICN-D

40K311

12

ICN-D

40K312

13

ICN-V

40K313

14

ICN-D

56K314

15

ICN-V

56K315

16

ICN-V

56K316

17

ICN-D

51K317

Location Code2

Description

11

Extra low voltage switch board in the cab base

20

Operator’s cab

40

Hydraulic oil tank (node box on top of the roof)

56

Pump compartment (node box on top of the roof)

51

Engine room (node box on top of the roof)

1, 2

For a detailed explanation of the Location Code & Component Code definition refer to section 13. HINTS FOR READING THE ELECTRIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM in this Service Manual.

Version 2010/1

14-119

The Nodes in the CAN bus System

14.9.5.2

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

EXEMPLARY VIEW ONTO LOCATION 11 (CAB BASE)

The following exemplary views show the arrangement of the CAN bus control components in a cab base.

Fig. 14-177 Exemplary view onto the CAN bus control components in the cab base Legend for Fig. 14-177: (1)

Low voltage switch board (11a000) in the cab base

(2)

ICN-D node (11K302)

(3)

Dual ICN-V node, LH side (11K303)

(4)

Dual ICN-V node, RH side (11K304)

(5)

MTC-controller (11K301)

(6)

CAN bus connector plate

(7)

Single ICN-V node (11K305) behind the CAN bus connector plate

For further troubleshooting information regarding the MTC control system refer to the Troubleshooting Manual of your machine.

14-120

Version 2010/1

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

The Nodes in the CAN bus System

This page was left blank intentionally.

Version 2010/1

14-121

The Nodes in the CAN bus System

14-122

VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) & MTC CONTROL SYSTEM

Version 2010/1

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

15. AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Version 2010/1

15-1

General Overview CLS & SLS

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

15.1

GENERAL OVERVIEW CLS & SLS

Fig. 15-1

General overview CLS & SLS

Legend for Fig. 15-1: CLS SLS

Central Lubrication System Pin & bearing lubrication

z

Swing ring Lubrication System z Open swing ring gear lubrication

(1)

Superstructure

(2)

Attachment (FSA & BHA)

(3)

Swing ring

(4)

Swing gearbox

(5)

Undercarriage

(6)

CLS station (barrel)

(7)

SLS station (barrel)

15-2

Version 2010/1

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

15.1.1

General Overview CLS & SLS

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

For maximum machine reliability and maximum lifetime the principal bearing points must be frequently lubricated with a sufficient amount of specified lubricant. For best lubricating reliability with minimum maintenance there are automatic lubrication systems which are controlled by the MTC. They lubricate all connected lubrication points within adjustable time intervals and with the required amount of lubricant. The automatic lubrication starts as soon as the machine runs at high idle. The excavator is equipped with 2 independent lubrication systems: CLS The CLS (Central Lubricating System) supplies the attachment bearings and the swing ring bearing with grease. SLS The SLS (Swing ring gear Lubrication System) supplies the open gear of the swing ring teeth and the lower bearings of the swing gearboxes with grease. These two independent lubrication systems are necessary because the attachment bearings and the open gear teeth require different types of lubricant.

Version 2010/1

15-3

Basic Function of the Lubrication Systems

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

15.2

BASIC FUNCTION OF THE LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Fig. 15-2

Basic function of the lubrication systems

15-4

Version 2010/1

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Basic Function of the Lubrication Systems

Legend for Fig. 15-2: (1)

Drive of lubrication pump (hydraulically)

(2)

Flow control valve (19-21 double strokes/min)

(3)

Pressure relief valve (max. 45 bar)

(4)

Grease pump control solenoid valve (62Q507 / 62Q509) - (pump on / off)

(5)

Hydraulic oil return line

(6)

Hydraulic oil supply line (60+3 bar X4-pressure)

(7)

Lubricant pressure gauge

(8)

Lubricant in-line filter

(9)

Lubricant pressure release solenoid valve (62Q507a / 62Q509a)

(10)

Lubricant supply line from pump to injector

(11)

Lubricant release line

(12)

End-line-pressure switch (80B043 / 62B046)

(13)

Lubricant injector

(14)

Lubricant feed line from injector to the lubrication point (bearings or open gear of the swing ring teeth)

(15)

Lubricant pump

(16a)

Bearing

(16b)

Dummy wheel

(17)

Lubricant

(18)

Lubricant container

(19)

Breather filter for lubricant container

(20)

Sonar sensor for lubricant level indication (62B108 / 62B109)

Version 2010/1

15-5

Central Lubrication System (CLS)

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

15.3

CENTRAL LUBRICATION SYSTEM (CLS)

Fig. 15-3

Lubrication pump station CLS

15-6

Version 2010/1

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Central Lubrication System (CLS)

Legend for Fig. 15-3: (1)

Lubrication pump drive (hydraulic cylinder)

(2)

Solenoid valve (oil pressure supply)

(3)

Flow control valve

(4)

Pressure reducing valve

(5)

Hydraulic oil supply line (pilot pressure)

(6)

Hydraulic oil return line

(7)

Vent valve (solenoid valve, de-energized open to the barrel)

(8)

Grease supply line to injectors

(9)

Grease level sensor (sonar sensor)

(10)

Grease barrel

(11)

Pump suction pipe

(12)

Lubricant filter

(13)

Hydraulic pressure test plug (operating pressure)

(14)

Lubricant pressure gauge (operating pressure)

(15)

Vent line to barrel

(16)

Breather

(17)

Electrical terminal box

(18)

Lubricant injector

(19)

Lubricant supply line to lubrication points (bearings or open gear of the swing ring teeth)

(20)

End-line switch

Description The lubrication pump station includes the grease barrel (Fig. 15-3, Pos. 10) and the barrel cover with the pump system. The barrel is fix-mounted. With the refilling arm the barrel is rechargeable via a filter. The main grease pump system is mounted onto the barrel cover. It includes the pump (Fig. 15-3, Pos. 1 & 11), valves (Fig. 15-3, Pos. 2, 3, 4, 7), a grease filter (Fig. 15-3, Pos. 12), a grease level sensor (Fig. 15-3, Pos. 9), and an end-line switch (Fig. 15-3, Pos. 20).

Version 2010/1

15-7

Central Lubrication System (CLS)

15.3.1

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

GENERAL INFORMATION ON CLS

A hydraulic driven lubricant pump (Fig. 15-3, Pos. 1 & 11) pumps grease from a barrel (Fig. 15-3, Pos. 10) through pipes (Fig. 15-3, Pos. 8) or hoses to the injectors (Fig. 15-3, Pos. 18). These injectors pump a defined quantity of grease to the lubrication points. After all injectors delivered their grease quantity to the lube points, the grease pump stops and the next lubrication cycle will start after an adjusted time period (pause time). The central lubrication system is only active if the engine is running at high idle. z

After the pilot pressure has been reduced it passes to the hydraulic cylinder (Fig. 15-3, Pos. 1) which operates the grease pump (Fig. 15-3, Pos. 11).

z

The hydraulic cylinder (Fig. 15-3, Pos. 1) operates the grease cylinder with 19 – 21 double strokes per minute. In that way 612 - 680 cm3 (approx. 550 - 612 g) of lubricant are delivered per minute.

z

With the vent valve (Fig. 15-3, Pos. 7) closed, the pump continues to cycle until the maximum pressure is achieved and the injectors (Fig. 15-3, Pos. 18) have metered grease to the lubrication points. The pressure in the lubrication system is 180 bar.

z

When the maximum system pressure is reached, the end-line switch (Fig. 15-3, Pos. 20) will open.

z

The open end-line switch (Fig. 15-3, Pos. 20) signals the controller that the pumping cycle has to be stopped.

z

The solenoid valve (Fig. 15-3, Pos. 2) is de-energized and the hydraulic oil stops flowing to the pump (Fig. 15-3, Pos. 1).

z

The MTC starts to count down a fixed time (pressure holding time) and an adjustable pause time (rest time between the automatic lubrication cycles).

z

The vent valve (Fig. 15-3, Pos. 7) is still closed (solenoid active) and the lubricant pressure will be kept on the pressure (a slow pressure decrease is normal).

z

If the countdown for the pressure holding time (5 min) is finished the controller terminates the signal to the solenoid valve (Fig. 15-3, Pos. 7).

z

If the vent valve (Fig. 15-3, Pos. 7) is de-energized, it opens and allows the grease pressure to drop to zero.

z

All injectors move into their initial position by spring force and recharge themselves for the next lubricant cycle.

z

The system is at rest now and ready for another lube cycle.

Manual lube activation A manual activation of the lubrication systems is possible by operating switch 20S124 (CLS) or 20S126 (SLS) at the dashboard. The MTC counts the number of switch activations and operates the lube system successively, as often as the switch was activated. The system rests between the lube cycles according to an adjustable pause time (pressure relief time). After the previous loop is completely finished and after the pause time is experied the next lubrication cycle can start if the engine is running at high idle (CLS/SLS) and if a slew movement was activated (SLS). Component Code Table (according to Wiring Diagram) System

Solenoid Valve (2)

Vent Valve (7)

End-Line Switch (20)

CLS

62Q507

62Q507a

80B043

SLS

62Q509

62Q509a

62B046

15-8

Version 2010/1

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Central Lubrication System (CLS)

This page was left blank intentionally.

Version 2010/1

15-9

Lubrication Pump Station (SLS)

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

15.4

LUBRICATION PUMP STATION (SLS)

Fig. 15-4

Lubrication pump station SLS

15-10

Version 2010/1

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Lubrication Pump Station (SLS)

Legend for Fig. 15-4: (1)

Lubricant pump drive (hydraulic cylinder)

(2)

Solenoid valve (oil pressure supply)

(3)

Flow control valve

(4)

Pressure reducing valve

(5)

Hydraulic oil supply line (pilot pressure)

(6)

Hydraulic oil return line

(7)

Vent valve (solenoid valve, de-energized open to barrel)

(8)

Grease supply line to injectors

(9)

Grease level sensor (sonar sensor)

(10)

Grease barrel

(11)

Pump suction pipe

(12)

Lubricant filter

(13)

Hydraulic pressure test plug (operating pressure)

(14)

Lubricant pressure gauge (operating pressure)

(15)

Vent line to barrel

(16)

Breather

(17)

Electrical terminal box

(18)

Lubricant injector

(19)

Lubricant supply line to dummy wheel

(20)

End-line switch

(R)

Dummy wheel

(A)

Swing circle gear

(B)

Center bore

(C)

Stator radial bore

(D)

Grease outlet

Description The lubrication pump station includes the grease barrel (Fig. 15-4, Pos. 10) and the barrel cover with the pump system. The barrel is fix-mounted. With the refilling arm the barrel is rechargeable via a filter. The main grease pump system is mounted onto the barrel cover. It includes the pump (Fig. 15-4, Pos. 1, 11), valves (Fig. 15-4, Pos. 2, 3, 4, 7), a grease filter (Fig. 15-4, Pos. 12), a grease level sensor (Fig. 15-4, Pos. 9), and an end-line switch (Fig. 15-4, Pos. 20).

Version 2010/1

15-11

Lubrication Pump Station (SLS)

15.4.1

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

GENERAL INFORMATION ON SLS

The swing circle gear lubrication system (SLS) uses a special dummy wheel to apply the gear grease onto the swing circle gear. All other components between the grease barrel and the injectors are comparable to the central lubrication system (CLS). With each lube cycle the dummy wheel receives grease from two or more parallel connected injectors. After the injectors delivered their gear grease quantity through the dummy wheel to the swing ring gear, the grease pump stops and the next lubrication cycle will start after an adjusted time period (pause time). The swing circle gear lubrication system is only active if the engine is running at high idle and if the slew function is activated. z

After the pilot pressure has been reduced it passes to the hydraulic cylinder (Fig. 15-4, Pos. 11) which operates the grease pump.

z

The hydraulic cylinder (Fig. 15-4, Pos. 1) operates the grease cylinder with 19 - 21 double strokes per minute. In that way 612 - 680 cm3 (approx. 550 - 612 g) of lubricant are delivered per minute.

z

With the vent valve (Fig. 15-4, Pos. 7) closed, the pump continues to cycle until maximum pressure is achieved and the injectors (Fig. 15-4, Pos. 18) have metered grease to the dummy wheel. The pressure in the lubrication system is 180 bar.

z

When the maximum system pressure is reached, the end-line switch (Fig. 15-4, Pos. 20) will open.

z

The open end-line switch (Fig. 15-4, Pos. 20) signals the controller that the pumping cycle has to be stopped.

z

The solenoid valve (Fig. 15-4, Pos. 2) is de-energized and the hydraulic oil stops flowing to the pump (Fig. 15-4, Pos. 1).

z

The MTC starts to count down a fixed time (pressure holding time) and an adjustable pause time (rest time between the automatic lubrication cycles).

z

The vent valve (Fig. 15-4, Pos. 7) is still closed (solenoid active) and the lubricant pressure will be kept on the pressure (a slow pressure decrease is normal).

z

If the countdown for the pressure holding time (5 min) is finished the controller terminates the signal to the solenoid valve (Fig. 15-4, Pos. 7).

z

If the vent valve (Fig. 15-4, Pos. 7) is de-energized, it opens and allows the grease pressure to drop to zero.

z

All injectors move into their initial position by spring force and recharge themselves for the next lubricant cycle.

z

The system is at rest now and ready for another lube cycle.

Manual lube activation A manual activation of the lubrication systems is possible by operating switch 20S124 (CLS) or 20S126 (SLS) at the dashboard. The MTC counts the number of switch activations and operates the lube system successively during swing movement, as often as the switch was activated. The system rests between the lube cycles according to an adjustable pause time (pressure relief time). Component Code Table (according to Wiring Diagram) System

Solenoid Valve (2)

Vent Valve (7)

End-Line Switch (20)

CLS

62Q507

62Q507a

80B043

SLS

62Q509

62Q509a

62B046

CLS = Central Lubrication System SLS = Swing circle Lubrication System

15-12

Version 2010/1

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

15.5

LUBRICATION CYCLE

15.5.1

OPERATION AND CONTROL

Lubrication Cycle

General The lubrication systems (CLS & SLS) are completely controlled and monitored by the MTC. The MTC activates the outputs dependent on the inputs and dependent on the system timelines. For the electrical interrelations refer to the respective Wiring Diagram. NOTE: The exemplary explanations in this section are based on the Wiring Diagram 94856340 and on the Flow Chart 9485640. Beside the MTC the following electrical components are involved in lubrication control and operation: Inputs Description

CLS

SLS

End-line switch

80B043

62B046

Grease level sensor

62B108

62B109

Switch for manual lubrication cycle

20S124

20S126

Pre-condition: Swing circle (lever) moved

20S020

Pre-condition: Engine running at high idle

Engine ECM

Outputs Description

CLS

SLS

Lubrication pump solenoid valve

62Q507

62Q509

Vent valve (solenoid)

62Q507a

62Q509a

Version 2010/1

15-13

Lubrication Cycle

15.5.2

LUBRICATION CYCLE - COMPONENTS

Fig. 15-5

Lubrication cycle components

15-14

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Version 2010/1

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Lubrication Cycle

Legend for Fig. 15-5: (1)

Lubrication pump drive (hydraulic cylinder)

(2)

Flow control valve (19 - 21 double strokes / min)

(3)

Pressure relief valve

(4)

Main pump control solenoid valve (pump on / off)

(5)

Hydraulic oil return line

(6)

Hydraulic oil supply line (60 bar, X4 pressure)

(7)

Lubricant pressure gauge

(8)

Lubricant in-line filter

(9)

Lubricant pressure release solenoid valve

(10)

Lubricant supply line from pump to injector

(11)

Lubricant release line

(12)

End-line switch

(13)

Lubricant injector

(14)

Lubricant feed line to swing ring gear

(15)

Lubricant pump

(16)

Lubricant points (bearings) CLS only

(17)

Lubricant container

(18)

Breather filter for lubricant container

(19)

Grease level sensor (sonar sensor)

(20)

Test port lubricant pump drive pressure

(21)

Electrical terminal box

(22)

Dummy wheel, SLS only

(23)

Dipstick grease level

Version 2010/1

15-15

Lubrication Cycle

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

15.5.3

LUBRICATION CYCLE - PROCESSING

Fig. 15-6

Process of a lubrication cycle

Legend for Fig. 15-6 X axis

Task time

Y axis

Pressure timeline in the lubricant supply line

PINCREASE E-L SWOPENING PHOLD E-L SWCLOSING PRELEASE TPAUSE

15-16

Pressure increasing time End-line switch opening point Pressure holding time (5 minutes) End-line switch closing point Pressure release time Pause time

Version 2010/1

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

15.5.4

Lubrication Cycle

TIME SEGMENTS & SWITCH POINTS OF A LUBRICATION CYCLE

Terms

PINCREASE

E-L SWOPENING

PHOLD

E-L SWCLOSING

PRELEASE

TPAUSE

Time segment

Explanation

a-b

If the engine is running at high idle a lubrication cycle starts after the pause time is expired or if the switch for manual lubrication 20S124 (CLS) or 20S126 (SLS) was activated. For SLS there is also the precondition that the control lever for "Swing" is moved out of its zero position. The MTC activates the solenoid valve and the pilot pressure (X4 pressure) starts to move the oscillating cylinder. At the same time the vent valve is closed and the lubrication pressure starts to increase. This time segment for building-up the pressure in the lubricant line is fix-programmed in the MTC and it is not adjustable.

b

After all lubrication points have been lubricated there is a pressure rise which opens the end-line switch when the max. pressure is reached. At this time the MTC de-energizes the solenoid valve and stops the oscillating cylinder of the lubrication pump. Now the pressure increasing phase is finished and the pressure holding time starts. The switch point of the end-line switch is 180 +5 bar.

b-c

At this time the MTC starts to count the pressure holding time (5 min) which is fix-programmed in the controller. This time segment is not adjustable. During the pressure holding time the vent valve is kept closed and the pressure is kept at its max. level of 180 bar.

c

After the pressure holding time (5 min) is expired, the end-line switch closes and the vent valve opens. Now the pressure holding phase is finished and the grease pressure is released back to the barrel.

c-d

The pressure release time is fix-programmed in the MTC. This time segment is not adjustable. It is necessary to drop the lubricant pressure completely to zero so the injectors can be recharged for the next lubrication cycle.

b - a’

The pause time prevents that the next lubrication cycle would start too early in case the switch for manual lubrication 20S124 (CLS) or 20S126 (SLS) was actived several times. The counting of the pause time starts at "b" when the end-line switch opens at max. line pressure. The next lubrication cycle starts after the pause time is expired. Preconditions: SLS/CLS: Engine running at high idle SLS only: Slew movement was activated Via the VHMS monitor the pause time is adjustable: CLS 10 - 60 minutes SLS 10 - 20 minutes

Lubrication pump solenoid valve

Vent valve (solenoid)

End-line switch

CLS

62Q507

62Q507a

80B043

SLS

62Q509

62Q509a

62B046

Version 2010/1

15-17

Lubrication Cycle

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

15.5.5

LUBRICATION MODES

15.5.5.2

15.5.5.1

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION MODE

A manual lubrication cycle can be activated via the switches 20S124 (CLS) or 20S126 (SLS) at the dashboard.

The lubrication systems are controlled and monitored complete by the program of the MTC. The MTC activates the outputs dependent on inputs and time-lines according to the programmed software. The Pause Time can be adjust in a specified range via the VHMS Real Time Monitor. Monitoring time and pressure relief time are fix-programmed. After a restart of the engine the SLS / CLS system first continues the residual time of the current pause time period before a new start of the grease system is possible. The lube system only starts if the engine is running at high idle.

MANUAL LUBRICATION MODE

In the Operator Mode a manual lube cycle can be started after a waiting period of 10 minutes. This timeline is independent of the Pause Time setting for the automatic mode, which is input via the VHMS monitor.

15.5.5.3

VHMS SERVICE MODE

As long as the VHMS Service Mode is activated the Pause Time is automatically reduced to 30 seconds. Test and adjustment works can be performed more comfortable if the Pause Time is shortened in the VHMS Service Mode. After return to the Operator Mode the Pause Time will be reset to the automatic period which has been adjusted on the VHMS monitor before.

VHMS Pause Time Settings CLS Pause time range: 10 - 60 minutes Standard setting: 15 minutes SLS Pause time range: 10 - 20 minutes Standard setting: 20 minutes

NOTE: For more details of the Pause Time setting refer to the VHMS information in section 14.

15-18

Version 2010/1

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Lubrication Cycle

This page was left blank intentionally.

Version 2010/1

15-19

Hydraulically Driven Lube Pump

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

15.6

HYDRAULICALLY DRIVEN LUBE PUMP

Fig. 15-7

Hydraulically driven lubrication pump

15-20

Version 2010/1

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Hydraulically Driven Lube Pump

Legend for Fig. 15-7 (1)

Pump drive hydraulic cylinder

(2)

Flow control valve

(3)

Pressure relief valve

(4)

Lubricant pump intake

(5)

Hydraulic oil supply port

(6)

Hydraulic oil return port

(7)

Pump drive control block

(8)

Breather port

(9)

Pump tube

(10)

Lubricant outlet port

(11)

Outlet check valve (ball type)

(12)

Piston rod

(13)

Pump rod shaft seal

(14)

Check valve (ball type)

(15)

Main piston and plunger

(16)

Piston rod set

(17)

Inlet valve

(18)

Scoop piston

(19)

Lubricant inlet

The lubrication pump is a hydraulically driven seal free differential piston pump. The pump pumps lubricant at the up and down stroke but sucks lubricant only during the up stroke. The scoop piston at the pump bottom supports the main pump especially with high viscosity lubricants. There are only one dynamic seal at the piston rod on top of the pump pipe therefor less on wear and long service time. The lubrication pump is divided in two main components, the pump drive hydraulic cylinder and the pump. The pump drive and only the pump outlet are outside on top of the lubricant container, the pump itself is inside and reaches into the lubricant. The maximum possible lubricant pressure depend on the adjusted supply pressure. The pressure multiplication factor between supply pressure and maximum lubricant pressure is 6.55. The pressure reduction valve has to be adjusted to 45 bar. Example: 45 bar supply pressure x 6.55 = 295 bar lubricant pressure. During normal operation the end-line switch stops the pump before reaching this high pressure. For a sufficient lube pump operation 19 - 21 double strokes / min for the pump drive cylinder are required. Therefore the flow reducing valve has to be adjusted, refer to section 15.6.1 on page 15-22. Technical pump data Pump stroke

Pump delivery per stroke

Pump speed

Total pump delivery

152 mm

30 cm3 / double stroke

19 - 21 double strokes / min

540 - 600 cm3 / min

Version 2010/1

15-21

Hydraulically Driven Lube Pump

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

15.6.1

ADJUSTMENT OF LUBE PUMP SPEED & WORKING PRESSURE

Fig. 15-8

Adjustment of pump speed and working pressure

15-22

Version 2010/1

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

15.6.1.1

STROKE SPEED ADJUSTMENT

Hydraulically Driven Lube Pump

15.6.1.2

WORKING PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

For a sufficient lubricating pump operation 19 - 21 double strokes / min of the pump drive cylinder are required. Therefore the flow reducing valve (Fig. 15-8, Pos. 3) has to be adjusted accordingly.

The pressure reducing valve (Fig. 15-8, Pos. 2) is mounted on the oscillation control block. It reduces the supply pressure to 45 ± bar.

Adjustment procedure

Adjustment procedure

1. Remove the connector from the vent valve (Fig. 15-8, Pos. 7), in order to avoid any pressure rise during the following test.

1. If not yet mounted install a test fitting in port M at the oscillation block, and connect a pressure gauge (0 - 60 bar)

2. Start the engine and run it at high idle.

2. Disconnect the quick-coupling (Fig. 15-8, Pos. 8) from the lubricant supply line in order to block the pump when it is started.

3. Manually switch ON the lube system by using switch 20S124 (CLS) or 20S26 (SLS) at the dasboard and count the double strokes per minute. Therefore remove the plug (Fig. 15-9, Pos. 1) from the pump cover (Fig. 15-9, Pos. 2) and watch the piston going up and down.

3. Start the engine and run it at high idle. 4. Manually switch ON the lube system. The gauge should indicate a max. pressure of 45 ± bar. If adjustment is required 5. Loosen the lock nut (Fig. 15-8, Pos. 2.1). 6. Turn the adjustment screw (Fig. 15-8, Pos. 2) until a pressure of 45 ± bar is achieved. 7. Tighten the lock nut (Fig. 15-8, Pos. 2.1). 8. Reconnect the quick-coupling (Fig. 15-8, Pos. 8). NOTE: If it is not possible to adjust the pressure to 45 ± bar, check the adjustment of the pilot pressure valve (X4 pressure) at the valve cartridge block in the machinery house. The pilot pressure should be 60 bar.

Fig. 15-9

Pump cover with plug

If adjustment is required 4. Loosen the lock nut (Fig. 15-8, Pos. 3.1). 5. Turn the adjustment screw (Fig. 15-8, Pos. 3) until the correct number of double strokes is achieved. 6. Tighten the lock nut (Fig. 15-8, Pos. 3.1). 7. Stop the engine. 8. Connect the connector to the vent valve (Fig. 15-8, Pos. 7).

Version 2010/1

15-23

Lubricant Injectors

15.7

LUBRICANT INJECTORS

Fig. 15-10

Lubricant Injectors type SL-1 and type SL-11

15-24

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Version 2010/1

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Lubricant Injectors

15.7.2

Legend for Fig. 15-10 SL-1

Injector type SL-1

SL-11

Injector type SL-11

(1)

Adjustment screw

(2)

Indicator stem

(3)

Lock nut

(4)

Injector piston

(5)

Spring

(6)

Slide valve

(7)

Stud fitting (NPT)

(7a)

Cap nut

(8)

Discharge chamber

(9)

Passage

(10)

Lubricant supply inlet

(11)

Lubricant outlet

(12)

Mounting manifold

DESCRIPTION

Series SL-1 Injector The lubricant output volume is adjustable from 0.13 ... 1.3 cm3 per cycle. An hydraulic type fitting with a screw type cover cap is provided for initial filling of the feeder line. It may also be used for visual checks of the injector operation. Series SL-11 Injector The lubricant output volume is adjustable from 0.82 ... 8.2 cm3 per cycle. It is designed for systems where a large amount of lubricant is required. The operation principle is similar to the series SL-1.

15.7.3

ADJUSTMENT OF THE LUBRICANT OUTPUT

1. Loosen the lock nut (Fig. 15-10, Pos. 3).

15.7.1

TIGHTENING TORQUE FOR FITTINGS AT THE GREASE INCETORS

The exact tightening torque of 14 Nm has to be observed when installing a fitting to a grease injector. CAUTION

2. Turn the adjustment screw (Fig. 15-10, Pos. 1) counterclockwise (OUT) for more lubrication outlet. Turn the adjustment screw clockwise (IN) for less lubricant outlet. 3. Tighten the lock nut (Fig. 15-10, Pos. 3).

NOTE: The max. lubricant outlet is adjusted if the indicator stem (Fig. 15-10, Pos. 2) can no further be screwed out.

When installing a grease nipple fitting or a stud fitting (NPT) to an injector, always observe the maximum tightening torque of 14 Nm. Otherwise the fitting will be screwed too far into the injector and the injector piston movement will be blocked. As a result the grease supply will fail.

For the tightening procedure also refer to the PARTS & SERVICE NEWS AH10532 (latest edition). NOTE: In case of leakage use thread tape (Teflon®) or Loctite® when installing a fitting to any injector.

Version 2010/1

15-25

Lubricant Injectors

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

15.7.4

OPERATION PRINCIPLE OF LUBRICANT INJECTORS

Fig. 15-11

Operation principle of lubricant injectors

15-26

Version 2010/1

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Lubricant Injectors

Legend for Fig. 15-11 A

Normal position (rest position) pressure-free

B

Inlet pressure increasing and lubricant application

C

Maximum inlet pressure application completed

D

Inlet pressure relieved and internally reloading

(1)

Set screw

(2)

Indicator stem

(3)

Lock nut

(4)

Injector piston

(5)

Spring

(6)

Slide valve

(7)

Service port

(8)

Discharge chamber

(9)

Passage

(10)

Lubricant supply inlet

(11)

Lubricant outlet

(12)

Measuring chamber

Version 2010/1

15-27

Lubricant Injectors

15.7.4.1

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

Stage A

Stage D

Inlet pressure 0 bar Outlet pressure 0 bar

Inlet pressure relieved

The injector piston is in its normal, or rest position. Visible by the extracted indicator stem (2) which is blocked in final position by the set screw (1). The discharge chamber (8) is filled with lubricant from the previous cycle.

Stage B

After lubricant supply pressure (10) is relieved, the compressed spring (5) moves the slide valve (6) to the closed position. This opens the port from the measuring chamber (12) and permits the lubricant to be transferred from the top of the piston to the discharge chamber (8). The indicator stem (2) extract to its initial final stop of the adjustment screw (1). Now the injector is prepared for the next lubricant application.

Inlet pressure increasing from 0 to 180 bar Outlet: lubricant injection 0 - 180 bar Output volume: adjusted amount of lubricant Under the pressure of incoming lubricant via port (10), slide valve (6) is about to open the passage (9) leading to the piston (4). When the slide valve (6) uncovers the passage (9), lubricant is admitted to the measuring chamber (12) at the top of the piston (4), forcing the piston down. The piston (4) forces lubricant from the discharge chamber (8) through the outlet port (11) to the bearing. The indicator stem (2) retracts.

Stage C Inlet pressure at maximum 180 bar Output injection is finished As the piston (4) completes its stroke, it pushes the slide valve (6) past the passage (9), cutting off further admission of lubricant to the passage (9). Piston (4) and slide valve (6) remain in this position until lubricant pressure in the supply line (10) is vented (relieved) at the pump station. The indicator stem (2) is fully retracted and the adjusted amount of lubricant is injected to the bearing.

15-28

Version 2010/1

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Lubricant Injectors

15.7.5

CONNECTION OF ONE OR MORE INJECTORS

Fig. 15-12

Connection of lubricant injectors

Description To increase the lubricant output volume, the injectors (1) are designed to be combined (2 or more injectors). A connector pipe (2) is used to connect two injectors (1). Lubricant from the first injector, outlet (b), is directed through the connector pipe (2) to the inlet (c) of the second injector. Both injectors are now connected, in order to lubricate one lubrication point via pipe (3). This connection is possible for both injector types (SL-1 and SL-11).

CAUTION When installing a fitting to an injector, always observe the maximum tightening torque of 14 Nm. Otherwise the fitting will be screwed too far into the injector and the injector piston movement will be blocked. As a result the grease supply will fail.

For the tightening procedure also refer to the PARTS & SERVICE NEWS AH10532 (latest edition). NOTE: In case of leakage use thread tape (Teflon®) or Loctite® when installing a fitting to any injector.

Version 2010/1

15-29

Vent Valve

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

15.8

VENT VALVE

Fig. 15-13

Vent valve

15-30

Version 2010/1

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Vent Valve

Legend for Fig. 15-13: (1)

Solenoid

(2)

Valve assembly

(3)

Solenoid stem

(4)

Lever

(5)

Main valve piston

(6)

Auxiliary valve piston

(7)

Reset spring

15.8.1

DESCRIPTION

Task By the function of the vent valve the pressure in the lubricant supply line is relieved, after a lubrication cycle is finished. The injector pistons move back into their initial positions. The valve is open if the solenoid is de-energized. Then port A is connected with port B. Function The solenoid isenergized when a lubrication cycle starts. The connection from A to B gets closed, thus a pressure build-up in the grease supply line is possible. The solenoid gets de-energized, as soon as a lubrication cycle is finished. This causes an opening of the connection A to B, thus the supply line to the lubricant barrel is open. The lubricant flows from A to B or vice versa along the main valve piston (Fig. 15-13, Pos. 5).

Version 2010/1

15-31

End-Line Switch

15.9

END-LINE SWITCH

Fig. 15-14

End-line switch

15-32

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Version 2010/1

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

End-Line Switch

Legend for Fig. 15-14: (1)

Piston

(2)

Disk

(3)

Switch contact

(4)

Spring

(5)

Pressure switch

(6)

Adjustment sleeve

(7)

Connection to pressure circuit

(8)

Electrical connection

15.9.1

DESCRIPTION

Task The end-line pressure switch is the main part to monitor and to control the lubrication system. It stops the lubrication pump when the lubricant pressure reaches the max. adjusted pressure. Function One pressure control unit is installed in each lubrication system (CLS & SLS). The grease pressure, produced by the hydraulic barrel pump, acts also at the piston (Fig. 15-14, Pos. 1) If the force of the grease pressure exceeds the spring forces (Fig. 15-14, Pos. 4), the piston (Fig. 15-14, Pos. 1) is forced against the disk (Fig. 15-14, Pos. 2). Thus the contacts of the switch (Fig. 15-14, Pos. 5) are operated and an electric contact is given to the MTC. Any adjustment has to be done with the sleeve (Fig. 15-14, Pos. 6): Turning it clockwise - higher switch point Turning it counterclockwise - lower switch point

Version 2010/1

15-33

End-Line Switch

15.9.2

CLS END-LINE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT

Fig. 15-15

End-line switch adjustment (CLS)

15-34

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Version 2010/1

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

End-Line Switch

Legend for Fig. 15-15: 80B043

End-line switch (CLS)

(1)

Pressure gauge

(2)

Grease container

(3)

Location of CLS pump station

(4)

Bolt

(5)

Cover

(6)

Allen key

(7)

Allen screw

Procedure 1. For adjustment use the pressure gauge (Fig. 15-15, Pos. 1) which is mounted on top of the grease container (Fig. 15-15, Pos. 2). NOTE: For the following adjustment procedure 2 service technicians are required. 2. Start the engine and run it at high idle. 3. Start a manual CLS lube cycle using the dashboard switch 20S124. 4. Watch the pressure gauge (Fig. 15-15, Pos. 1). At a pressure of 180 ± 5 bar the end-line switch (80B043) must open and the lubrication pump must be stopped. NOTE: 180 ± 5 bar is the standard setting. Under particular circumstances it may be necessary to increase the pressure slightly. If re-setting is required 5. Screw out the bolts (Fig. 15-15, Pos. 4) and remove the cover (Fig. 15-15, Pos. 5). 6. Using an allen key (Fig. 15-15, Pos. 6) turn the allen screw (Fig. 15-15, Pos. 7) and alter the spring tension until the switch operates at 180 ± 5 bar. 7. After adjustment is finished install the cover (Fig. 15-15, Pos. 5) and tighten the 4 bolts (Fig. 15-15, Pos. 4).

Version 2010/1

15-35

End-Line Switch

15.9.3

SLS END-LINE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT

Fig. 15-16

End-line switch adjustment (SLS)

15-36

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Version 2010/1

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

End-Line Switch

Legend for Fig. 15-16: 62B046

End-line switch (SLS)

(1)

Pressure gauge

(2)

Grease container

(3)

Location of SLS pump station

(4)

Bolt

(5)

Cover

(6)

Allen key

(7)

Allen screw

Procedure 1. For adjustment use the pressure gauge (Fig. 15-15, Pos. 1) which is mounted on top of the grease container (Fig. 15-15, Pos. 2). NOTE: For the following adjustment procedure 2 service technicians are required. 2. Block the swing function by applying the slew parking brake via switch 20S029. 3. Start the engine and run it at high idle. 4. Start a manual SLS lube cycle using the dashboard switch 20S126. 5. Watch the pressure gauge (Fig. 15-15, Pos. 1). At a pressure of 180 ± 5 bar the end-line switch (62B046) must open and the lubrication pump must be stopped. NOTE: 180 ± 5 bar is the standard setting. Under particular circumstances it may be necessary to increase the pressure slightly. If re-setting is required 6. Screw out the bolts (Fig. 15-15, Pos. 4) and remove the cover (Fig. 15-15, Pos. 5). 7. Using an allen key (Fig. 15-15, Pos. 6) turn the allen screw (Fig. 15-15, Pos. 7) and alter the spring tension until the switch operates at 180 ± 5 bar. 8. After adjustment is finished install the cover (Fig. 15-15, Pos. 5) and tighten the 4 bolts (Fig. 15-15, Pos. 4).

Version 2010/1

15-37

In-Line Filter

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

15.10 IN-LINE FILTER

Fig. 15-17

15-38

In-line filter

Version 2010/1

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Legend for Fig. 15-17: (1)

Plug screw

(2)

Plug screw gasket

(3)

Filter element

(4)

Filter housing

(5)

Spring guide

(6)

Spring

In-Line Filter

15.10.2 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE CAUTION Before starting to work on the system, stop the engine and remove the key from the main key switch in order to prevent any engine start.

1. Remove the plug screw (Fig. 15-17, Pos. 1) using a 36 mm wrench. 2. Remove the plug screw gasket (Fig. 15-17, Pos. 2).

15.10.1 DESCRIPTION

3. Take out the spring (Fig. 15-17, Pos. 6), the spring guide (Fig. 15-17, Pos. 5), and the filter element (Fig. 15-17, Pos. 3).

Task 4. Clean all parts and inspect them for damage. The in line-filter between lubricant pump and injectors prevents a system contamination by rough particles. To prevent a too high intake pressure due to a blocked filter, the filter element is equipped with a by-pass function.

NOTE: A clogged filter element will be pressed against the spring force by the lubricant pressure and unfiltered lubricant reaches the system. 5. Replace damaged parts as necessary. 6. Insert the filter element, the spring guide, and the spring. 7. Install the plug screw with gasket and tighten it with a wrench. NOTE: For the service intervals refer to the MAINTENANCE MANUAL.

Version 2010/1

15-39

Lubricant Level Sensor

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

15.11 LUBRICANT LEVEL SENSOR

Fig. 15-18

15-40

Lubricant level sensor

Version 2010/1

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Legend for Fig. 15-18: (1)

Grease level sensor

(2)

Cover of grease container

(3)

Section of wiring diagram Sensor 62B108 (CLS)

(4)

Section of wiring diagram Sensor 62B109 (SLS)

(a)

Elbow plug

(b)

LED location at the sensor (red & yellow)

(c)

Upper lock nut

(d)

Retainer

(e)

Seal ring

(f)

Lower lock nut

(g)

Top view onto the sensor

Lubricant Level Sensor

Function The sonar sensor sends a proportional current signal according to the distance between the sonar sensor and the grease level to the MTC. The sensor operates in a range of 320 to 950 mm. The min. distance means the lubricant barrel is full. In this case the signal current to the MTC is ~ 20 mA. The max. distance means the lubricant barrel is empty. In this case the sensor signal current to the MTC is ~ 4 mA. NOTE: The sonar sensor gets out of range if it comes in contact with grease. Therefore an overfilling of the grease barrel should be avoided. In case of a sensor malfunction (red LED at the sensor ON), remove the sensor and wipe off any grease from its lower surface. For the LED function in case of a sensor error see the following section.

15.11.1 DESCRIPTION

15.11.1.1 LEDS AT THE SONAR SENSOR

Task

At the upper collar (Fig. 15-18, Pos. b) the sensor is equipped with LEDs (red & yellow). The function of these LEDs is as follows:

The lubricant level sensor is an analog sonar sensor type. Lubricant maximum filling level monitoring is necessary to prevent an overfilling of the grease barrel via the refilling arm. The minimum grease level monitoring allows timely refilling of grease and it prevents the grease pump from running dry. General The analog level signal comes from the sonar sensor which is mounted on the cover of the lubricant pump station. The sensor is connected to the MTC. The MTC activates the "full" light if the grease level reaches the maximum. This indication light is mounted at the refilling arm. If a grease level of 10 - 15 % is reached the MTC generates the message Central lubrication system grease level too low or Slew gear lubrication system grease level too low. This allows grease charging in time, which prevents an unexpected breakdown. If the lubricant level reaches 0 % the MTC deactivates the lubrication pump and generates the message Central lubrication system empty or Slew gear lubrication system empty. Version 2010/1

Sensor condition

LED red

LED yellow

Normal operation

OFF

ON

Error

ON

Previous state

Adjustment The sonar sensor doesn’t need adjustments, except the mounting depth in the lubricant container cover. This adjustment only has to be done if the sensor was removed for cleaning or if it is replaced by another one. Standard sensor length below the lubricant container cover: 20 mm If adjustment is required: 1. Unplug the sensor connector. 2. Loosen the upper lock nut (Fig. 15-18, Pos. c). 3. Loosen the lower lock nut (Fig. 15-18, Pos. f). 4. Adjust the sensor length below the lubricant container cover to 20 mm by turning the upper and lower nuts. 15-41

Lubricant Level Sensor

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

5. If the correct measurement (20 mm) is achieved tighten the upper and lower lock nut (Fig. 15-18, Pos. c & f). 6. Plug-in the sensor connector. The MIN and MAX points of the grease level don’t need any sensor adaption. The sensors are preadjusted ex factory. NOTE: For the wiring connection of the sonar sensor also refer to the wiring diagram of the distribution box on top of the lubricant container.

15-42

Version 2010/1

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Lubricant Level Sensor

This page was left blank intentionally.

Version 2010/1

15-43

Lubrication Pinion (SLS)

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

15.12 LUBRICATION PINION (SLS)

Fig. 15-19 15-44

Dummy wheel Version 2010/1

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Legend for Fig. 15-19: (A)

Swing circle gear

(B)

Center shaft

(C)

Stator radial bore

(D)

Grease outlet

(1)

Lubrication pump station

(2)

Lubrication container

(3)

Main pump control solenoid valve (pump on/off)

(4)

Lubricant pressure relief solenoid valve

(5)

Lubricant supply line from pump to injector

(6)

End-line pressure switch

(7)

Injectors

(8)

Lubricant feed line from injector to lubrication pinion

(9)

Lubrication pinion

Lubrication Pinion (SLS)

15.12.1 DESCRIPTION The SLS system lubricates the open gear of the swing ring with special open gear lubricant. The lubricant pump station (Fig. 15-19, Pos. 1) is the same as for the CLS system. To apply the lubricant equally to the swing ring gear teeth (Fig. 15-19, Pos. A) a special lubrication pinion (Fig. 15-19, Pos. 9) close to the swing drive pinion is mounted. The lubrication pinion (Fig. 15-19, Pos. 9) distributes the lubricant from the injectors evenly to the teeth. Normally two or more injectors are parallel connected to supply the required amount of lubricant to the lubrication pinion. The pinion center shaft (Fig. 15-19, Pos. B) acts as a rotary joint and distributes the lubricant through radial bores only to those teeth witch are in contact with the swing ring gear teeth. Outlet bores (Fig. 15-19, Pos. B) at different pinion gear levels distribute the lubricant equally to the swing ring gear teeth (Fig. 15-19, Pos. A). To prevent unnecessary lubrication with the swing ring in park position, the SLS pump only starts to operate after "swinging" was activated with the control lever. All other SLS control and monitoring functions are the same as they are used in the CLS system.

Version 2010/1

15-45

Commissioning

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

15.13 COMMISSIONING 15.13.1 COMMISSIONING OF THE CLS LUBRICATION SYSTEM Commissioning procedures for the automatic Central Lubrication System. These procedures must be performed after the first assembly of the excavator, or after repair and exchange of components.

WARNING z

Some checks and adjustments can only be done with the engine running. For such jobs two persons are necessary.

z

Thereby, the controls must not be left unattended, while the other man carries out checks and adjustments.

z

The service technican on the operator’s seat must be skilled in the operation of the excavator.

z

He must keep constant visual contact with the other service technician and both must agree on suitable communication signals before they start their work.

1. Visual check of all hose and pipe connections from the lubrication pump station to the lubrication points via the injectors. 2. Check the correct mounting of the lubrication system. 3. Check the correct connection of the hydraulic oil supply line and the tank line. 4. Check the correct electrical connection. 5. Check the correct kind and quality of the respective grease according to the OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL. In addition refer to the relevant PARTS & SERVICE NEWS. 6. Check the injector adjustment of each injector. It should be on max. volume, if not, adjust to max. volume, refer to section 15.7.3 on page 15-25. 7. Check if the grease supply line (from the pump station to the injectors) is pre-charged with grease. If not, open (unplug) the supply line close to the end-line switch. Start the engine and activate the lubrication station so often until grease comes out of the open end of the supply line. Stop the engine and close the open supply line. 8. Manually pre-lubricate all bearings with a grease gun of the lube track. To do this, unscrew the dust cap at the second port of each injector and connect the grease gun to the grease nipple. Apply sufficient grease into the bearing until a small amount of fresh grease appears at the bearing seals or open bearings. 9. Adjust the end-line switch if necessary, refer to section 15.9 on page 15-32. 10. Check the lubrication pump speed. If required adjust it, refer to section 15.6.1 on page 15-22. 11. Check the time settings of the pause time at the VHMS Real Time Monitor. Adjust the suggested settings which are given in the PM-CLINIC forms. This is the basic setting and also a guaranty for sufficient lubrication. NOTE: A fine adjustment is possible to adapt the lubricant apply to the working and environmental conditions by minimized lubricant consumption. 12. Start the engine and activate several cycles of the CLS lubrication. 13. Set the lubrication cycle counter to zero and note the actual working hours from the hour meter. 14. The excavator is now ready for operation. 15-46

Version 2010/1

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Commissioning

15. After ~20 working hours check the lubrication systems. Check the lubrication points for sufficient grease. Check the swing circle lubricating, a small amount of grease must appear at the inner swing circle seal. Watch the cycle counter and compare it with the respective working hours. z

Example: Pause time setting = 30 minutes Working hours since the last check = 10 hours 10 h / 0.5 h = 20 cycles Compare with the indication of the cycle counter. There should be 20 –1 cycles, provided no manual cycle was activated.

16. Check the lubrication systems every day. Compare all lubrication points. There should be a well balanced small amount of fresh grease at each bearing seal or open bearing.

15.13.2 FINE ADJUSTMENT General Under normal circumstances the lubrication system - with the basic adjustment - applies more lubricant as required. 1. Find out the lubrication point with the lowest quantity of fresh grease. This point is the indicator for the following pause time fine adjustment. 2. Reduce the applied quantity by extending the pause time as much until a small amount of wet grease appears at the bearing seal or open bearing of the indicator point. Extend the pause time only in small steps (~2 - 5min). Between each step wait for 40 working hours or more and watch the lubrication points. 3. If there are one or more bearing points with too much grease, adjust the respective injector to a lower volume, refer to section 15.7.3 on page 15-25. Change the setting only in small steps (max. 1 - 2 turns clockwise). Between each step wait for 40 working hours or more and watch the lubrication points. Be careful, don’t turn the set screw too much in, and block the injector against moving. NOTE: Check the CLS every day (Daily Check)! The lubrication points of a correct adjusted Central Lubrication System have a well balanced small amount of wet grease. Never let the excavator operate with a grease shortage. Find out the reason for this shortage and eliminate this problem immediately.

Version 2010/1

15-47

Commissioning

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

15.13.3 COMMISSIONING OF THE SLS LUBRICATION SYSTEM Commissioning procedures for the automatic Swing circle Lubricating System. These procedures must be performed after the first assembly of the excavator, or after repair and exchange of components.

WARNING z

Some checks and adjustments can only be done with the engine running. For such jobs two persons are necessary.

z

Thereby, the controls must not be left unattended, while the other man carries out checks and adjustments.

z

The service technican on the operator’s seat must be skilled in the operation of the excavator.

z

He must keep constant visual contact with the other service technician and both must agree on suitable communication signals before they start their work.

1. Visual check of all hose and pipe connections from the lubrication pump station to the dummy wheel via the injectors. 2. Check the correct mounting of the lubrication system. 3. Check the correct connection of the hydraulic oil supply line and the tank line. 4. Check the correct electrical connection. 5. Check the correct kind and quality of the respective grease according to the OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL. 6. Check the injector adjustment of each injector. It should be on max. volume, if not, adjust to max. volume, refer to section 15.7.3 on page 15-25. 7. Check if the grease supply line (from the pump station to the injectors) is pre-charged with grease. If not, open (unplug) the supply line close to the end-line switch. Start the engine and activate the lubrication station so often until grease comes out of the open end of the supply line. Stop the engine and close the open supply line. 8. Remove protection fluid, dust or old grease with adequate solvent from the swing circle toothing. 9. Important: First apply open ring gear compound manually at the clean slew ring, before the assembly of the swing circle protection. Use adhesive voler compound spray for the swing circle toothing (KMG ET-No.500 893 98). It is delivered together with the new excavator. 10. Apply the swing circle parking brake. Start the engine and activate the SLS manually (switch 20S126) and move the swing circle lever to one direction, only for a short time. The SLS starts to work due to the swing movement. 11. Adjust the end-line switch if necessary, refer to section 15.9 on page 15-32. 12. Check the lubrication pump speed. If required adjust it, refer to section 15.6.1 on page 15-22. 13. Check the time settings of the pause time at the VHMS Real Time Monitor. Adjust the suggested settings which are given in the PM-CLINIC forms. This is the basic setting and also a guaranty for sufficient lubrication. 14. Start two or three lubrication cycles. 15. Stop the engine and check the lubrication system. Check if a small amount of grease arrived at one or two dummy wheel teeth.

15-48

Version 2010/1

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Commissioning

16. Set the lubrication cycle counter to zero and note the actual working hours from the hour meter. The excavator is ready for digging. 17. After ~20 working hours check the SLS. Check the dummy wheel and the swing circle toothing. A small amount of fresh grease must be at the swing circle toothing. Check the SLS lubricant cycle counter. Its indication must be higher as the number of CLS cycles during the same time. NOTE: Check the SLS every day (Daily Check)! Never let the excavator work with a grease shortage. If the teeth get a clear metallic look it is immediately necessary to apply fresh open ring gear lubricant. Find out the reason of this shortage and eliminate this problem immediately. The swing circle toothing of a correct adjusted SLS have a thin layer of open ring gear lubricant. There should be a small amount of fresh open ring gear lubricant around the tooth contact area.

Version 2010/1

15-49

Commissioning

15-50

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Version 2010/1

LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Central Lubrication System (CLS)

A manually activation of the lubrication systems is possible by switching a switch at the dashboard. The controller count the number of switch activated and operate the system this number one by on. The system rest between the cycles for a adjustable time (pressure relief time). Circuit Diagram Code Table Solenoid Valve 2

Vent Valve 7

End-Of-Line Switch

CLS (1)

Y7

Y7a

B43

SLS (2)

Y9

Y9a

B46

CLS = Central Lubrication System SLS = Swing circle Lubrication System

Version 2009/1

15-9

Lubrication Pump Station (SLS)

15.3

LUBRICATION PUMP STATION (SLS)

Fig. 15-4

Lubrication pump station SLS

15-10

LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Version 2009/1

LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Lubrication Pump Station (SLS)

Legend for Fig. 15-4: (1)

Lubricant pump drive (Hydraulic cylinder)

(2)

Solenoid valve (Oil pressure supply)

(3)

Flow control valve

(4)

Pressure reducing valve

(5)

Hydraulic oil supply line (Pilot pressure)

(6)

Hydraulic oil return line

(7)

Vent valve (Solenoid valve, de-energized open to barrel)

(8)

Grease supply line to injectors

(9)

Lubricant level indication (Sonar sending and receiver principal)

(10)

Lubricant barrel

(11)

Pump mechanism

(12)

Lubricant filter

(13)

Hydraulic pressure test plug (Operating pressure)

(14)

Lubricant pressure gauge (Operating pressure)

(15)

Vent line to barrel

(16)

Breather

(17)

Electrical terminal box

(18)

Injector

(19)

Lubricant supply line to dummy wheel

(20)

Lubricant pressure sensor

(21)

Lubricant pressure test point

(22)

End of line switch

(R)

Dummy wheel

(A)

Swing circle gear

(B)

Center bore

(C)

Stator radial bore

(D)

Grease outlet

The lubrication pump station include the barrel (Fig. 15-4, Pos. 10) and the barrel cover with the pump system. The barrel is fix mounted. From the refilling arm is the barrel via a filter rechargeable. The main grease pump system is mounted on the barrel cover it consist the pump (Fig. 15-4, Pos. 1, 11), valves (Fig. 15-4, Pos. 2, 3, 4, 7), lubricant screen filter (Fig. 15-4, Pos. 12), lubricant level sensor (Fig. 15-4, Pos. 9) and a lubricant pressure sensor (Fig. 15-4, Pos. 20).

Version 2009/1

15-11

Lubrication Pump Station (SLS)

Fig. 15-5 15-12

LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Lubrication Pump Station SLS Version 2009/1

LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Lubrication Pump Station (SLS)

General The swing circle gear lubrication system use a special dummy wheel to apply the gear grease on to the swing circle gear. All other components between grease barrel and injectors are the same as the central lubrication system. The dummy wheel receives by each lub cycle grease from two or more parallel connected injectors. After the injectors have pump its gear grease quantity through the dummy wheel to the swing ring gear the grease pump stops and the next grease cycle starts after a adjusted time (pause time). The swing circle gear lubrication system start only by running engine in high idle and active slew function. z

After the pilot pressure has been reduced it passes to the hydraulic cylinder which operates the grease pump.

z

The oil cylinder shuttle’s the grease cylinder at 18 – 20 double strokes per minute and delivering 612 – 680 cm³ (37.3 – 41.5 in³) of lubricant per minute (approx. 550 – 612 g / 19.64 – 21.45 oz.)

z

With the vent valve (Fig. 15-5, Pos. 9) closed the pump continues to cycle until maximum pressure is achieved and the injectors have transmitted lubricant to the dummy wheel. In most lubrication systems this is 185 bar (2630 psi. ).

z

When the maximum system pressure is reached the end-of-line switch opens.

z

The open pressure switch signals the controller to stop the pump cycle.

z

Solenoid valve (Fig. 15-5, Pos.4) are de-energized and the hydraulic oil stops flowing to the pump.

z

The controller starts to count down a fixed time (load holding time) and a adjustable pause time (rest time between the automatic lubrication cycles).

z

The vent valve (Fig. 15-5, Pos. 9) is still closed (solenoid active) and the lubricant pressure will be rest on pressure (slow decrease is normal).

z

If the count down of the load holding time is finished the controller terminate the signal to solenoid valve (Fig.15-5, Pos. 9).

z

Vent valve (Fig. 15-5, Pos. 9) is de-energized, it opens and allows the grease pressure to drop to zero.

z

All injectors move in the initial position by spring force and recharge itself for the next lubricant cycle.

z

The system is now at rest and ready for another lube cycle.

It is possible to activate the slew gear lubrication system manually by using switch S26 on the dashboard. The controller count the number of switch activatings and operate the system this number one by on provided the slew function was activated. The system rest between each cycles for a adjustable time (pressure relief time).

Version 2009/1

15-13

Lubrication Pump Station (SLS)

15.3.0.1

SLS LUBRICATION SYSTEM ELECTRIC LAYOUT

Fig. 15-6

Circuit diagram lubrication system

15-14

LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Version 2009/1

LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Lubrication Pump Station (SLS)

. Circuit Diagram Code Table Solenoid Valve 2

Vent Valve 7

End-Of-Line Switch

CLS (1)

Y7

Y7a

B43

SLS (2)

Y9

Y9a

B46

CLS = Central Lubrication System SLS = Swing circle Lubrication System

CAUTION Grease qualities to be used: According to NLGI classes 000, 00, 0 and 1 according to the lowest ambient temperature in the operation area.

NOTE: The content of molybdenum must not exceed 5 %. Only synthetic graphite must be contained in graphite lubricants.

Version 2009/1

15-15

Lubrication Pump Station (SLS)

15.3.1

HYDRAULICALLY DRIVEN LUBE PUMP

Fig. 15-7

Hydraulically driven “Power Master III” lube pump

15-16

LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Version 2009/1

LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Lubrication Pump Station (SLS)

Legend for Fig. 15-7 (more detailed see parts list 991-0266a): (P)

Hydraulic oil supply

(T)

Hydraulic oil return

(Pr)

Pressure reducing valve

(Q)

Flow regulator valve

(M)

Measure point

(1)

Hydr. actuator piston

(2)

Oscillator control block

(3)

Pump tube

(4)

Breather port

(5)

Grease outlet port

(6)

Piston rod

(7)

Breather plug

(8)

Ball, outlet check valve

(9)

Ball and seat, check valve

(10)

Main piston and plunger

(11)

Piston rod set

(12)

Inlet valve

(13)

Scoop piston

(14)

Grease inlet

The pump assembly consist three main groups: z

Propulsion cylinder (Fig. 15-7, Pos. 1)

z

Cylinder controlling (Fig. 15-7, Pos. 2)

z

Grease pump (Fig. 15-7, Pos. 3)

The Propulsion cylinder (Fig. 15-7, Pos. 1) is connected to the pump piston (Fig. 15-7, Pos. 10). The lubricant pump pumps per stroke (up or down) lubricant through the pump tube (Fig. 15-7, Pos. 3) to the lubricant outlet port. The piston speed and force is adjustable via two valves mounted on the cylinder controlling block (Fig. 15-7, Pos. 2). The left hand valve is a adjustable flow regulation valve to limit the oil flow to the propulsion cylinder. This flow is responsible for the cylinder speed. The right hand valve is a pressure reducing valve to limit the maximum lubrication supply pressure. The stroke direction change automatically if the cylinder stops moving. Reach the cylinder its own stroke limit the moving direction change also if the cylinder stops by an external force. The maximum possible lubricant pressure depend on the adjusted supply pressure. The pressure multiplication factor between supply pressure and maximum lubricant pressure is 6,55. The pressure reduction valve has to be adjusted to 50 bar. Example: 50 bar supply pressure x 6,55 = 327,5 bar lubricant pressure. During normal operation the end line switch stop the pump before reaching this high pressure. For a sufficient lube pump operation 18 – 20 double strokes / min for the pump drive cylinder are required. Therefore the flow reducing valve has to be adjusted, refer to section 15.5 on page 15-38. Version 2009/1

15-17

Lubrication Pump Station (SLS)

15.3.2

VENT VALVE

Fig. 15-8

Vent valve

15-18

LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Version 2009/1

LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Lubrication Pump Station (SLS)

Legend for Fig. 15-8: (1)

Solenoid

(2)

Valve assembly

(3)

Solenoid stem

(4)

Lever

(5)

Main valve piston

(6)

Auxiliary valve piston

(7)

Reset spring

Task By the function of the vent valve the lubricant supply line gets pressure relieved, after the lubrication cycle is finished. The injector pistons move back into their initial position. The valve is open if the solenoid is de-energized. It means port A is connected with port B. Function The solenoid gets energized. When the lubrication cycle starts. The connection from A to B gets closed, thus a pressure build-up in the grease supply line is possible. The solenoid gets de-energized, as soon as the lubrication cycle is finished. This causes opening of the connection A to B, thus the supply line to the lubricant barrel is open. The lubricant flows from A to B or vice versa along the main valve piston (Fig. 15-8, Pos. 5).

Version 2009/1

15-19

Lubrication Pump Station (SLS)

15.3.3

END OF LINE SWITCH

Fig. 15-9

End of line switch

15-20

LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Version 2009/1

LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Lubrication Pump Station (SLS)

Legend for Fig. 15-9: (1)

Piston

(2)

Disk

(3)

Switch contact

(4)

Spring

(5)

Pressure switch

(6)

Adjustment sleeve

(7)

Connection to pressure circuit

(8)

Electrical connection

Task The pressure control unit (end of line switch) is monitoring and controlling the lube system. Function One pressure control unit is installed in each lubrication system. The grease pressure, produced by the hydraulic barrel pump, acts also at the piston (Fig. 15-9, Pos. 1) If the grease pressure reaches the tension of the spring (Fig. 15-9, Pos. 4), the piston (Fig. 15-9, Pos. 1) is forced against the disk (Fig. 15-9, Pos. 2), thus that the contacts of the switch (Fig. 15-9, Pos. 5) are operated and a electric contact is given to the electronic control unit of the PLC. Adjusting has to be done with the sleeve (Fig. 15-9, Pos. 6). Clockwise - higher switch point, counterclockwise lower switch point. The adjusting have to be done, refer to section 15.5.3 on page 15-44 and on page 15-46.

Version 2009/1

15-21

Lubrication Pump Station (SLS)

15.3.4

IN-LINE FILTER

Fig. 15-10

In-line filter

15-22

LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Version 2009/1

LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Lubrication Pump Station (SLS)

Legend for Fig. 15-10: (1)

Plug screw

(2)

Plug screw gasket

(3)

Filter element

(4)

Filter housing

(5)

Spring guide

(6)

Spring

Task The in line filter prevent the lubrication injectors against contamination.

CAUTION Before servicing stop the motor and remove ignition key in order to prevent operation of the system!

NOTE: A clogged filter element will be moved against the spring force by the lubricant pressure and unfiltered lubricant reaches the system! For Maintenance proceed as follows: 1. Remove plug screw (Fig. 15-10, Pos. 1) using 36 mm width wrench. 2. Remove plug screw gasket (Fig. 15-10, Pos. 2). 3. Take out spring (Fig. 15-10, Pos. 6), spring guide (Fig. 15-10, Pos. 5) and filter element (Fig. 15-10, Pos. 3). 4. Clean all parts and inspect for damage. Replace as necessary. 5. Insert filter element, spring guide (Fig. 15-10, Pos. 5) and spring. 6. Install plug screw (Fig. 15-10, Pos. 1) with gasket (Fig. 15-10, Pos. 2) and tighten with a wrench. NOTE: For service intervals refer to MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Version 2009/1

15-23

Lubrication Pump Station (SLS)

15.3.5

LUBRICANT LEVEL SENSOR

Fig. 15-11

Lubricant level sensor

LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Capacitive analog level sensor for machines with PLC (PC 4000 .... PC8000) Legend for illustration Z 21190 1

Capacitive analog sensor housing

2

Capacitive level sensor pipe

3

Lubricant

4

Lubricant container

5

Electrical connection line

General: The capacitive analog level sensor measure the lubricant level with a capacitive measurement principle which is independend from the lubricant surface condition. The sensor create proportional to the lubricant level a analog output signal which use the PLC to monitor the lubricant level and to control the lubricant level messages. It is only one sensor for one container required. For power supply and signal output only two shield wires connected. The sensor is exact to the lubricant container adjusted there are no adjustments and maintenance required.

15-24

Version 2009/1

LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

15.3.6

LUBRICANT PRESSURE SENSOR

Fig. 15-12

Lubricant level sensor

Lubrication Pump Station (SLS)

Lubricant Pressure Sensor Function (electrical diagram Z 27402Page 26) The sensor is additional to the mechanical analogue pressure gauge mounted on the lubrication pump station. On display page REAL TIME MONITOR 4.1.21 is the grease pressure shown. The pressure sensor B160 (1) with a range from 0 bar to 500 bar is hydraulically connected parallel to the mechanical analog pressure gauge (2) in the lubricant supply line on top of the lubricant pump station. On electrical side there are three wire. +24 V electrical supply on plug A (br = brown) and ground on plug D (ws = white). The signal with a proportional voltage output to the lubricant pressure is connected on plug C (gn = green). Connecting between plug and main electrical box X2 is used a shielded wire, to protect the signal line against electrical magnetic interferences. this wire is in the X2 box connected with terminal 3-4, 5, 7-8 and ground (GND) on terminal group Z. The PLC is also connected from analog input port EW14.3 to the terminals. The PLC receive a voltage signal on port 6 of input plug 15 (EW14.3) between 0 – 10 Volt proportional to the lubricant pressure. Task The pressure sensor is used only for the VHMS. It check the lubricant pressure only for observe. NOTE: The grease pressure represent the lubrication pump pressure. The pressure on the end of the grease supply line is lower depend on line resistance and lubricant viscosity.

Version 2009/1

15-25

LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

15.3.7

LUBRICANT INJECTOR

Fig. 15-13

Lubricant injector (metering valve)

Lubrication Pump Station (SLS)

Legend for Fig. 15-13 (for model SL1 and SL11): (1)

Set screw

(2)

Control pin

(3)

Lock nut

(4)

Injector piston

(5)

Spring

(6)

Slide valve

(7)

Second outlet with greaser (injector couple poind)

(8)

Discharge chamber

(9)

Passage (Connecting bore)

(A)

Lubricant inlet

(B)

Lubricant outlet

Version 2009/1

15-26

LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Lubrication Pump Station (SLS)

General: Each injector can be manually adjusted with set screw (1) to discharge the precise amount of lubricant each bearing needs. Injectors are mounted singly at each bearing, or grouped in a manifold with feed lines supplying lubricant to the bearings. In each case, injectors are supplied with lubricant under pump pressure through a single lubricant inlet port (A). Two injector size are used on KMG machines. Both size can be used in the same circuit, their selection is made on the basis of bearing lubricant requirements.The injectors are externally adjustable so each bearing can receive the correct amount of lubricant. Each injector incorporates an indicator pin that gives visual confirmation the injector is operating correctly. When necessary, troubleshooting is the simple process of checking indicator pins. Via service port (7) it is possible to lubricate the bearing with a manual operated grease gun. Open only cab nut (7a) of service port (7) to get access to the grease nipple. The cup nut (7a) must be replaced after manuel lubrication to plug and protect the nipple.

Injector type

Output volume range

SL1 (A)

0,131 to 1,31 cm³

SL11 (B)

0,82 to 8,2 cm³

Version 2009/1

15-27

Lubrication Pump Station (SLS)

15.3.7.1

FUNCTION STEPS:

Fig. 15-14

Function lubricant injectors

15-28

LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Version 2009/1

LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Lubrication Pump Station (SLS)

Function steps: Stage A: Inlet pressure 0 bar, Outlet pressure 0 bar The injector piston is in its normal, or rest position. Visible by the extracted indicator stem (2) which is blocked in final position by the set screw (1). The discharge chamber (8) is filled with lubricant from the previous cycle.

Stage B: Inlet pressure increasing from 0 to 180 bar, Outlet: lubricant injection 0 - 180 bar, Output volume: adjusted amount of lubricant Under the pressure of incoming lubricant via port (10), slide valve (6) is about to open the passage (9) leading to the piston (4). When the slide valve (6) uncovers the passage (9), lubricant is admitted to the measuring chamber (12) at the top of the piston (4), forcing the piston down. The piston (4) forces lubricant from the discharge chamber (8) through the outlet port (11) to the bearing. The indicator stem (2) retracts. Stage C: Inlet pressure at maximum 180 bar Output injection is finished As the piston (4) completes its stroke, it pushes the slide valve (6) past the passage (9), cutting off further admission of lubricant to the passage (9). Piston (4) and slide valve (6) remain in this position until lubricant pressure in the supply line (10) is vented (relieved) at the pump station. The indicator stem (2) is fully retracted and the adjusted amount of lubricant is injected to the bearing. Stage D: Inlet pressure relieved z

After lubricant supply pressure (10) is relieved, the compressed spring (5) moves the slide valve (6) to the closed position. This opens the port from the measuring chamber (12) and permits the lubricant to be transferred from the top of the piston to the discharge chamber (8). The indicator stem (2) extract to its initial final stop of the adjustment screw (1). Now the injector is prepared for the next lubricant application.

Version 2009/1

15-29

Lubrication Pump Station (SLS)

15.3.7.2

INLINE CONNECTION OF INJECTORS

Fig. 15-15

Connection of lubricant injectors

LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

To increase the lubricant output volume the injectors are designed to combined two or more injectors together. The injector body (1) has two outlet ports (a) and (b), both connected to the discharge chamber. A connector pipe (2) is used to couple two injectors together. Lubricant from the first injector is directed through the connector pipe into the discharge chamber of the second injector. Both injectors now parallel connected to one bearing. Lubrication pinion

15-30

Version 2009/1

LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

15.3.8

LUBRICATION PINION

Fig. 15-16

Dummy wheel

Lubrication Pump Station (SLS)

Legend for Fig. 15-16: (R)

Lubrication pinion (Dummy whee)l

(A)

Swing circle gear

(B)

Center bore

(C)

Stator radial bore

(D)

Grease outlet

Principle of Operation By mean of a lubricant pump, the lubricant is supplied to the centered bore hole (B) of the lubricating pinion (R). Bore hole (B) must be perfectly aligned to the swing circle gear (A) to be greased, so that lubricant leaves the tooth flank always at matched condition. The grease outlet (D) of the lubricating pinion is arranged at a different angle for each tooth, so that the lubricant is distributed in a uniform and perfect manners on the tooth flank of the drive pinion to be lubricated. The pinion propulsion is by the slew gear. The pinion bearings are lubricated himself by the gear grease. The picture shows an example with one pinion only. There are also machines which will have two pinion (dummy wheel).

Version 2009/1

15-31

Lubrication Pump Station (SLS)

LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

This page was left blank intentionally.

15-32

Version 2009/1

LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

15.4

Operating and Controlling

OPERATING AND CONTROLLING

General The Lubrication Systems are controlled and monitored complete through the PLC. The PLC activate the outputs dependent on inputs and time. The programmed flow is shown in the flowchart (898 688 40, page 31 to 34) and the electrical connection is shown in the electrical diagram 897 844 40 d. In- and Outputs of the PLC

Inputs

End of line switch Lubricant level Switch manual cycle Lubricant pressure

CLS

SLS

E2.6 / B43

E2.7 / B46

EW14.1 / B108

EW14.2 / B109

E4.4 / S24

E4.5 / S26

EW14.3 / B160

EW14.4 / B161

Swing circle condition

E 3.5 (18.4) Lever E 20

Engine operating condition

Engine controller

Outputs CLS

SLS

Lubrication pump

A3.1 / Y7

A3.2 / Y9

Vent line

A7.1/Y7a

A7.2 / Y9a

A5.2 / H76

A5.3 / H78

Light “full barrel”

Version 2009/1

15-33

Operating and Controlling

15.4.1

OPERATING FLOW, ELECTRICAL FLOW

Fig. 15-17

Operating flow, Electrical flow

15-34

LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Version 2009/1

LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

Operating and Controlling

Function of a lubrication cycle. (Illustration Z24042d). PT - phase With the pump and controller system in a rest sate a pre-set pause time interval occurs as determined by PLC: Diagram position (a): A 24Vdc signal from the PLC activate solenoid valve (2) that opens and activate the lubrication pump (*). As solenoid valve (2) opens, hydraulic oil flow through the pressure reducing valve (4), it lowers the hydraulically pilot oil pressure to the operating range of the hydraulic driven lube pump. The reduced pilot oil pressure operates now the grase pump. The oil cylinder shuttle the grease cylinder at 18 - 20 double strokes per minute and delivering 212 680cm³ (37.3 - 41.5 in³) of lubricant per minute (approx. 550- 612 / 19....64 - 21.45 oz.) At the same time a 24V signal energize release valve (7), it close now the release line to the lubricantion container. PI - phase With energized release valve (7) (*) and solenoide valve (4) the pumpcontinues to cycle until mayimum pressure is achieved and the injectors have transmitted lubricant to the brearings. S + ponit, diagram position (b) Whenthe maximum system pressure is reached the end of the line switch (*) open it’s contact. In the normal application es the end of line switch adjusted to 180 bar (2610psi.). The pressure increasing phase is now finished. The open pressure switch (*) signals the controller to stop the pumping cycle and the controller terminates the signal to the solenoid valve (2). The pilot oil flow to the pump stops PH-phase Release valve (7) is still energized to keep the pressure in the lubricant line for a fix adjusted time (pressure holding time normally 5 min.) Once cycle With expired pressure holding time vent valve (7) de-energize. Itopens the release line to the lunbricant container. The lubricant line pressure drop to zero so the injectors can recharge for the next lubricant cycle. (PR-phas